Variables 1

Interface Signals sl 2

SINUMERIK 840D sl/ 840Di sl Interface Signals pl 3

SINUMERIK 840D/ 840Di/ 810D
SIMODRIVE 611 digital
SINAMICS PLC Blocks 4

Lists (2nd Book)

Index I
Parameter Manual

Valid for
Control Software
SINUMERIK 840D sl 1.3
SINUMERIK 840DE sl (export version) 1.3
SINUMERIK 840D powerline 1.1
SINUMERIK 840DE (export version) powerline 1.1
SINUMERIK 840Di sl 7.4
SINUMERIK 840DiE (export version) sl 7.4
SINUMERIK 840Di powerline 3.2
SINUMERIK 840DiE (export version) powerline 3.2
SINUMERIK 810D powerline 7.4
SINUMERIK 810DE (export version) powerline 7.4
Drive
SIMODRIVE 611
SINAMICS

03/2006 Edition
SINUMERIK®-Documentation

Printing history

Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below.
The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column.
Status codes in the "Remarks" column.
A .... New documentation.
B .... Unrevised reprint with new Order No.
C .... Revised edition with new status.
If factual changes have been made on a page since the last edition, this is indicated by a new edition
coding in the header on that page.

Edition Order-No. Remarks

07/2005 6FC5397-3CP10-0BA0 A
03/2006 6FC5397-3CP10-1BA0 C

Registered Trademarks
All designations with the trademark symbol ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this
documentation may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes may infringe the rights of the owner.

Liability disclaimer
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nonetheless,
differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this
document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition.

Copyright © Siemens AG 1995 - 2006.

Orderl-No. 6FC5397-3CP10-1BA0

Siemens AG 2006.
Subject to change without prior notice
03/2006 Preface

Preface

Structure of the documentation

The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts:
• General documentation
• User documentation
• Manufacturer/service documentation

An overview of publications (updated monthly) indicating the language versions

available can be found on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Select "Support" -> "Technical Documentation" ->"Overview of Publications"

The Internet version of the DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at:

http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb

Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can be
found at the following web site:
http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol und dort unter Menüpunkt "Support"

Target group
This documentation is intended for project engineers, commissioning engineers,
machine operators, service and maintenance personnel.

Benefits
The Parameter Manual enables the intended target group to evaluate error and
fault indications and to respond accordingly.
With the help of the Parameter Manual, the target group has an overview of the
various diagnostic options and diagnostic tools.

With the present edition, the previous Lists will be subdivided into Lists (1st Book)
and Lists (2nd Book).
1 st Book contains:
• Overview of functions
• Maschine data (Drive 611D, Hydraulics module, HMI, NCK, SD)
• Sinamics Parameters

The table of contents refers to the present 2nd Book.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition iii
Preface 03/2006

Standard version
This Parameter Manual only describes the functionality of the standard version.
Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by
the machine tool manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the
control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions
with a new control or when servicing.
Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed
information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case
of installation, operation or maintenance.

Technical Support
If you have any questions, please get in touch with our Hotline:

Europe and Africa time zone:

A&D Technical Support
Phone: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 223
Internet: http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request
Email: mailto:[email protected]

Asia and Australia time zone:

A&D Technical Support
Phone: +86 1064 719 990
Fax: +86 1064 747 474
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
Email: mailto:[email protected]

America time zone:

A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +1 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 423 262 2289
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
Email: mailto:[email protected]

Note
Country telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following
Internet address:

http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

iv SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 Preface

Questions about the Manual

If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation,
please fax or e-mail us:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 63315
Email: mailto:[email protected]

Fax form: See the reply form at the end of the document.

SINUMERIK Internet address

http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

EC declaration of conformity
The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found/obtained
• "on the Internet:
http://www.ad.siemens.de/csinfo
under product/order no. 15257461
• at the relevant regional office of the Siemens AG division A&D MC.

Safety Instructions
This Manual contains information which you should carefully observe to ensure
your own personal safety and the prevention of material damage. The notices
referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol The
warnings appear in decreasing order of risk as given below.

! Danger
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

! Warning
Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are
not taken.

! Caution
with a warning triangle indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition v
Preface 03/2006

Caution
without a warning triangle indicates that property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Notice
indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable
event or state.

If several hazards of different degrees occur, the hazard with the highest degree
must always be given priority. A warning notice accompanied by a safety alert
symbol indicating a risk of bodily injury can also indicate a risk of property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The associated device/system may only be set up and operated using this
documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be
performed by qualified personnel. Qualified persons are defined as persons who
are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

vi SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 Table of Contens

Table of Contens

1 Variables .......................................................................................... 1-11

1.1 Introduction ................................................................................... 1-14

1.1.1 General information ................................................................... 1-15
1.1.2 Module types.............................................................................. 1-17
1.1.3 Variable types ............................................................................ 1-18
1.1.4 Data types.................................................................................. 1-21
1.1.5 Reference .................................................................................. 1-22

1.2 Systemdaten ................................................................................. 1-23

1.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data ......................................... 1-23
1.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data ......................... 1-32
1.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones................................ 1-35
1.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones ............... 1-42
1.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups.......................... 1-48

1.3 State data of system ..................................................................... 1-49

1.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data............................................. 1-49
1.3.2 Area N, Mod. SALA: Alarms ...................................................... 1-68
1.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms.................................................... 1-70
1.3.4 Area N, Mod. SALAL: Alarms .................................................... 1-72
1.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .......................... 1-73
1.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes
(extension of SMA) .................................................................... 1-75
1.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle..................................... 1-87
1.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle................................... 1-90
1.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Active NCU global frames............................. 1-93
1.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: NCU global base frames............................. 1-94
1.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: NCU global settable frames........................ 1-95
1.3.12 Area N, Mod. YFAFL: NCK instruction groups (Fanuc)........... 1-96
1.3.13 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data..................... 1-97

1.4 State data of channel.................................................................... 1-98

1.4.1 Area C, Mod. M: Channel-specific machine data ...................... 1-98
1.4.2 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data........................... 1-98
1.4.3 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data ............. 1-129
1.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information ...................... 1-132
1.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in
automatic operation ................................................................... 1-136
1.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption ........... 1-138
1.4.7 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointers for
block search and stop run ......................................................... 1-140
1.4.8 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions .......................... 1-142
1.4.9 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions 1-144
1.4.10 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions.................................. 1-146
1.4.11 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling ................................... 1-147
1.4.12 Area C, Mod. FB: Channel-specific base frames .................... 1-148
1.4.13 Area C, Mod. FS: Channel-specific system frames................. 1-149
1.4.14 Area C, Mod. AUXFU: Auxiliary functions ............................... 1-150

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition vii
Table of Contens 03/2006

1.5 State data of axes ......................................................................... 1-151

1.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes .......................... 1-151
1.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes
(extension of SMA) .................................................................... 1-153
1.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in
tool offset memory ..................................................................... 1-174
1.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in
tool offset memory (extension of SGA) ..................................... 1-176
1.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle..................................... 1-182
1.5.6 Area C, Mod. FU: Channel-specific settable frames ................. 1-185
1.5.7 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle................................... 1-186
1.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active channel-specific frames ..................... 1-189
1.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: Channel-specific external frame ................... 1-190

1.6 State data of drives ....................................................................... 1-190

1.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD) ...................... 1-190
1.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD) ..................... 1-193

1.7 Tool and magazine data ............................................................... 1-195

1.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data .......................... 1-195
1.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data ................................ 1-198
1.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data ................... 1-200
1.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data ........................ 1-201
1.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data............. 1-202
1.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data .................. 1-202
1.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data............ 1-204
1.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory ........................... 1-206
1.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data ....................... 1-206
1.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data ..................... 1-209
1.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment
of location data ......................................................................... 1-211
1.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types.................... 1-212
1.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory..................................... 1-212
1.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters of _N_TMGETT,
_N_TSEARC........................................................................................ 1-214
1.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data ................ 1-221
1.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data ........ 1-222
1.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data................ 1-222
1.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data ............................................... 1-222
1.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory ........................ 1-223
1.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters................................ 1-225
1.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
setup offsets ............................................................................ 1-231
1.7.22 Area T, Mod. TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
transformed setup offsets ........................................................ 1-231
1.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent
fine total offsets ....................................................................... 1-231
1.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent
fine total offsets, transformed .................................................. 1-234
1.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data......... 1-234
1.7.26 Area T, Mod. TAD: Application-specific data........................... 1-236
1.7.27 Area T, Mod. TAM: Application-specific magazine data.......... 1-236
1.7.28 Area T, Mod. TAO: Application-specific cutting edge data...... 1-237
1.7.29 Area T, Mod. TAP: Application-specific magazine
location data ............................................................................ 1-238

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

viii SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 Table of Contens

1.7.30 Area T, Mod. TAS: Application-specific monitoring data ......... 1-239

1.8 Machine and setting data.............................................................. 1-240

1.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data ...................................... 1-240
1.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data# ........................... 1-241
1.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data........................................ 1-242
1.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data ....................... 1-243
1.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data .............................. 1-243

1.9 Parameters ................................................................................... 1-245

1.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters .................................. 1-245
1.9.2 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user
variables for synchronous actions ............................................. 1-246

1.10 Servo........................................................................................... 1-247

1.10.1 Area N, Mod. SD: Servo data .................................................. 1-247

1.11 Diagnosis data ............................................................................ 1-249

1.11.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data ......................... 1-249
1.11.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data .......... 1-261
1.11.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling ....................... 1-263
1.11.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events ........................................ 1-264

1.12 HMI / MMC State data ................................................................ 1-269

1.12.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC ............................. 1-269

2 Interface Signals sl ......................................................................... 2-271

2.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface .................... 2-272

2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface ........................ 2-272

2.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version..................... 2-273
2.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version...................... 2-275
2.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel ......................... 2-276
2.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)......................................... 2-277
2.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT8).................... 2-279
2.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2) ............................................................... 2-280
2.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................... 2-284
2.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/HMI (DB 10) ............................................. 2-285
2.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11) ......................................... 2-292
2.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18) .... 2-295
2.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19) ................................... 2-298
2.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)...................................................... 2-303
2.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30) ............................... 2-304
2.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC->NCK) (DB 31–DB 61) ...... 2-322
2.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71) .................. 2-331
2.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72)..................... 2-332
2.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73)................................... 2-333
2.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
(840Di with MCI2 only) (DB 77).............................................. 2-335

3 Interface Signals power line .......................................................... 3-337

3.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface .................... 3-338

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition ix
Table of Contens 03/2006

3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface ........................ 3-338

3.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version..................... 3-338
3.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version...................... 3-340
3.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel ......................... 3-341
3.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)......................................... 3-342
3.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU)................... 3-344
3.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2) ............................................................... 3-345
3.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................... 3-349
3.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC (DB 10) ........................................... 3-353
3.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11) ......................................... 3-358
3.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18) .... 3-360
3.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19) ................................... 3-364
3.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)...................................................... 3-369
3.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30) ............................... 3-370
3.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC->NCK) (DB 31–DB 61) ...... 3-386
3.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71) .................. 3-393
3.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72)..................... 3-394
3.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73)................................... 3-396
3.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
(840Di with MCI2 only) (DB 77)............................................... 3-397
3.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn, ShopMill, ShopTurn (DB 82) ..... 3-398

4 PLC-Blocks...................................................................................... 4-399

4.1 Overview of organization blocks ................................................... 4-400

4.2 Overview of function blocks .......................................................... 4-400

4.3 Assignment of data blocks............................................................ 4-401

4.4 Assigned timers ............................................................................ 4-402

I Index.................................................................................................. I-403

I.1 Stichwortindex................................................................................ I-403

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

x SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction

1 Variables
1
1.1 Introduction............................................................................ 1-14
1.1.1 General information............................................................ 1-15
1.1.2 Module types ...................................................................... 1-17
1.1.3 Variable types..................................................................... 1-18
1.1.4 Data types .......................................................................... 1-21
1.1.5 Reference ........................................................................... 1-22

1.2 Systemdaten.......................................................................... 1-23

1.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data.................................. 1-23
1.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data.................. 1-32
1.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones ........................ 1-35
1.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones ........ 1-42
1.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups .................. 1-48

1.3 State data of system.............................................................. 1-49

1.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data ..................................... 1-49
1.3.2 Area N, Mod. SALA: Alarms............................................... 1-68
1.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms ............................................ 1-70
1.3.4 Area N, Mod. SALAL: Alarms............................................. 1-72
1.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes................... 1-73
1.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes
(extension of SMA)............................................................ 1-75
1.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle ............................. 1-87
1.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle ........................... 1-90
1.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Active NCU global frames ..................... 1-93
1.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: NCU global base frames ..................... 1-94
1.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: NCU global settable frames ................ 1-95
1.3.12 Area N, Mod. YFAFL: NCK instruction groups (Fanuc) ... 1-96
1.3.13 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data ............. 1-97

1.4 State data of channel ............................................................ 1-98

1.4.1 Area C, Mod. M: Channel-specific machine data............... 1-98
1.4.2 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data ................... 1-98
1.4.3 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data...... 1-129
1.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information ............... 1-132
1.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic
operation ............................................................................ 1-136
1.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption.... 1-138
1.4.7 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointers for
block search and stop run .................................................. 1-140
1.4.8 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions................... 1-142
1.4.9 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific
synchronous actions .......................................................... 1-144

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-11
1 Variables 03/2006
1.1 Introduction

1.4.10 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions...........................1-146

1.4.11 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling ............................1-147
1.4.12 Area C, Mod. FB: Channel-specific base frames .............1-148
1.4.13 Area C, Mod. FS: Channel-specific system frames..........1-149
1.4.14 Area C, Mod. AUXFU: Auxiliary functions ........................1-150

1.5 State data of axes ..................................................................1-151

1.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes ...................1-151
1.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes
(extension of SMA) ............................................................1-153
1.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in
tool offset memory ..............................................................1-174
1.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in
tool offset memory (extension of SGA) ..............................1-176
1.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle..............................1-182
1.5.6 Area C, Mod. FU: Channel-specific settable frames ..........1-185
1.5.7 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle............................1-186
1.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active channel-specific frames ..............1-189
1.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: Channel-specific external frame ............1-190

1.6 State data of drives................................................................1-190

1.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD) ...............1-190
1.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD) ..............1-193

1.7 Tool and magazine data ........................................................1-195

1.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data ...................1-195
1.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data .........................1-198
1.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data ............1-200
1.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data .................1-201
1.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data......1-202
1.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data ...........1-202
1.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data.....1-204
1.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory ....................1-206
1.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data ................1-206
1.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data ..............1-209
1.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple
assignment of location data..............................................1-211
1.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types.............1-212
1.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory..............................1-212
1.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters
of _N_TMGETT, _N_TSEARC .........................................1-214
1.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data .........1-221
1.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data .1-222
1.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data.........1-222
1.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data ........................................1-222
1.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory .................1-223
1.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters.........................1-225
1.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
setup offsets .....................................................................1-231
1.7.22 Area T, Mod. TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets,
transformed setup offsets .................................................1-231
1.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent
fine total offsets ................................................................1-231
1.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent
fine total offsets, transformed ...........................................1-234

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-12 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction

1.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data . 1-234
1.7.26 Area T, Mod. TAD: Application-specific data ................... 1-236
1.7.27 Area T, Mod. TAM: Application-specific magazine data .. 1-236
1.7.28 Area T, Mod. TAO: Application-specific cutting
edge data ......................................................................... 1-237
1.7.29 Area T, Mod. TAP: Application-specific magazine
location data ..................................................................... 1-238
1.7.30 Area T, Mod. TAS: Application-specific monitoring data.. 1-239

1.8 Machine and setting data ...................................................... 1-240

1.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data ............................... 1-240
1.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data#.................... 1-241
1.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data ................................ 1-242
1.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data ................ 1-243
1.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data....................... 1-243

1.9 Parameters ............................................................................ 1-245

1.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters........................... 1-245
1.9.2 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user variables
for synchronous actions ..................................................... 1-246

1.10 Servo ................................................................................... 1-247

1.10.1 Area N, Mod. SD: Servo data........................................... 1-247

1.11 Diagnosis data..................................................................... 1-249

1.11.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data .................. 1-249
1.11.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data... 1-261
1.11.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling ................ 1-263
1.11.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events................................. 1-264

1.12 HMI / MMC State data......................................................... 1-269

1.12.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC ...................... 1-269

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-13
1 Variables 03/2006
1.1 Introduction

1.1 Introduction

This section describes the NCK variables that an MMC/HMI or the PLC
can access via the operator panel interface. (Access is read and for some
variables write also). The access methods of the various components are
described in the following user documentation:
References: /FBO/, Configuring the OP030 Operator Interface
/PK/, Configuring kit MMC 100/Unit Operator Panel

Description of PLC access method in:

References: /FB/, P3, "Basic PLC Program"

Description of the OEM-MMC access method in "OEM-MMC Description

of Functions".

OEM-MMC

OPI
MPI

NCK
OP 030 NCU 57x

NC data
block

PLC

The components shown on the left-hand side of the diagram each have
their own development environment which defines the syntax to be used.
A variable is always addressed according to a defined pattern. All the
information required for addressing the variables irrespective of the
programming language chosen is summed up in the following lists.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-14 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction

1.1.1 General information

The NCK variables are stored in data modules that are assigned to the
individual areas of the NCK as the figure below shows:

Mode group 1

Channel n
Channel 2

Channel 1

Axis n

Axis 2

Axis 1

Variable areas of SINUMERIK 840D/810D/FM-NC

A distinction is made between the following areas:

• NCK (N)
• Mode group (B)
• Channel (C)
• Tool (T)
• Axis (A)
• Feed/main drive (V/H)
NCK
Contains all the variables such as system data (Y), protection zones
(PA), G groups (YNCFL) etc. that apply to the entire NCK.

Mode group
Contains variables such as the status data (S) that apply to the mode
group.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-15
1 Variables 03/2006
1.1 Introduction

Channel
Contains variables such as the system data (Y), protection zones (PA),
global status data (S) etc. that apply to each channel.

Tool
Contains variables such as the tool offset data (TO), general tool data
(TD), tool monitoring data (TS) etc. that apply to the tools on the
machine. Each tool area T is assigned to a channel.

Axis
Contains the setting data and machine data that apply to each axis or
spindle. For a description see Section "Axis-specific machine data".

Feed / main drive

Contains machine data and machine data as the service values that
apply to each drive. For a description see Section "Drive machine data".

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-16 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction

1.1.2 Module types

The following table provides an overview of the modules for the variables
of the NCK and how they are assigned to the individual areas.
Only the data modules whose variables can be read or written with direct
access are contained in the list. Data modules whose variables can be
defined by the programmer (e.g. global user data) are read by the MMC
or PLC using other mechanisms. The documentation listed below
describes the modules to which these mechanisms are applied:

References: /FBO/, Configuring the OP030 Operator Interface,

/FB/, P3, "Basic PLC Program" and
"OEM-MMC Description of Functions"

Module Area
A B C H N T V
ETP 1
ETPD 1
DIAGN 1
FA 1 1
FB 1 1
FE 1
FU 1 1
M 1 1
NIB 1
PA 1 1
RP 1
S 1 1 1 1 1
SALA 1
SALAL 1
SALAP 1
SE 1 1 1
SEGA 1
SEMA 1 1
SGA 1
SINF 1
SMA 1 1
SNCF 1
SPARP 1
SPARPF 1
SPARPI 1
SPARPP 1
SSP 1 1
SSP2 1 1
SSYNAC 1
SYNACT 1
TD 1
TF 1
TG 1
TM 1
TMC 1
TMV 1
TO 1
TP 1
TPM 1
TS 1
TT 1
TU 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-17
1 Variables 03/2006
1.1 Introduction

TUE 1
TUM 1
TUP 1
TUS 1
TV 1
AD 1
AEV 1
TC 1
TOE 1
TOET 1
TOS 1
TOST 1
TOT 1
VSYN 1
Y 1 1
YNCFL 1

1.1.3 Variable types

Within each area the variables are generally stored in the form of
structures or in arrays of structures (tables). The following information
must therefore be contained in an address when accessing a variable:
• Area + area number
• Module
• Variable name (or column number)
• Line number

It is generally possible to distinguish between three different variable

types:
1. Variables that consist of 1 line
2. Variables that consist of several lines
3. Variables that consist of several columns and lines

Single-line variables
Each of these variables consists of a single value. The following
information is required when accessing a variable of this type:
1. Area (and possibly area number)
2. Module
3. Variable name

numMachAxes
Number of existing machine axes
- Word r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-18 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
 03/2006 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction

Example for reading the number of machine axes in channel 1:

MMC102:
/Channel/Configuration/numMachAxes[u1]

MMC100/OP030:
P_C_Y_numMachAxes

PLC with NC-Var-Selector:

Area: C[.]
Module: Y
Variable: numMachAxes
Area No. = 1

Multi-line variables
These variables are defined as a one-dimensional field. When accessing
a variable of this type the following information must be specified:
1. Area (and possibly area number)
2. Module
3. Variable name
4. Line number

actFeedRate $AA_VACTB[x] S5
Axial feedrate actual value (only if axis is a positioning axis "spec" = 1)
% Double r
Multi-line:yes Axis index numMachAxes

Example for reading the current velocity of axis 3 in channel 1:

MMC102:
/Channel/MachineAxis/actFeedRate[u1, 3]

MMC100/OP030:
P_C_SEMA_actFeedRate

PLC with NC-Var-Selector:

Area: C[.]
Module: SEMA
Variable: actFeedRate[.]
Area No. = 1
Line = 3

Multi-line and multi-column variables

These variables are defined as a two-dimensional field. In order to
access a variable of this type, the following information must be specified:
1. Area (and possibly area number)
2. Module
3. Variable name
4. Column number
5. Line number
In this case the entire data module only consists of this two-dimensional
variable.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-19
1 Variables 03/2006
1.1 Introduction

cuttEdgeParam $TC_DPx[y,z]
Offset value parameters for a cutting edge
mm, inch or userdef 0 Double

Multi-line:yes (CuttEdgeNo 1) * numCuttEdgeParams * numCuttEdges

numCuttEdgeParams +
ParameterNo
Example for reading the current cutting edge data of cutting edge
3/parameter 1 of tool 3 in T area 1: (in this example it is assumed that
each tool cutting edge has been defined with (numCuttEdgeParams =) 25
parameters).

MMC102:
/Tool/Compensation/cuttEdgeParam[u1,c3, 51]

MMC100/OP030:
P_T_TO_cuttEdgeParam

PLC with NC-Var-Selector:

Area: T[.]
Module: TO
Variable: cuttEdgeParam[.]
Area No. = 1
Column = 3
Line = 51

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-20 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
 03/2006 1 Variables
1.1 Introduction

1.1.4 Data types

The following data types are used in this description:

Data type Description

Bool 1 bit
Character 8 bits without sign
Byte 8 bits with sign
Word 16 bits without sign
Short Integer 16 bits with sign
Doubleword 32 bits without sign
Long Integer 32 bits with sign
Float 32 bits floating point
Double 64 bits floating point
String String ending in zero

In the tables below the individual fields have the following meaning:

Variable name Reference to assigned MD Ref.

Variable brief description/
variable description
« Description of value range »
Physical unit Default value Lower limit Upper limit Format / w/r
field length
Multi-line:yes / no Description of line index Maximum line index

Ref. Cross-reference to references

w/r w Variable can be overwritten
r Variable can be read

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-21
1 Variables 03/2006
1.1 Introduction

1.1.5 Reference

The "Reference" field designates the document which contains the

description of the context in which the machine data is used.
Reference is made to the following documents:

/FB1/ Function Manual of basic machines, supporting manuals: A2, A3, B1,
B2, D1, F1, G2, H2, K1, K2, N2, P1, P3pl, P3sl, R1, S1, V1, W1, Z1
/FB2/ Function Manual of expanded functions, supporting manuals: A4, B3,
B4, F3, H1, K3, K5, M1. M5, N2, N4, P2, P5, R2, S3, S7, T1, W3, W4
/FB3/ Function Manual of special functions, supporting manuals: F2, G1,
G3, K6, M3, S9, T3, TE01, TE02, TE1, TE2, TE3, TE4, TE6, TE7,
TE8, V2, W5
/FBA/ Function manual of drive functions, supporting manuals: DB1, DD1,
DD2, DE1, DF1, DG1, DL1, DM1, DS1, DÜ1
/FBU/ Description of Functions SIMODRIVE 611 universal
/FBSI/ Description of Functions Safety Integrated
/IAC/ 810D Installation & Start-Up Guide
/IAD/ 840D/611D Installation & Start-Up Guide
/POS3/ POSMO SI/CD/CA User Manual
/FBHLA/ Description of Functions HLA module
/IAM/ Commissioning CNC Part 2 (HMI), supporting manuals: BE1,
HE1, IM2, IM4

/FBO/ Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface

/FBT/ Description of Functions ShopTurn
/FBSP/ Description of Functions ShopMill
/BAS/ Operating/Programming ShopMill
/BAD/ Operator's Guide HMI Advanced
/BEM/ HMI Embedded Operator's Guide
/FBW/ Description of Functions Tool Management
/FBMA/ Description of Functions ManualTurn
/FBFA/ ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK Description of Functions
/FBSY/ Description of Functions Synchronized Actions
/PGA/ Programming Manual Job Planning

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-22 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

1.2 Systemdaten
1.2.1 Area N, Mod. Y: Global system data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/Configuration/...

The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the
machine data. Configuration can only be performed with certain access rights. The
configuration of the NC can be read in the system data regardless of current
access rights.

accessLevel
Level of the access rights currently set. Can be changed by entering the password or turning the keyswitch.
0 = access level SIEMENS
1 = access level machine tool builder
2 = access level system start-up engineer (machine tool builder)
3 = access level end user with password
4 = access level key switch 3
5 = access level key switch 2
6 = access level key switch 1
7 = access level key switch 0
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

axisType
Axis types for all machine axes (necessary for start-up): If a machine axis is addressed via the M module, the units and
values are returned with reference to the axis type accessible via this variable. (The absolute machine axis index 1-
N_Y_maxnumGlobMachAxes is specified via the line index)
0 = Linear axis
1 = Rotary axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Absolute machine axis number maxnumGlobMachAxes

basicLengthUnit
Global basic unit
0 = mm
1 = inch
4 = userdef
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

chanAssignment MD 10010: ASSIGN_CHAN_TO_MODE_GROUP[x] x=ChannelNo K1

Assignment of each channel to mode group
0 = channel does not exist
n = channel assigned to mode group n (n is maximum numBAGs (BAG = mode group))
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Channel number maxnumChannels

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-23
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

externCncSystem $MN_EXTERN_LANGUAGE und $MN_EXTERN_CNC_SYSTEM

CNC system whose part programs must be processed on the
SINUMERIK control.
0: No external language defined
1: System ISO Dialect0 Milling
2: System ISO Dialect0 Turning
etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

extraCuttEdgeParams
Bit string that specifies which TO edge parameters are available
in addition to the 25 standard parameters.
Bit 0: Edge parameter no. 26 valid (ISO Dialect Milling H No.)
Bit 1: Edge parameter no. 27 valid
Bit 2: Edge parameter no. 28 valid
Bit 3: Edge parameter no. 29 valid
Bit 4: Edge parameter no. 30 valid
etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

kindOfSumcorr $MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR
Characteristics of total offsets in NCK:
Bit No. Value Meaning
0 0 Total offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Total offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 0 Setup offsets are saved at the same time as the tool data.
1 Setup offsets are not saved at the same time as the tool data.
2 0 If the "Tool management" function is in use: The existing total/setup offsets are not affected when
tool status "active" is set.
1 When tool status "active" is set, the existing total offsets are set to zero. The setup offsets are not
affected.
3 0 If the "Tool management" function plus "Adapter" is in use: Transformation of total offsets
1 No transformation of total offsets
4 0 No setup offset data sets
1 Setup offset data sets are created additionally, in which case the total offset equals the product of
total offset + "fine total offset".
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-24 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

maskToolManagement $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of tool management memory with "0" means: The set tool management data do not occupy any memory
space.
Bit 0=1: Memory for TM-specific data is made available
Bit 1=1: Memory for monitoring data is made available
Bit 2=1: Memory for user data (CC data) is made available
Bit 3=1: Memory for "Consider adjacent location" is made available
SW 5.1 and later:
Bit 5=0: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are not available.
Bit 5=1: Parameters and function for tool wear monitoring are available and, if bit 1 = 1, the wear monitoring function is
also available.
Bit 6=0: The wear group function is not available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 cannot be programmed,
$TC_MPP5 is not defined for magazine locations of type 1.
Bit 6=1: The wear group function is available; i.e. parameters $TC_MAMP3, $TC_MAP9 can be programmed and wear
groups defined. $TC_MPP5 contains the wear group number for location type 1.
Bit 7=1: Tool adapter data sets are available.
Bit 8=1: Total offsets are available.
Bit 9=1: Tools in a turret are handled in OPI variable modules such that they are not "displayed" in tool half-locations,
but always displayed in a turret location. Please note, therefore, that tools in a turret remain (in display terms) in their
turret location in the event of a tool change.
Bit 9=0: Default response; Tools in a turret are "displayed" in the OPI in their actual (according to data) location.
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

maxCuttingEdgeNo $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO
Maximum value of D number
1 to 32000
- 9 1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

maxNumAdapter $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER
Maximum number of tool adapter data sets available in NCK
>0: Maximum number of adapter data sets.
0: Adapter data cannot be defined. Edge-specific parameters $TC_DP21, $TC_DP22, $TC_DP23 are available, i.e.
active tool management function with adapters is not in use.
-1: An adapter is automatically assigned to each magazine location, i.e. the number of adapters provided internally
corresponds to the number of magazine locations set in machine data $MN_MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION.
- 0 -1 600 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

maxnumAlarms
Size of NCK alarm buffer (maximum number of pending alarms)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

maxnumChannels
Maximum number of available channels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

maxnumContainer
Maximum number of available axis containers
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-25
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

maxnumContainerSlots
Maximum number of available slots per axis container
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

maxnumCuttEdges_Tool $MN_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PER_TOOL
Max. number of edges per tool
1 to 12
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

maxnumDrives
Maximum number of available drives
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

maxnumEdgeSC $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE
Max. number of total offsets per edge
0 to 6
- 0 ??? NCK UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

maxnumEventTypes
Maximum number of event types for the trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

maxnumGlobMachAxes
Maximum number of available machine axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

maxNumSumcorr $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR
Total number of total offsets in NCK
A setting of -1 means that the number of total offsets equals the
number of edges * number of total offsets per edge.
A setting of > 0 and < number of edges * number of total offsets per edge
means that a maximum number of total offsets equalling "number of total
offsets per edge" can be defined per edge, but need not be, i.e. it is thus
possible to use the buffer memory more economically.
In other words, only the edges have a total offset data set for which
data can be defined explicitly.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

maxnumTraceProtData
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

maxnumTraceProtDataList
Maximum number of data per data list for trace protocolling
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-26 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

modeSpindleToolRevolver MD $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK Bit 9

Representation of tool currently in use in modules
magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data, location data) and
tool data (T / TD, tool data, general data and T / TV, tool data, directory)
0: Previous method: During operation, the tool is removed (in data terms) from its circular magazine location and
loaded to the spindle location in the buffer magazine.
1: During operation, the tool remains in its circular magazine locations in the OPI modules. This applies to OPI
modules magazine location data (T / TP, magazine data and location data) and tool data (T / TD, tool data, general data
and T / TV, tool data, directory and T / AEV, working offsets, directory).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

nckLogbookSeekPos
NCK logbook
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: no 1

nckType
NCK type
0: 840D pl
1000: FM-NC (up to and including SW 6)
2000: 810D pl
3000: 802S (up to and including SW 6)
4000: 802D pl (up to and including SW 6)
5000: 840Di pl (up to and including SW 6)
6000: SOLUTIONLINE
10700: 840D sl
14000: 802D sl T/M
14000: 802D sl N/G or C/U
15000: 840Di sl
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

nckVersion
NCK version
Only the digits before the comma of the floating point number are evaluated, the digits after the comma may contain
identifiers for development-internal intermediate releases.
The digits before the comma includes the official NCK identifier for the software release: For software release 3.4 the
value of the variable is 34,....
- Double r
Multi-line: no

ncuPerformanceClass
NCU power class
Not defined in SW 6.2.
0: No special power class
1: Powerline
2-n: Reserved
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numAnalogInp MD 10300: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW analog inputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numAnalogOutp MD 10310: FASTIO_ANA_NUM_OUTPUTS A2

Number of HW analog outputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-27
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

numBAGs
Number of available mode groups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numBasisFrames $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent basic frames
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numChannels
Number of active channels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numContainer
Number of currently available axis containers
- 0 maxnumContainer UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numContainerSlots
Number of currently available slots per axis container
- maxnumContainerSlots UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of axis container numContainer

numCuttEdgeParams
Number of P elements of a cutting edge
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numCuttEdgeParams_tao $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_TOA_PARAM
Number of Siemens application cutting edge data in module TAO
!! Reserved for SIEMENS applications !!
- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numCuttEdgeParams_tas $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM
Number of Siemens application monitoring data in module TAS
!! Reserved for SIEMENS applications !!
- 0 0 10 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numCuttEdgeParams_ts
Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TS (tool monitoring data)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numCuttEdgeParams_tu MD 18096: MM_CC_TOA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a cutting edge in module TUE (cutting edge data for OEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-28 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

numCuttEdgeParams_tus $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM
Number of parameters in the user monitoring data of a cutting edge in the module TUS

- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numDigitInp MD 10350: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_INPUTS A2

Number of HW digital inputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numDigitOutp MD 10360: FASTIO_DIG_NUM_OUTPUTS A2

Number of HW digital outputs
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numDrives
Number of active drives
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numGCodeGroups
Number of NC instruction groups
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numGCodeGroupsFanuc
Number of NC instruction groups in ISO Dialect mode
(the number for the turning and milling versions is not the same)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numGlobMachAxes
Number of active machine axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numHandWheels
Maximum number of handwheels
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numMagLocParams_tap $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of Siemens application magazine location data in module TAP
!! Reserved for SIEMENS applications !!
- 0 0 10 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numMagLocParams_u $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for a tool magazine place in the module TUP

- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-29
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

numMagParams_tam $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of Siemens application magazine data in module TAM
!! Reserved for SIEMENS applications !!
- 0 0 10 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numMagParams_u $MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM
Number of parameters of the magazine user data for a tool magazine in the module TUM

- 0 0 10 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numMagPlaceParams $TC_MPP1
Number of parameters of a magazine location
8 in SW 5.1 and later
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

numMagPlacesMax MD 18086: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION FBW

Maximum number of magazine locations
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numMagsMax MD 18084: MM_NUM_MAGAZINE FBW

Maximum number of magazines
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numParams_Adapt
Number of parameters per adapter
- 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

numParams_SC $TC_SCPx; x=13,...21,....71

Number of total offset parameters per total offset set
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

numPlaceMulti FBW
Number of possible multiple assignments of a location to magazines
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numPlaceMultiParams FBW
Number of parameters of a multiple assignment
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numToBaust MD 18110: MM_NUM_TOA_MODULES

Number of T areas
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-30 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

numToolHolderParams
Number of parameters in the data toolHolderData in the area C, module S
Number of parameters in toolHolderData.
If the tool magazine management is not active, the value =0 will be returned.
- 3 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

numToolParams_tad $MN_MM_NUM_CCS_TDA_PARAM
Number of Siemens application tool data in module TAD
!! Reserved for SIEMENS applications !!
- 0 0 10 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numToolParams_tu MD 18094: MM_CC_TDA_PARAM

Number of P elements of a tool in module TU (tool data for OEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numUserFrames MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES
Number of channel-independent user frames
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

simo611dSupport
This data specifies the extent to which the system supports 611 drives.

Bit 0 set: NCK software supports 611D drives

Bit 1 set: Hardware supports 611D drives
(only if bit 0 is also set).
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

toolChangeMfunc MD 22560: TOOL_CHANGE_M_CODE W1

Number of M function for tool change
0 = change on T selection (standard for turning)
1 = change on selection M1..
99999 = change on selection M99999
(standard for milling M06)
- Double r
Multi-line: no

typeOfCuttingEdge
Type of D-number programming see MD: MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE
0 no 'flat D-number management' active
1 D-numbers are programmed directly and absolutely
2 D-numbers are programmed indirectly and relatively

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

userScale
User unit table with 13 elements (see Start-up Guide 2.4 and machine data)
0 = table not active
1 = table active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-31
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

1.2.2 Area C, Mod. Y: Channel-specific system data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
Channel/Configuration/...

The machine tool builder or user configures the control with the help of the
machine data. Configuration can only be performed with certain access rights. The
configuration of the NC can be read in the system data regardless of current
access rights.

channelName MD 20000: CHAN_NAME K1

Channel name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no

maskToolManagement MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK
Channel-specific settings for NCK tool management function
Activation of TM memory by "0" means: The set tool management data do not use any memory space.
Value=0: TM deactivated
Bit 0=1: TM active: The tool management functions are enabled for the current channel.
Bit 1=1: TM monitoring function active: Functions required to monitor tools (tool life and number of workpieces) are
enabled.
Bit 2=1: OEM functions active: The memory for user data can be utilized.
Bit 3=1: Consideration of adjacent location active
Bits 0 to 3 must be set identically to machine data MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK (18080).
Bit 4=1: The PLC has the possibility of issuing another request for tool change preparation with modified parameters.
-------------------------For test purposes only :------------------------------------------------
Part program is halted in response to T selection or M06 until it has been
acknowledged by the PLC program.
Bit 5=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is executed
simultaneously with the transport acknowledgement.
Bit 6=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is executed
simultaneously with the transport acknowledgement.
Bit 7=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the main spindle is not executed until the
PLC acknowledgement confirms that the tool change is complete.
Bit 8=1: The main run/PLC synchronization in response to a tool change for the auxiliary spindle is not executed until
the PLC acknowledgement confirms that the tool change is complete..
-------------------------End For test purposes only :-------------------------------------------
Bit 9: Reserved
Bit 10=1: M06 is delayed until the preparation acknowledgement has been output by the PLC. The change signal (e.g.
M06 ) is not output until the tool selection ( DBX [ n+0 ].2 ) has been acknowledged. The part program is halted in
response to M06 until the T selection has been acknowledged.
Bit 11=1: The preparation command is output even if a preparation command has already been output for the same tool.
This setting is useful, for example, if the chain is to be positioned when "Tx" is first called and if the second call is to
initiate a check as to whether the tool is in the correct location for a tool change (e.g. in front of tool-change station).
Bit 12=1: The preparation command is executed even if the tool is already loaded in the spindle, i.e. the T selection
signal (DB72.DBXn.2) is set even if it has already been set for the same tool. (Tx...Tx)
Bit 13=1: Only on systems with sufficient memory space (NCU572, NCU573): Recording of tool sequences in a
diagnostics buffer. The commands are fetched from the diagnostics buffer in response to Reset and stored in a file in the
passive file system, NCATR xx.MPF under part program. The trace file is useful for the Hotline in the event of errors and
is not described in detail here.
Bit 14=1: Automatic tool change in response to Reset and Start according to machine data MD20120
TOOL_RESET_NAME MD20110 RESET_MODE_MASK MD20124 TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER. If machine
data RESET_MODE_MASK is in use, then this bit must be set as well. If RESET_MODE_MASK is set such that the tool
stored in TOOL_RESET_NAME must be loaded in response to RESET, then the select and change command is output
to the user interface (DB 72) in response to RESET or Start. If machine data RESET_MODE_MASK is set such that the
active tool must remain active after M30 or RESET and if the active tool is disabled in the spindle (by user), then a
change command for a replacement tool is output to the user interface in response to RESET. If no replacement tool is
available, then an error message is output.
Bit 15=1: No return transport of tool when several preparation commands are output. (Tx->Tx)
Bit 16=1: T location number is active
Bit 17=1: Tool life decrementation can be started/stopped via the PLC.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-32 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

mmcCmd
Command from NCK to MMC
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgement mode:
"N" no acknowledgement
"S" synchronous acknowledgement
"A" asynchronous acknowledgement
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII that is generated by the NCK
7. - 207th character: Command string which ends with "\0"
- String[206] r
Multi-line: no

mmcCmdPrep
Command from the NCK-preparation task to the MMC (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- String[206] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

mmcCmdQuit
Acknowledgement from MMC for command from NCK to MMC
The string is made up of the following characters:
1st Character acknowledgement code:
"P" programmed
"B" busy
"F" failed
"E" executed
2. - 6th character: five-digit sequence number in ASCII for acknowledgement code "B", "F" or "E", generated by NCK
7. - 201th character: additional communication-specific information for acknowledgement code "B", "F" or "E", ends with
"\0"
- String[200] w
Multi-line: no

mmcCmdQuitPrep
Acknowledgemnt by MMC for an NCK-preparation command to the MMC (e.g. for calling external subprograms)
- String[200] wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numActAxes
Number of active tools in channel.
Channel axis gaps are not included in count which means that value might be lower than numMachAxes.
The following applies:
numMachAxes >= numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
numActAxes = numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes
- 0 0 numMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numAuxAxes
Number of auxiliary axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-33
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

numBasisFrames $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES
Number of basic frames in channel
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numContourInProtArea
Maximum number of polygon elements per protection zone
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numGeoAxes
Number of geometry axes and orientation axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numMachAxes
No. of highest channel axis.
This also corresponds to the number of axes in the
channel provided there are no gaps in the axis sequence.
- 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numOriAxes
Number of orientation axes in channel
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numProtArea MD 28200: MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN S7

Maximum number of protection zones
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numRParams MD 28050: MM_NUM_R_PARAM S7

Number of channel-specific R parameters
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numSpindles
Number of spindles
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numSpindlesLog
Number of logical spindles.
Specifies the number of lines in module SSP2.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

numToolEdges MD 18100: MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA S7

Number of tool edges in this channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-34 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

numUserFrames MD 28080: MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES S7

Number of user frames in this channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

oemProtText
OEM text to be entered next in the logging buffer.

- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

progProtText
Programmable text to be entered next in the logging buffer

- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

punchNibActivation MD 26012: PUNCHNIB_ACTIVATION N4

Activation of punching and nibbling functions
0 = option not available
1 = option available
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

systemFrameMask $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK
Configuring screenform for channel-specific system frames
Indicates in bit-coded form which system frames are available
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

toNo MD 28085: MM_LINK_TOA_UNIT W1

Number of T area that is assigned to the channel
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

1.2.3 Area N, Mod. PA: Global protection zones

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/ProtectedArea/...

Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described by a

polygon function consisting of up to 10 elements. The module PA contains the
individual coordinates of the polygon elements. The protection zones are
addressed via the variable indices. The physical unit of the parameters can be read
from the variable "basicLengthUnit" in the module Y in area N.

The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zones does not affect the
protection zone monitoring function, but indicates the area in which the protection
zone is registered.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-35
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_1 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_2 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_3 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 4th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_4 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 5th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_5 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 6th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_6 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 7th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_7 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 8th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_8 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 9th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_9 $SN_PA_CENT_ABS[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 10th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-36 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_1 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_2 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_3 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 4th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_4 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 5th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_5 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 6th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_6 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 7th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_7 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 8th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_8 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 9th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_9 $SN_PA_CENT_ORD[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 10th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_1 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-37
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_2 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_3 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 4th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_4 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 5th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_5 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 6th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_6 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 7th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_7 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 8th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_8 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 9th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_9 $SN_PA_CONT_ABS[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 10th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_1 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_2 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-38 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_3 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 4th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_4 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 5th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_5 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 6th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_6 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 7th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_7 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 8th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_8 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 9th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_9 $SN_PA_CONT_ORD[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 10th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM $SN_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM $SN_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the plus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition (applicate)
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED $SN_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been started
up and the axes have been referenced
0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-39
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

MDU_PA_CONT_NUM $SN_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Number of valid contour elements
- 0 numContourInProtArea UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 1st contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_1 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 2nd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_2 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 3rd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_3 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 4th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_4 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 5th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_5 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 6th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_6 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 7th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-40 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_7 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 8th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_8 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 9th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_9 $SN_PA_CONT_TYP[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 10th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM $SN_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_ORI $SN_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for plane assignment of protection zone
0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_TW $SN_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-41
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

1.2.4 Area C, Mod. PA: Channel-specific protection zones

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/ProtectedArea/...

Up to 10 protection zones can be defined. Each protection zone is described by a

polygon function consisting of up to 10 elements. The maximum permissible
number of protection zones is specified in "numProtArea" in the module Y in area
C. The maximum permissible number of polygon definition elements is specified in
"numContourInProtArea" in module Y in area C. Module PA contains the individual
coordinates of the polygon elements. The protection zones are addressed via the
variable indices.

The classification as NCK or channel-specific protection zone does not affect the
protection zone monitoring function but simply indicates the area in which the
protection zone is registered.

The physical unit actually used for length quantities is defined in "/C/SGA/extUnit"
in module SGA in area C.

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_1 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 2nd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_2 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 3rd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_3 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 4th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_4 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 5th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_5 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 6th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_6 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 7th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-42 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_7 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 8th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_8 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 9th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_9 $SC_PA_CENT_ABS[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of arc centre of 10th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_1 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 2nd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_2 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 3rd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_3 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 4th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_4 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 5th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_5 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 6th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_6 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 7th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_7 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 8th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-43
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_8 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 9th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_9 $SC_PA_CENT_ORD[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of arc centre of 10th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_1 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 2nd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_2 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 3rd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_3 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 4th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_4 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 5th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_5 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 6th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_6 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 7th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_7 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 8th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_8 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 9th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-44 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_9 $SC_PA_CONT_ABS[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute abscissa value of end point of 10th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 1st contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_1 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 2nd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_2 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 3rd contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_3 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 4th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_4 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 5th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_5 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 6th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_6 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 7th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_7 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 8th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_8 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 9th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_9 $SC_PA_CONT_ORD[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Absolute ordinate value of end point of 10th contour element
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-45
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM $SC_PA_MINUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation in the minus direction of the protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition
(applicate)
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM $SC_PA_PLUS_LIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Limitation of the protection zone in the plus direction of the axis that is perpendicular to the polygon definition (applicate)
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED $SC_PA_ACTIV_IMMED[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for "active immediately after referencing", i.e. the protection zone is active as soon as the control has been started
up and the axes have been referenced
0 = protection zone is not active immediately
1 = protection zone is active immediately
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_NUM $SC_PA_CONT_NUM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Number of valid contour elements
- 0 numContourInProtArea UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,0] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 1st contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_1 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,1] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 2nd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_2 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,2] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 3rd contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_3 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,3] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 4th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-46 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.2 Systemdaten

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_4 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,4] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 5th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_5 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,5] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 6th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_6 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,6] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 7th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_7 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,7] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 8th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_8 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,8] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 9th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_9 $SC_PA_CONT_TYP[x,9] x = Number protection zone A3

Contour type of 10th contour element
0 = G1
1 = G2
2 = G3
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM $SC_PA_LIM_3DIM[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for limitation of protection zone in the axis that is perpendicular to polygon definition (applicate)
0 = no limitation
1 = limitation in positive direction
2 = limitation in negative direction
3 = limitation in both directions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-47
1 Variables 03/2006
1.2 Systemdaten

MDU_PA_ORI $SC_PA_ORI[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for plane assignment of protection zone
0 = G17
1 = G18
2 = G19
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

MDU_PA_TW $SC_PA_T_W[x] x = Number protection zone A3

Code for workpiece or tool-oriented protection zone
0 = workpiece-related
1 = reserved
2 = reserved
3 = tool-related
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of protection zone numProtArea

1.2.5 Area N, Mod. YNCFL: NCK instruction groups

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/FunctionGrouping/...

All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for reading
by the NCK. They are configured via machine data. Since the G functions are
organized in groups, only one of which can be active at a time, this module is
organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G
functions in a group (/N/YNCFL/Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number of
rows in each subsequent column. This second column contains all the G functions
belonging to a group (/N/YNCFL/Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)

The number of G groups is given in the variable "numGCodeGroups" in area N /

module Y. The resultant the maximum column offset of the variables is thus 2 *
numGCodeGroups.

The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.

Function
Instruction group

Attention: This variable is called "Gruppe" in the non-Windows MMC and the PLC !
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number /N/YNCFL/GroupID

GroupID
Number of G functions in each G group

Attention: This variable is called "Gruppe_NUM" in the non-Windows MMC and the PLC !
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-48 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

Gruppe
Instruction group
Attention: This variable is called "Function" in the MMC102 !
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number /N/YNCFL/Gruppe_NUM

Gruppe_NUM
Number of G functions in each G group
Attention: This variable is called "GroupID" in the MMC102 !
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1.3 State data of system

1.3.1 Area N, Mod. S: Global state data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/State/...

During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data may
change during operation. To distinguish those from system variables, they are
classified as state data.

A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)

accIndex
Global upload starting point for ACC entries. If a value is set here, upload access to _N_xx_yyy_ACC modules starts
from this entry.
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no

aDbb $A_DBB[x] x = ByteNo

Data byte from/to the PLC
Can be written from SW 6.4.
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area

aDbd $A_DBD[x] x = Offset

Data double word (32 bits) from/to the PLC
Can be written from SW 6.4.
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area.
The offset refers to the byte, with the
count beginning at 0.
Permissible values for x are thus 0,
4, 8 etc.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-49
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

aDbr $A_DBR[x] x = Offset

Real data (32 bits) from/to the PLC
Can be written from SW 6.4.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area

aDbw $A_DBW[x] x = Offset

Data word (16 bits) from/to the PLC
Can be written from SW 6.4.
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within an I/O area

aDlb $A_DLB[index]
Data byte (8 bits) in link area
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link data area

aDld $A_DLD[index]
Data double word (32 bits) in link data area
- UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link data area

aDlr $A_DLR[index]
Read data (32 bits) in link data area
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link area

aDlw $A_DLW[index]
Data word (16 bits) in link data area
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within link data area

aInco $A_INCO[x] x = InputNo

Comperator input NC
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Input number 2

analogInpVal $A_INA[x] x = AnaloginputNo

Value of HW analog input
A or V Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of analog input numAnalogInp

analogOutpVal $A_OUTA[x] x = AnalogoutputNo

Number of HW analog output
A or V Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of analog output numAnalogOutp

anAxCtAS $AN_AXCTAS[n]
Current container rotation, i.e. by how many slots the axis
container has been currently advanced. The original container
assignment is valid after Power On and outputs value 0.
maxCount = max. number of occupied slots in axis container - 1
- 0 0 maxnumContainerSlots UWord r
-1
Multi-line: yes Container no. numContainer

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-50 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

anAxCtSwA $AN_AXCTSWA[CTn]
A rotation is currently being executed on the
axis container.
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Container no. numContainer

anAxEsrTrigger $AN_ESR_TRIGGER
(Global) control signal "Start Stop/Retract". With a signal edge change
from 0 to 1, the reactions parameterized beforehand in axial MD $MA_ESR_REACTION
and enabled via system variable $AA_ESR_ENABLE are started.
Independent drive reactions subsequently require a Power-Off / Power-On,
independent NC reactions require at least an opposite edge change in the
relevant system variable as well as a Reset.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

anTimer $AN_TIMER[n]
Global NCK timer in seconds.
s, user defined 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Index in $AN_TIMER[n] $MN_MM_NUM_AN_TIMER

aPbbIn $A_PBB_IN[index]
Data byte (8bits) in PLC input/output area IN
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Neg. values are also permitted in spite of TYPE_UWORD
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Position offset within PLC
input/output area

aPbbOut $A_PBB_OUT[index]
Data byte (8 bits) in PLC input/output area OUT
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Can be written from SW 6.4.
Neg. values are also permitted in spite of TYPE_UWORD
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within the PLC
input/output area

aPbdIn $A_PBD_IN[index]
Data double word (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
- UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes Position offset within PLC
input/output area

aPbdOut $A_PBD_OUT[index]
Data double word (32 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Can be written from SW 6.4.
- UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within the PLC
input/output area

aPbrIn $A_PBR_IN[index]
Real data (32bits) in PLC input/output area IN
(also available on 810D CCU2)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Position offset within PLC
input/output area

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-51
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

aPbrOut $A_PBR_OUT[index]
Real data (32 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Can be written from SW 6.4.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within the PLC
input/output area

aPbwIn $A_PBW_IN[index]
Data word (16bits) in PLC input/output area IN
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Neg. values are also permitted in spite of TYPE_UWORD
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Position offset within PLC
input/output area

aPbwOut $A_PBW_OUT[index]
Data word (16 bits) in the PLC input/output area OUT
(also available on 810D CCU2)
Can be written from SW 6.4.
Neg. values are also permitted in spite of TYPE_UWORD
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Position offset within the PLC
input/output area

axisActivInNcu
Display indicating whether the axis is active, i.e. whether it can be traversed via a channel
of its own NCU or via another NCU (link axis).
This data can be utilized by MMCs in order to suppress the display of any non-active axes.

Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.

Bit n = 1: Axis can be traversed.
Bit n = 0: Axis cannot be traversed.
- UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

badMemFfs
Number of bytes which are defective in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

basisFrameMask $P_NCBFRMASK
Display indicating which channel-independent basic frames are active.
Each bit in the mask specifies whether the relevant basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

completeDocAcxChangeCnt
Modification counter of ACX for the configuration of
DO of all SINAMICS on all PROFIBUS segments (_N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX) that is
incremented when the ACX is changed. If the contents of ACX
is or becomes invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will
be reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid,
and will simultaneously be incremented (only the value), if the contents of
ACX has really changed.
== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX is invalid
!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-52 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

completeDotAcxChangeCnt
Modification counter of ACX that describes all
SINAMICS DO types known to the OPI (_N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX) and that
is incremented when ACX changes. If the contents of ACX is or becomes
invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will be
reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid and will
be incremented (only the value) simultaneously, if the contents of ACX has really changed.

== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX is invalid

!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

completeDpcAcxChangeCnt
Modification counter of ACX for the PROFIBUS configuration of
all PROFIBUS segments (_N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX) that is
incremented when ACX is changed. If the contents of ACX
is or becomes invalid, the modification counter will be set to 0.
If the contents of ACX is valid again, the modification counter will
be reset to the value it had before the contents of ACX became invalid,
and will simultaneously be incremented (only the value), if the contents of
ACX has really changed.
== 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX is invalid
!= 0: Contents of _N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX is valid
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

diagnoseDataFfs
Diagnostic data for Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1: realspace (bytes) 8
2: formspace (bytes)
3: freespace (%)
4: delspace (%)
5: badspace (%)
6: actlowwater (%)
7: lowwater (%)
8: reorgmode (%)

digitInpVal $A_IN[x] x = DigitalinputNo

Value of HW digital input
0 = low
1 = high
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of digital input numDigitInp

digitOutpVal $A_OUT[x] x = DigitaloutputNo

Value of HW digital output
0 = low
1 = high
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Number of digital output numDigitOutp

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-53
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

driveType
Digital drive type. Coded according to machine data 13040, but additional code.
Note:
As long as the OPI variable contains the identifier 0x100 "Drive type unknown" after an NCK ramp-up, the information is
not yet consistent and must not be evaluated.
As soon as the identifier 0x100 is deleted, in NCU systems with SIMODRIVE 611D drives it can be assumed that the
content can only change after renewed link to the NCK.
(e.g. after modification of the drive modules), i.e. it need not be cyclically checked for change.

0x100: Drive type unknown.

0x200: This identifier is entered in addition to the code according to the machine data 13040 if a 611D-Performance2
module is detected.
For other codes, see MD 13040.

- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no maxnumDrives

driveTypeChangeCnt
This counter is incremented by 1 every time driveType is modified.
The next value after 65535 is 0.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

freeDirectorys
Number of directories that can be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

freeFiles
Number of files that can be created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

freeMem
Free SRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

freeMemDram
Free memory in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

freeMemDram2PassF
Memory available in passive file system (DRAM no. 2) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

freeMemDramPassF
Memory available in passive file system (DRAM no. 1) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-54 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

freeMemFfs
Number of bytes that are still available in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

freeMemSramPassF
Memory available in passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

freeProtokolFiles
Logging: Number of protocol files that can still be created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

hwMLFB
MLFB of the NCU module
- String[24] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

hwProductSerialNr
Unique hardware number of the NCU module
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

hwProductSerialNrL
Unique hardware number of the NCU module
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

licenseStatus
Licensing status
0: Licensed,
1: Insufficiently licensed
2: Not licensed
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

mmcCmdPrepCounter
Counter that is incremented with each call of EXTCALL
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-55
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

nckAliveAndWell DB10, DBX104.7 A4

NCK sign-of-life
This value is incremented every time the variable is read which means that an
MMC can determine whether the NCK is still operating correctly by reading the variable
cyclically.
The value itself has no meaning.
Cyclic result acknowledgements in relation to this variable are generated even if the NCK
is otherwise no longer operating cyclic services owing to problems with block cycle times.
However, this response can be guaranteed only if the variable is not mixed with others in
one request, i.e. nckAliveAndWell must be the only variable linked to the cluster.
As long as a cyclic read service is set for this variable, one of the MMC-CPU-Ready signals
is set in the PLC interface.
Which of the signals is set is determined on the one hand by the line number and, on the other,
by the client's "gloports":
line index = 1 and gloports 0x20-0x2f --> DB10.DBX108 bit2 MMC1-CPU-Ready to MPI
line index = 1 and gloports 0x10-0x1f --> DB10.DBX108 bit3 MMC1-CPU-Ready to OPI
line index = 2 --> DB10.DBX108 bit1 MMC2-CPU-Ready
Note: The related NCK-CPU-Ready signal is stored in DB10,DBX104.7.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes MMC No. 2 (ab SW 5.2)

ncuLinkActive
Display indicating whether NCU link is activated (via machine data setting)
Based on display, MMC decides whether link-specific calculations and
displays are required.
0: NCU link not activated
1: NCU link activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

nettoMemFfs
Net number of bytes which are available for the
Flash File System (FFS).
This memory stores the files contents and
management data (e.g. file names).
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numAlarms
Number of pending general alarms
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

numFilesPerDir
Maximum number of files per directory (see: $MN_MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numSubDirsPerDir
Maximum number of subdirectories per directory see: $MN_MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numTraceProtocDataList $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_STD_LIST
Logging: Number of standard data lists per user
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-56 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

numTraceProtocOemDataList $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETPD_OEM_LIST
Logging: Number of OEM data lists per user
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protCnfgAutoLoad
Log: Controls automatic loading of the trace session
from the description file during the NCK start-up process
0: Automatic load is disabled
1: Load trace session from description file during NCK start-up
2: Same as (1), but cancel automatic load when stop trigger fires
3: Same as (1), but update the description file whenever the logging state changes
- 0 0 3 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protCnfgAutoLoadFile
Log: Directory path and file name from which
the trace session is to be loaded during NCK start-up
- String[64] wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protCnfgAutoSave
Log: Automatically save the trace session into a description file
0: Automatic save is disabled
1: Save the trace session to a description file whenever data logging is terminated
2: Save the trace session and diagnostic information to a description file whenever data logging is terminated
- 0 0 2 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protCnfgCtl
Log: Control word to manipulate the trace session description file
0: Do nothing
1: Save the trace session into a description file
2: Save the trace session with diagnostic information into a description file
3: Load the trace session from a description file and reset all active triggers to the armed state
4: Load the trace session from a description file with the saved trigger states
5: Delete the trace session description file
- 0 0 5 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protCnfgFilename
Log: Directory path and file name of the
session description file that is managed by protCnfgCtl
- String[64] wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protCnfgStat
Log: Result from the most recent save or load of a description file
0: No Error
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocLastValNetIpoCycle
Logging: Runtime of all events of all channels of a user in the last IPO cycle
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-57
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

protocMaxValNetIpoCycle
Logging: Maximum run time of all events of all channels of a user
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtMaskInt16
Logging: Integer 16 bit screen form with which the start trigger variable is logically AND-ed before the comparison is
made with the trigger value. There is no logic operation with the value 0.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtMaskInt32
Logging: Integer 32 bit screen form with which the start trigger variable is logically AND-ed before the comparison is
made with the trigger value. There is no logic operation with the value 0.
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the start trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtNumEvDelay
Logging: Number of events which are still to be omitted after the occurrence of the trigger event before logging is started.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtRemMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison still has to match before the start trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtState
Logging: Status of the start triggering
0: Passive (trigger inactive)
1: Active (trigger is active, but has not yet responded)
2: Delay (trigger has responded and is still waiting the delay time)
3: Firing (trigger has responded, but must still respond more frequently until the triggering takes place)
4: Done (trigger has responded and is inactive)
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtType
Logging: Type of start triggering
0: Monitoring for equality
1: Monitoring for more than or equal to
2: Monitoring for greater than
3: Monitoring for less than or equal to
4: Monitoring for less than
5: Monitoring for inequality
6: Monitoring for value change
7: Monitoring for increasing values
8: Monitoring for falling values
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-58 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

protocStrtValueInt16
Logging: Integer 16 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtValueInt32
Logging: Integer 32 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtValueReal32
Logging: Real 32 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 Float wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtValueReal64
Logging: Real 64 bit value with which the start trigger variable is to be compared
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtVarCol
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for the start triggering.
Statement of the "Col"
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtVarRow
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for the start triggering.
Statement of the "Row"
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtVarType
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for the start triggering.
Statement of the "Type"
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocStrtVarUnit
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for the start triggering.
Statement of the "Unit".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocTrigMaskInt16
Logging: Integer 16-bit mask with which the trigger variable is logically
ANDed before the comparison with the trigger value is made.
Variable is not ANDed if value is 0.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigMaskInt32
Logging: Integer 32-bit mask with which the trigger variable is logically
ANDed before the comparison with the trigger value is made.
Variable is not ANDed if value is 0.
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-59
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

protocTrigMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison must match before the trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocTrigNumEvDelay
Logging: Number of events to be recorded after the trigger event
has occurred before the logging operation is stopped.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigRemMatchCount
Logging: Specifies how often the comparison still has to match before the trigger fires.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protocTrigState
Logging: Triggering status
0: Passive (trigger not active)
1: Active (trigger is active, but has not yet responded)
2: Delay (trigger has responded and is waiting for delay)
3: Firing (trigger has responded, but must still respond more frequently until the triggering takes place)
4: Done (trigger has responded and is inactive)
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigType
Logging: Triggering method
0: Monitor for equals
1: Monitor for greater than/equal to
2: Monitor for greater than
3: Monitor for less than/equal to
4: Monitor for less than
5: Monitoring for inequality
6: Monitoring for value change
7: Monitoring for increasing values
8: Monitoring for falling values
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigValueInt16
Logging: Integer 16-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigValueInt32
Logging: Integer 32-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigValueReal32
Logging: Real 32-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 Float wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-60 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

protocTrigValueReal64
Logging: Real 64-bit value with which trigger variable must be
compared
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigVarArea
Logging: Variable which is to be monitored for the start triggering.
Specification of "Area".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigVarCol
Logging: Variable to be monitored for triggering.
Specification of "Col".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigVarRow
Logging: Variable to be monitored for triggering.
Specification of "Row".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigVarType
Logging: Variable to be monitored for triggering.
Specification of "Type".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protocTrigVarUnit
Logging: Variable to be monitored for triggering.
Specification of "Unit".
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

protSessAccR
Logging: Access rights of the session
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protSessComm
Logging: Comments on session
- String[128] wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protSessConn
Logging: Connection of the session
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

protSessName
Logging: Name of the session
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-61
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

protSessPrior
Logging: Priority of the session
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

safeExtInpValNckBit $A_INSE[n]
External NCK input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Input number 64

safeExtInpValNckWord $A_INSED
Image of the external NCK inputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variables 2
$A_INSE[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variables
$A_INSE[33]...[64]

safeExtInpValPlcBit $A_INSEP[n]
External PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the PLC periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Input number 64

safeExtInpValPlcWord $A_INSEPD
Image of the external PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variables 2
$A_INSEP[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variables
$A_INSEP[33]...[64]

safeExtOutpValNckBit $A_OUTSE[n]
External NCK output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Output number 64

safeExtOutpValNckWord $A_OUTSED
Image of the external NCK outputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variables 2
$A_OUTSE[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variables
$A_OUTSE[33]...[64]

safeExtOutpValPlcBit $A_OUTSEP[n]
External PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the PLC periphery
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Output number 64

safeExtOutpValPlcWord $A_OUTSEPD
Image of the external PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variable 2
$A_OUTSEP[1]...[32]
2. mage of the system variable
$A_OUTSEP[33]...[64]

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-62 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

safeIntInpValNckBit $A_INSI[n]
Internal NCK input of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Input number 64

safeIntInpValNckWord $A_INSID
Image of the internal NCK inputs of the SI programmable logic from the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variables 2
$A_INSI[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variables
$A_INSI[33]...[64]

safeIntInpValPlcBit $A_INSIP[n]
Internal PLC input of the SI programmable logic from the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Input number 64

safeIntInpValPlcWord $A_OUTSID
Image of the internal PLC inputs of the SI programmable logic from the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variables 2
$A_INSIP[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variables
$A_INSIP[33]...[64]

safeIntOutpValNckBit $A_OUTSI[n]
Internal NCK output of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Output number 64

safeIntOutpValNckWord $A_OUTSID
Image of the internal NCK outputs of the SI programmable logic to the NCK's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variable 2
$A_OUTSI[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variable
$A_OUTSI[33]...[64]

safeIntOutpValPlcBit $A_OUTSIP[n]
Internal PLC output of the SI programmable logic to the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Output number 64

safeIntOutpValPlcWord $A_OUTSIPD
Image of the internal PLC outputs of the SI programmable logic to the 611D's SI monitoring channel
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1: image of the system variable 2
$A_OUTSIP[1]...[32]
2: image of the system variable
$A_OUTSIP[33]...[64]

safeMarkerNck $A_MARKERSI
NCK flag for the SI programmable logic
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-63
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

safeMarkerPlc $A_MARKERSIP
Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI programmable logic
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 64

safePlcIn $A_PLCSIIN[index]
Bit image of the single channel safety signals from PLC to NCK
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index for $A_PLCSIIN[1...32] 32

safePlcOut $A_PLCSIOUT[index]
Bit image of the single channel safety signals from NCK to PLC
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index for $A_PLCSIOUT[1...32] 32

safeSplStatus
Status of components and parameter settings required for
operation of Safe Programmable Logic

Bit 0: SPL interfaces $A_INSE, $A_OUTSE, $A_INSI

or $A_OUTSI have been parameterized
Bit 1: SPL program file SAFE.SPF loaded
Bit 2: Drive runup status 4 reached, NCK is waiting
for PLC to run up
Bit 3: Drive runup status 4 reached, PLC has
reached cyclic operating status. PLC can now communicate
with drive.
Bit 4: Interrupt for ASUB start of SPL must be
assigned (FB4 call started)
Bit 5: Interrupt for ASUB start of SPL has been
assigned (FB4 call ended)
Bit 6: Interrupt processing for SPL start called
(FC9 call started)
Bit 7: Interrupt processing for SPL start ended
(FC9 call ended)
Bit 8: -
Bit 9: NCK cross-checking has been started
Bit10: PLC cross-checking has been started
Bit11: Cyclic SPL checksum check active
Bit12: All SPL protective mechanisms active
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

safeTimerNck $A_TIMERSI
NCK timer-variable for the SI programmable logic
s, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: no 8

safeXcmpCmd $A_CMDSI[index]
Command word for cross-checking (KDV) between NCK and PLC

0:No command
1:Extension of time window for different signal levels in cross-checking operation between NCK and PLC

- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no 32

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-64 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

safeXcmpLevel $A_LEVELSID
Fill-level display for cross-checking operation (KDV)
between NCK and PLC. Specifies the current number
of signals of different levels between the NCK and PLC)

- 0 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

safeXcmpState $A_STATSID
Cross-checking (KDV) error has occurred between NCK and PLC.

0: No error has occurred

- 0 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

scalingSystemCounter
Modification counter for dimension system
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

semaDataAvailable
Display indicating whether complete SEMA data are available for individual axes.
This is the case if a channel can be assigned to the relevant NCU axis, thus allowing
the data in the channel context to be accessed. This does not apply to link axes as these
are traversed by a channel of another NCU.
This data can be utilized by MMCs in order to conceal specific, inaccessible data
in link axis data displays.

Bits 0-31 stand for the axes of the NCU.

Bit n = 1: Data can be accessed easily
Bit n = 0: Not all SEMA data are accessible
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

swLicensePIN
PIN for licensing
- String[128] wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

sysTimeBCD
Time represented in PLC format:
<month>.<day>.<year> <hours>:<minutes>:<seconds>.<milliseconds> <weekday> <status>
<weekday> can take following values: "SUN", "MON", "TUE", "WED", "THU", "FRI", "SAT"
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no

sysTimeNCSC
NCSC system time in microseconds
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

sysTimeSinceStartup
System run time in seconds since NCK ramp-up
s, user defined 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-65
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

totalDirectorys
Maximum number of directories which may be created
see: $MN_MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

totalFiles
Maximum number of files which may be created (see: $MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

totalMem S7
Total SRAM in bytes (user memory)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

totalMemDram
total DRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

totalMemDram2PassF
Size of passive file system (DRAM No.2) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

totalMemDramPassF
Size of passive file system (DRAM No. 1) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

totalMemFfs
Number of bytes reserved on the PCMCIA card for the
Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

totalMemSramPassF
Size of passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

totalProtokolFiles $MM_PROTOC_NUM_FILES
Logging: Maximum number of log files which may be created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

traceProtocolActive $A_PROTOC
Logging: User status
1 = Not active
2 = Active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-66 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

traceProtocolLock $A_PROT_LOCK
Logging: Recording disable of a user
0: No disable
1: Disable
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

traceStopAction
Logging: Actions on ending the recording
Bit 0: Automatic restart
1: Disable
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

usedDirectorys
Number of directories that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

usedFiles
Number of files that have already been created
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

usedMem S7
Used memory in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1

usedMemDram
Used DRAM in bytes
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

usedMemDram2PassF
Memory used in passive file system (DRAM No.2) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

usedMemDramPassF
Memory used in passive file system (DRAM No. 1) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

usedMemFfs
Number of used bytes in the Flash File System (FFS)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

usedMemSramPassF
Memory used in passive file system (SRAM) in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-67
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

usedOptionsNotLicensed
List of options which are not licensed
- String[200] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

usedProtokolFiles
Logging: Number of protocol files that have already been created
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User no. (1-10) 10

vaDpActTel $VA_DP_ACT_TEL[n, Achse]

Word for word image of the Profibus actual value message frames from drives on the Profibus/PROFIdrive

- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 100 * axis index + word offset in the 100 * numMachAxes + 19
message frame

1.3.2 Area N, Mod. SALA: Alarms

List organized according to time, oldest alarm appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/SequencedAlarms/...

The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the oldest alarm
appears at the top of the list. The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII
strings, the first character contains the type information for that parameter. The
following types are used:
S: General string, e.g. part program name
A: Axis name / spindle name
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number

If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.

All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic
acknowledgements are sent for these variables even if the cyclic services are no
longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with
non-privileged variables in a request. -> Do not combine alarm variables with other
variables in a cluster!
In addition it is presumed that the cyclic services are set "on change" for the alarm
variables and are not combined with other variables (not even with privileged
variables) in the same request.
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
contains neither PLC nor MMC alarms. In order to read all alarms, the OEM-MMC
user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALA module directly.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-68 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

alarmNo DA
Ordinal number of an alarm (how many alarms since control ON)
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria for an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
4 = Alarm is cancelled by NCK-software (from SW 4.1)
5 = Alarm is cancelled by starting a program
6 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the bags (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

fillText1 DA
Parameter 1 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText2 DA
Parameter 2 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText3 DA
Parameter 3 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText4 DA
Parameter 4 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

textIndex
Alarm number (actual alarm)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-69
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

timeBCD
Time stamp of an alarm
Time stamp, displayed in PLC format DATE_AND_TIME
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no 1

1.3.3 Area N, Mod. SALAP: Alarms

List organized according to priority
OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/TopPrioAlarm/...

The alarm parameters are transferred as ASCII strings, the first character contains
the type information for the parameter. The following types are used:
S: General string, e.g. part program name
A: Axis name / spindle name
K: Channel name
N: Block name
Y: System error
D: Drive number

If a parameter is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.

All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic
acknowledgements are sent for these variables even if the cyclic services are no
longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with
non-privileged variables in a request. -> Do not combine alarm variables with other
variables in a cluster!

In addition it is presumed that the cyclic services are set "on change" for the alarm
variables and are not combined with other variables (not even with privileged
variables) in the same request.

The module SALAP only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
contains neither PLC nor MMC alarms. In order to read all alarms, the OEM-MMC
user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALAP module
directly.

alarmNo DA
Ordinal number of an alarm (how many alarms since control ON)
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-70 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria of an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
4 = Alarm is cancelled by NCK-software (from SW 4.1)
5 = Alarm is cancelled by starting a program
6 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the bags (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no

fillText1 DA
Parameter 1 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText2 DA
Parameter 2 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText3 DA
Parameter 3 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText4 DA
Parameter 4 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

textIndex
Alarm number (actual alarm)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

timeBCD
Time stamp of an alarm
Time stamp, displayed in PLC format DATE_AND_TIME
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-71
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

1.3.4 Area N, Mod. SALAL: Alarms

Liste organized according to time, most recent alarm appears first
OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/LastAlarm/...

The NCK alarms are sorted in a list in the order they occurred, the most recent
alarm appears at the bottom of the list. The alarm parameters are transferred as
ASCII strings, the first character contains the type information for that parameter.
The following types are used:
S: General string, e.g. part program name
A: Axis name / spindle name
K: Channel name
N: Block number
Y: System error
D: Drive number

If a parameters is not assigned, an "S" is transferred.

All variables in this module are privileged variables! This means that cyclic
acknowledgements are sent for these variables even if the cyclic services are no
longer serviced by the NCK because of block cycle problems.
Attention: Privileged variables lose this characteristic if they are combined with
non-privileged variables in a request. -> Do not combine alarm variables with other
variables in a cluster!
In addition it is presumed that the cyclic services are set "on change" for the alarm
variables and are not combined with other variables (not even with privileged
variables) in the same request.
The module SALA only contains the alarms that are generated in the NCK. It
contains neither PLC nor MMC alarms. In order to read all alarms, the OEM-MMC
user should use the alarm server functions and not read the SALA module directly.

alarmNo DA
Ordinal number of an alarm (how many alarms since control ON)
0 = unknown alarm
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

clearInfo DA
Acknowledgement criteria for an alarm
1 = Power On
2 = Reset
3 = Cancel
4 = Alarm is cancelled by NCK-software (from SW 4.1)
5 = Alarm is cancelled by starting a program
6 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the bags (from SW 4.1)
7 = Alarm is cancelled by RESET in all channels of the NC (from SW 4.1)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-72 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

fillText1 DA
Parameter 1 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText2 DA
Parameter 2 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText3 DA
Parameter 3 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

fillText4 DA
Parameter 4 of the alarm
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

textIndex
Alarm number (actual alarm)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Alarm list index 16
The maximum alarm list index can be
read via variable numAlarms in
module S.

timeBCD
Time stamp of an alarm
Time stamp, displayed in PLC format DATE_AND_TIME
- Date+Time r
Multi-line: no

1.3.5 Area N, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/MachineAxis/...

All state data that are dependent on machine movement and are defined
specifically for machine axes (geometry and special axes) are combined in module
SMA. Supplementary information is to be found in module SEMA. The individual
variables are defined as fields where the line index is the number of the machine

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-73
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

axis (assigned to the current channel). The variable "name" in module SMA with
the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SMA and SEMA is identical.

actIncrVal H1
Active INC weighting of the axis
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasePos
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position setpoint. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

extUnit
Current physical unit of the axis position
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
3 = indexing position
4 = userdef
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

name
Axis name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

status
Axis state
0 = travel command in plus direction
1 = travel command in minus direction
2 = exact position coarse reached
3 = exact position fine reached
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-74 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

toolBaseREPOS
Tool base REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

varIncrVal
Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

1.3.6 Area N, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/MachineAxis/...

All state data that are dependent on machine movement and are defined
specifically for machine axes (geometry and special axes) are combined in module
SMA. Supplementary information is to be found in module SEMA. The individual
variables are defined as fields where the line index is the number of the machine
axis (assigned to the current channel). The variable "name" in module SMA with
the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SMA and SEMA is identical.

aaActIndexAxPosNo $AA_ACT_INDEX_AX_POS_NO[<Achse>]
Current indexing position; the display depends on
$MN_INDEX_AX_NO_MODE and the division (via table or equidistant)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaAlarmStat $AA_ALARM_STAT
Display indicating whether alarms are active for a PLC-controlled axis.
The relevant coded alarm reactions can be used as a source for
the "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The data is bit-coded, allowing, where necessary, individual states to be
masked or evaluated separately (bits not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancelation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (rampm stop in all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal "Setting alarm")
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (Follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaBcsOffset $AA_BCS_OFFSET[Achse]
Sum of all axial offsets of an axis,
such as DRF, online tool offset, $AA_OFF and ext. WO.
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-75
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

aaCoupAct
Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaCoupOffs
Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaCurr
Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (611D only)

A Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaDtbb
Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in
synchronous actions (note: SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaDteb
Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous
actions (note: SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaDtepb
Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (note: SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaEsrEnable
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-76 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

aaEsrStat
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).

The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or

evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaEsrTrigger $AA_ESR_TRIGGER
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR" for PLC-controlled axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaIbnCorr $AA_IBN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current BZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaIenCorr $AA_IEN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current SZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaJerkCount $AA_JERK_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaJerkTime $AA_JERK_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaJerkTotal $AA_JERK_TOT[Achse]
Overall total of jerk of an axis
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaLeadP
Actual lead value position
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaLeadPTurn $AA_LEAD_P_TURN
Current master value - position component lost
as a result of modulo reduction
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-77
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

aaLeadSp
Simulated lead value - position
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaLeadSv
Simulated leading value velocity
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaLeadTyp
Source of the lead value

1: actual value
2: desired value
3: simulated value
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaLeadV
Actual lead value - velocity
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaLoad
Drive load in % (611D only)
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaMaslState $AA_MASL_STAT
Each slave axis currently coupled via master-slave delivers the machine axis number of the corresponding master axis.
Zero is displayed as default for inactive coupling. A master axis also shows default value zero.
0: No coupling for this axis configured, or axis is master axis, or no coupling active
>0: Machine axis number of the master axis with which the slave axis is currently coupled
- 0 0 numGlobMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaMm
Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaMm1
Access to measurement result of trigger event in the MCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaMm2
Access to measurement result of trigger event in the MCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaMm3
Access to measurement result of trigger event in the MCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-78 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

aaMm4
Access to measurement result of trigger event in the MCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaOff
Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaOffLimit
Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)

0: limit not reached

1: limit in positive axial direction reached
11: limit in negative axial direction reached
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaOffVal
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]

- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaOscillBreakPos1 $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS1[<Achse>]
Oscillation interrupt position 1
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaOscillBreakPos2 $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS2[<Achse>]
Oscillation interrupt position 2
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaOscillReversePos1
Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS. For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
$SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 is evaluated online; (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaOscillReversePos2
Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS; For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
$SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 is evaluated online; (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaOvr
Axial override for synchronous actions
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-79
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

aaPlcOvr $AA_PLC_OVR[Achse]
Axial override specified by PLC for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaPolfa $AA_POLFA
The programmed retraction position of the single axis
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaPolfaValid $AA_POLFA_VALID
Indicates whether the retraction of the single axis is programmed
0: no retraction programmed for the single axis
1: retraction programmed as position
2: retraction programmed as distance
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaPower
Drive power in W (611D only)
W Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaSnglAxStat $AA_SNGLAX_STAT
Display status of a PLC-controlled axis
0: Not a single axis
1: Reset
2: Ended
3: Interrupted
4: Active
5: Alarm
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaSoftendn
Software end position, negative direction
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaSoftendp
Software end position, positive direction
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaStat
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-80 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

aaSync
Coupling state of the following axis with lead value coupling

0: not synchronized
1: synchronized coarse
2: synchronized fine
3: synchronized coarse and fine
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaTorque
Desired torque value in Nm (611D only)
Nm Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaTotalOvr $AA_TOTAL_OVR[Achse]
The total axial override for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaTravelCount $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaTravelCountHS $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT_HS[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis at high speed
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaTravelDist $AA_TRAVEL_DIST[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaTravelDistHS $AA_TRAVEL_DIST_HS[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis at high speed in mm or degrees

- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaTravelTime $AA_TRAVEL_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis in seconds
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaTravelTimeHS $AA_TRAVEL_TIME_HS[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed in seconds
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-81
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

aaTyp
Axis type
0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaVactB
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaVactM
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

aaVc
Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

ackSafeMeasPos
Confirmation of SI actual position
0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

actCouppPosOffset S3
Position offset of an axis to a leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate for positioning axes. Actual value of single axis feed for additional axes.
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

actIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position number
0 = no indexing position
>0 = indexing position number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

actSpeedRel
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %; for 611D in MD1401), for linear drives actual value of
the velocity.
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-82 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

actValResol
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

amSetupState
State variable of the PI Service Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
0 = inactive
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- 0 0 0xff06 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

axComp
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The
physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

axisActiveInChan
Flag indicating whether axis is active in this channel
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of the axis-specific feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

chanAxisNoGap
Display indicating whether axis exists, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

chanNoAxisIsActive
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

cmdContrPos
Desired value of position after fine interpolation
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-83
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

cmdCouppPosOffset S3
Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

cmdFeedRate
Setpoint of axis-specific feedrate, if axis is a positioning axis. Single axis feedrate setpoint if the axis is an additional axis.
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

cmdSpeedRel
Desired value of rotary speed. (referring to the max. speed in %; for 611D in MD 1401). For linear motors actual value of
velocity.
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

contrConfirmActive
Controller enable
0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

contrMode
Identifier for controller mode servo
0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

displayAxis
Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by MMC as a machine axis.
0= Do not display at all
0xFFFF = Always display everything
bit 0 = Display in actual-value window
bit 1 = Display in reference point window
bit 2 = Display in Preset / Basic offset / Scratching
bit 3 = Display in handwheel selection
- 0xFFFF 0 0xFFFF UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

distPerDriveRevol
Distance per revolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

drive2ndTorqueLimit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-84 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

driveActMotorSwitch
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveActParamSet
Number of the actual drive parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveClass1Alarm
Message ZK1 drive alarm
0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveContrMode
Control mode of drive
0 = current control
1 = speed control
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveCoolerTempWarn
Heatsink temperature monitoring
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveDesMotorSwitch
Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveDesParamSet
Desired parameter set of the drive
- 1 8 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveFastStop
Ramp-function generator rapid stop
0 = not stopped
1 = stopped
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveFreqMode
I/F mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-85
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

driveImpulseEnabled
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveIndex
Drive assignment (logical drive number)
0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveIntegDisable
Integrator disable
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveLinkVoltageOk
State of the DC link voltage
0 = OK
1 = not OK
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveMotorTempWarn
Motor temperature warning
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveNumCrcErrors
CRC errors on the drive bus
(transmission errors when writing data to the 611D; values may range up to FFFFH)
0 = no error
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

driveParked
Parking axis
0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

drivePowerOn
Drive switched on
0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index maxnumGlobMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-86 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

1.3.7 Area N, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/Spindle/...

All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The
individual variables are defined as arrays where the row index is the number of the
spindle (assigned to the current channel). The spindle can be identified by reading
the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective row index.

The number of spindles can be read from "numSpindles" in the module Y in the
area C. Values of 0 or ' ' are supplied for axes which are not spindles. The value
SSP:index = 0 indicates that the axis is not a spindle.

acConstCutS $AC_CONSTCUT_S[n]
Current constant cutting rate
m/min, ft/min, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

acSMode $AC_SMODE[x]
Spindle mode
0: No spindle present in channel or spindle is active in another channel or
is being used by PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Open-loop speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

actGearStage
Actual gear stage of spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

actSpeed
Spindle speed actual value
rev/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

channelNo
Number of channel in which spindle is configured
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

cmdAngPos
Spindle position (SPOS)
Degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-87
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

cmdConstCutSpeed
Constant cutting speed of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from SSP:cmdSpeed
only if G96 is active

mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r

Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

cmdGearStage
Requested gear stage
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

cmdGwps
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

cmdSpeed
Spindle speed desired value
rev/min , m/min Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

driveLoad
Load
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

gwpsActive {$GWPS}
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is made
via area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

namePhys
Name of associated physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-88 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

speedLimit
Current speed limitation for spindle
rev/min , m/min Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

status
Spindle state

Bit0 = following spindle

Bit1 = leading spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

turnState
State of spindle rotation
value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
1 = counter-clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
4 = counter-clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-89
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

1.3.8 Area N, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/LogicalSpindle/...

All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is active

acConstCutS $AC_CONSTCUT_S[n]
Current constant cutting rate
m/min, ft/min, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

acSMode $AC_SMODE[x]
Spindle mode
0: No spindle present in channel or spindle is active in another channel or
is being used by PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Open-loop speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

actGearStage
Actual gear stage of spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

actSpeed
Spindle speed actual value
rev/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

channelNo
Number of channel in which spindle is configured
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdAngPos
Spindle position (SPOS)
Degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdConstCutSpeed
Constant cutting speed of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from SSP:cmdSpeed
only if G96 is active

mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r

Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdGearStage
Requested gear stage
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-90 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

cmdGwps
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdSpeed
Spindle speed desired value
rev/min , m/min Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

driveLoad
Load
% Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

gwpsActive {$GWPS}
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is made
via area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

speedLimit
Current speed limitation for spindle
rev/min , m/min Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-91
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

status
Spindle state

Bit0 = following spindle

Bit1 = leading spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

turnState
State of spindle rotation
value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
1 = counter-clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
4 = counter-clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-92 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

1.3.9 Area N, Mod. FA: Active NCU global frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/ActualFrame/...

There are the following frame indices:

2: IFRAME current settable work offset (only if
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0)
6: ACTBFRAME current total of base frames (only if
$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES = 0)

The maximum frame index is: 6

linShift $P_PFRAME[x,TR] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Translation of an active zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * 6 * maxnumGlobMachAxes
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis
number

mirrorImgActive $P_PFRAME[x,MI] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Mirroring enabled in an active zero offset
0 = mirroring not active
1 = mirroring active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * 6 * maxnumGlobMachAxes
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis
number

rotation $P_PFRAME[x,RT] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Rotation of an active zero offset
Degree Double r
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * 6 * maxnumGlobMachAxes
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis
number

scaleFact $P_PFRAME[x,SC] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Scaling factor of an active zero offset
- Double r
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * 6 * maxnumGlobMachAxes
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis
number

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-93
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

1.3.10 Area N, Mod. FB: NCU global base frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/BaseFrame/...

This only applies if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES > 0.

The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES - 1

linShift $P_NCBFR[x,TR] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Translation of settable zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

linShiftFine $P_NCBFR[x,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

Fine offset with frames, expansion of basic frames and settable frames
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

mirrorImgActive $P_NCBFR[x ,MI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in a settable zero offset
0: Mirroring not active
1: Mirroring active
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

rotation $P_NCBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Rotation of a settable zero offset
Degree Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

scaleFact $P_NCBFR[x,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of a settable zero offset
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_BASE_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-94 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

1.3.11 Area N, Mod. FU: NCU global settable frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/UserFrame/...
This only applies if $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES > 0.

The following frame indices are possible:

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
n = G5n
:
99 = G599

The maximum frame index is: $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES - 1

The PI service SETUFR has to be called in order to activate the settable frames.

linShift $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Translation of settable zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

linShiftFine $P_UIFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

Fine offset with frames, expansion of basic frames and settable frames
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

mirrorImgActive $P_UIFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in settable zero offset
0 = mirroring not active
1 = mirroring active
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

scaleFact $P_UIFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of settable zero offset
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * $MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES *
maxnumGlobMachAxes + axis maxnumGlobMachAxes
number

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-95
1 Variables 03/2006
1.3 State data of system

1.3.12 Area N, Mod. YFAFL: NCK instruction groups (Fanuc)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/FunctionGroupingFanuc/...

All G functions currently configured for the channels are made available for reading
by the NCK. They are configured via machine data. Since the G functions are
organized in groups, only one of which can be active at a time, this module is
organized as a table.
There are two columns for each G group. The 1st column lists the number of G
functions in a group (/N/YFAFL/Gruppe_NUM), this corresponds to the number of
rows in each subsequent column. This second column contains all the G functions
belonging to a group (/N/YFAFL/Gruppe).
As a result, the data for a certain G group are calculated via a column offset.
The column offset of each variable is:
2 * (G group number - 1)

The number of G groups is given in the variable "numGCodeGroupsFanuc" in area

N / module Y. The resultant maximum column offset of the variables is thus 2 *
numGCodeGroupsFanuc.

The G functions currently active are listed in area C / module SNCF.

Gruppe
Instruction group
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number /N/YFAFL/Gruppe_NUM

Gruppe_NUM
Number of Fanuc-G functions in respective group
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-96 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.3 State data of system

1.3.13 Area B, Mod. S: Mode-group-specific state data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Bag/State/...

During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data may
change during operation. To distinguish those from system variables, they are
classified as state data.

A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)

opMode DB11, DBX6.0-6.2

Active mode
0 = JOG
1 = MDA
2 = AUTO
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

readyActive DB11, DBX6.3

Code whether mode group is ready
0 = not ready
1 = ready
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

resetActive DB11, DBX6.7

Code whether all channels in mode group are in Reset
0 = not all channels in reset
1 = all channels in reset
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-97
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

1.4 State data of channel

1.4.1 Area C, Mod. M: Channel-specific machine data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/Drive/...

Channel-specific machine data

MDS_CHAN_NAME MD 20000: CHAN_NAME

Channel name
- String[16] wr
Multi-line: no 1

1.4.2 Area C, Mod. S: Channel-specific status data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/State/...

During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data may
change during operation. To distinguish those from system variables, they are
classified as state data.

A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)

aaAccLimA $AA_ACCLIMA[a]
Axial acceleration override in main run
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index ) numMachAxes

aaEgActive $AA_EG_ACTIVE[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Link to the specified master axis is operative, i.e. activated.
0: Deactivated
1: Activated
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
numMachAxes + (axis index of the
master axis) + 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-98 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

aaEgAx $AA_EG_AX[n,a]
Electronic gear:
Axis number of nth master axis (1-n).
(Axis index = axis number - 1)
1-numMachAxes
- 0 1 numMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis) * 5 + (index numMachAxes * 5
of master axis) + 1

aaEgDenom $AA_EG_DENOM[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Denominator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- 1 Double r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave axis) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
numMachAxes + (axis index of the
master axis) + 1

aaEgNumera $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Numerator of link factor for the specified master axis.
The link factor of the gear is the result of $AA_EG_NUMERA[a,b]/$AA_EG_DENOM[a,b].
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave axis) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
numMachAxes + (axis index of the
master axis) + 1

aaEgNumLa $AA_EG_NUM_LA[a]
Electronic gear:
Number of master axes specified with EGDEF.
If the axis has not been specified with EGDEF as slave axis,
the value is 0.
0-5
- 0 0 5 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis + 1) numMachAxes

aaEgSyn $AA_EG_SYN[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the specified master axis.
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave axis) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
numMachAxes + (axis index of the
master axis) + 1

aaEgSynFa $AA_EG_SYNFA[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous position for the slave axis.
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis + 1) numMachAxes

aaEgType $AA_EG_TYPE[a,b]
Electronic gear:
Type of link for the specified master axis
0: Actual-value linkage
1: Setpoint linkage
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the slave axis) * numMachAxes * numMachAxes
numMachAxes + (axis index of the
master axis) + 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-99
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

aaJerkLimA $AA_JERKLIMA[a]
Axial jerk override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index ) numMachAxes

aaMeasP1Valid $AA_MEAS_P1_VALID
Save axial measuring point P1 for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial measuring point
1: Write actual axial values to axial measuring point
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMeasP2Valid $AA_MEAS_P2_VALID
Save axial measuring point P2 for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial measuring point
1: Write actual axial values to axial measuring point
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMeasP3Valid $AA_MEAS_P3_VALID
Save axial measuring point P3 for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial measuring point
1: Write actual axial values to axial measuring point
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMeasP4Valid $AA_MEAS_P4_VALID
Save axial measuring point P4 for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial measuring point
1: Write actual axial values to axial measuring point
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMeasPoint1 $AA_MEAS_POINT1
1st measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
mm, inch, user defined 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMeasPoint2 $AA_MEAS_POINT2
2nd measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMeasPoint3 $AA_MEAS_POINT2
3rd measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMeasPoint4 $AA_MEAS_POINT4
4th measuring point for workpiece and tool measurement
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-100 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

aaMeasSetangle $AA_MEAS_SETANGLE
Setpoint angle of an axis
Degree, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index

aaMeasSetpoint $AA_MEAS_SETPOINT
Setpoint position of edge, corner or hole
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMeasSpValid $AA_MEAS_SP_VALID
Save axial setpoint for workpiece and
tool measurement
0: Clear axial setpoint
1: Validate axial setpoint
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaVeloLimA $AA_VELOLIMA[a]
Axial velocity override in main run
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index ) numMachAxes

acAlarmStat $AC_ALARM_STAT
!=0: Alarms are pending, the appropriate coded alarm reactions can be used as source for
"Extended stop and retract".
The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or
evaluated separately if necessary (bits excluded below produce a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancellation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (ramp stop of all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal alarm setting)
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acAxCtSwA $AC_AXCTSWA[CTn]
Channel status of axis container rotation
TRUE: The channel has enabled rotation for the axis container
and rotation is still in progress.
FALSE: Axis container rotation is already finished
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Container no. numContainer

acDelt $AC_DELT
Stored distance-to-go of the path in the WCS after delete-distance-to-go of the path DELDTG for synchronous action
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acDtbb $AC_DTBB
Distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-101
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

acDtbw $AC_DTBW
Distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acDteb $AC_DTEB
Distance to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acDtepb $AC_DTEPB
Distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only )

- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acDtepw $AC_DTEPW
Distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acDtew $AC_DTEW
Distance to the end of the block in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acEsrTrigger $AC_ESR_TRIGGER
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR"
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acFct0 $AC_FCT0[x] x = PolynomNo

a0-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

acFct1 $AC_FCT1[x] x = PolynomNo

a1-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

acFct2 $AC_FCT2[x] x = PolynomNo

a2-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
(Note: for SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-102 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

acFct3 $AC_FCT3[x] x = PolynomNo

a3-coefficient of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
(Note: for SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

acFctll $AC_FCTLL[x] x = PolynomNo

Lower limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

acFctul $AC_FCTUL[x] x = PolynomNo

Upper limit of the nth polynominal for the synchronous action SYNFCT / function FCTDEF n
(Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the polynominal $MC_MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS

acIwStat $AC_IW_STAT
Current position of machine
Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Tool inv. position
Bit 1: Axis 2/3 position
Bit 2: Axis 5 position
Bit 3-31: Not yet assigned
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acIwTu $AC_IW_TU
Current position of channel axes
Bit-coded:
Bit 0: Channel axis 1 position
Bit 1: Channel axis 2 position
Bit 2: Channel axis 3 position
Bit 3: Channel axis 4 position
...
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acJogCoord $AC_JOG_COORD
Setting the coordinate system for the manual travel
0: Work
1: SZS
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMea $AC_MEA
Touch probe has switched
No. of touch probe
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of touch probe 2

acMeasActPlane $AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE
Plane setting for measurement calculation
0: G17, 1: G18, 2: G19
- 0 2 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-103
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

acMeasChbfr $AC_MEAS_CHBFR
Channel basic frame screen form for setting up the new frame
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasChsfr $AC_MEAS_CHSFR
System frame bit screen form for setting up the new frame
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasCornerAngle $AC_MEAS_CORNER_ANGLE
Calculated cutting angle of corner
Degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasCornerSetangle $AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE
User-selectable setpoint cutting angle of corner
Permissible input range between 0 and 180 degrees
Degree, user defined 0 180.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasDiameter $AC_MEAS_DIAMETER
Calculated diameter
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasDirApproach $AC_MEAS_DIR_APPROACH
Approach direction towards workpiece
0: +x 1: -x 2: +y 3: -y 4: +z 5: -z
- 0 5 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasDNumber $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER
Selected tool edge number
- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasFineTrans $AC_MEAS_FINE_TRANS
Correction in fine offset
0: Correction in coarse translation
1: Correction in fine translation
- 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasFrameSelect $AC_MEAS_FRAME_SELECT
The frame calculated during workpiece measurement is
entered in the selected frame.
0: $P_SETFR
10.. 25: $P_CHBFR[0..15]
50.. 65: $P_NCBFR[0..15]
100.. 199: $P_UIFR[0..99]
1010..1025: $P_CHBFR[0..15]
1050..1065: $P_NCBFR[0..15]
- 0 1065 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-104 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

acMeasInput $AC_MEAS_INPUT[n]
Data for the workpiece and tool measurement
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Index 10

acMeasLatch $AC_MEAS_LATCH
Save measuring points for workpiece and tool measurement

0: Clear measuring point

1: Write current axial values to measuring point
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Measuring point no. 4

acMeasNcbfr $AC_MEAS_NCBFR
Global basic frame screen form for setting up the new frame
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasP1Coord $AC_MEAS_P1_COORD
Coordinate system of the 1st measuring point
0: Work 1: BCS 2: MCS
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasP2Coord $AC_MEAS_P2_COORD
Coordinate system of the 2nd measuring point
0: Work 1: BCS 2: MCS
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasP3Coord $AC_MEAS_P3_COORD
Coordinate system of the 3rd measuring point
0: Work 1: BCS 2: MCS
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasP4Coord $AC_MEAS_P4_COORD
Coordinate system of the 4th measuring point
0: Work 1: BCS 2: MCS
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasPframe $AC_MEAS_PFRAME
Programmable frame is not included
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasResults $AC_MEAS_RESULTS[n]
Measurement results
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Index 10

acMeasScaleunit $AC_MEAS_SCALEUNIT
Unit of measurement for input and output values
0: Unit of measurement as configured
1: Unit of measurement in relation to active G code G70/G700/G71/G710
- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-105
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

acMeasSema $AC_MEAS_SEMA
Variable for disabling and enabling the measurement interface
0: Not assigned
1: Assigned
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasSetCoord $AC_MEAS_SET_COORD
Coordinate system of the set point
0: Work 1: BCS 2: MCS
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasTNumber $AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER
Selected tool number
- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasToolLength $AC_MEAS_TOOL_LENGTH
Calculated tool length
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasToolMask $AC_MEAS_TOOL_MASK
Tool setting for the measurement calculation
Bit 0: Tool radius is not included in the calculation
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

acMeasType $AC_MEAS_TYPE
Measurement type specification
0: Default
1: x edge
2: y edge
3: z edge
4: Corner 1
5: Corner 2,
6: Corner 3
7: Corner 4
8: Hole
9: Shaft
10: Tool length
11: Tool diameter
12: Groove
13: Web
14: Actual value setting for geo and special axes
15: Actual value setting for special axes only
16: Edge_2P
17: Plane_Angles
18: Plane_Normal
19: Dimension_1
20: Dimension_2
21: Dimension_3
- 0 0 21 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasUifr $AC_MEAS_UIFR
Settable data management frame for setting up the new frame
- 0 0 99 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-106 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

acMeasValid $AC_MEAS_VALID
Validity bits for measurement input values
Bit 0: $AA_MEAS_POINT1[axis]
Bit 1: $AA_MEAS_POINT2[axis]
Bit 2: $AA_MEAS_POINT3[axis]
Bit 3: $AA_MEAS_POINT4[axis]
Bit 4: $AA_MEAS_SETPOINT[axis]
Bit 5: $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE
Bit 6: $AC_MEAS_CORNER_SETANGLE
Bit 7: $AC_MEAS_T_NUMBER
Bit 8: $AC_MEAS_D_NUMBER
Bit 9: $AC_MEAS_DIR_APPROACH
Bit 10: $AC_MEAS_ACT_PLANE
Bit 11: $AC_MEAS_FRAME_SELECT
Bit 12: $AC_MEAS_TYPE
Bit 13: $AC_MEAS_FINE_TRANS
- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasWpAngle $AC_MEAS_WP_ANGLE
Calculated workpiece position angle
Degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acMeasWpSetangle $AC_MEAS_WP_SETANGLE
User-selectable setpoint workpiece position angle
Permissible input range less than +/- 90 degrees
Degree, user defined -90.0 90.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acOvr $AC_OVR
Path override for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acPathn $AC_PATHN
Normalized path parameter (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acPlcOvr $AC_PLC_OVR
Path override for synchronized actions specified by the PLC
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acPltbb $AC_PLTBB
Path length from the beginning of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acPlteb $AC_PLTEB
Path length to the end of the block in the BCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-107
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

acProg $AC_PROG
Program status
(identical to progStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_PROG)
0: aborted (reset)
1: halted (stop)
2: running (active)
3: waiting
4: interrupted
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acPRTimeA
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - downtime
s, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acPRTimeM
For simulation: Estimation of program runtime in seconds - machining time
s, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acPtpSup
Cartesian point-to-point travel (PTP) is supported by transformation
0: Cart. PTP travel is not supported
1: Cart. PTP travel is supported
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acStat $AC_STAT
Channel status
(identical to chanStatus but with coding that corresponds to $AC_STAT)
0: reset
1: interrupted
2: active
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acSynaMem $AC_SYNA_MEM
Free memory for synchronous actions: Shows how many elements of the memory set with
$MC_MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS are still free.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actDLNumber ??
Number of active total offset DL
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

actDNumber $P_TOOL
Number of active tool edge
- 0 9 UWord r
Multi-line: no

actDNumberFanuc
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number radius.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-108 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

actDNumberS
Corresponds to actNumber for block search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, not for the Variable Service!

- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actDuploNumber
Duplo number of active tool
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

actFeedRateIpo
Actual value of the interpolation feedrate. The actual value is the feed actually moved with. (depends on the acceleration
profiles, LookAhead, velocity limits etc. ) The variable 'feedRateIpoUnit' defines the physical unit.
mm/min, inch/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: no

actFrameIndex $P_UIFRNUM
Index of the active set frame (index in G group 8 "Settable zero offset"). Frames 0 - 4 (corresponds to G500 ... G57) can
be set in the standard version. The number of frames can be changed via machine data MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES.
0 = no frame selected
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
to
99 = G599
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

actHNumberFanuc
With programming in ISO Dialect mode:
Offset memory number length.
Assigned only in conjunction with ISO Dialect M external language.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acThreadPitch $AC_THREAD_PITCH
Programmed lead
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acThreadPitchAct $AC_THREAD_PITCH_ACT
Current lead
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acThreadPitchInc $AC_THREAD_PITCH_INC
Current lead change
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acTime $AC_TIME
Time from the beginning of the block in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-109
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

acTimec $AC_TIMEC
Time from the beginning of the block in interpolation cycles (Note: for SYNACT only)
IPO cycle Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acTimer $AC_TIMER[x] x = TimerNo

Time variable in seconds (Note: for SYNACT only)
s Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the time variable $MN_MM_NUM_AC_TIMER

actIpoType
Active interpolation mode used for the path motion. This date corresponds to a large degree to the SNCF:ncFktBin for
the first G-group. The value differs for automatically generated intermediate blocks only. This is e.g. the case if two lines
are connected with an arc by the command RND. The value is the index of the active G-code (analog with
SNCF:ncFktBin)

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actIpoTypeS
Active mode of interpolation applied during block searches.
This data is very similar to SNCF:ncFktBinS for the 1st G group.
Its value is different only in the case of automatically generated intermediate blocks,
such as when, for example, two straight lines are connected to an arc
by means of command RND.
The value is the index of the active G function (analogous to SNCF:ncFktBinS).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actMasterToolHolderNo $P_MTHNUM, $AC_MTHNUM bzw. $P_MSNUM, $AC_MSNUM

Active number of the master tool holder.
Especially for $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, Bit0=0, this is the value of
SETMS or SETMTH last programmed in the RESET status of the NCK.
Especially for $MC_RESET_MODE_MASK, Bit0=1, this is the value in the RESET status of the NCK for
$MC_SPIND_DEF_MASTER_SPIND (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER=0);
or $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER (if $MC_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_TOOLHOLDER > 0)
- 1 max. Anzahl der UWord r
Kanalachsen
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actOriToolLength1
X component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
taking into account the tool orientation, incl. adapter data, mirroring and TCARR
(orientable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actOriToolLength2
Y component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
taking into account the tool orientation, incl. adapter data, mirroring and TCARR
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actOriToolLength3
Z component in workpiece coordinate system (WCS) of active tool length,
taking into account the tool orientation, incl. adapter data, mirroring and TCARR
(orientation-capable toolholder).
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-110 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

acTotalOvr $AC_TOTAL_OVR
Total path override for synchronized actions
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actParts $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS
Total number of workpieces machined in current run:
This counter registers the number of workpieces
machined since it started.
When the required number is reached, the counter is set
to zero automatically.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no

acTrafo $AC_TRAFO
Code number of the active transformation (encoded as for $AC_TRAFO)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acTrafoParSet $AC_TRAFO_PARSET
Number of current transformation data record.
The variable is '0' if no transformation is active.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actTNumber $P_TOOLNO W1
Number of active tool
- 0 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: no

actTNumberLong
Number of the active tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actTNumberS
Corresponds to actTNumber for block search with calculation. Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the
block search events only, not for the Variable Service!

- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actToolIdent W1
Identifier of active tool
- "\0" String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1

actToolLength1 $P_TOOLL[1] W1
Active tool length 1
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: no

actToolLength2 $P_TOOLL[2] W!
Active tool length 2
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-111
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

actToolLength3 $P_TOOLL[3] W1
Active tool length 3
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: no

actToolRadius $P_TOOLR W1
Active tool radius
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: no

actTransform
Active transformation
- \0 String[32] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acVactB $AC_VACTB
Path velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acVactw $AC_VACTW
Path velocity in the work piece coordinate system (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

acVc $AC_VC
Additive path feedrate correction value for synchronous actions (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aLinkTransRate $A_LINK_TRANS_RATE
Link transfer rate
Number of bytes that can still be transferred in the
current IPO cycle via the NCU link communication.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle no. or toolholder no. max. Spindelnr oder WZ-Halter-Nr.

allAxesRefActive DB21-28, DBX36.2

Code specifying whether all axes are referenced
1 = all axes referenced
0 = at least 1 axis not referenced
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

allAxesStopped
Code specifying whether axes are in exact stop
0 = at least one axis is not in exact stop
1 = All axes in exact stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

aTcAckC $AC_TC_ACKC
Counter variable: aTcAckC (AcknowledgeCounter) is incremented by 1
every time the PLC acknowledges a tool management command.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-112 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

aTcCmdC $AC_TC_CMDC
Counter variable: aTcCmdC (CoMmandCounter) is incremented by
1 every time the tool management outputs a command to the PLC.
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcFct $AC_TC_FCT
Command number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcLfn $AC_TC_LFN
Source location number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcLfo $AC_TC_LFO
Source location number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcLmyn $AC_TC_LMYN
Owner location number of the new tool
- -1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcLtn $AC_TC_LTN
Target location number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcLto $AC_TC_LTO
Target location number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcMfn $AC_TC_MFN
Source magazine of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcMfo $AC_TC_MFO
Source magazine number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcMmyn $AC_TC_MMYN
Owner magazine number of the new tool
- -1 32000 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcMtn $AC_TC_MTN
Target magazine number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-113
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

aTcMto $AC_TC_MTO
Target magazine number of old tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcStatus $AC_TC_STATUS
Command status
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcThno $AC_TC_THNO
Number of toolholder for new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

aTcTno $AC_TC_TNO
T number of new tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

basisFrameMask $P_CHBFRMASK
Display indicating which channel-specific basic frames are active
Every bit in the mask indicates whether the appropriate basic frame
is active. Bit0 = 1st basic frame, Bit1 = 2nd basic frame, etc.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

blockType $AC_BLOCKTYPE
Identifies the type of a block (programmed or generated internally)
0: No internally generated block
1: Internally generated block, but cannot be specified in detail
2: Block was generated on chamfering/rounding
3: Smooth approach and retraction (SAR)
4: Block was generated during tool offset
5: Block was generated on smoothing
6: Block was generated by TLIFT (tangential correction)
7: Block was generated during path segmentation
8: Block was generated by compile cycles
- 0 0 8 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-114 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

blockTypeInfo $AC_BLOCKTYPEINFO
Detailed information on block type
The value range and the meaning of this variable depend on the current
value of system variable blockType

With system variable blockTypeInfo, additional information on

variable blockType can be requested.

Depending on the value of system variable blockType, different values are possible:

1. General internally generated block: blockType = 1

blockTypeInfo = 1000 and does not include any additional information.

2. Chamfer/round: blockType = 2
2001: straight
2002: circle

3. SAR: blockType = 3
3001: Approach with straight
3002: Approach with quadrant
3003: Approach with semicircle

4. Tool offset: blockType = 4

4001: Approach block after STOPRE
4002: Link sets when intersection not found
4003: Pointed circle on the inner corners (with TRACYL only)
4004: Bypass circle (or conic) on outer corners
4005: Approach blocks for offset suppression
4006: Approach blocks for reactivation of TRC
4007: Block separation when curvature is too high
4008: Compensation blocks for 3D front milling (tool vector || plane vector)

5. Corner rounding: blockType = 5

5001: Rounding contour through G641
5002: Rounding contour through G642
5003: Rounding contour through G643
5004: Rounding contour through G644

6. TLIFT: blockType = 6
6001: TLIFT block with linear movement of the tangential axis and without retraction movement.
6002: TLIFT block with non-linear tangential axis (polynomial)
and without retraction movement.
6003: TLIFT block with retraction movement; tangential axis movement and retraction movement
start simultaneously.
6004: TLIFT block with retraction movement; tangential axis will only start, if certain
retraction position has been reached.

7. Path segmentation: blockType = 7

7001: Programmed path segmentation without punching/nibbling to be active.
7002: Programmed path segmentation with active punching/nibbling.
7003: Automatic internally generated path segmentation.

8. Compile cycles: blockType = 8

In this case, system variable $AC_BLOCKTYPEINFO includes the ID of the compile cycles
application that created the block.

- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

chanAlarm DB21-28, DBX36.6 und DBX36.7 A2

Code whether NCK alarm pending.
0 = no alarm in this channel
1 = alarm without stop
2 = alarm with stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-115
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axes, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
Bits 0-31 represent the axes of the channel.
Bitn = 0: Axis does not exist.
Bitn = 1: Axis does exist.
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

changeAxConfCounter
A counter which is incremented if the axes configuration has changed. This is the case, if e.g. geometry axes are
switched or axes have been changed between channels. The counter is set to 0 at PowerOn and it might overflow. You
cannot be sure, that the axes configuration actually has changed when the counter is incremented.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

chanStatus DB21-28, DBX35.5-DBX35.7 K1

Channel status
0 = RESET
1 = active
2 = interrupted
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

cIn $C_IN[n]
Signal from PLC to cycle (reserved for
SIEMENS application, e.g. ShopMill/ManualTurn)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of input signal 16

cmdDwellTime
Programmed dwell time
See timeOrRevolDwell
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

cmdFeedRateIpo
Desired feedrate of the interpolation feedrate. The physical unit is defined in the variable 'feedRateIpoUnit'
mm/min, inch/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: no

cmdTrafoParSetS $P_TRAFO_PARSET
Number of programmed transformation data record for block search
The variable is '0' if no transformation is active.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

cmdTrafoS $P_TRAFO
Code number of programmed transformation for block search
Coding as for variable $AC_TRAFO
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

corrBlActive
Incorrect block has occurred (correction block)
0 = no incorrect block
1 = incorrect block
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-116 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

cOut $C_OUT[n]
Signal from cycle to PLC (reserved for
SIEMENS application, e.g. ShopMill/ManualTurn)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of output signal 16

cycServRestricted
Code whether restricted cyclic variable service is available.

This is a privileged variable: Cyclic result acknowledgements for this variable are produced even if the cyclic services are
no longer served by the NCK because of block cycle time problems. Caution: Privileged variables lose this characteristic
if they are mixed with non-privileged variables in one request. -> Do not combine the variable cycServRestricted in a
cluster with other variables!

0 = normal cycl. service

1 = no cyclic service (but acknowledgement)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

delayFSt
Delay Feed Stop, Stop is delayed in the current program area
0: Stop in the current program area is effective immediately
1: Stop in the current program area is effective after a delay
2: Stop in the current program area is effective immediately (same as 0), although
a stop delay area was programmed in the parts program.
(This means that the NCK could not switch on the stop delay area.)
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

direction
Traversing direction
0 = normal travel
1 = forward travel
2 = reverse travel
3 = reference point cycle
4 = stop state
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

extProgActive DB21-28, DBB32.0

Flag indicating whether program execution from external is active.
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

feedRateIpoOvr
Interpolation feedrate, override
% Double r
Multi-line: no

feedRateIpoUnit
Interpolation feedrate, units
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
3 = inch/rev
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-117
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

findBlActive DB21-28, DBX33.4 K1

Code whether block search is active.
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

G0Mode $AC_G0MODE
G00 is active and $MC_G0_LINEAR_MODE is FALSE (Siemens mode) or $MC_EXTERN_G0_LINEAR_MODE is
FALSE (ISO mode) and therefore non-linear interpolation is active with G0, i.e. the path axes are traversed as positioning
axes.
0: G00 not active
1: G00 and linear interpolation active
2: G00 and non-linear interpolation active
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

ludAccCounter
Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is available. If subprograms are called during an automatic program execution, a
new set of LUDs becomes valid. In order to indicate to the MMC that it has to modify the display of the LUDs,
respectively that the validity of the LUDs has changed, the variable 'ludAccCounter' is incremented. It is only necessary
for the MMC to inquire a change of the variable's value, the value itself is of no importance.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

machFunc DB11, DBX7.0-DBX7.2

Active channel machine function
0 = none
1 = REPOS
2 = TEACH IN
3 = REF
4 = TEACH-REPOS
5 = TEACH-REF
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

markActiveList
Status array for the active marker in channel m.
The first element (markActiveList[1] ) of the array specifies the currently active marker number of this channel (channel
m).
The second element ( markActiveList[2] ) specifies bit-coded whether channel m is still waiting for the mark to
be reached in the other channels (channel n), in short "waiting status".

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 1 Channel m is waiting for mark markActiveList[1] in channel n

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 0 Channel n has already reached mark markActiveList[1], or channel m is not
waiting for mark markActiveList[1] at all
markActiveList[1] == 0 Current channel m does not edit any wait marker
markActiveList[1] == 1..99 Current channel m is positioned on the wait marker with markActiveList[1]

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 1 Channel m is waiting for mark markActiveList[1] in channel n

markActiveList[2] Bit-n == 0 Channel n has already reached mark markActiveList[1], or channel m is not
waiting for mark markActiveList[1] at all
- 0 0 99 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1: Wait marker number 2
2: Bit-coded wait status for all
channels

ncStartCounter
Counter for the NC-start key. Pressing this key increments the variable 'ncStartCounter'. The value of the variable can be
ignored, the MMC must just inquire the change of the variable to see whether the start-key has been pressed.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-118 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

ncStartSignalCounter
Counter that is incremented
as soon as the channel-specific NC start signal has been activated in the VDI interface.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

numToolHolders $P_MAGNS
Number of tool holders/ spindles (buffer locations of the location type = spindle) from the magazine configuration of the
TOA which are allocated to the channel. The number of tool holders / spindles is solely a function of the magazine
configuration and does not change during an NC program execution.
Value = 0, if there is no magazine configuration or the TMMG (tool management magazines) is not present in the NC.
- 0 0 numMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

numTraceProtocEventType
Logging: Number of standard event types
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

numTraceProtocOemEventType $MM_PROTOC_NUM_ETP_OEM_TYP
Logging: Number of OEM event types
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

paAccLimA $PA_ACCLIMA[a]
Axial acceleration override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index ) numMachAxes

paJerkLimA $PA_JERKLIMA[a]
Axial jerk override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index ) numMachAxes

paVeloLimA $PA_VELOLIMA[a]
Axial velocity override in run in
1-200
- 100 1 200 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index ) numMachAxes

pEgBc $P_EG_BC[a]
Electronic gear:
Block change criterion. Important for EGON, EGONSYN
0: NOC Block change is performed immediately
1: IPOSTOP Block change is performed with setpoint synchronism
2: COARSE Block change is performed with "Synchronism coarse"
3: FINE Block change is performed with "Synchronism fine"

- 3 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis + 1) numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-119
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

pMthSDC $P_MTHSDC
Master tool holder no. or master spindle no. is determined with reference to the active tool for the next D offset selection.
This is important if the master spindle changes after the last tool change.
>0 Successful read access
0 No master tool holder or no master spindle available.
The next D offset works with TO.
-1 TMMG not available
- 0 0 numMachAxes UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

pOffn $P_OFFN
Last programmed offset normal
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: no

progDLNumberS ??
Corresponds to actDLNumber for block search with calculation
Caution: This variable is not available for the Variable Service,
but only for logging in the case of block search events!.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

progDuploNumber
Duplo number of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

progStatus DB21-28, DBX35.0 - DBX35.4 K1

Program status
1 = interrupted
2 = stopped
3 = in progress
4 = waiting
5 = aborted
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

progTNumber
Number of programmed tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

progTNumberLong
Number of the programmed tool using flat D-numbers with up to 8 digits
- 0 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

progToolIdent
Identifier of programmed tool (does not yet have to be active)
- "\0" String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1

progWaitForEditUnlock
The interpreter is waiting until the editor has saved the specified parts
program and has enabled it by means of _N_F_MODE
- 0 String[160] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-120 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

protAreaCounter
Counter is incremented by 1 every time a
protection zone (block PA) is modified
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

protocUserActive $MM_PROTOC_USER_ACTIVE
Logging: Displays active users
0: User inactive
1: User active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes User No. (1-10) 10

pTc $P_TC
The active orientatable toolholder
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pTcAng $P_TCANG[n]
The current angles of the two axes of an orientation-capable toolholder
Degree 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis no. of toolholder 2

pTcDiff $P_TCDIFF[n]
The difference between the exact and the actually used
angles of the two axes of
an orientation-capable toolholder
Degree 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis no. of toolholder 2

pTcNum $P_TCNUM
Number of available orientable tool carriers in the channel
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pTcSol $P_TCSOL
Number of solutions (configuration options for rotary
axes) on selection of an orientatable toolholder. The variable
value can be between 0 and 2, where 0 to 2 means either none,
1 solution or 2 solutions.
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pTcStat $P_TCSTAT
Specifies the status of an orientable tool carrier.
The variable is bit-coded with the following meanings:
0x0001 The first rotary axis is available
0x0002 The second rotary axis is available
0x0004 The angles used for the calculation come from an orientation in the frame direction
0x0008 The angles used for the calculation have been absolutely defined
0x0010 The polar axis angle is not defined in the case of orientation in the frame direction

0x1000 Only the tool can be rotated (kinematic type T)

0x1000 Only the workpiece can be rotated (kinematic type P)
0x4000 Tool and workpiece can be rotated (kinematic type M)

The bits stated here are not currently assigned.

- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-121
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

pTCutMod $P_AD[2]
Angle of rotation for modification of edge position and cutting direction
Angle between 0 and 360 degrees
Degree 0 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pTCutModS $P_AD[2]
Angle of rotation for edge position and
cutting direction for block search
Angle between 0 and 360 degrees
Degree 0 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pToolO $P_TOOLO
Supplies the current tool orientation
The orientation vector is normalized, i.e. it has the value 1.
- 0 -1 1 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1: X component 3
2: Y component
3: Z component

rapFeedRateOvr
Rapid traverse override
% Double r
Multi-line: no

remainDwellTime
Remaining dwell time
See timeOrRevolDwell
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

reqParts $AC_REQUIRED_PARTS
Number of required workpieces (workpiece requirement):
The workpiece count at which the number of current
workpieces $AC_ACTUAL_PARTS is set to zero can be
defined in this counter.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no

rotSys $AC_ROT_SYS
Reference system for orientation movements with cartesian manual traversal
0: Axis-specific manual traversal active
1: Cartesian manual traversal in basic coordinate system active
2: Cartesian manual traversal in workpiece coordinate system active
3: Cartesian manual traversal in tool coordinate system active
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

seruproMasterChanNo
The search type SERUPRO (search via program testing) may be
started simultaneously in several channels in order to start a channel grouping
correctly. A search target must be specified in one channel (master channel) in the grouping.
The other channels do not need a search target, they wait until they have reached a
stop condition and the master channel has reached the search target. These channels generally
stop at WAIT marks. The variable seruproMasterChanNo defines the master channel.
- 0 0 numChannels UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-122 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

seruproMasterNcuNo
The search type SERUPRO (search via program testing) may be
started simultaneously in several channels in order to start a channel grouping
correctly. A search target must be specified in one channel (master channel) in the grouping.
The other channels do not need a search target, they wait until they have reached a
stop condition and the master channel has reached the search target. These channels generally
stop at WAIT marks. The variable seruproMasterChanNo defines the master channel.
seruproMasterNcuNo specifies the master channel in more detail if it is not on the active NCU.
- 0 0 $MN_MM_LINK_NUM_OF_MODULES UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

specParts $AC_SPECIAL_PARTS
Number of current workpieces as defined by user:
This counter enables the user to define his own
workpiece count. The counter is reset to zero automatically
only when the control system boots on defaults.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no

splitBlock $AC_SPLITBLOCK
Identifier of internally splitted blocks
0: A BLOCK programmed unchanged
(a BLOCK generated by the compressor is regarded as programmed BLOCK):
<>0: BLOCK was shortened or is an internally generated BLOCK; the following values are possible:
1: It is an internally generated BLOCK or a shortened original BLOCK
3: It is the last block in a chain of internally generated
blocks or shortened original blocks.
- 0 0 2 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

startLockState
Status of the global start disable.
Also see PI _N_STRTLK and _N_STRTUL.
0: No start disable
1: Start disable is switched on and program is not running
2: Start disable is switched on and program is running nevertheless
The NCK changes from 2->1 as soon as the program is stopped.
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

startRejectCounter
Counter that is incremented
as soon as an NC start is rejected due to a global start
disable (see _N_STRTLK) or a program-specific
start disable (see _N_F_MODE).
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-123
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

stopCond
NC in stop state
NC stop state

0= No stop state
1= NC not ready
2= Mode group not ready
3= EMERGENCY STOP active
4= Alarm with stop active
5= M0 / M1 active
6= Block ended in single block mode
7= NC stop active
8= Read-in enable missing
9= Feed enable missing
10 = Dwell time active
11 = Aux. funct. acknowledgement missing
12 = Axis enable missing
13 = Exact stop not reached
14 = Wait for positioning axis
15 = Wait for spindle
16 = Wait for another channel
17 = Wait for feed override
18 = NC block faulty or user alarm
19 = Wait for NC blocks from external source
20 = Wait for synchronized action
21 = Block search active
22 = Spindle enable missing
23 = Axis feed override 0
24 = Wait for tool change acknowledgement
25 = Gear ratio change
26 = Wait for position control
27 = Wait for thread first cut
28 = Reserved
29 = Wait for punching
30 = Wait for safe operation
31 = No channel ready; from SW 4.1
32 = Oscillation active; from SW 4.1 to SW 6.3
32 = Reserved; from SW 6.3
33 = Axis replacement active; Block change prevented because axis replacement was active from
SW 4.1
34 = Axis container rotation; from SW 4.4
35 = AXCT: Slave axis active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
36 = AXCT: Master axis active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
37 = AXCT: Follow-up active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
38 = AXCT: Internal status change; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
The following internal status changes may cause this waiting status:
- Switch on the position controller
- Request the zero mark
- Reference point approach active
- Parameter block change active
- Measuring cycle system change active
- In-process measurement active
- Servo enable removed
39= AXCT: Axis/spindle disable; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
40 = AXCT: Corr. motion active; Axis container replacement: overlaid motion from SW 5.2
41 = AXCT: Axis replacement active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
42 = AXCT axis interpolator active; Axis container replacement from SW 5.2
43 = Wait for compile cycle; from SW 5.2
44 = Access to system variables; from SW 5.3
45 = Search target found; block search has found search target and NCK has stopped.
46 = Rapid retraction activated; from SW 6.2.
47 = AXCT: Wait for spindle stop; axis container replacement from SW 6.2.
48 = Machine data match; New config, from SW 6.2.
49 = Axis replacement: coupled axis; from SW 6.3
50 = Axis replacement: Liftfast active; from SW 6.3
51 = Axis replacement: New config active; from SW 6.3
52 = Axis replacement: AXCTSW active; from SW 6.3
53 = Axis replacement: Waitp active; from SW 6.3
54 = Axis in another channel; axis replacement from SW 6.3

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-124 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

55 = Axis replacement: axis PLC axis; from SW 6.3

56 = Axis replacement: axis reciprocating axis; from SW 6.3
57 = Axis replacement: axis jog axis; from SW 6.3
58 = Axis replacement: command axis; from SW 6.3
59 = Axis replacement: axis OEM axis; from SW 6.3
60 = Linked slave axis; axis replacement from SW 6.3
61 = Coupled-motion slave axis; axis replacement from SW 6.3
62 = Linked slave axis; axis replacement from SW 6.3
63 = Stop: associated M0 active; from SW 6.3
64 = Stop: associated M1 active; from SW 6.3
65 = Axis at limit stop; from SW 6.3
66 = Master-slave changeover active; from SW 6.3
67 = Axis replacement: axis single axis; from SW 6.3
68 = Stop run has reached the stop block; from SW 7.1
69 = Synchronous run: synchronous spindle; from SW 6.4
70 = Deactivation position of synchronous spindle; from SW 6.4
71 = Wait for release of transformation axis; from SW 7.1
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

stopCondPar
Supplementary parameters for variable stopCond.
stopCondPar has the default value 0. If stopCond takes one of the following values, variable stopCondPar contains
supplementary information:

- UWord r
Multi-line: no

stopRunActive
Stop run active
0 = inactive
1 = active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

stopRunCounter
Modification counter for stop run.
This is always incremented when the NCK has stopped at a stop block.

- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

suppProgFunc
Disabling of language commands
Bit0 = 0: SBLOF command is active
Bit0 = 1: SBLOF command is disabled
- Bit0 = 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

threadPitch
Current lead
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

threadPitchS
Current lead during search run
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-125
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

timeOrRevolDwell
Dwell time unit in seconds or spindle revolutions
0: cmdDwellTime and remainDwellTime in seconds
1: cmdDwellTime and remainDwellTime in spindle revolutions
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

timeS $AC_TIMES
Time after a block change between programmed blocks in seconds
Each programmed block can be divided up into a chain of part blocks that are
processed one after the other.
O n l y with the 1st cycle of the 1st block of the chain, timeS is set to zero and
then counted up in seconds. Therefore, the variable enables time measurements
throughout the entire block chain.
s, user defined 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

timeSC $AC_TIMESC
Time after a block change between programmed blocks in IPO cycles
Each programmed block can be divided up into a chain of part blocks that are
processed one after the other.
Only (!) with the 1st cycle of the 1st block of the chain, timeSC is set to zero and
then counted up in seconds. Therefore, the variable enables time measurements
throughout the entire block chain.
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

toolCounter
Counter of the changes of the tool data assigned to a channel. The counter is incremented each time a tool data is
changed.
All changes of tool data made by BTSS, part programs, INI files and by the Tool Management software are considered.
Tool data are tool compensations, grinding-specific tool parameters, OEM tool parameters and Tool Managment data
including magazine data.
There is one exception: the present tool-in-use-time, since it is changed in each IPO cycle.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

toolCounterC
Counter for modifications to tool offset data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

toolCounterM
Counter for modifications to magazine data assigned to the channel
(analog toolCounter).
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-126 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

toolHolderData GETSELT, GETEXET

Data for each tool holder/spindle from the magazine configuration of the TOA which is assigned to the channel.

There is a set of numToolHolderParams parameters for each tool holder.

Currently there are the three parameters P1, P2 and P3.
There are numToolHolders tool holders. The number of tool holders in this list is solely a function of the magazine
configuration and does not change while an NC program runs.
- P1: THNo ToolHolderNumber / SpindleNumber
(In the language commands of the NC program,
corresponds to the address extension
<n> from T<n>=... or M<n>=6 with explicit notation;
in the magazine configuration, corresponds to the location
type index of the associated buffer location of the location
type = spindle.)
- P2: SelTno T number of the selected tool with
reference to the tool holder / spindle with the number of THNo
(The same TNo would also return the language command GETSELT.)
The value 0 indicates that no tool is selected with
reference to the tool holder. For further behavior see the description of GETSELT.
- P3: ExeTno TNumber of the tool to be loaded / loaded with
reference to the tool holder / the spindle with the number THNo from
the point of view of the NC program.
When working without M6, the same TNumber is in SelTno and ExeTno.
(The same TNumber would also return the language command GETEXET.)
The value 0 indicates that no tool is to be loaded / is loaded
with reference to the tool holder. For further behavior see the description of GETEXET.

An array access is possible to toolHolderData, with which the data of all numToolHolders tool holders can be read at one
time.
0 will be returned for line 1 only, if tool magazine management is not active.
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes The line index addresses the numToolHolderParams * numToolHolders
parameters of the tool holder and the
tool holder itself:
Line index = (ElementNo - 1) *
numToolHolderParams + PNo

With: ElementNo 1 to
numToolHolders;
The ElementNo is the list element no
of the tool holder in this list.

PNo: Parameter number from 1 to

numToolHolderParams
numToolHolderParams from range
N, block Y, global system data

totalParts $AC_TOTAL_PARTS
Total number of all machined workpieces:
This counter specifies the number of workpieces machined
since it was started. The counter is automatically
set to zero only if the control system boots on defaults.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: no

transfActive DB21-28, DBX33.6 K1,

M1
Transformation active
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-127
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

transSys $AC_TRANS_SYS
Reference system for translation with cartesian manual traversal
0: Axis-specific manual traversal active
1: Cartesian manual traversal in basic coordinate system active
2: Cartesian manual traversal in workpiece coordinate system active
3: Cartesian manual traversal in tool coordinate system active
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

vaEgSyncDiff $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronism deviation (actual values). The comparison between this value
and $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_... determines whether the appropriate
"Synchronism" VDI signal is set.
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes (Axis index of slave axis + 1) numMachAxes

vaEgSyncDiffS $VA_EG_SYNCDIFF_S[a]
Electronic gear:
Synchronous run difference (actual values) with sign. Whether the corresponding VDI signal "synchronous run" is set
depends upon the comparison of this value with $MA_COUPLE_POS_TOL_....

mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 Double r

Multi-line: yes (Axis index of the following axis) numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-128 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

1.4.3 Area C, Mod. SINF: Part-program-specific status data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/ProgramModification/...

During automatic execution of a part program different parameters can influence

the type of machining. The current status data for the selected part program are
combined in module SINF. The status data must only be changed via the PLC.
interface.

DRFActive
DRF active
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

feedStopActive
Feed disable
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

ipoBlocksOnly
Display traversing blocks
0 = normal block transfer
1 = exclusively traversing blocks
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

optAssStopActive
Associated M01 selected
0: Not selected
1: Selected
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

optStopActive
M01 selected
0 = not selected
1 = selected
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

progTestActive DB21-28, DBX1.7 K1

Program test
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-129
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

rapFeedRateOvrActive
ROV rapid traverse override
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

singleBlockActive
Single block, SBL
0 = no single block
1 = SBL 1
2 = SBL 2
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

singleBlockType
Single block mode
1 = interpolation single block
2 = decoder single block
- UWord wr
Multi-line: no

skipLevel0Active
Info whether skip level /0 is activated.
0: Skip level /0 not active
1: Skip level /0 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

skipLevel1Active
Info whether skip level /1 is activated
0: Skip level /1 not active
1: Skip level /1 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

skipLevel2Active
Info whether skip level /2 is activated
0: Skip level /2 not active
1: Skip level /2 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

skipLevel3Active
Info whether skip level /3 is activated
0: Skip level /3 not active
1: Skip level /3 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

skipLevel4Active
Info whether skip level /4 is activated
0: Skip level /4 not active
1: Skip level /4 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-130 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

skipLevel5Active
Info whether skip level /5 is activated
0: Skip level /5 not active
1: Skip level /5 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

skipLevel6Active
Info whether skip level /6 is activated.
0: Skip level /6 not active
1: Skip level /6 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

skipLevel7Active
Info whether skip level /7 is activated.
0: Skip level /7 not active
1: Skip level /7 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

skipLevel8Active
Info whether skip level /8 is activated.
0: Skip level /8 not active
1: Skip level /8 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

skipLevel9Active
Info whether skip level /9 is activated.
0: Skip level /9 not active
1: Skip level /9 active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no

trialRunActive DB21-28, DBX0.6 V1

Dry run feedrate
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-131
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

1.4.4 Area C, Mod. SPARP: Part program information

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/ProgramInfo/...

This module contains information on the currently active part programm in the
respective channel.

absoluteBlockBufferName
File name with path of upload buffer in which display blocks are stored

Empty string: Function is deactivated

- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

absoluteBlockBufferPreview
Part of content of file absoluteBlockBufferName.
The desired content of the variables is set by $MC_MM_ABSBLOCK_BUFFER_CONF.
In principle, only complete parts program blocks are entered.
If the desired number of previous blocks are not present, then an empty block ("LF") is entered in that place.
If there is insufficient space for all parts program blocks, then the previous blocks are first replaced by empty blocks
("LF"), if this is still insufficient, the blocks at the end are also omitted.

- String[198] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

absoluteBlockCounter
Modification counter for display information in the upload buffer
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actBlock
Current part program block.
If search run is active, then search run block is displayed.
With DISPLOF an empty string is returned; with search run the subroutine call.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actBlockA
Current part program block.
If search run is active, then search run block is displayed.
Display is always made irrespective of DISPLOF.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actBlockI
Current part program in the interpreter.
Display is always made irrespective of DISPLOF.
- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-132 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

actLineNumber
Line number of the current NC instruction (starting at 1)
0: before program start
-1: not available due to an error
-2: not available because of DISPLOF
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

block
To display the currently active part programm, NCK supplies 3 ascii-blocks of the part programm in one single variable
job (last, current and next block). That means the variable 'block' consists of a maximum of 3 lines:
Line index 1: string of the last block
Line index 2: string of the current block
Line index 3: string of the next block

To gain consistent information, all 3 array elements must be processed in one variable request. This is why the maximum
string length of each array element is limited to 66 characters.

- String[66] r
Multi-line: yes Block index, 1 = last, 2 = current, 3 = 3
next block

blockNoStr
Block number
- String[12] r
Multi-line: no

circleCenter
Center of the circle (WCS)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Line index 1 - 3 for geometry axis 3
and only effective for G02 or G03

circleCenterS
Corresponds to circleCenter for search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling the block search events only, not for the Variable Service!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of the geometry axis 3

circlePlane
The vector perpendicular to the circular plane (axial) is output
to enable identification of the position of a circle in space
- Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo axis 3

circlePlaneS
The vector perpendicular to the circular plane (axial) is output
to enable identification of the position of a circle in space
- Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo axis 3

circleRadius
Radius of the circle (only effective for G02/G03)
- Double r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-133
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

circleRadiusS
Corresponds to circleRadius for block search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for logging in connection with block search events!
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1

circleTurn
Progr. number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in curr. program
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

circleTurnS
Programmed number of additional circular passes with
helical interpolation in the current program for search with calculation.
Note: This variable is not available for the Variable Service, but only for
logging of block search events
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEns
Arc center in relation to WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but
without tool radius
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo-axis 3

cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEnsS
Corresponds to circleCenterWos for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes No. of geo-axis 3

cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEns
Arc radius in relation to WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool
length but without tool radius
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEnsS
Corresponds to circleRadiusWos for block search with calculation
in relation to WOS frame as center-point path. i.e. with tool length
but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service, but only for
logging in connection with block search events!
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-134 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

lastBlockNoStr
Indicates the last programmed block number, if $MN_DISPLAY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 0 is set. A block number is shown
until either a new block number is programmed or the subroutine level which generated the block number has been left.
Block numbers of masked blocks are not displayed.
There is also no display if DISPLOF is active.

- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

msg PG
Messages from a part program can be programmed with the instruction 'MSG (...)'. The variable 'msg' contains the text of
the current 'MSG(...)'-instruction until a new instrucion is processed or until the message is deleted with the instruction
'MSG ()'.
- String[128] r
Multi-line: no 1

progName
Progam name of the currently active program (or subroutine)
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1

seekw
First line enabled for modification in part program
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

singleBlock
In most cases the variable 'block' is used to read the currently active blocks of the part program. Because this variable is
limited to 66 characters per string, it might be necessary (for long blocks) to read longer strings. The variable
'singleBlock' can read complete blocks (up to strings with 198 charecters) . 3 lines can be addressed:

Line index 1: last block

Line index 2: current block
Line index 3: next block

It is not guaranteed for rapid block changes, that the information of 3 successive blocks is always consistent, because
each block is read with a single variable request. This method is only safe, if the part program has stopped.
- String[198] r
Multi-line: yes Block index, 1 = last, 2 = current, 3 = 3
next block

stepEditorFormName
Current module name for step editor is stored

- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

workPandProgName
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- String[160] r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

workPName
Name of the active workpiece
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-135
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

workPNameLong
Workpiece name of active workpiece
- String[128] r
Multi-line: no

1.4.5 Area C, Mod. SPARPP: Program pointer in automatic operation

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/ProgramPointer/...

In automatic mode it is possible to branch to several subroutine levels from the

main program level. The state of the program can be determined for every program
level. Each variable of the module consists of 12 rows. This makes it possible to
address the main program level and 11 subroutine levels (incl. ASUP levels).

The array indices (row indices) mean:

1 = Main program
2 = 1st subroutine level
3 = 2nd subroutine level
4 = 3rd subroutine level
5 = 4th subroutine level
6 = 5th subroutine level
7 = 6th subroutine level
8 = 7th subroutine level
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level
12 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level

actInvocCount
Subroutine call counter, actual value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set 1 for the main program
and for asynchronous subroutines.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

blockLabel
Block label
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

blockNoStr
Block number
[:][N]<No>
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

cmdInvocCount
Subroutine call counter, desired value. Specifies the number of subroutine passes. Is always set to 1 for the main
program and for asynchronous subroutines.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-136 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

displayState
Display state for block display.
(Blocks should not be displayed automatically for program levels for which DISPLAY OFF has been programmed in the
PROC instruction. This is valid also for the subroutine levels below).

0 = DISPLAY OFF for the program level

1 = DISPLAY ON for the program level

- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of the program level 12

extProgBufferName
Name of FIFO buffer for execution from external source
- String[160] wr
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

extProgFlag
Indicates whether programs are being executed externally
0: Program is being processed from NCK program memory
1: Program is being executed externally
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

lastBlockNoStr
Returns the last programmed block number for each program level when $MN_DISPLAY_FUNCTION_MASK bit 0 is set.
A block number is shown until either a new block number is programmed or the subroutine level which generated the
block number has been left. Block numbers of masked blocks are not displayed.
There is also no display if DISPLOF is active.

- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

progName
Program name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

seekOffset
Search pointer (block offset, each block consists of a string that ends with a line feed)
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

seekw
First line enabled for modification in part program
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

workPandProgName
Workpiece name and name of current program.
- String[160] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-137
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Program level index 12

workPNameLong
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure
Note: This variable is ignored when lines are accessed!
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes Program level index 12

1.4.6 Area C, Mod. SPARPI: Program pointer on interruption

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/InterruptionSearch/...

In order to be able to continue at the point of interruption in a program, the current

states of the main program and any subroutines must be stored. On a program
interrupt the information is immediately updated in the NCK and reamins valid even
after RESET.
This makes it possible to read the states of the main program level and the 11
subroutine levels (incl. ASUP levels).
The array indices (row indices) mean:

1 = main program
2 = 1st subroutine level
3 = 2nd subroutine level
4 = 3rd subroutine level
5 = 4th subroutine level
6 = 5th subroutine level
7 = 6th subroutine level
8 = 7th subroutine level
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level
12 = 4th asynchronus subroutine level

forward
Search direction
2 = forwards
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

invocCount
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-138 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

plcStartReason
Specifies for the SERUPRO function which channel has to be started by the PLC so that the current channel starts.

- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Program level index 12

progName
Program name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

searchString
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to the search pointer)
- String[64] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

searchType
Search type
5 = search pointer block-oriented (searching for line feed characters)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

seekOffset
Search pointer (block-oriented, searching for linefeed characters)
1fffffff HEX is returned if the value is invalid.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

status
Informs about whether block SPARPI includes currently
valid values, and provides the reason for the last update of the
block, if available.
Note: If an interruption occurs in a program range between the command
IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK, the first block after IPTRLOCK will be provided
in the SPARPI instead of the current block.
The first interruption between IPTRLOCK and IPTRUNLOCK will set "status"
and any additional interruption prior to IPTRUNLOCK will neither change "status" nor SPARPI.
0: Program is running, i.e. SPARPI variables are not up-to-date
1: Program selection, i.e. SPARPI has been reset
2: Block selection through PI service _N_SEL_BL
3: Reset (program abort)
4: Stop after program instruction, e.g. M0
5: Stop with STOP key
6: Stop caused by alarm
- 1 0 6 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

workPNameLong
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure
Note: This variable is ignored when lines are accessed!
- String[128] r
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-139
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

1.4.7 Area C, Mod. SPARPF: Program pointers for block search and stop
run

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/Search/...

To look for a particular block within a parts program the user can enter search
criteria and start a block search. The variables to be entered are combined in the
module SPARPF and must be written by the MMC (or another component on the
MPI bus).
One main program level and 11 subroutine levels can be processed. These levels
are the row indices of the individual variables. The search targets (seek pointer and
search string) can only be used mutually exclusively in one level. If a collision
occurs, a negative acknowledgement results when the block search is started.
Depending on the search type, the search string is either a block label, block
number or any string.
If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for subroutine calls is
used. The main program entered in the first program level must be selected for the
block search; otherwise the search request is acknowledged negatively.

The array indices (row indices) mean:

1 = main program level for search run

2 = 1st subroutine level for search run
3 = 2nd subroutine level for search run
4 = 3rd subroutine level for search run
5 = 4th subroutine level for search run
6 = 5th subroutine level for search run
7 = 6th subroutine level for search run
8 = 7th subroutine level for search run
9 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level for search run
10 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level for search run
11 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level for search run
12 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level for search run

101 = main program level for stop run

102 = 1st subroutine level for stop run
103 = 2nd subroutine level for stop run
104 = 3rd subroutine level for stop run
105 = 4th subroutine level for stop run
106 = 5th subroutine level for stop run
107 = 6th subroutine level for stop run
108 = 7th subroutine level for stop run
109 = 1st asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
110 = 2nd asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
111 = 3rd asynchronous subroutine level for stop run
112 = 4th asynchronous subroutine level for stop run

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-140 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

forward
Search direction
Search direction "backwards" is only possible in the mode without calculation
1 = backwards (without calculation)
2 = forwards
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

invocCount
Actual value of the subroutine call counter. Is always 1 for the main program.
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

plcStartReason
Specifies for the SERUPRO function which channel has to be started by the PLC so that the current channel starts.

- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Program level index 112

progName
Program name. The main program that is used in the first main program level must be selected for the block search,
otherwise the search request will be acknowledged negatively.
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the program level 12

searchString
Search string (the first 64 characters of the NC block - corresponding to search pointer). Contents of the search string
depends on the search type and are either:
block label
block number
any string
- String[64] wr
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

searchType
Search type
1 = block number
2 = label
3 = string
4 = program level
5 = search pointer block-oriented (searching for line feeds)
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

seekOffset
Search pointer (block-oriented, searching for line feeds). If the search pointer is used, a program name (progName)
always must have been defined. The search pointer refers to this program.
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

status
This variable is without function in block SPARPF.
It has only been introduced to achieve the same structure of SPARPI and SPARPF.
- 0 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-141
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

workPName
Workpiece name = path name in the NC file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
subroutine calls is used.
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

workPNameLong
Workpiece name = path name in the NCK file structure. If no path name is specified, the default search strategy for
subroutine calls is used.
Note: This variable is ignored when lines are accessed!
- String[128] wr
Multi-line: yes Index of program level 12

1.4.8 Area C, Mod. SSYNAC: Synchronous actions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/SelectedFunctions/...

Several synchronous actions (M, H, S, E, F, T, D) can be active simultaneously in

one channel. The module SSYNAC contains a list of all the synchronous actions
programmed in the current block. This module consists of arrays of varying length
because some types of synchronous actions might be programmed several times
in a block. A synchronous action that is not assigned produces a negative number
for the respecitive index.
For each synchronous action there is an address variable and a variable in which
the value of the address is entered.
5 M functions
3 S functions
3 H functions
1 T function
1 D function
6 F functions
1 E function
can be programmed in each part program block, but no more than 10 synchronous
actions must be programmed in a single block.

blockNoStrAct
Block number of the current block if synchronous actions are active
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes No of the synchronous action /C/SSYNAC/numSynAct

blockNoStrProg
Number of the block where the synchronous action has been programmed
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes No. of the synchronous action /C/SSYNAC/numSynAct

Dadr
D-number. There is only one active D-number per channel.
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-142 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

Dval
Value of the current D-number
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

Eadr S5
Number of active E-function
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

Eval S5
Value of the E-function
mm/min, inch/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: no 1

Hadr S5
Number of active auxiliary functions (H-functions). Up to three H-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 99 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 3

Hval S5
Value of the H-function
- -99999,9999 99999,9999 Double r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 3

id
ID of the synchronous action; value 0 means no ID defined
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes No. of the synchronous action /C/SSYNAC/numSynAct

Madr S5
Number of the active M-function. Up to 5 M-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 99 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 5

Mval S5
Value of the M-function
- 0 99999999 Long Integer r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 5

numSynAct
Number of synchronous actions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

Sadr S5
Number of active S-functions. Up to three S-functions can be active simultaneously.
- 0 6 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 3

Sval S5
Value of the S-function. Specifies the spindle speed.
rev/min , m/min 0 999999,999 Double r
Multi-line: yes Serial number 3

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-143
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

Tadr
Active T-number. Only one T-number can be active at any a time.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

TPreSelAdr
Number of the preselected T-function
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

TPreSelVal
Value of the preselected T-function
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

Tval
T-function value
- Long Integer r
Multi-line: no 1

typStatus
Type and state of the synchronous action
Bits0-7 describe the state:
Bit0: active
Bit1: lock
Bits8-15 describe the type:
Bit8: static
Bit9: modal
Bit10: blockwise
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the synchronous action /C/SSYNAC/numSynAct

1.4.9 Area C, Mod. SYNACT: Channel-specific synchronous actions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/SelectedFunctions/...

This module contains information on the synchronous actions. The 1000 digit of the
cell contains the user protection level (0-7) needed for displaying the corresponding
synchronous action.

blockNoStrAct
If a technology cycle is active: block number of the current action
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes (Protection level) * 1000 + no. of the 7 * 1000 + /C/SYNACT/numSynAct
synchronous action

blockNoStrProg
Number of the block where the synchronous action has been programmed
- String[12] r
Multi-line: yes (Protection level) * 1000 + no. of the 7 * 1000 + /C/SYNACT/numSynAct
synchronous action

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-144 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

id
ID of the synchronous action; value 0 means that there is no ID defined (blockwise)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (protection level) * 1000 + no. of the 7 * 1000 + /C/SYNACT/numSynAct
synchronous action

numSynAct
Number of synchronous actions
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (protection level) * 1000 + 1 7 * 1000 + 1

typStatus
Type and state of the synchronous action
Bits0-7 describe the state:
Bit0: active, i.e. condition fullfilled, action is being executed
Bit1: lock, i.e. action is locked by PLC or Synact
Bits8-15 describe the type:
Bit8: static
Bit9: modal
Bit10: blockwise (to be recognized by id=0)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (Protection level) * 1000 + no. of the 7 * 1000 + /C/SYNACT/numSynAct
synchronous action

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-145
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

1.4.10 Area C, Mod. SNCF: Active G functions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/SelectedFunctions/...

All G functions are organized in G groups. Only one function of each G group can
be active at a time. The module SNCF consists of a single variable that is
organized as an array. The row index corresponds to the G group number.

ncFkt
Active G-function of relevant group G <No>.
If there is no function active within the corresponding G-group, the variable returns an empty string "\0".

- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes G group number numGCodeGroups

ncFktAct
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to ncFkt or ncFktFanuc.
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes G group number or ISO Dialect G numGCodeGroups bzw.
group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc

ncFktBin
Active G-function of the correponding group
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes G group number numGCodeGroups

ncFktBinAct
Active G function of relevant current group in current
language mode.
Depending on whether function has been programmed in Siemens or
ISO Dialect mode, this is identical to ncFktBin or ncFktBinFanuc.
(The value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes G group number or ISO Dialect G numGCodeGroups bzw.
group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc

ncFktBinFanuc
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
(the value is the index of the active G function within the group)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes ISO Dialect G group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc

ncFktBinS
Active G-function of the correponding group for block search with calculation
(The value is the index of the active G-function within the group)
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, but not for the Variable Service.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes G group number numGCodeGroups

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-146 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

ncFktFanuc
Active G function of relevant ISO Dialect group
- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes ISO Dialect G group number numGCodeGroupsFanuc

ncFktS
Active G-function of the correponding group for block search with calculation
Attention: This variable is available for protocolling block search events only, but not for the Variable Service.

- String[16] r
Multi-line: yes G group number numGCodeGroups

1.4.11 Area C, Mod. NIB: State data: Nibbling

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/Nibbling/...

The module NIB contains technology-specific data for nibbling.

actPunchRate N4
Strokes per minute
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

automCutSegment N4
Identifier that indicates which type of automatic block division is active. The division is specified by the commands 'SPP'
and 'SPN' in the part program.
0 = no block division
1 = number of segments per block ('SNP')
2 = segments of fixed length ('SPP')
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

numStrokes N4
Number of strokes when the instruction 'SPN' divides the block into segments (variable 'automCutSegment' = 1).
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

partDistance N4
If the block has been divided in segments with the instruction 'SPP' (variable 'automCutSegment' = 2) the variable
specifies the length of the path between the punches.
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-147
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

punchActive N4
Identification of punching or nibbling active. The part program turns off/on punching and nibbling with 'SPOF', 'SON' and
'PON'. Rapid punching and nibbling are turned on/off with 'SONS' and 'PONS'.
The variable 'punchActive' specified the present state.

0 = inactive
1 = punching active
2 = nibbling active
3 = rapid punching active (PONS from SW 4.1)
4 = rapid nibbling active (SONS from SW 4.1)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

punchDelayActive N4
Identifier that indicates whether punching with delay is active. The part program can turn on/off the delay with the
instructions 'PDELAYON' and 'PDELAYOF'. The variable 'PunchDelayActive' indicates the present state.
0 = inactive
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

punchDelayTime SD 42400: PUNCH_DWELL_TIME N4

Punching delay time
ms Double r
Multi-line: no 1

strokeNr
Current stroke number
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

1.4.12 Area C, Mod. FB: Channel-specific base frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/BaseFrame/...

This only applies if $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES > 0.

The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES - 1

linShift $P_CHBFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Translation of settable zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * (numGeoAxes + $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES *
numAuxAxes) + axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

linShiftFine $P_CHBFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis

Fine offset with frames, expansion of basic frames and settable frames
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * (numGeoAxes + $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES *
numAuxAxes) + axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-148 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.4 State data of channel

mirrorImgActive $P_CHBFR[x,y,MI] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in a settable zero offset
0: Mirroring not active
1: Mirroring active
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * (numGeoAxes + $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES *
numAuxAxes) + axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

rotation $P_CHBFR[x,y,RT] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Rotation of a settable zero offset
Degree Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * (numGeoAxes + $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES *
numAuxAxes) + axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

scaleFact $P_CHBFR[x,y,SC] x=FrameNo, y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of a settable zero offset
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes (Frame index - 1 ) * (numGeoAxes + $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES *
numAuxAxes) + axis number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

1.4.13 Area C, Mod. FS: Channel-specific system frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/SystemFrame/...

Those that there are, are set by the bits in $MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK.

Consequently, there may be gaps between the active system frames.

The maximum frame index is:

3 up to but excluding SW 6.3.
5 from and including SW 6.3.

linShift $P_SETFR[Achse, TR]

Translation
mm, inch, user defined 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Frameindex 4 * (numGeoAxes+numAuxAxes)

linShiftFine $P_SETFR[Achse, SI]

Fine offset
mm, inch, user defined 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Frameindex 4 * (numGeoAxes+numAuxAxes)

mirrorImgActive $P_SETFR[Achse, MI]

Mirroring
0: Mirroring inactive
1: Mirroring active
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Frameindex 4 * (numGeoAxes+numAuxAxes)

rotation $P_SETFR[Achse, RT]

Rotation
Degree 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Frameindex 4 * (numGeoAxes+numAuxAxes)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-149
1 Variables 03/2006
1.4 State data of channel

scaleFact $P_SETFR[Achse, SC]

Scaling factor
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Frameindex 4 * (numGeoAxes+numAuxAxes)

1.4.14 Area C, Mod. AUXFU: Auxiliary functions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel//...

The module includes the active auxiliary functions for each group.
In the line, the auxiliary function group (64 groups) and the
desired view are addressed:
Line 1001-1064: Active auxiliary function from the point of view of the NCK
Line 2001-2064: Collected auxiliary function (after search run) from the point of
view of the NCK
Line 3001-3064: Active auxiliary function from the point of view of the PLC
Line 1-64: Summary of the above views

Only the values of lines 3001-3064 can be written.

When writing individual values, it must be taken care
that the status variable is written last.
The entire data block of an auxiliary function will not be
accepted before this variable is written.

extension
Extension of the auxiliary function
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Group of auxiliary functions/view 3064

status
Status of the auxiliary function
Bit0 = 1: Auxiliary function has been collected (NCK view)
Bit1 = 1: Auxiliary function has been output to PLC (NCK view)
Bit2 = 1: Auxiliary function has been acknowledged by PLC (NCK view)
Bit3 = 1: Auxiliary function has been acknowledged by PLC (PLC view)
Bit4 = 1: Auxiliary function has been functionally completed (PLC view)

Bit14 = 1: Value type is LONG

Bit15 = 1: Value type is DOUBLE
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Group of auxiliary functions/view 3064

type
Type of the auxiliary function, e.g. "M", "S", "T", "D", "F", "H", "L".
- String[2] wr
Multi-line: yes Group of auxiliary functions/view 3064

valueDo
Value of the auxiliary function.
This value will be supplied, if "status" Bit15 = 1
- 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Group of auxiliary functions/view 3064

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-150 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

valueLo
Value of the auxiliary function.
This value will be supplied, if "status" Bit14 = 1
- 0 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes Group of auxiliary functions/view 3064

1.5 State data of axes

1.5.1 Area C, Mod. SMA: State data: Machine axes

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/MachineAxis/...

All state data that are dependent on machine movement and are defined
specifically for machine axes (geometry and special axes) are combined in module
SMA. Supplementary information is to be found in module SEMA. The individual
variables are defined as fields where the line index is the number of the machine
axis (assigned to the current channel). The variable "name" in module SMA with
the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SMA and SEMA is identical.

actIncrVal DB31-48, DBB5 H1

Active INC weighting of the axis
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no incremental mode set
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasePos $AA_IM[x] x = Ax is
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

extUnit
Current physical unit of the axis position
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
3 = indexing position
4 = userdef
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-151
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

name
Axis name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

status
Axis state
0 = travel command in plus direction
1 = travel command in minus direction
2 = exact position coarse reached
3 = exact position fine reached
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

toolBaseREPOS
Tool base REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

varIncrVal
Settable value for INC_VAR. The physical value depends on whether the axis is linear or rotary.
Linear axis: unit is 1 mm
Rotary axis: unit is 1/1000 degrees
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-152 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

1.5.2 Area C, Mod. SEMA: State data: Machine axes (extension of SMA)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/MachineAxis/...

All state data that are dependent on machine movement and are defined
specifically for machine axes (geometry and special axes) are combined in module
SMA. Supplementary information is to be found in module SEMA. The individual
variables are defined as fields where the line index is the number of the machine
axis (assigned to the current channel). The variable "name" in module SMA with
the line index in question identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SMA and SEMA is identical.

aaActIndexAxPosNo $AA_ACT_INDEX_AX_POS_NO[<Achse>]
Current indexing position; the display depends on
$MN_INDEX_AX_NO_MODE and the division (via table or equidistant)
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaAlarmStat $AA_ALARM_STAT
Display indicating whether alarms are active for a PLC-controlled axis.
The relevant coded alarm reactions can be used as a source for
the "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The data is bit-coded, allowing, where necessary, individual states to be
masked or evaluated separately (bits not listed supply a value of 0)
Bit2 = 1: NOREADY (active rapid deceleration + cancelation of servo enable)
Bit6 = 1: STOPBYALARM (rampm stop in all channel axes)
Bit9 = 1: SETVDI (VDI interface signal "Setting alarm")
Bit13 = 1: FOLLOWUPBYALARM (Follow-up)
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaBcsOffset $AA_BCS_OFFSET[Achse]
Sum of all axial offsets of an axis,
such as DRF, online tool offset, $AA_OFF and ext. WO.
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaCoupAct $AA_COUP_ACT[x] x = Spindle following

Current coupling state of the slave spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaCoupOffs $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Spindle

Position offset of the synchronous spindle desired value
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaCurr $AA_CURR[x] x = Axis

Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A (611D only)

A Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-153
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

aaDtbb $AA_DTBB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance from the beginning of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in
synchronous actions (note: SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaDteb $AA_DTEB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance to the end of the block in the BCS for positioning and synchronous axes used in synchronous
actions (note: SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaDtepb $AA_DTEPB[x] x = Axis

Axis-specific distance-to-go of infeed during oscillation in the BCS (note: SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaEsrEnable $AA_ESR_ENABLE[Achse]
(Axial) enabling of reactions of "Extended Stop and Retract" function.
The selected axial ESR reaction must be parameterized in MD $MA_ESR_REACTION.
beforehand. The corresponding Stop or Retract reactions can be activated via
$AN_ESR_TRIGGER (or for individual drives in the event of communications failure/
DC-link undervoltage), generator-mode operation is automatically activated in response to
undervoltage conditions.
0: FALSE
1: TRUE
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaEsrStat $AA_ESR_STAT[Achse]
(Axial) status checkback signals of "Extended Stop and Retract" function,
which can be applied as input signals for the gating logic of the ESR (synchronous actions).

The data is bit-coded. Individual states can therefore be masked or

evaluated separately if necessary:
Bit0 = 1: Generator mode is activated
Bit1 = 1: Retract operation is activated
Bit2 = 1: Stop operation is activated
Bit3 = 1: Risk of undervoltage (DC-link voltage monitoring,
voltage has dropped below warning threshold)
Bit4 = 1: Speed has dropped below minimum generator mode threshold (i.e. no more
regenerative rotation energy is available).
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaEsrTrigger $AA_ESR_TRIGGER
Activation of "NC-controlled ESR" for PLC-controlled axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaIbnCorr $AA_IBN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current BZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-154 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

aaIenCorr $AA_IEN_CORR[<Achse>]
Current SZS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaJerkCount $AA_JERK_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaJerkTime $AA_JERK_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis with jerk
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaJerkTotal $AA_JERK_TOT[Achse]
Overall total jerk of an axis
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaLeadP $AA_LEAD_P[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value position
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaLeadPTurn $AA_LEAD_P_TURN
Current master value - position component lost
as a result of modulo reduction
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaLeadSp $AA_LEAD_SP[x] x = Axis

Simulated lead value - position
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaLeadSv $AA_LEAD_SV[x] x = Axis

Simulated leading value velocity
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaLeadTyp $AA_LEAD_TYP[x] x = Axis

Source of the lead value

1: actual value
2: desired value
3: simulated value
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaLeadV $AA_LEAD_V[x] x = Axis

Actual lead value - velocity
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-155
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

aaLoad $AA_LOAD[x] x = Axis

Drive load in % (611D only)
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMaslState $AA_MASL_STAT
Each slave axis currently coupled via master-slave delivers the machine axis number of the corresponding master axis.
Zero is displayed as default for inactive coupling.
A master axis also shows default value zero.
0: No coupling for this axis configured, or axis is master axis, or no coupling active
>0: Machine axis number of the master axis with which the slave axis is currently coupled
- 0 0 numMachAxes UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMm $AA_MM[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position in the machine coordinate system
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMm1 $AA_MM1[x] x = Axis

Access to measurement result of trigger event 1 in the MCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMm2 $AA_MM2[x] x = Axis

Access to measurement result of trigger event 2 in the MCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMm3 $AA_MM3[x] x = Axis

Access to measurement result of trigger event 3 in the MCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMm4 $AA_MM4[x] x = Axis

Access to measurement result of trigger event 4 in the MCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaOff $AA_OFF[x] x = Axis

Superimposed position offset from synchronous actions
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaOffLimit $AA_OFF_LIMIT[x] x = Axis

Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached (Note: for SYNACT only)

0: limit not reached

1: limit in positive axial direction reached
11: limit in negative axial direction reached
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-156 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

aaOffVal $AA_OFF_VAL[x]
Integrated value of overlaid motion for an axis.
The negative value of this variable can be used to cancel an overlaid motion.
e.g. $AA_OFF[axis] = -$AA_OFF_VAL[axis]

- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaOscillBreakPos1 $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS1[<Achse>]
Oscillation interrupt position 1
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaOscillBreakPos2 $AA_OSCILL_BREAK_POS2[<Achse>]
Oscillation interrupt position 2
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaOscillReversePos1 $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1[x] x = Axis

Current reverse position 1 for oscillation in the BCS. For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
$SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 is evaluated online; (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaOscillReversePos2 $AA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS2[x] x = Axis

Current reverse position 2 for oscillation in the BCS; For synchronous actions the value of the setting data
$SA_OSCILL_REVERSE_POS1 is evaluated online; (note: SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaOvr $AA_OVR[x] x = Axis

Axial override for synchronous actions
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaPlcOvr $AA_PLC_OVR[Achse]
Axial override specified by PLC for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaPolfa $AA_POLFA
The programmed retraction position of the single axis
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaPolfaValid $AA_POLFA_VALID
States whether the retraction of the single axis is programmed
0: No retraction programmed for the single axis
1: Retraction programmed as position
2: Retraction programmed as distance
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaPower $AA_POWER[x] x = Axis

Drive power in W (611D only)
W Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-157
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

aaSnglAxStat $AA_SNGLAX_STAT
Display status of a PLC-controlled axis
0: Not a single axis
1: Reset
2: Ended
3: Interrupted
4: Active
5: Alarm
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaSoftendn $AA_SOFTENDN[x] x = Axis

Software end position, negative direction
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaSoftendp $AA_SOFTENDP[x] x = Axis

Software end position, positive direction
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaStat $AA_STAT[]
Axis state
0: no axis state available
1: travel command is active
2: axis has reached the IPO end. only for channel axes
3: axis in position (exact stop coarse) for all axes
4: axis in position (exact stop fine) for all axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaSync $AA_SYNC[x] x = Axis

Coupling state of the following axis with lead value coupling

0: not synchronized
1: synchronized coarse
2: synchronized fine
3: synchronized coarse and fine
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaTorque $AA_TORQUE[x] x = Axis

Desired torque value in Nm (611D only)
Nm Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaTotalOvr $AA_TOTAL_OVR[Achse]
The total axial override for motion-synchronous actions
- 100 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaTravelCount $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-158 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

aaTravelCountHS $AA_TRAVEL_COUNT_HS[Achse]
Total traverse processes of an axis at high speed
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaTravelDist $AA_TRAVEL_DIST[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis in mm or degrees
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaTravelDistHS $AA_TRAVEL_DIST_HS[Achse]
Total travel path of an axis at high speed in mm or degrees

- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaTravelTime $AA_TRAVEL_TIME[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis in seconds
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaTravelTimeHS $AA_TRAVEL_TIME_HS[Achse]
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed in seconds
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaTyp $AA_TYP[x] x = Axis

Axis type
0: axis in other channel
1: channel axis of same channel
2: neutral axis
3: PLC axis
4: reciprocating axis
5: neutral axis, currently traversing in JOG
6: slave axis coupled via master value
7: coupled motion slave axis
8: command axis
9: compile cycle axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaVactB $AA_VACTB[X]
Axis velocity in basic coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaVactM $AA_VACTM[X]
Axis velocity in machine coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaVc $AA_VC[x] x = Axis

Additive correction value for path feed or axial feed
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-159
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

ackSafeMeasPos
Confirmation of SI actual position
0 = not confirmed
0x00AC = confirmed
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actCouppPosOffset $VA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis to a leading axis / leading spindle (actual value)
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate for positioning axes. Actual value of single axis feed for additional axes.
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actIndexAxPosNo
Current indexing position number
0 = no indexing position
>0 = indexing position number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actSpeedRel
Actual value of rotary speed (referring to the maximum speed in %; for 611D in MD1401), for linear drives actual value of
the velocity.
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actValResol
Actual value resolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

amSetupState
State variable of the PI Service Automatic set-up of an asynchronous motor
0 = inactive
1 = wait for PLC enable
2 = wait for key NC-start
3 = active
4 = stopped by Servo + fine code in the upper byte
5 = stopped by 611D + fine code in the upper byte
6 = stopped by NCK + fine code in the upper byte
- 0 0 0xff06 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

axComp
Sum of axis-specific compensation values (CEC Cross Error compensation and temperature compensation). The
physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

axisActiveInChan
Flag indicating whether axis is active in this channel
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-160 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of the axis-specific feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = inch/min
2 = degree/min
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

chanAxisNoGap
Display of existing axis, i.e. no axis gap in channel.
0: Axis does not exist
1: Axis does exist
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

chanNoAxisIsActive
Channel number in which the channel axis is currently active
0 = axis is not assigned to any channel
1 to maxnumChannels (Area.:N / Module:Y) = channel number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdContrPos
Desired value of position after fine interpolation
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdCouppPosOffset $AA_COUP_OFFS[x] x = Axis S3

Position offset of an axis referring to the leading axis / leading spindle (desired value)
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0 360 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdFeedRate
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate, if axis is a positioning axis. Single axis feedrate if the axis is an additional axis.
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdSpeedRel
Desired value of rotary speed. (referring to the max. speed in %; for 611D in MD 1401). For linear motors actual value of
velocity.
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

contrConfirmActive
Controller enable
0 = no controller enable
1 = controller enable
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-161
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

contrMode
Identifier for controller mode servo
0 = position control
1 = speed control
2 = stop
3 = park
4 = follow-up

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

displayAxis $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit16-31

Identifier indicating whether axis is displayed by MMC as a machine axis.
0= Do not display at all
0xFFFF = Always display everything
bit 0 = Display in actual-value window
bit 1 = Display in reference point window
bit 2 = Display in Preset / Basic offset / Scratching
bit 3 = Display in handwheel selection
- 0xFFFF 0 0xFFFF UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

distPerDriveRevol
Distance per revolution. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

drive2ndTorqueLimit
2nd torque limit. With linear motors: 2nd force limit
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveActMotorSwitch
Actual motor wiring (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveActParamSet
Number of the actual drive parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveClass1Alarm
Message ZK1 drive alarm
0 = no alarm set
1= alarm set (fatal error occured)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveContrMode
Control mode of drive
0 = current control
1 = speed control
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-162 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

driveCoolerTempWarn
Heatsink temperature monitoring
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveDesMotorSwitch
Motor wiring selection (star/delta)
0 = star
1 = delta
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveDesParamSet
Desired parameter set of the drive
- 1 8 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveFastStop
Ramp-function generator rapid stop
0 = not stopped
1 = stopped
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveFreqMode
I/F mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveImpulseEnabled
Enable inverter impulse (checkback signal to impulseEnable)
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveIndex
Drive assignment (logical drive number)
0 = drive does not exist
1 to 15 = logical drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveIntegDisable
Integrator disable
0 = not disabled
1 = disabled
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveLinkVoltageOk
State of the DC link voltage
0 = OK
1 = not OK
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-163
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

driveMotorTempWarn
Motor temperature warning
0 = temperature OK
1 = overtemperature
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveNumCrcErrors
CRC errors on the drive bus
(transmission errors when writing data to the 611D; values may range up to FFFFH)
0 = no error
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveParked
Parking axis
0 = no parking axis
1 = parking axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

drivePowerOn
Drive switched on
0 = drive not switched on
1 = drive switched on
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveProgMessages
Configurable messages (via machine data)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveReady
Drive ready
0 = drive not ready
1 = drive ready
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveRunLevel
Current state reached during the boot process
(range: coarse state (0 to 5) * 100 + fine state (up to 22)
Booting the firmware ---> 0 XX
entering the configuration ---> 1XX
hardware-init, communication-init
loading, converting data ---> 2XX
changing bus addressing ---> 3XX
preparing synchronization ---> 4XX
activating interrupt ---> 519

XX ==> fine state

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-164 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

driveSetupMode
Set-up mode
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

driveSpeedSmoothing
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary speed, for linear drives: smoothing the desired value of the velocity
0 = no smoothing
1 = smoothing
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

effComp1
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 1. The value results from: temperature compensation, backlash
compensation, quadrant error compensation, beam sag compensation, leadscrew error compensation. The physical unit
is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

effComp2
Sum of the compensation values for encoder 2. The value results from: temperature compensation, backlash
compensation, quadrant error compensation, beam sag compensation, leadscrew error compensation. The physical unit
is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

encChoice
Active encoder
0 = does not exist
1 = encoder 1
2 = encoder 2
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

fctGenState
State of the function generator
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

feedRateOvr
Feedrate override (only if axis is a positioning axis)
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

focStat $AA_FOC[x]
Current status of "Travel with limited torque" function
0-2
0: FOC not active
1: FOC modal active (programming of FOCON[])
2: FOC non-modal active (programming of FOC[])
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-165
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

fxsInfo $VA_FXS_INFO[Achse]
Additional information on travel to fixed stop if
$VA_FXS[]=2, or OPI variable /C/SEMA/fxsStat=2.
0 No additional information available
1 No approach motion programmed
2 Programmed end position reached, movement ended
3 Abort by NC RESET (Reset key)
4 Fixed stop window exited
5 Torque reduction was rejected by drive
6 PLC has canceled enable signals
- 0 0 6 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

fxsStat $AA_FXS[x] x = Axis

State after travelling to fixed stop
0 = normal control
1 = fixed stop reached
2 = failed
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to an axis
0 = no handwheel assigned
1 to 3 = handwheel number
- 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

impulseEnable
Impulse enable for drive
0 = not enabled
1 = enabled
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

index
Absolute axis index referring to machine data axis number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

isDriveUsed
One or more machine axes are assigned to each drive.
The drive can only be controlled at any one time by one of these machine axes. The machine manufacturer makes the
selection.
The status of the drive control changes dynamically.

- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

kVFactor
position control gain factor
16.667 1/s Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

lag
Following error = desired value of position after fine interpolation - actual value of position. The physical unit is defined in
measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-166 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

logDriveNo
Drive assignment (logical drive number)
0 = not available
1 to 15 = drive number
- 0 15 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

measFctState
State of the probing function
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

measPos1
Actual value of position for encoder 1. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

measPos2
Actual value of position for encoder 2. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

measPosDev
Actual position difference between the two encoders. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

measUnit
Unit for service values of the drives
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = grd
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

paramSetNo
Number of parameter set
- 1 8 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

preContrFactTorque
Feed forward control factor torque
Nm Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

preContrFactVel
Feed forward control factor velocity
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

preContrMode
Feed forward control mode
0 = inactive
1 = velocity feed forward
2 = torque feed forward
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-167
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

PRESETActive
Preset state
0 = no preset active
1 = preset active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

PRESETVal $AC_PRESET[x] x = Axis

The function PRESETON (...) programs a zero offset for an axis. The value of the offset is stored in the variable
'PRESETVal'. The variable can be overwritten by the part program and by the MMC.
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

progIndexAxPosNo
Programmed indexing position number
0 = no indexing position
>0 = indexing position number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

qecLrnIsOn
Quadrant error compensation learning active
0 = inactive
1 = Neuronal-QEC learning active
2 = Standard-QEC active
3 = Standard-QEC with adaption of the correction value active
4 = Neuronal-QEC active
5 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the measuring time active
6 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the decay time of the correction value active
7 = Neuronal-QEC with adaption of the measuring time and the decay time of the correction value active
- 0 7 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

refPtBusy
Axis is being referenced
0 = axis is not being referenced
1 = axis is being referenced
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

refPtCamNo
Reference point cam
0 = no cam approached
1 = cam 1
2 = cam 2
3 = cam 3
4 = cam 4
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-168 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

refPtStatus
Identifier indicating whether an axis is liable for reference and actually is referenced.
Note for changing axes into another channel:
In general a changable axis is only liable for reference in the channel it is presently assigned to. Thus a referenced
changable axis is announced to the channel it is presently being moved in with the value 3 (liable for reference and
referenced) and to all other channels with the value 1 (not liable for reference but referenced).

A set bit means:

Until SW release 3.1:

bit0: at least 1 measuring system has been referenced
bit1: active measuring system is liable for reference

From SW release 3.2:

bit0: active measuring system has been referenced
bit1: active measuring system is liable for reference
(The busy signal effects the state)
- Achsindex UWord r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes

safeAcceptCheckPhase
Flag for NCK-side acceptance test phase, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test phase is
present on the NCK.

0: NCK has acceptance test phase inactive = 0

0ACH: NCK has acceptance test phase active
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeAcceptTestMode
SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset in acceptance test mode
0: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms cannot be acknowledged by Reset
0ACH: Acceptance test mode: SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged by Reset
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeAcceptTestPhase
Flag for acceptance test phase
0: Acceptance test Wizard not selected, activate NCK-side alarm suppression
0ACH: Dialogs for acceptance test support selected, deactivate NCK-side alarm suppression
- 0 0 0FFH UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeAcceptTestSE
Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test. The human-machine interface starts checking the safe limit positions during the
acceptance test

0: NCK has SE acceptance test inactive = 0. The single channel SW limit positions are activated.
0ACH: NCK is to activate SE acceptance test. The single channel SW limit positions are deactivated in this way.
- 0 0 0ACH UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeAcceptTestState
Flag for acceptance test status, the human-machine interface can determine which acceptance test mode is present on
the NCK.
0: NCK has acceptance test mode inactive
0CH: Acceptance test mode not activated because SI PowerOn alarms already present.
The causes of the SI PowerOn alarms must be eliminated first.
0DH: Acceptance test mode not activated, the HMI writes invalid values in /C/SEMA/safeAcceptTestMode to the NCK.
0ACH: NCK has acceptance test mode active
- 0 0 0FFH UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-169
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

safeActPosDiff
Current actual value difference betw. NCK and drive monitoring channels
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeActVeloDiff
Current speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels
mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeActVeloLimit
Safe limit of actual speed
-1 => no actual speed limit active
>= 0 => limit of actual speed is active
mm, inch, degree, user defined -1 Double r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes

safeDesVeloLimit
Safe limit of desired speed
-1 => no desired speed limit active
>= 0 => desired speed limit is active
mm, inch, degree, user defined -1 Double r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes

safeFctEnable
Safe operation active
0 = not activated
1 = activated
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeInputSig
Safe input signals of the axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeInputSig2
Safe input signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes

safeInputSigDrive
Safe input signals of the drive
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeInputSigDrive2
Safe input signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes

safeMaxVeloDiff
Maximum speed difference between NCK and drive monitoring channels since last NCK Reset
mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-170 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

safeMeasPos $VA_IS[x] x = Axis

Safe actual position of the axis. The physical unit is defined in the variable measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeMeasPosDrive
Safe actual position of drive. The physical unit is defined in measUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeOutputSig
Safe output signals of the axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeOutputSig2
Safe output signals part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes

safeOutputSigDrive
Safe output signals of the drive
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

safeOutputSigDrive2
Safe output signals of the drive part 2
- 0 0xffff UWord r
Multi-line: no numMachAxes

safeStopOtherAxis
Stop on another axis
0: No stop on another axis
1: Stop on another axis
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
1 = positioning axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

subSpec T1
Subspecification
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

torqLimit
Torque limitation value (referring to the nominal value of the drive). For linear motors: force limitation value.
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-171
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

traceState1
State of trace channel 1
0 = idle state
1 = recording started
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
4 = recording aborted
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

traceState2
State of trace channel 2
0 = idle state
1 = recording started
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
4 = recording aborted
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

traceState3
State of trace channel 3
0 = idle state
1 = recording started
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
4 = recording aborted
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

traceState4
State of trace channel 4
0 = idle state
1 = recording started
2 = trigger reached
3 = recording ended
4 = recording aborted
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

trackErrContr
Position controller difference (actual value / desired value of position)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

trackErrDiff
Contour deviation (difference actual value of position and calculated dynamical model)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-172 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

vaDistTorque $VA_DIST_TORQUE[Achse]
Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end, York)
% 0 -100 100 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

vaDpe $VA_DPE[x1]
Status of power enable of a machine axis
0-1
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

vaIm $VA_IM[x]
Encoder actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured
active measuring system)
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

vaIm1 $VA_IM1[x]
Actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured encoder 1)
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

vaIm2 $VA_IM2[x]
Actual value in the machine coordinate system (measured encoder 2)
- 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

vaTorqueAtLimit $VA_TORQUE_AT_LIMIT[Achse]
Status "effective torque equals specified torque limit"

0: Effective torque lower than torque limit

1: Effective torque has reached torque limit
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

vaVactm $VA_VACTM[x] x = Axis

Axis velocity actual value on the load side in the MCS
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-173
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

1.5.3 Area C, Mod. SGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset memory

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/GeometricAxis/...

All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the
workpiece coordinate system are included in module SGA. Supplementary
information can be found in module SEGA. The individual variables are defined as
arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the current
channel).The variable "name" in module SGA with the line index in question
identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.

With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the
geo-axis no. instead of via the channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis

The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be found in
"numMachAxes" in module Y in area C.

actIncrVal
Active INC weighting of the axis
0 = INC_10000
1 = INC_1000
2 = INC_100
3 = INC_10
4 = INC_1
5 = INC_VAR
6 = INC_JOG_CONT
7 = no increment mode has been set
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actProgPos
Programmed position, actual value. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasePos $AA_IW[x] x = Axis

Tool base position. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolEdgeCenterPos
Center point of a cutting edge. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (from this module)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdProgPos
Programmed position, desired value. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-174 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

cmdToolBasePos
Tool base position, desired value . Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdToolEdgeCenterPos
Position of the cutting edge center point. Physical unit is defined in variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

extUnit
Current physical unit of the related geometry axis or auxiliary axis
0 = mm
1 = inch
2 = degree
3 = indexing position
4 = userdef
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

name
Axis name
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

progDistToGo
Programmed position, distance-to-go. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

progREPOS
Programmed position, REPOS. The physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

status
Axis state
0 = travel command in plus direction
1 = travel command in minus direction
2 = exact stop coarse reached
3 = exact stop fine reached
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

subType
Axis type geometry or auxiliary axis
0 = auxiliary axis
1 = geometry axis
2 = orientation axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

toolBaseDistToGo
Tool base distance-to-go. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-175
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

toolBaseREPOS
Tool base REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

toolEdgeCenterDistToGo
Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go. Physical unit results from the variable extUnit (in this module)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

toolEdgeCenterREPOS
Center point of the cutting edge REPOS. Physical unit is defined in the variable extUnit (in this module).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

varIncrVal
Setable value for INC_VAR. The physical unit depends on whether the axis is rotary or linear. Linear axes: 1mm rotary
axes: 1/1000 degrees
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

1.5.4 Area C, Mod. SEGA: State data: Geometry axes in tool offset
memory (extension of SGA)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/GeometricAxis/...

All status data that are dependent on machine movement and specified in the
workpiece coordinate system are combined in module SGA. Supplementary
information can be found in module SEGA. The individual variables are defined as
arrays where the line index is the number of the axis (assigned to the current
channel).The variable "name" in module SGA with the line index in question
identifies the axis.
The assignment of the line indices in modules SGA and SEGA is identical.

With SW 5.2 and later, OPI modules SGA and SEGA can be addressed via the
geo-axis no. instead of via the channel axis no.:
Line index 1001: 1st geo-axis
Line index 1002: 2nd geo-axis
Line index 1003: 3rd geo-axis

The number of channel axes (geometry, special axes and spindles) can be found in
"numMachAxes" in module Y in area C.

aaDelt $AA_DELT[x] x = Axis

Stored axial distance-to-go in the WCS after axial delete-distance-to-go DELDTG(axis) for synchronous actions (Note: for
SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-176 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

aaDtbw $AA_DTBW[x] x = Aaxis

Axial distance from the beginning of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous motion
(Note: for SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaDtepw $AA_DTEPW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance-to-go for infeed during oscillation in the WCS (Note: for SYNACT only)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaDtew $AA_DTEW[x] x = Axis

Axial distance to the end of the block in the WCS for positioning and synchronous axes for synchronous actions (Note:
for SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaIbCorr $AA_IB_CORR
Current BCS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaIwCorr $AA_IW_CORR
Current WCS setpoint value of an axis including override components
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMw $AA_MW[x] x = Axis

Latched probe position retransformed in the WCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMw1 $AA_MW1[Achse]
Access to measurement result of trigger event 1 in the WCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMw2 $AA_MW2[Achse]
Access to measurement result of trigger event 2 in the WCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMw3 $AA_MW3[Achse]
Access to measurement result of trigger event 3 in the WCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

aaMw4 $AA_MW4[Achse]
Access to measurement result of trigger event 4 in the WCS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-177
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

aaTOff $AA_TOFF[ ]
Value of the superimposed motions which have been retracted in the individual tool directions via $AA_TOFF[ ]

mm, inch, user defined 0 Double r

Multi-line: yes 1000 + geo axis number 1000 + numGeoAxes

aaTOffLimit $AA_TOFF_LIMIT[ ]
Limiting value of the superimposed motion has been achieved in the tool direction via $AA_TOFF[ ]

0 : Limiting value not achieved

1 : Limiting value achieved in positive direction
11 : Limiting value achieved in negative direction
- 0 0 11 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1000 + geo axis number 1000 + numGeoAxes

aaTOffPrepDiff $AA_TOFF_PREP_DIFF[ ]
Difference between the current value of $AA_TOFF[] and the value as the current block was prepared.

mm, inch, user defined 0 Double r

Multi-line: yes 1000 + geo axis number 1000 + numGeoAxes

aaTOffVal $AA_TOFF_VAL[ ]
Integrated value of the superimposed motions which have been retracted in the individual tool directions via $AA_TOFF[
]

mm, inch, user defined 0 Double r

Multi-line: yes 1000 + geo axis number 1000 + numGeoAxes

aaVactW $AA_VACTW[X]
Axis velocity in workpiece coordinate system
mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

acRetpoint $AC_RETPOINT[x] x = Axis

Return point on the contour for repositioning
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actDistToGoEns
Distance-to-go in the SZS based on the programmed position
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actFeedRate S5
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate, if the axis is a positioning axis.
mm/min, inch/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actProgPosBKS $AA_IBORI
Actual value of geometry and orientation axes in basic coordinate system
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasePosBasic
Base position of the active tool in the base system (inch/metrical)
mm, inch, degree, user defined 0.0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-178 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

actToolBasePosBasicDiam
Corresponds to actToolBasePosBasic with diameter conversion
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasePosDiam
Corresponds to /C/SGA/actToolBasePos with diameter conversion
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasPosBN $AA_IBN[x] x=Axis

Actual tool base position in relation to basic zero point
(SGA:/C/SGA/actToolBasePos without progr. frame and without settable frames)
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasPosBNDiam
Corresponds to actToolBasPosBN with diameter conversion
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasPosEN $AA_IEN[x] x = Axis

Base position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero point
(SGA:/C/SGA/actToolBasePos without programmed frame)
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasPosENitc
corresponds to actToolBasPosEN with $DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION=1
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolBasPosENjmp
corresponds to actToolBasPosEN with $DISPLAY_MODE_POSITION=0
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
Actual position value in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length but without tool radius
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

axisActiveInChan
Flag indicating whether axis is active in this channel
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

axisFeedRateUnit
Unit of axial feedrate
0 = mm/min
1 = mm/rev
2 = inch/min
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-179
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

cmdFeedRate
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate for a positioning axis.
mm/min, inch/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS
Programmed position for block search with calculation
in relation to the WOS frame as center-point path, i.e. with tool length
but without tool radius
Note: This variable is not available for the variable service,
but only for logging in connection with block search events!
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

diamonInfo
Information whether position values are shown as diameter or radius values.
This information is relevant for the following variables of the blocks SGA/SEGA:

- /C/SGA/cmdToolBasePos
- /C/SGA/toolBaseDistToGo
- /C/SGA/toolBaseREPOS
- cmdToolEdgeCenterPos
- actToolEdgeCenterPos
- toolEdgeCenterDistToGo
- toolEdgeCenterREPOS
- cmdProgPos
- actProgPos
- progDistToGo
- progREPOS
- actToolBasPosEN
- cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS
- /C/SEGA/actToolEdgeCenterPosEns
- actToolBasPosBN
- cmdToolBasPosENS
- actProgPosBKS
- actToolBasePosDiam
- actToolBasePosBasicDiam
- actToolBasPosBNDiam
0: Diameter programming inactive
1: Diameter programming active
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

displayAxis $MC_DISPLAY_AXIS Bit0-15

Identifier indicating whether the axis is displayed by the MMC as a geometry or auxiliary axis.
0= Do not display at all
0xFFFF = Always display everything
bit 0 = Display in actual-value window
bit 1 = Display in reference point window
bit 2 = Display in Preset / Basic offset / Scratching
bit 3 = Display in handwheel selection
- 0xFFFF 0 0xFFFF UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

drfVal $AC_DRF[x] x = Axis

DRF value. The physical unit is defined in /C/SGA/extUnit (in module SGA).
mm, inch, degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-180 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

dummy
Added for alignment only, row index may be used later
- UWord
Multi-line: no

feedRateOvr
Feedrate override if axis is a positioning axis. Multiplying override component which is active in addition to the override
factors programmed, set via handwheel or via PLC.
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

geoAxisNr
Number of the geometry axis

1 - 3 for geometry axes

0 for non-geometry axes
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

handwheelAss
Number of handwheel assigned to axis
0 = no handwheel assigned
1 to 3 = handwheel number
- 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

index
Absolute axis index referring to machine data axis number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

motEnd $AA_MOTEND
Current motion end criterion for single-axis interpolation
1 = Motion end with exact stop FINE
2 = Motion end with exact stop COARSE
3 = Motion end with exact stop IPO Stop
4 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion
5 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion with tolerance window with reference to setpoint
6 = Block change in braking ramp of axis motion with tolerance window with reference to actual value
- 1 1 6 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

spec
Axis specification
0 = path axis
1 = positioning axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

subSpec MD 30500: INDEX_AX_ASSIGN_POS_TAB T1

Subspecification, identifies whether an axis is an indexing axis
0 = normal axis
1 = indexing axis
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-181
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

type
Axis type
1 = linear axis
2 = rotary axis
3 = spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Axis index numMachAxes

1.5.5 Area C, Mod. SSP: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/Spindle/...

All status data that refer to the spindle are combined in the module SSP. The
individual variables are defined as arrays where the row index is the number of the
spindle (assigned to the current channel). The spindle can be identified by reading
the variables "name" or "index" in the same module with the respective row index.
The number of spindles can be read from "numSpindles" in the module Y in the
area C.

acConstCutS $AC_CONSTCUT_S[n]
Current constant cutting rate
m/min, ft/min, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

acSMode $AC_SMODE[x]
Spindle mode
0: No spindle present in channel or spindle is active in another channel or
is being used by PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Open-loop speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

actGearStage
Actual gear stage of spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

actSpeed $AA_S[x] x = SpindleNo

Spindle speed actual value
rev/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

channelNo
Number of channel in which spindle is configured
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-182 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

cmdAngPos
Spindle position (SPOS)
Degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

cmdConstCutSpeed
Constant cutting speed of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from SSP:cmdSpeed
only if G96 is active

mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r

Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

cmdGearStage
Requested gear stage
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

cmdGwps
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

cmdSpeed $P_S[x] x = SpindleNo

Spindle speed desired value
rev/min , m/min Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

driveLoad
Load
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

gwpsActive {$GWPS}
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is made
via area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-183
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

pSMode $P_SMODE
Last programmed spindle mode
0: No spindle configured in channel or spindle is active in another channel
or in use by the PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

pSModeS $P_SMODE
Last programmed spindle mode with block search
0: No spindle configured in channel or spindle is active in another channel
or in use by the PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

speedLimit
Current speed limitation for spindle
rev/min , m/min Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

status
Spindle state

Bit0 = following spindle

Bit1 = leading spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-184 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

turnState $AC_SDIR[x] x = SpindleNo

State of spindle rotation
value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
1 = counter-clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
4 = counter-clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Spindle index numSpindles

1.5.6 Area C, Mod. FU: Channel-specific settable frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/UserFrame/...

This only applies if $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES > 0 and

$MN_MM_NUM_GLOBAL_USER_FRAMES = 0, otherwise all settable frames
have an NCU-global configuration.

The following frame indices are possible:

0 = G500
1 = G54
2 = G55
3 = G56
4 = G57
5 = G505
6 = G506
:
n = G5n
:
99 = G599

The maximum frame index is: $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES - 1

The PI service SETUFR has to be called in order to activate the settable frames.

linShift $P_UIFR[x,y,TR] x=FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Translation of settable zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES *
number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

linShiftFine $P_UIFR[x,y,SI] x=FrameNo,y=Axis

Fine offset with frames, expansion of basic frames and settable frames
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES *
number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-185
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

mirrorImgActive $P_UIFR[x,y,MI] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Mirroring enabled in settable zero offset
0 = mirroring not active
1 = mirroring active
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES *
number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

rotation $P_UIFR[x,y,RT] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Rotation of settable zero offset
Degree Double wr
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES *
number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

scaleFact $P_UIFR[x,y,SC] x = FrameNo,y=Axis PA

Scaling factor of settable zero offset
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis $MC_MM_NUM_USER_FRAMES *
number (numGeoAxes + numAuxAxes)

1.5.7 Area C, Mod. SSP2: State data: Spindle

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/LogicalSpindle/...

All state data that refer to a spindle, if a spindle converter (logical spindles) is active

acConstCutS $AC_CONSTCUT_S[n]
Current constant cutting rate
m/min, ft/min, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

acSMode $AC_SMODE[x]
Spindle mode
0: No spindle present in channel or spindle is active in another channel or
is being used by PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Open-loop speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 1 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

actGearStage
Actual gear stage of spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

actSpeed
Spindle speed actual value
rev/min, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-186 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

channelNo
Number of channel in which spindle is configured
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdAngPos
Spindle position (SPOS)
Degree, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdConstCutSpeed
Constant cutting speed of the master spindle. The requested value for the master spindle differs from SSP:cmdSpeed
only if G96 is active

mm/min, inch/min, user defined 0.0 Double r

Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdGearStage
Requested gear stage
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdGwps
Programmed SUG desired value (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel")
m/s, ft/s Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

cmdSpeed
Spindle speed desired value
rev/min , m/min Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

driveLoad
Load
% Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

gwpsActive {$GWPS}
SUG programming active (SUG is the function "constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel)
0 = not active
1 = active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

index
Absolute axis index referred to MD
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

name
Spindle name
Note: If several logical spindles are referred to one physical spindle with active spindle conversion and access is made
via area N of module SSP2, then the name of the first suitable logical spindle is output.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-187
1 Variables 03/2006
1.5 State data of axes

namePhys
Name of assigned physical spindle, identical to "name" variable.
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

opMode
Spindle mode
0 = spindle mode
1 = oscillation mode (gear step changeover)
2 = positioning mode
3 = synchronous mode
4 = axis mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

pSMode $P_SMODE
Last programmed spindle mode
0: No spindle configured in channel or spindle is active in another channel
or in use by the PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

pSModeS $P_SMODE
Last programmed spindle mode with block search
0: No spindle configured in channel or spindle is active in another channel
or in use by the PLC (FC18) or by synchronized actions.
1: Speed control mode
2: Positioning mode
3: Synchronous mode
4: Axis mode
- 0 4 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

speedLimit
Current speed limitation for spindle
rev/min , m/min Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

speedOvr
Spindle override
% Double r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

spindleType
Spindle type
0 = master spindle
1 = no master spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-188 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.5 State data of axes

status
Spindle state

Bit0 = following spindle

Bit1 = leading spindle
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

turnState
State of spindle rotation
value range to be read via BTSS variable
0 = clockwise
1 = counter-clockwise
2 = stop
value range to be read via $ variable
3 = clockwise
4 = counter-clockwise
5 = stop
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes logical spindle index numSpindlesLog

1.5.8 Area C, Mod. FA: Active channel-specific frames

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/ActualFrame/...

The following frame indices are available:

0: ACTFRAME = currently resulting work offset

1: IFRAME = current settable work offset
2: PFRAME = current programmable work offset
3: EXTFRAME = current external work offset
4: TOTFRAME = current total work offset = sum of ACTFRAME and EXTFRAME
5: ACTBFRAME = current total base frame
6: SETFRAME = current 1st system frame (set actual value, scratching)
7: EXTSFRAME = current 2nd system frame (set actual value, scratching)
8: PARTFRAME = current 3rd system frame (TCARR and PAROT with orientable
toolholder)
9: TOOLFRAME = current 4th system frame (TOROT and TOFRAME)
10: MEASFRAME = result frame for workpiece and tool measurement
11: WPFRAME = current 5th system frame (workpiece reference points) as of
SW 6.3
12: CYCFRAME = current 6th system frame (cycles) as of SW 6.3

The maximum frame index is 12.

linShift $P_PFRAME[x,TR] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Translation of an active zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
mm, inch, user defined Double r
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis 11 * numMachAxes
number

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-189
1 Variables 03/2006
1.6 State data of drives

mirrorImgActive $P_PFRAME[x,MI] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Mirroring enabled in an active zero offset
0 = mirroring not active
1 = mirroring active
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis 11 * numMachAxes
number

rotation $P_PFRAME[x,RT] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Rotation of an active zero offset
Degree Double r
Multi-line: yes Frame index * numMachAxes + axis 11 * numMachAxes
number

scaleFact $P_PFRAME[x,SC] / $P_ACTFRAME / $P_IFRAME PA

Scaling factor of an active zero offset
- Double r
Multi-line: yes Frameindex * numMachAxes + axis 11 * numMachAxes
number

1.5.9 Area C, Mod. FE: Channel-specific external frame

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/ExternFrame/...

There is exactly one external frame defined by the PLC.

The maximum frame index is: 0

linShift $AA_ETRANS[x] x = FrameNo PA

Translation of external zero offset (the physical unit is defined in basicLengthUnit in module Y in area N).
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Geo axis number numGeoAxes

1.6 State data of drives

1.6.1 Area H, Mod. S: Drive-specific state data (MSD)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/DriveHsa/State/...

During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data may
change during operation. To distinguish those from system variables, they are
classified as state data.

A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-190 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.6 State data of drives

Attention: The HS module cannot be addressed with MMC100/EBF/OP030

actualCurrent MD 1708: ACTUAL_CURRENT IAD

Actual value of the smoothened current (referring to the maximum current of the drive)
CAUTION: The variable cannot be configured by MMC100.
% -100000,0 10000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

actualSpeed MD 1701: ACTUAL_SPEED IAD

Actual value of rotary speed (motor)
CAUTION: The variable cannot be configured by MMC100.
rev/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

cl1PoImage MD 1731: CL1_PO_IMAGE IAD

Image of the ZK1PO register. The format is hexadecimal
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC 100
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no

cl1ResImage MD 1732: CL1_RES_IMAGE IAD

Image of the ZK1RES register. The format is hexadecimal
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC 100!
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no

crcErrorCount MD 1720: CRC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

CRC-parameter for diagnosis. Number is displayed in hexadecimal format.
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no

desiredSpeed MD 1706: DESIRED_SPEED IAD

Desired value of rotary speed. With linear motors: desired velocity
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
rev/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

encTypeDirect MD 1791: ENC_TYPE_DIRECT IAD

Direct mounted encoder used for reading in the actual values
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

encTypeMotor MD 1790: ENC_TYPE_MPTOR IAD

Motor mounted ( indirect ) encoder used for reading in the actual values.
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

firmwareDate MD 1798: FIRMWARE_DATE IAD

Firmware date
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-191
1 Variables 03/2006
1.6 State data of drives

firmwareVersion MD 1799: FIRMWARE_VERSION IAD

Firmware version
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

linkVoltage MD 1701: LINK_VOLTAGE IAD

Link voltage
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
0 to 800
V 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

load MD 1722: LOAD IAD

Load. Display is in hexadecimal format
Attention: Variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
% -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

motorTemperature MD 1702: MOTOR_TEMPERATURE IAD

Motor temperature
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
C 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

operatingMode IAD
Operating mode
Attention: Variable cannot be configured By the MMC100!
Bit0 = VSA
Bit4 = HSA
Bit8 = AM control
Bit9 = AM closed loop control
Bit12 = U/f-operation mode
bits exclude one another (except bit 12)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

pblVersion MD 1797: PBL_VERSION IAD

Data version
Attention: The variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

safeStopFDiagnosis MD 1395 : SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS

Drive error code for alarm 300911
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no

terminalState MD 1700: TERMINAL_STATE IAD

State of the binary inputs (displayed in hexadecimal format)
Attention: This variable cannot be configured by the MMC100!
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-192 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.6 State data of drives

1.6.2 Area V, Mod. S: Drive-specific status data (FDD)

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/DriveVsa/State/...

During NC operation different internal states occur and system-specific data may
change during operation. To distinguish those from system variables, they are
classified as state data.

A distinction is made between:

- NCK-specific state data
- Mode-group-specific state data
- Channel-specific state data
- Drive-specific state data (FDD)
- Drive-specific state data (MSD)

No cyclic service may be set up on variables in this module. Only single variable
access is permitted.

actualCurrent MD 1708: ACTUAL_CURRENT IAD

Actual value of the smoothened current (referring to the maximum current of the drive)
% -10000,0 10000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

actualSpeed MD 1707: ACTUAL_SPEED IAD

Actual value of the rotary speed, actual velocity for linear drive (motor)
rev/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

cl1PoImage MD 1731: CL1_PO_IMAGE IAD

ZK1PO register image. Hexadecimal numerical representation
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no

cl1ResImage MD 1732: CL1_RES_IMAGE IAD

ZK1RES register image. Hexadecimal numerical representation
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no

crcErrorCount MD 1720: CRC_DIAGNOSIS IAD

CRC diagnostic parameter. Hexadecimal numerical representation
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: no

desiredSpeed MD 1706: DESIRED_SPEED IAD

Speed setpoint
rev/min , m/min -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

encTypeDirect MD 1791: ENC_TYPE_DIRECT IAD

Measuring circuit type of direct measuring system
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-193
1 Variables 03/2006
1.6 State data of drives

encTypeMotor MD 1790: ENC_TYPE_MOTOR IAD

Measuring circuit type of indirect measuring system
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

firmwareDate MD 1798: FIRMWARE_DATE IAD

Firmware date
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

firmwareVersion MD 1799: FIRMWARE_VERSION IAD

Firmware version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

linkVoltage MD 1701: LINK_VOLTAGE IAD

DC-link voltage
V 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

load MD 1722: LOAD IAD

Utilization: Represented in hexadecimal format
% -100000,0 100000,0 Float r
Multi-line: no

motorTemperature MD 1702: MOTOR_TEMPERATURE IAD

Motor temperature
C 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

operatingMode IAD
Operating mode
Bit0 = FDD
Bit4 = MSD
Bit8 = Open-loop AM control
Bit9 = Closed-loop AM control
Bit12 = V/Hz mode
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

pblVersion MD 1797: PBL_VERSION IAD

Data version
- 0 32767 UWord r
Multi-line: no

safeStopFDiagnosis MD 1395 : SAFE_STOP_F_DIAGNOSIS

Drive error code for alarm 300911
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no

terminalState MD 1700: TERMINAL_STATE IAD

State of the binary inputs (in hexadecimal format)
- 0x0 0x7FFF UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-194 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.1 Area T, Mod. TO: Tool edge data: Offset data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Compensation/...

The data module TO is organized as a two-dimensional variable array.

The module contains the tool edge offset data for all tools. Each element can be
addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the offset data for all cutting
edges of a tool are located in one column. The assignment of a tool to a T-number
is given in the module "Tool directory" (TV) in the related area T. If a non-existent
tool number is entered for the column index the request is negatively
acknowledged.
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge and
the number of edges on a tool:

maxZeilenindex = numCuttEdgeParams * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)

The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams" is given in module

Y in area N. The number of cutting edges "/T/TV/numCuttEdges" is always tool-
specific and is given in the module TV in associated area T.

If necessary, several rows can be addressed, so that in one request, for example,
all tool edge offset data of a single tool can be read. The offset values of the tool
edges are all of the same data type and have the same physical unit.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-195
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

cuttEdgeParam $TC_DPCEx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z = EdgeNo

Offset value parameter and edge list with D numbers for a tool
1st section: Offset value parameter for a tool edge:
The meaning of each parameter depends on the tool type. At present 25 parameters are reserved for each tool edge
(however only some of them are used). To be flexible for future extensions use the variable 'numCuttEdgeParams' rather
than the fixed number 25 for the number of parameters.
A detailed description of tool parameters can be found in the documentation 'Tool Offset (W1)', Section "Tool edge". The
following list is a summary of the tool edge parameters:
Parameter 1: Geometry -- tool type ($TC_DP1)
Parameter 2: Geometry -- tool point direction ($TC_DP2)
Parameter 3: Geometry -- length 1 ($TC_DP3)
Parameter 4: Geometry -- length 2 ($TC_DP4)
Parameter 5: Geometry -- length 3 ($TC_DP5)
Parameter 6: Geometry -- radius ($TC_DP6)
Parameter 7: Geometry -- corner radius (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP7)
Parameter 8: Geometry -- length 4 (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP8)
Parameter 9: Geometry -- length 5 ($TC_DP9)
Parameter 10: Geometry -- angle 1 ($TC_DP10)
Parameter 11: Geometry -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP11)
Parameter 12: Wear -- length 1 ($TC_DP12)
Parameter 13: Wear -- length 2 ($TC_DP13)
Parameter 14: Wear -- length 3 ($TC_DP14)
Parameter 15: Wear -- radius ($TC_DP15)
Parameter 16: Wear -- slot width b / rounding radius ($TC_DP16)
Parameter 17: Wear -- proj. length k ($TC_DP17)
Parameter 18: Wear -- length 5 ($TC_DP18)
Parameter 19: Wear -- angle 1 ($TC_DP19)
Parameter 20: Wear -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP20)
Parameter 21: Adapter -- length 1 ($TC_DP21)
Parameter 22: Adapter -- length 2 ($TC_DP22)
Parameter 23: Adapter -- length 3 ($TC_DP23)
Parameter 24: Relief angle ($TC_DP24)
Parameter 25: Manual Turn: Cutting rate ($TC_DP25)
Shopmill: Bit-coded value for different states of tools of type 1xx and 2xx ($TC_DP25)
All parameters up to 25, that are not listed, are reserved.

2nd section: edgeDNo (SW 5.1 and later), associated optional D numbers of edges:
-1: No edge
1 .. maxDNo: Edge exists, associated D number, only when "any D numbers" function is activated
(maxnumCuttEdges_Tool < maxCuttingEdgeNo)
Edge No.: 1 to maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, when edge exists, but when "Assignment of any D numbers" function
is not activated on the NC.
0: No D number assigned/assignment cancelled. (In this case, OPI deviates from NCK variable
$TC_DPCE....
$TC_DPCE = edge number, D = offset number D.
If the D number of an edge (variable of module TO) has been set to invalid, the value $TC_DPCE remains unaffected.
The edge number specified in the description of the row index matches parameter $TC_DPCE.
The variable D No. defined in the module matches the second index in the offset-specific parameters of type
$TC_DPx[T,D],... and others; with x=1,....25.).

Important: This variable is called "edgeData" in the MMC102.

The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes For edge offset value parameters: (numCuttEdgeParams + 1) *
(edgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
+ ParameterNo
For D numbers:
((numCuttEdgeParams *
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) + EdgeNo)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-196 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

edgeData $TC_DPx[y,z] x = ParamNo y = ToolNo z = EdgeNo

Offset value parameter and edge list with D numbers for a tool
1st section: Offset value parameter for a tool edge:
The meaning of each parameter depends on the tool type. At present 25 parameters are reserved for each tool edge
(however only some of them are used). To be flexible for future extensions use the variable 'numCuttEdgeParams' rather
than the fixed number 25 for the number of parameters.
A detailed description of tool parameters can be found in the documentation Tool Offset (W1), Section "Tool edge". The
following list is a summary of the tool edge parameters:
Parameter 1: Geometry -- tool type ($TC_DP1)
Parameter 2: Geometry -- tool point direction ($TC_DP2)
Parameter 3: Geometry -- length 1 ($TC_DP3)
Parameter 4: Geometry -- length 2 ($TC_DP4)
Parameter 5: Geometry -- length 3 ($TC_DP5)
Parameter 6: Geometry -- radius ($TC_DP6)
Parameter 7: Geometry -- corner radius (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP7)
Parameter 8: Geometry -- length 4 (tool type 700; slotting saw) ($TC_DP8)
Parameter 9: Geometry -- length 5 ($TC_DP9)
Parameter 10: Geometry -- angle 1 ($TC_DP10)
Parameter 11: Geometry -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP11)
Parameter 12: Wear -- length 1 ($TC_DP12)
Parameter 13: Wear -- length 2 ($TC_DP13)
Parameter 14: Wear -- length 3 ($TC_DP14)
Parameter 15: Wear -- radius ($TC_DP15)
Parameter 16: Wear -- slot width b / rounding radius ($TC_DP16)
Parameter 17: Wear -- proj. length k ($TC_DP17)
Parameter 18: Wear -- length 5 ($TC_DP18)
Parameter 19: Wear -- angle 1 ($TC_DP19)
Parameter 20: Wear -- angle 2 for tapered milling tools ($TC_DP20)
Parameter 21: Adapter -- length 1 ($TC_DP21)
Parameter 22: Adapter -- length 2 ($TC_DP22)
Parameter 23: Adapter -- length 3 ($TC_DP23)
Parameter 24: Relief angle ($TC_DP24)
Parameter 25: Manual Turn: Cutting rate ($TC_DP25)
Shopmill: Bit-coded value for different states of tools of type 1xx and 2xx ($TC_DP25)
All parameters up to 25, that are not listed, are reserved.

2nd section: edgeDNo (SW 5.1 and later), associated optional D numbers of edges:
-1: No edge
1 .. maxDNo: Edge exists, associated D number, only when "any D numbers" function is activated
(maxnumCuttEdges_Tool < maxCuttingEdgeNo)
Edge No.: 1 to maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, when edge exists, but when "Assignment of any D numbers" function
is not activated on the NC.
0: No D number assigned/assignment cancelled. (In this case, OPI deviates from NCK variable
$TC_DPCE.... $TC_DPCE... contains a unique number > 32000 when a D number is not assigned.)
If the D number of an edge (variable of module TO) has been set to invalid, the value $TC_DPCE remains unaffected.
The edge number specified in the description of the row index matches parameter $TC_DPCE.
The variable D No. defined in the module matches the second index in the offset-specific parameters of type
$TC_DPx[T,D],... and others; with x=1,....25.).

Important: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC.

The value for the tool type is stored internally as an integer.

mm, inch, user defined 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes For edge offset value parameters: (numCuttEdgeParams + 1) *
(edgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
+ ParameterNo
For D numbers:
((numCuttEdgeParams *
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) + EdgeNo)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-197
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.2 Area T, Mod. TD: Tool data: General data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Data/...

In addition to the tool offset data other tool characteristics are stored for managing
the tools. The module TD contains the general data of the tools. The tool
characteristics can be addressed via individual multiple-line variables. The variable
line index corresponds to the T-number. If non-existent T-numbers are accessed,
the request is acknowledged negatively. The module Tool directory (TV) in the
associated T area shows which T-numbers are valid.

A new entry is provided for the tool monitoring mode:

Monitoring modes in toolMon:
0: No tool monitoring
1: Tool life monitoring
2: Workpiece number monitoring
4: Monitoring of edge wear parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
8: Monitoring of total offset parameters (fine, $TC_SCP..., not setup offsets
$TC_ECP...) using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)

adaptNo
Number of adapter defined by system parameter $TC_ADPx which is
supporting the tool
>0: adapter number
0: no adapter assigned
- 0 0 numMagPlacesMax UWord r
Multi-line: yes T number max. T-Nummer

duploNo $TC_TP1 FBW

Duplo number (number of replacement tool)
In the tool management each tool is explicitly defined both by its identifier and its duplo number. This means that a T-
area can only contain tool identifiers with different duplo numbers.
- T-Nummer UWord r
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

numCuttEdges $P_TOOLND[x] x = ToolNo

Number of cutting edges of a tool
- UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

toolIdent $TC_TP2 FBW

Tool identifier
- "<T-Nummer>" String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

toolInfo $TC_TP11 FBW

Tool information for MMC
Not currently assigned
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

toolInMag $A_TOOLMN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current magazine in which the tool is located
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-198 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

toolInPlace $A_TOOLMLN[x] x = ToolNo T

Current location in which the tool is located
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

toolMon $TC_TP9 FBW

Type of tool monitoring
0: no tool monitoring
1: tool life monitoring
2: no. of workpieces monitoring
4: monitoring of edge wear parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
8: monitoring of total offset parameters using wear limit (SW 5.1 and later)
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes TNo 32000

toolMyMag $A_MYMN
Owner magazine of the tool magazine from which the tool was loaded
0 = the tool is not loaded. If toollnMag is >0 at the same time,
the T number will specify a manual tool, or TMMG is not active.
- - 0 max. Nummer UWord r
eines def.
Magazins
Multi-line: yes T number max. T-Nummer

toolMyPlace $A_MYMLN
Owner magazine of the tool - Magazine location from which the tool was
loaded
0 = the tool is not loaded. If toollnPlace is >0 at the same time,
the T number will specify a manual tool, a valid magazine location number or TMMG is not active.
- - max. Nummer UWord r
def. Magazinplatz
Multi-line: yes T number max. T-Nummer

toolplace_spec $TC_TP7 FBW

Magazine location type of tool
- 9999 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

toolSearch $TC_TP10 FBW

Type of tool search for replacement tools
0: no strategy
1: next duplo no.
2: shortest path
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

toolsize_down $TC_TP6 FBW

Size downwards in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

toolsize_left $TC_TP3 FBW

Size to the left in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-199
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

toolsize_right $TC_TP4 FBW

Size to the right in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number t 32000

toolsize_upper $TC_TP5 FBW

Size upwards in half locations
- 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

toolState $TC_TP8 FBW

Tool state
0: not enabled
1: active tool (A)
2: enabled (F)
4: disabled (G)
8: measured (M)
16: prewarning limit reached (V)
32: tool being changed (W)
64: fixed location coded (P)
128: tool was in use (E)
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

1.7.3 Area T, Mod. TS: Tool edge data: Monitoring data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Supervision/...

The module TS is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The module

contains the tool edge monitoring data for all tools. Each element can be
addressed via a column and line index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. one column contains the
monitoring data for all tool edges of a tool. The assignment of a tool to a T-number
is given in the module Tool directory (TV) in the associated area T. If a non-existent
tool number is specified for the column index, the request is acknowledged
negatively.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge and
from the number of tool edges of a tool:

maxZeilenanzahl = numCuttEdgeParams_ts * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)

The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams_ts" is given in the

module Y in area N. The number of tool edges "/T/TV/numCuttEdges" is always
tool specific and can be found in the module TV in associated area T.

If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that in one request, for example,
all tool edge monitoring data of a single tool can be read. The monitoring data of
the tool edges are all of the same data type and have the same physical unit.

New tool monitoring modes "Monitoring of wear values" and "Monitoring of total
offsets":
3 new parameters are provided for these modes:
P7 = Wear prewarning limit (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-200 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)

P9 = Wear setpoint (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)

data $TC_MOP1[x,y] ...$TC_MOP15[x,y] x=ToolNo y=EdgeNo

Monitoring data per tool edge
Important: This is a two-dimensional variable.
9 parameters are available for each tool edge.
The parameters have the following meaning:
P1 = Prewarning limit service life in minutes ($TC_MOP1)
P2 = Remaining service life in minutes ($TC_MOP2)
P3 = Prewarning limit workpiece number ($TC_MOP3)
P4 = Remaining workpiece number ($TC_MOP4)
P5 = Desired service life ($TC_MOP11)
P6 = Desired workpiece number ($TC_MOP13)
P7 = Prewarning limit wear (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP5)
This parameter can only be set if bit 5 of machine data $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK has been
correspondingly set.
P8 = Remaining wear (actual value) (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP6) cannot be written
P9 = Desired wear (SW 5.1 and later) ($TC_MOP15)
This parameter can only be set if bit 5 of machine data $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK has been
correspondingly set.

Important: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!

The values for P3 to P9 are stored internally as integers.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes (ToolEdgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams_ts *
numCuttEdgeParams_ts + maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
ParameterNo

1.7.4 Area T, Mod. TU: Tool data: User-defined data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/User/...

The data module TU is defined as a two-dimensional variable array. The module

contains user-defined data for all tools. Each element can be addressed via a
column and row index:
The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The number of
tool parameters (columns) is to be found in the variable "numToolParams_tu" in
the module Y in area N.
The row index is the tool number. If non-existent tools are accessed, the request is
acknowledged negatively.
The user-defined tool data are all of the same type.

data $TC_TPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y = ToolNo FBW

User-defined tool parameters. Important: This is a two-dimensional variable. The column index is the parameter number.

Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC !
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-201
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.5 Area T, Mod. TUE: Tool edge data: User-defined data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/User/...

The data module TUE is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The

module contains user-defined tool edge data for all tools. Each element can be
addressed via a column and row index:
The column index is the tool number (T-number), i.e. the user-defined data for all
tool edges are to be found in one column.The assignment of a tool to a T-number
is to given in the module Tool directory (TV) in the associated area T. If a non-
existent tool number is specified for the column index, the request is acknowledged
negatively.
The number of rows is derived from the number of parameters per tool edge and
the number of tool edges of a tool:

maxZeilenanzahl = numCuttEdgeParams_tu * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T-number)

The number of parameters per tool edge "numCuttEdgeParams_tu" is given in the

module Y in area N. The number of tool-specific tool edges "/T/TV/numCuttEdges"
are contained in the module TV in the associated area T.
If neccessary, several lines can be addressed, so that in one request, for example,
all user-defined tool edge data of a single tool can be read. The data are all of the
same data type.

edgeData $TC_DPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=ToolNo z=EdgeNo FBW

User-defined cutting edge parameter. Important: This is a two-dimensional variable, the column index is the T number

Caution: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes (TooledgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tu *
numCuttEdgeParams_tu + maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
ParameterNo

1.7.6 Area T, Mod. TG: Tool data: Grinding-specific data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/GrindingData/...

Special tool data are required for grinding tools. These data are contained in the
module TG. They can be addressed via several multiple-row variables. The row
index corresponds to the T number. If a non-existent T-number is addressed
negative acknowledgement is returned. The module tool directory (TV) in the
associated area T shows which T-numbers are valid.

actToolWide $TC_TPG5 W4
Current width of the grinding wheel
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-202 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

conntectPar $TC_TPG2 W4
Chaining rule. This parameter ( which is bitwise defined ) specifies which tool parameters of cutting edge 2 and cutting
edge 1 are chained. If the value of any chained parameter is altered, the value of the other chained parameter is
automatically adapted.
If the following bits are set, the corresponding parameters of D1 and D2 are chained:
Bit0: tool type
Bit2: geometry length1
Bit3: geometry length2
Bit4: geometry length3
Bit11: wear length1
Bit12: wear length2
Bit13: wear length3
Bit20: base dimension/adapter dimension length1
Bit21: base dimension/adapter dimension length2
Bit22: base dimension/adapter dimension length3
The value is stored internally as an integer.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

inclAngle $TC_TPG8 W4
Angle of inclination of the inclined grinding wheel in the current plane
Degree -90 90 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

maxRotSpeed $TC_TPG6 W4
Maximum rotary speed of the grinding wheel
rev/min , m/min Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

maxTipSpeed $TC_TPG7 W4
Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding wheel
mm/min, inch/min, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

minToolDia $TC_TPG3 W4
Minimum diameter of the grinding wheel
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

minToolWide $TC_TPG4 W4
Minimum width of the grinding wheel
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

paramNrCCV $TC_TPG9 W4
Compensation parameters for the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel"). These parameters define
which compensation value is to be used for SUG, tool monitoring and centerless grinding. The value always refers to
cutting edge D1.
3: length 1
4: length 2
5: length 3
6: radius
The value is stored internally as an integer.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-203
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

spinNoDress $TC_TPG1 W4
Spindle number to which the monitoring data and the function SUG ("constant perimeter speed of grinding wheel") refer.
The value is stored internally as an integer.
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool-number T 32000

1.7.7 Area T, Mod. TMC: Magazine data: Configuration data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/MagazineConfiguration/...

Each tool magazine is configured with several parameters during start-up. These
configuration data together with the state information are combined in the module
TMC.

magBLMag W4
Number of the internal load magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

magCBCmd W4
Command for magazine execution
1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

magCBCmdState W4
Command state of the magazine (for magCBCmd)
1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

magCBIdent $TC_MAMP1 W4
Identifier of the magazine
- String[32] r
Multi-line: no

magCMCmdPar1 W4
Return variable for the command MagCBCmd
In case of a succesfull return, the return variable is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

magCMCmdPar2 W4
Return value for command MagCBCmd
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-204 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

magRPlaces W4
Total number of real magazine locations (incl. buffer and loading locations)
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

magSearch $TC_MAMP2 W4
Type of tool search. This variable is bitwise defined.
A set bit has the following meaning:
Bit0: search active tool
Bit1: search tool by shortest path
Bit8: begin search at first location (forwards)
Bit9: begin search at current location forwards
Bit10: begin search at last location (backwards)
Bit11: begin search at current location backwards
Bit12: begin search at current location symmetrically
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

magVPlaces W4
Number of defined locations for the control block
Number of virtual locations (without buffer and loading locations) for all real magazines in this area unit
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

magZWMag W4
Number of internal buffer magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

modeWearGroup $TC_MAMP3
Definition of strategies relating to wear group.
The value is bit-coded. Default setting = 0.
Effects on tool status
Bit Value Meaning
0 0 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is activated internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. One tool from
each tool group is set to the "active" state.
1 0 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains remains unchanged.
1 When a wear group is disabled internally, the status of the tools it contains changes. The "active"
status is cancelled for all tools.
"Internally" in this instance means disabling or activation due to a tool change necessitating a change in the wear group.
Activating/disabling the appropriate tools after writing system parameters or via OPI is described in Section ???.
2... Reserved
... Reserved
7... Reserved
Search strategy for next wear group:
Bit Value Meaning
8 0 Find the next possible wear group
1 Find the wear group with the next-higher group number which can be activated
9... Reserved
... Reserved
11... Reserved
Search strategy within the wear group for the tool to be activated
Bit Value Meaning
12 0 Lowest possible duplo number
1 Lowest possible magazine location number
13... Reserved
... Reserved
15... Reserved
The active wear group can be disabled completely by negating the contents of $TC_MAP9. It is also possible to disable
any selected wear group by negating $TC_MPP5 for a magazine location assigned to the relevant wear group.
See also system parameter magWearCompoundNo / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number) and wear group number of
magazine location / $TC_MPP5.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-205
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1

1.7.8 Area T, Mod. TMV: Magazine data: Directory

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/MagazineCatalogue/...

The data module TMV can be used for the following purposes:
1. To display all magazines. The most important magazine information is combined
in the module TMV. The existing magazines are sorted in ascending order
according to the magazine number without gaps. This means that variables that
are defined in this module as one-dimensional arrays contain all magazine
information without any gaps. The row index with which a specific array can be
addressed does not refer to the magazine number, it is merely a serial number.
Inserting/deleting a magazine dynamically changes the contents of a row.

2. To access magazine data in the modules TM, TP and TPM. Before accessing an
element in the above modules, the module TV should be consulted to determine
which tools have actually been defined.

magVIdent
Identifier of the magazine
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magVNo
Number of the magazine
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

numActMags
Number of magazines in the modules TMV and TM
- numMagsMax UWord r
Multi-line: no

1.7.9 Area T, Mod. TM: Magazine data: General data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/MagazineDescription/...

This module contains the information for the available tool magazines.

magActPlace $TC_MAP8
Current magazine position
Location number of tool change position
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-206 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

magCmd
Command for magazine execution
1: Find_empty location_loading
2: Tool_MOVE
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magCmdPar1
Command parameter of the magazine
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the magazine number.
If an error occurs, an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magCmdPar2
Command parameter of the magazine
In case of a succesfull return, the return value is the place number.
If an error occurs an error number is set.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magCmdState
Command state of the magazine
1: started
2: running
3: end correct
4: end with error
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magDim $TC_MAP6 FBW

Dimension of the magazine, number of magazine lines in the box magazine
Applies to box magazines (magKind = 5) number of lines. For all other magazine types the value is 1.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magIdent $TC_MAP2 FBW

Identifier of the magazine
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magKind $TC_MAP1 FBW

Type of the magazine
1 = chain
3 = revolver
5 = box magazine
7 = internal magazine tool buffer
9 = internal magazine loading stations
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magLink1 $TC_MAP4 FBW

Chaining 1 of the magazine to the following magazine. Number to (next) background magazine. Can be used with chain,
revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1,3 or 5)
- -1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-207
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

magLink2 $TC_MAP5 FBW

Chaining 2 of the magazine to the previous magazine. Backward chaining of background magazines. Can be used for
chaining to chain, revolver and box magazines (magKind = 1, 3 or 5)
- -1 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magLocSearchStrat $TC_MPAP10, Bits 8-15

Empty location search strategy during tool change
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number 320000

magNo
Number of the magazine
- 1 numMagsMax UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magNrPlaces $TC_MAP7 * $TC_MAP6

Number of real locations (in chain magazine) or number of slots (in box magazine)
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magState $TC_MAP3 FBW

State of the magazine
1 = current magazine
2 = disabled
4 = magazine in loading position
8 = motion is active
16 = enabled for loading
- 2 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

magToolSearchStrat $TC_MPAP10, Bits 0-7

Tool search strategy during tool change
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Magazine number 320000

magWearCompoundNo $TC_MAP9
Each magazine has its own active wear group (wear group number).
The number of this group is stored in OPI variables magWearCompoundNo:
Meaning: Number of active wear group.
=0: No wear group active.
>0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
(this is the number of the active wear group.)
<0: Number of wear group in which tool search commences.
However, this wear group is disabled which means that the next tool
search is started in the next possible wear group.
This system parameter can thus also be used to disable a wear
group. See also wear group number of magazine location
/ $TC_MPP7 and modeWearGroup / $TC_MAMP3.

Previous name: actWearGrInMag

-32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Magazine number numMagsMax

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-208 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.10 Area T, Mod. TP: Magazine data: Location data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Magazine/...

The data module TP is organized as a two-dimensional variable array. The module

contains the state and assignment of all magazine locations of a T area. Each
element can be addressed via a column or a line index:
The column index is the magazine number, i.e. the configuration data for all
locations of a magazine are contained in a column. The assignment of a magazine
to a magazine number is given in the associated module Magazine directory (TMV)
in the associated area T. If a non-existent magazine number is specified for the
column index, the request is negatively acknowledged.
The number of lines is derived from the number of parameters per magazine
location and from the number of magazine locations:

maxZeilenindex = numMagPlaceParams * magNrPlaces

The number of parameters per magazine location "numMagPlaceParams" is given

in module Y in area N and is currently 7 (8 with SW 5.1 and later).
The row indices are based on the following scheme:
1: Location type ($TC_MPP1) (read only)
1: Magazine location
2: Spindle
3: Gripper
4: Loader
5: Transfer location
6: Loading station
7: Loading point
2: Location type ($TC_MPP2) (read only)
>0: Location type for virtual location
=0: "match all" (buffer location)
9999: Undefined (not a virtual location)
3: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
4: Consideration of adjacent location on / off ($TC_MPP3)
0: off
1: on
5: Location status ($TC_MPP4)
1: Disabled
2: Free (<> occupied)
4: Reserved for tool in buffer location
8: Reserved for tool to be loaded
16: Occupied in left half-location
32: Occupied in right half-location
64: Occupied in top half-location
128: Occupied in bottom half-location
6: Physical magazine reference (read only)
Magazine number of magazine to which location belongs
7: Type index ($TC_MPP5) (read only) and new: Wear group number from SW 5.1
Type index/wear group number is read only in SW earlier than 5.1 and
read/write from SW 5.1 if it is assigned "Wear group" meaning.
Type index: The locations of a location type in a magazine are numbered in
ascending sequence, e.g. type=2, type index=5; ==> Spindle5)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-209
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

(previous meaning when location type = 1 before P5: Equals location number
when location type=1)
Wear group number from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP5)
When location type = 1: Number of wear group to which this magazine location
is assigned.
Value range: -32000, ..., -1, 0, 1, 2, ... 32000
=0: Not assigned to a wear group
>0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is enabled
<0: Number of assigned wear group, this wear group is disabled
By negating this system parameter, it is possible to disable or enable the whole
assigned wear group.
See also magWearCompoundNo / $TC_MAP9 (active wear group number) and
modeWearGroup / $TC_MAMP3 (general settings for wear grouping).
8: Adapter number from SW 5.1 ($TC_MPP7)
Reference to adapter data set number.

Associated system data:

The number of parameters of this module changes accordingly:
N / Y, global system data, numMagPlaceParams = 8 from SW 5.1

The number of magazine locations "magNrPlaces" is magazine specific and can be

found in module TM in associated area T.

The locations of the buffer magazine and the loading magazine are numbered in
ascending order independently of the location type index.

If necessary, several lines can be addressed, so that, for example, all location data
of a magazine can be read in a single request. The location data are all of the
same type.

placeData $TC_MPP1[n,m]...$TC_MPP7[n,m] n=MagNo m=SlotNo

P1: Location type (read access only) ($TC_MPP1)
P2: Location type (read access only) ($TC_MPP2)
P3: T number of tool in this location ($TC_MPP6)
P4: Consider adjacent location on/off ($TC_MPP3)
P5: Location status (bit arry) ($TC_MPP4)
P6: Reference for physical magazine (read access only)
P7: Location type index (location type numbering) ($TC_MPP5)
P8: Number of adapter in magazine location ($TC_MPP7)

Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes (LocationNo - 1) * numMagPlaceParams * magNrPlaces
numMagPlaceParams +
ParameterNo

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-210 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.11 Area T, Mod. TPM: Magazine data: Multiple assignment of location

data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Magazine/...

The data module TPM is organized as a two-dimensional variable array.

ParameterNo = 1: Specifies the magazine number with which a relationship exists.
ParameterNo = 2: Distance (in locations) between the internal location and the
magazine change position (cf. magazine number for 1st parameter) with which a
relationship will be established.
It contains information about possible multiple assignments. The column index is
the magazine number.

For location P with location number p in magazine MP (= column index)

numPlaceMulti times the multiple assignments to other magazines which are
possible are stored with the associated distances to the change positions in each
of the magazines. The offset for row index zi for a location number p is calculated
according to the following rule: zi = (p-1) * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMultiParams
+ ParameterNo.

Determining the distance between the load position and the change position:

The value 9999 (magazine no. load position) must be specified for the variable
multiPlace in the column. The LocationNo (p) for the line is the number of the load
position. The line for the first assignment is calculated with ParameterNo = 1.
When reading the variable, the system can thus read the magazine number linked
to the intended change position. If this magazine number is correct, it is possible to
read the number of locations between the load position and the change position
with the variable multiPlace with the next higher line number. If the magazine
number read was incorrect, the following magazine assignment must be read with
the line number increased by numPlaceMulti.
This procedure has to be repeated a max. of numPlaceMultiParams times until the
desired relationship has been found.

multiPlace $TC_MDP1[n,m]...$TC_MDP2[n,m] n=MagNo m=SlotNo

P1: Distance between change position of magazine n and location m of 1st internal magazine (load magazine, 9999)
($TC_MDP1)
P2: Distance between change position of magazine n and location m of 2nd internal magazine (buffer magazine, 9998)
($TC_MDP2)

Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and PLC !

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes (LocationNo - 1) * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMulti * numPlaceMultiParams *
numPlaceMultiParams+ParameterNo magNrPlaces

In this case, numPlaceMulti and

numPlaceMultiParams are other OPI
variables from module Y.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-211
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.12 Area T, Mod. TT: Magazine data: Location types

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Magazine/...

The module TT is organized as a two-dimensional array where the variable with

index (1/1) contains the maximum number of columns (corresponds to the location
hierarchies) in this module. Each element can be addressed via a column and row
index:
The column index is the number of the location hierarchy + 1. The row index is the
number of the location type + 1. Row 1 contains the current T-number of rows for a
specific location hierarchy as special information.
If all location types are to be read out for a location hierarchy, this must be defined
in two steps:
1. The 1st line of each location hierarchy contains the number of assigned location
types for this hierarchy
2. Lines 2 ... n can be read out in a single request.

placeType $TC_MPTH[n,m] n=0...7 Hierarchy m=0...7 SlotType

Magazine location hierarchy

Attention: This variable is called "dummy" in the non-Windows-MMC and the PLC!
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of location type + 1 Wert aus Zeile 1

1.7.13 Area T, Mod. TV: Tool data: Directory

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Catalogue/...

Data module TV can be used for the following purposes:

1. For displaying all tools of a magazine. The most important tool information is
contained in module TV. Available tools are sorted consecutively in ascending
order of T-number. This means that variables that are defined as one-dimensional
arrays in this module contain all the tool information without any gaps. The line
index with which a specific array is addressed has no connection with the tool
number but is only a serial number. Inserting/deleting tools changes the contents of
a line dynamically.

2. Access to tool data in modules TD, TG, TO, TS, TU and TUE. Before an element
in one of the above modules is accessed, module TV should be consulted to
ascertain which tools are actually defined.

SW 5.1 and later: Variable modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global system

data) defines for circular magazines (T / TM, magazine data, general data,
MagKind=3) whether the tool in OPI modules "T / TP, magazine data, location
data", "T / TD, tool data, general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and "T / AEV,
working offsets, directory" remains (new functionality) in its circular magazine
location during operation or changes to the buffer magazine (earlier behaviour).

Associated system data:

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-212 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N / Y, global system data) with SW 5.1 and

later.

nrDuplo
Duplo number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools

numCuttEdges
Number of cutting edges of a tool
- 9 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools

numTools
Number of tools in the area TO
- 0 MD UWord r
MM_NUM_TOOL
Multi-line: no

TnumWZV
Last assigned T-number for tool management
The last assigned T number is the T number of the new tool
last created in the NCK through an NC language command or the PI service.
- UWord r
Multi-line: no

toolIdent
Tool identifier
- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools

toolInMag
Current magazine in which the tool is located
0 = tool not loaded
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools

toolInPlace
Current location in which the tool is located
0 = tool not loaded
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools

toolNo
T-number
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number numTools

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-213
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.14 Area T, Mod. TF: Parametrizing, return parameters of _N_TMGETT,

_N_TSEARC

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Find/...

This module is used for parameterizing as well as for the return parameters of PI
services _N_TMGETT and _N_TSEARC. Access to this module must be T area
specific and exclusive. It is up to the clients to guarantee this by using the
semaphore mechanism (PI service _N_MMCSEM) with the function number for
_N_TMSEARCH.
With _N_TMGETT, NO parameterizing elements (input parameters) are relevant;
the only relevant one is the result parameter resultToolNr

parDataTAD
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAD a value can be stored as a comparison
value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the
module TAS according to parMasksTAD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAO.

See module TAD

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAD, i.e. numToolParams_tad
the number of the user-defined tool
parameter.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TAD
module.

parDataTAO
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAO a value can be stored as a comparison
value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the
module TAS according to parMasksTAO.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAO.

See module TAO

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAO, numCuttEdgeParams_tao
i.e. tool number.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TAO
module.

parDataTAS
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type DOUBLE of the module TAS a value can be stored as a comparison
value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the
module TAS according to parMasksTAS.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TAS.

See module TAS

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAS, i.e. numCuttEdgeParams_tas
tool number.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TAS
module.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-214 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

parDataTD
Parameterizing: For parameters with data type UWORD of the module TD a value can be stored as a comparison value
for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the
module TD according to parMasksTD.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TD.

See module TD
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column 17
index) in the TD module > 1.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TD
module.

parDataTO
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TO, a value can be stored as a comparison value for the 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TO
according to parMasksTO.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TO.

See module TO
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TO module, i.e. a numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
cutting edge offset value parameter:
(EdgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams
+ ParameterNo
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge offset value
parameter in the module TO.

parDataToolIdentTD
Parameterizing: For the parameter with data type string[32] (tool identifier) of the module TD a value can be stored as a
comparison value for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding
parameter in the module TD according to parMasksTD.

See module TD
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: no

parDataTS
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TS
according to parMasksTS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TS.

See module TS
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TS module: numCuttEdgeParams_ts *
(EdgeNo - 1) * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numCuttEdgeParams_ts +
ParameterNo
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge parameter in
the module TS.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-215
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

parDataTU
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TU a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TU
according to parMasksTU.
The size of the column matches the lines in module TU.

See module TU
- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column numToolParams_tu
index) in the TU module is thus the
number of the user-defined tool
parameter.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TU
module (numToolParams_tu).

parDataTUE
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TUE a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUE
according to parMasksTUE.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUE.

See module TUE

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUE module: numCuttEdgeParams_tu *
(EdgeNo - 1) * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numCuttEdgeParams_tu +
ParameterNo
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge parameter in
the module TUE.

parDataTUS
Parameterizing: For each parameter of the module TUS a value can be stored as a comparison value for a 'complex
search' (_N_TUSEARC). The comparison value is combined with the corresponding parameter in the module TUS
according to parMasksTUS.
The size of the column matches the data set of an edge in module TUS.

See module TUS

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUS module: numCuttEdgeParams_tus *
Number of the user-defined maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
parameter + (number of the tool
cutting edge -1) *
numCuttEdgeParams_tus.
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge parameter in
the module TUS.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-216 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

parMasksTAD
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAD that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTAD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)

For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAD, i.e. numToolParams_tad
the number of the user-defined tool
parameter.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TAD
module.

parMasksTAO
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAO that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTAO. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)

For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAO, numCuttEdgeParams_tao
i.e. tool number.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TAO
module.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-217
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

parMasksTAS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TAS that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTAS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)

For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Column index in the module TAS, i.e. numCuttEdgeParams_tas
tool number.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TAS
module.

parMasksTD
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TD that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTD. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)

For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column 17
index) in the TD module > 1.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TD
module.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-218 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

parMasksTO
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TO that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTO. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)

For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TO module is thus a numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
cutting edge offset value parameter:
(EdgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams
+ ParameterNo
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge offset value
parameter in the module TO.

parMasksTS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TS that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)

For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TS module: numCuttEdgeParams_ts *
(EdgeNo - 1) * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numCuttEdgeParams_ts +
ParameterNo
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge parameter in
the module TS.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-219
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

parMasksTU
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TU that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTU. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)
For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed
- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Index of the parameter (i.e. column numToolParams_tu
index) in the TU module, thus the
number of the user-defined tool
parameter.
The maximum line index thus equals
the number of columns in the TU
module (numToolParams_tu).

parMasksTUE
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUE that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTUE. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)

For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUE module: numCuttEdgeParams_tu *
(EdgeNo - 1) * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numCuttEdgeParams_tu +
ParameterNo
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge parameter in
the module TUE.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-220 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

parMasksTUS
Parameterizing: There is a mask for each parameter of the module TUS that indicates whether it is to serve as a search
criterion for a 'complex search' (_N_TUSEARC) and how it is to be combined. The corresponding comparison values are
stored in parDataTUS. If more than one parameter ( i.e. search criteron) has been selected (#0), they are logically
combined with AND.

Value 0 : Corresponding operand is not evaluated / Variable is not a criterion for comparison
Value 1 : == (equal)
Value 2 : < (less than)
Value 3 : > (greater than)
Value 4 : <= (less or equal)
Value 5 : >= (greater or equal)
Value 6 : && (bitwise AND, value only allowed for operands of the types WORD and DOUBLEWORD)

For string operands "==" is the only operator allowed

- 0 0 6 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Line index in the TUS module: numCuttEdgeParams_tus *
Number of the user-defined maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
parameter + (number of the tool
cutting edge -1) *
numCuttEdgeParams_tus.
The maximum line index is thus the
maximum cutting edge parameter in
the module TUS.

resultNrOfTools
Result: Number of tools found
In the case of _N_TMGETT, it is possible to find no tools (value=0) or exactly 1 tool (value 1); in the case of
_N_TSEARC, the number of found tools can be any number > 0, limited by the number of tools in the NC or no tools at
all (value=0).
- 0 0 numTools UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

resultToolNr
Result: T-numbers of the tools found
The array elements contain the internal T- numbers of the tools found. The storing order is the order in which the tools
have been found by the PI-Service.

- 0 0 31999 UWord r
Multi-line: no tfNrOfResults

1.7.15 Area T, Mod. TUM: Tool data: user magazine data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/MagazineDescription/...

userData $TC_MAPCx[y] x = ParameterNo y = MagazineNo

Magazine user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM and
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.

- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numMagParams_u
parameter

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-221
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.16 Area T, Mod. TUP: Tool data: user magatine place data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Magazine/...

userPlaceData $TC_MPPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo y=MagazineNo z=MagPlaceNo

Magazine location user data for a tool magazine. These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM and
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.

- 0 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numMagLocParams_u * magNrPlaces
parameter + numMagLocParams_u *
(number of the magazine location -
1)

1.7.17 Area T, Mod. TUS: Tool data: user monitoring data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Supervision/...

userData $TC_MOPCx[y,z] x=ParamNo,y=T-Number,z=Edge

User data for monitoring a cutting edge These parameters can only be used if the machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CC_MON_PARAM and
$MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK have been set accordingly.
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the user-defined numCuttEdgeParams_tus *
parameter + (number of the cutting maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
edge -1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tus

1.7.18 Area T, Mod. AD: Adapter data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Adapter/...

Adapter data are used to define the dimensions of an adapter (L1, L2, L3) per
magazine location and the direction (transformation) of loaded tools. The
transformation is applied when cutting edge data are processed in OPI modules
TOT, TOST and TOET if the tool is loaded in a magazine location to which adapter
data are assigned.
Adapter data exist independently of magazine location data. Magazine location
data contain a reference (see module TP, placeData) to the adapter data.

adaptData $TC_ADPTx; x=1,...3, $TC_ADPTT

Adapter data
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ParameterNo numParams_Adapt

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-222 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.19 Area T, Mod. AEV: Working offsets: Directory

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/ActiveCatalogue/...

The active tool edges are sorted in consecutive ascending D number sequence in
the AEV module. This module also contains the essential tool data for each D
number entered. "Active" in this case refers to the replacement tools.
(If the "unique D numbers" option is not activated in the NC, the edges are sorted
according to ascending ToolIdent and DuploNumber. The D number variable is
then set to 0 on all lines in this module.)

The D number assignment is not necessarily unique for active tools. For this
reason, the same D number may be entered in several lines (successively).
The line number is a serial number which is not related to the D number.
The number of active tool edges is stored in numActDEdges (module AEV), e.g.
example 10,
i.e. module AEV contains entries for 10 tool edges. These are sorted in ascending
D number sequence. The tool edge with the lowest D number has index (serial
number) 1, the next-higher D number index 2, etc. and the edge with the highest D
number index 10.

When tools are activated/deactivated and D numbers re-assigned, the entries for a
D number change line dynamically.
Module T / AEV is organized as a 1-dimensional variable array and can be used for
the following purposes:
- Display all tool edges, including D numbers, of active tools.
- Display associated tool data

The module contains the following information which can be addressed via a
column index:
- Single column, in 1st line only. Number of D numbers (lines, tool edges) in the
current list
- The other columns apply to all lines, each line contains tool edge data with the
following information:
- D number
- Internal T number of associated tool
- Tool edge number relative to tool
- Tool identifier
- Duplo number
- Magazine number and
- Location number of tool

Individual values cannot be altered via this module.

Re-assignment of D numbers and changes in allocation to tools (deactivate,

activate replacement tools) and other modifications to data cause changes to
toolCounter in "C / S Channel-specific status data".

Variable modeSpindleToolRevolver (module N/Y, global system data) defines for

circular magazines (T / TM, magazine data, general data, MagKind=3) whether the
tool in OPI modules "T / TP, magazine data, location data", "T / TD, tool data,

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-223
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

general data", "T/TV, tool data, directory" and "T / AEV, working offsets, directory"
remains (new functionality) in its circular magazine location during operation or
changes to the buffer magazine (earlier behaviour)).

cuttEdgeNo
Number of edge for this tool

Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- 1 maxnumCuttEdges_Tool UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges

DNo
D number

Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Current number of active tool edges numActDEdges

duploNo
Duplo number

Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges

numActDEdges
Number of D numbers in this list

Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

When tool management function is active:
Specifies the number of edges belonging to tools with "active"
status (contained in the TO unit)
When tool management function is not active:
Specifies the number of all edges contained in the TO unit.
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

toolIdent
Tool identifier

Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- String[32] r
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges

toolInMag
Magazine in which tool is located

Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges

toolInPlace
Magazine location of tool

Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-224 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

toolNo
Internal T number

Meaningful and defined only in connection with "unique D numbers" function.

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Serial number of active edges numActDEdges

1.7.20 Area T, Mod. TC: Toolholder parameters

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/ToolCarrier/...

Module TC contains the data which define an orientatable toolholder (offset

vectors, axis directions, rotation angle, type information).
It is also possible to read the current positions of the toolholder axes and the
differences between the current and programmed axis values for the active
toolholder.

tcCarr1 $TC_CARR1
x component of offset vector l1
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr10 $TC_CARR10
x component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr11 $TC_CARR11
y component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr12 $TC_CARR12
z component of rotary axis v2
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr13 $TC_CARR13
Angle of rotation alpha1 (in degrees)
Degree 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr14 $TC_CARR14
Angle of rotation alpha2 (in degrees)
Degree 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr15 $TC_CARR15
x component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-225
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

tcCarr16 $TC_CARR16
y component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr17 $TC_CARR17
z component of offset vector l3
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr18 $TC_CARR18
x component of offset vector l4
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr19 $TC_CARR19
y component of offset vector l4
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr2 $TC_CARR2
y component of offset vector l1
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr20 $TC_CARR20
z component of offset vector l4
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr21 $TC_CARR21
Axis identifier of 1st rotary axis
- 0 String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr22 $TC_CARR22
Axis identifier of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr23 $TC_CARR23
Kinematic type
Kinematic type: P: Rotatable workpiece (part)
M: Rotatable tool and rotatable workpiece (mixed)
T or any character except P and M: Rotatable tool
- 0 String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr24 $TC_CARR24
Offset of 1st rotary axis in degrees
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr25 $TC_CARR25
Offset of 2nd rotary axis in degrees
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-226 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

tcCarr26 $TC_CARR26
Offset of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr27 $TC_CARR27
Offset of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr28 $TC_CARR28
Increment of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr29 $TC_CARR29
Increment of Hirth tooth system in degrees of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr3 $TC_CARR3
z component of offset vector l1
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr30 $TC_CARR30
Minimum position of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr31 $TC_CARR31
Minimum position of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr32 $TC_CARR32
Maximum position of 1st rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr33 $TC_CARR33
Maximum position of 2nd rotary axis
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr34 $TC_CARR34
Toolholder name
Contains a freely definable string provided as a freely definable
identifier for the orientatable toolholder.
It has no meaning as yet within the NCK and is not evaluated either.
The identifier should not be used for other purposes since a later
expansion will allow an orientatable toolholder to be activated via
a name as well as via numbers

- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-227
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

tcCarr35 $TC_CARR35
Axis name 1
Contains a freely definable string provided as a free identifier
for the first rotary axis.
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.
It can therefore be used for any other purposes.

- 0 String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr36 $TC_CARR36
Axis name 2
Contains a freely definable string provided as a free identifier
for the second rotary axis.
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.
It can therefore be used for any other purposes.

- String[32] wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr37 $TC_CARR37
Identifier
Contains an integer number for identifying the toolholder.
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.

- 0 UDoubleword wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr38 $TC_CARR38
Position component X
Contains a position (X component of return position).
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr39 $TC_CARR39
Position component Y
Contains a position (Y component of return position).
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr4 $TC_CARR4
x component of offset vector l2
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr40 $TC_CARR40
Position component Z
Contains a position (Z component of return position).
It has no meaning whatsoever within the NCK, neither is it evaluated.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-228 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

tcCarr41 $TC_CARR41
x-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr42 $TC_CARR42
y-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr43 $TC_CARR43
z-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l1
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr44 $TC_CARR44
x-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l2
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr45 $TC_CARR45
y-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l2
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr46 $TC_CARR46
z-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l2
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr5 $TC_CARR5
y component of offset vector l2
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr55 $TC_CARR55
x-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l3
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr56 $TC_CARR56
y-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l3
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr57 $TC_CARR57
z-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l3
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr58 $TC_CARR58
x-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l4
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-229
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

tcCarr59 $TC_CARR59
y-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l4
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr6 $TC_CARR6
z component of offset vector l2
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr60 $TC_CARR60
z-component of the fine offset of the offset vector l4
mm, inch, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr64 $TC_CARR64
Fine offset of the offset of the rotary axis v1
Degree, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr65 $TC_CARR65
Fine offset of the offset of the rotary axis v2
Degree, user defined 0 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of the tool carrier $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

tcCarr7 $TC_CARR7
x component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr8 $TC_CARR8
y component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

tcCarr9 $TC_CARR9
z component of rotary axis v1
- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes No. of toolholder $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER / numToBaust

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-230 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.21 Area T, Mod. TOE: Edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Compensation/...

One set of edge-related coarse total offsets, setup offsets, exists for each tool edge
and operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS, edge-related location-
dependent fine total offsets.

edgeECData $TC_ECPx[t,d]
Location-dependent offsets, setup value
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ((EdgeNo-1) * (maxnumEdgeSC * numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
numParams_SC)) + ((EdgeSC - 1)* maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numParams_SC) + ParameterNo

1.7.22 Area T, Mod. TOET: Edge-related coarse total offsets, transformed

setup offsets

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/CompTransfor/...

One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and
operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOE.

edgeECData
Transformed location-dependent offsets, setup value
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ((EdgeNo-1) * (maxnumEdgeSC * numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
numParams_SC)) + ((EdgeSC - 1)* maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numParams_SC) + ParameterNo

1.7.23 Area T, Mod. TOS: Edge-related location-dependent fine total

offsets

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/Compensation/...

One set of edge-related total offsets exists for each tool edge and operating
location.
The maximum number of operating locations is identical for all tool edges and
defined by the new variable maxnumEdgeSC
($MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE) in "N / Y global system data".

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-231
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

numParams_SC (currently 9) offsets are provided (depending on location-

independent wear values) for each total offset set: Length 1, length 2, length 3,
radius and 5 others.

Each replacement tool has its own separate (different) data.

The NCK resets the data when the associated tool is activated if machine data
($MN_MM_KIND_OF_SUMCORR, bit 1 = 1) is used for activation.

The total offsets of a tool edge are accessible via the internal T number of the
associated tool, edge number, total offset number ("operating location").

PI Services may exist for selective creation and deletion of tool edge total offsets.
The existence of total offsets can be controlled selectively via the new machine
data $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR (OPI: maxNumSumcorr in N / Y) (P5??).

The following applies:

When the MMC2 tool management function is in use, $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR
= -1 must be set to ensure that the total offsets exist for all offset locations (number
= maxnumEdgeSC) from creation of the tool edge until its deletion.
(The new PI Services for creation / deletion will not currently be used by the MMC2
tool management for turning applications). For the present, the new NC machine
data $MN_MM_NUM_SUMCORR = -1 must be set to automatic creation /
deletion.

The method of addressing in this module is analogous to accessing "Edge data /

offsets" by column addressing with T number (using an array access operation to
gain quick access to the total offsets of all tool edge operating locations or all
edges of a tool).

The module contains the location-dependent total offsets for all tools. Each
element is addressed via a column and line index:

The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. all location-dependent total
offsets of this tool (for all edges / locations) can be found in one column.
If a non-existent T number is specified as the column index, the request is
acknowledged negatively.
The number of lines is determined by the number of total offset values, the number
of operating locations and the maximum possible edge number of a tool:
maxZeilenindex = numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool

These variables are stored in "N / Y global system data" and have the following
meanings:
numParams_SC: No. of wear offsets per location (according to L1, L2,
L3, radius and 5 others), currently 9
maxnumEdgeSC: Maximum number of locations (SC) per edge
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool: Max. permissible number of edges per tool

Several lines can be addressed simultaneously if necessary, allowing, for example,

all location-dependent total offsets of all edges of one tool to be read in one
request. The location-dependent total offsets of the tools are all of the same data
type and have the same physical unit.

Module T / TOS has a 2-dimensional organization.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-232 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

For OPI, see Section OPI variables.

The following lines are provided for each T number (column index):

Edge 1, Location 1, L1
Edge 1, Location 1, L2
Edge 1, Location 1, L3
Edge 1, Location 1, Radius
Edge 1, Location 1, Par5
.......... ..... .....
Edge 1, Location 1, Par numParams_SC
Edge 1, Location 2, L1
Edge 1, Location 2, L2
Edge 1, ..... ......
Edge 1, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC

Edge 2, Location 1, L1
.......... ..... .....
Edge 2, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par numParams_SC
.......... ..... .....
Edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, Location maxnumEdgeSC, Par
numParams_SC

Interrelationship between edge parameters, total offsets and variables:

Edge parameter DL1 DL2 ... DL4 ...
$TC_DP3 $TC_SCP13 $TC_SCP23 ... $TC_SCP43 ...
$TC_DP4 $TC_SCP14 $TC_SCP24 ... $TC_SCP44 ...
$TC_DP5 $TC_SCP15 $TC_SCP25 ... $TC_SCP45 ...
....
$TC_DP9 $TC_SCP19 $TC_SCP29 ... $TC_SCP49 ...
$TC_DP10 $TC_SCP20 $TC_SCP30 ... $TC_SCP50 ...
$TC_DP11 $TC_SCP21 $TC_SCP31 ... $TC_SCP51 ...

with DLx, TC_DPy, TC_SCPz

x from 1 to 6 (maxnumEdgeSC = $MN_MAX_SUMCORR_PERCUTTING_EDGE)
and maximum = 6
y from 3 to 11
z = (10 * x) + y

edgeSCData $TC_SCPx[t,d]
Location-dependent offsets, wear
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ((EdgeNo-1) * (maxnumEdgeSC * numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
numParams_SC)) + ((EdgeSC - 1)* maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numParams_SC) + ParameterNo

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-233
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.24 Area T, Mod. TOST: Edge-related location-dependent fine total

offsets, transformed

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/CompTransfor/...

One set of edge-related transformed total offsets exists for each tool edge and
operating location.
This module corresponds totally to module T / TOS.

edgeSCData
Transformed location-dependent offsets, wear
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ((EdgeNo-1) * (maxnumEdgeSC * numParams_SC * maxnumEdgeSC *
numParams_SC)) + ((EdgeSC - 1)* maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
numParams_SC) + ParameterNo

1.7.25 Area T, Mod. TOT: Edge data: Transformed offset data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool/CompTransfor/...

The MMC must be capable of displaying and modifying the offset data of the tool
edges as both transformed and untransformed data. The transformation refers to
the adapter data (if programmed) of magazine locations. The MMC can display and
modify both transformed and untransformed data (of the same tool if necessary)
"simultaneously" (in different applications or different MMCs).

To provide access to transformed data, a new module, T / TOT (edge data:

transformed offset data), is provided which is identical to the existing module T /
TO (edge data: Offset data), except that it supplies transformed data instead of
untransformed data.
The information edge DNo (D numbers assigned to edges) is included under the
offset (numCuttEdgeParams * maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) in both the T / TOT and T
/ TO modules.
Both modules have a 2-dimensional organization.

The T number is the column index.

Line numbers are calculated by the following method:
(EdgeNo -1) * numCuttEdgeParams +parameter No.

numCuttEdgeParams = parameter per edge (currently 25) (from Y in N area)

EdgeNo = edge number for tool

Example: with numCuttEdgeParams = 25 and maxnumCuttEdges_Tool = 9

Column: T number
Lines:
1 edge 1, parameter 1
2 edge 1, parameter 2
...

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-234 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

25 edge 1, parameter numCuttEdgeParams

26 edge 2, parameter 1
27 edge 2, parameter 2
...
50 edge 2, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
...
225 edge maxnumCuttEdges_Tool, parameter numCuttEdgeParams
226 edge 1, D No assigned to edge 1

Untransformed data: /Tool/Compensation/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]

Transformed data: /Tool/CompTransfor/edgeData[uToa,cTNr,line_from,line_to]

Values which can be displayed as transformed data are the 9 geo-data

(corresponding to L1, L2, L3, radius, and generally 5 other values), wear and total
offsets.

If tools which are not located in a magazine location with adapter data are
accessed via the module for transformed data, then the data are treated as if they
were untransformed.

For OPI, see Section OPI variables.

cuttEdgeParam
Transformed edge offset data and D number list
Important: This variable is called "edgeData" in the MMC102.
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes For edge offset value parameters: (numCuttEdgeParams + 1) *
(edgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
+ ParameterNo
For D numbers:
((numCuttEdgeParams *
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) + EdgeNo)

edgeData
Transformed edge offset data and D number list
Important: This variable is called "cuttEdgeParam" in NonWindows MMC and PLC.
mm, inch, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes For edge offset value parameters: (numCuttEdgeParams + 1) *
(edgeNo - 1) * numCuttEdgeParams maxnumCuttEdges_Tool
+ ParameterNo
For D numbers:
((numCuttEdgeParams *
maxnumCuttEdges_Tool) + EdgeNo)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-235
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.26 Area T, Mod. TAD: Application-specific data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool//...

Data module TAD is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module

contains application-specific data for all tools. Every element can be addressed via
a column and row index:

The column index is the number of the user-defined tool parameter. The number of
tool parameters (columns) can be found in variable numToolParams_tad in area N
/ module Y.

The row index is the tool number. Attempts to access non-existent tools are
negatively acknowledged.

Application-specific tool data are all of the same data type.

Application-specific tool data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.

siemData $TC_TPCSx[y]
Siemens application tool parameter
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index corresponds to parameter number. Reserved for SIEMENS
applications.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes Tool number T 32000

1.7.27 Area T, Mod. TAM: Application-specific magazine data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool//...

Module TAM contains application-specific information about tool magazines.

Application-specific magazine data are all of the same data type.

The application-specific magazine data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.

siemData $TC_MAPCSx[y]
Siemens application magazine data.
These parameters can be used only if machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGAZINE_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
Reserved for SIEMENS applications.
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Parameter number numMagParams_tam

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-236 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.28 Area T, Mod. TAO: Application-specific cutting edge data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool//...

Data module TAO is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module

contains application-specific cutting edge data for all tools. Every element can be
addressed via a column and row index. The column index is the tool number (T
number), i.e. one column contains the application-specific data for all the cutting
edges of a tool.
The assignments between tools and T numbers are listed in the Tool Directory (TV)
module in the relevant T area. A request is negatively acknowledged if a non-
existent tool number is entered as the column index.

The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per cutting edge
and the number of cutting edges of a tool:

Max. number of rows = numCuttEdgeParams_tao * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T

number)

The number of parameters per cutting edge numCuttEdgeParams_tao can be

found in area N / module Y. The number of tool-specific cutting edges is specified
in area T / module TV.
Several rows can be addressed where necessary which means, for example, that
all application-specific edge data of a tool can be read in one request.

Application-specific edge data are all of the same data type.

Application-specific cutting edge data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.

siemEdgeData $TC_DPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application tool cutting edge parameter
Important: 2-dimensional variable. Column index corresponds to the T number. Reserved for SIEMENS applications.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes (EdgeNo-1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tao * /T/TV/numCuttEdges
numCuttEdgeParams_tao +
ParameterNo

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-237
1 Variables 03/2006
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.29 Area T, Mod. TAP: Application-specific magazine location data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool//...

Data module TAP is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module

contains application-specific data of a T area. Every element can be addressed via
a column and row index:

The column index is the magazine number, i.e. one column contains the
application-specific magazine location data for all the locations of one magazine.
The assignments between magazines and magazine numbers are listed in the
appropriate Magazine Directory (TMV) module in the relevant T area. A request is
negatively acknowledged if a non-existent magazine number is entered as the
column index.

The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per magazine

location and the number of magazine locations:

Max. number of rows = numMagLocParams_tap * magNrPlaces

Application-specific magazine location data are all of the same data type.

Application-specific magazine location data are reserved for SIEMENS

applications.

siemPlaceData $TC_MPPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application magazine location data.
These parameters can be used only if machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MAGLOC_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set
accordingly.
Reserved for SIEMENS applications.
- 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes ParameterNumber + numMagLocParams_tap * magNrPlaces
numMagLocParams_tap *
MagazineLocationNumber-1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-238 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.7 Tool and magazine data

1.7.30 Area T, Mod. TAS: Application-specific monitoring data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Tool//...

Data module TAS is organized as a 2-dimensional variable array. This module

contains application-specific monitoring data for all tools. Every element can be
addressed via a column and row index:

The column index is the tool number (T number), i.e. one column contains the
application-specific monitoring data for all the cutting edges of a tool. The
assignments between tools and T numbers are listed in the Tool Directory (TV)
module in the relevant T area. A request is negatively acknowledged if a non-
existent tool number is entered as the column index.

The number of rows is determined by the number of parameters per cutting edge
and the number of cutting edges of a tool:

Max. number of rows = numCuttEdgeParams_tas * /T/TV/numCuttEdges (T

number)

The number of parameters per cutting edge numCuttEdgeParams_tas can be

found in area N / module Y. The number of tool-specific cutting edges
(/T/TV/numCuttEdges) is specified in area T / module TV.
Several rows can be addressed where necessary which means, for example, that
all application-specific monitoring data of a tool can be read in one request.

Application-specific monitoring data are all of the same data type.

Application-specific monitoring data are reserved for SIEMENS applications.

siemData $TC_MOPCSx[y,z]
Siemens application monitoring data of a tool cutting edge.
These parameters can be used only if machine data
$MN_MM_NUM_CCS_MON_PARAM and $MN_MM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK are set accordingly.
Reserved for SIEMENS applications.

- 0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes ParameterNumber + (EdgeNo -1) * numCuttEdgeParams_tas * /T/TV/numCuttEdges
numCuttEdgeParams_tas

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-239
1 Variables 03/2006
1.8 Machine and setting data

1.8 Machine and setting data

1.8.1 Area N, Mod. M: Global machine data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem /Nck/Drive/...

Global machine data

MDBA_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE MD 13000: DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Activation of 611D drive / enable high-speed inputs/outputs
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number in drive bus 14

MDCA_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR MD 13010: DRIVE_LOGIC_NR[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Logical drive number
- 0 30 Character wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number in drive bus 14

MDCA_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE MD 13030: DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Module identifier of relevant drive bus slot
1 = single-axis module
2 = two-axis module
9 = terminal block for dig. I/Os
10 = bit bus interface
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number in drive bus 14

MDCA_DRIVE_TYPE MD 13040: DRIVE_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Drive type identifier for each drive bus slot
1 = FDD
2 = MSD
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number in drive bus 14

MDD_INT_INCR_PER_DEG MD 10210: INT_INCR_PER_DEG

Calculation resolution for angular position
- 0,000001 1000 Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

MDD_INT_INCR_PER_MM MD 10200: INT_INCR_PER_MM

Calculation resolution for linear positions
- 0,000001 1000 Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

MDD_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME MD 10050: SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME

Basic system clock cycle. For possible assignment of values, see description of machine data
SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME.
s 0,000125 s 0,032 s Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-240 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.8 Machine and setting data

MDL_POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO MD 10060: POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO

Position control cycle factor
- 1 100 Long Integer wr
Multi-line: no 1

MDLA_DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE MD 13020: DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Power section code of drive module
- Long Integer wr
Multi-line: yes Slot number of drive module 14

MDSA_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[x] x = Axis

Machine axis name
- String[16] wr
Multi-line: yes Axis index from 0 7

1.8.2 Area A, Mod. M: Axis-specific machine data#

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Axis/Drive/...

Axis-specific machine data

MDCA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR MD 30110: CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR

Setpoint assignment: Drive number / module number
- 1 15 Character wr
Multi-line: no 1

MDCA_CTRLOUT_TYPE MD 30130: CTRLOUT_TYPE

Type of setpoint output
- 0 1 Character wr
Multi-line: no 1

MDCA_ENC_MODULE_NR MD 30220: ENC_MODULE_NR[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Actual value assignment: Drive number / measuring circuit number
- 1 15 Byte wr
Multi-line: yes Encoder number 2

MDCA_ENC_TYPE MD 30240: ENC_TYPE[x] x = PlugplaceNo

Type of actual value sensing (actual position value)
0 = Simulation
1 = Raw signal generator, high-resolution
2 = Square-wave generator, standard generator with pulse quadruplication
3 = Encoder for stepper motor
4 = Absolute encoder with EnDat interface
5 = Absolute encoder with SSI interface (FM-NC)
- 0 5 Character wr
Multi-line: yes Encoder number 2

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-241
1 Variables 03/2006
1.8 Machine and setting data

1.8.3 Area N, Mod. SE: Global setting data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem

/Nck/Settings/...

This module contains all global setting data. The physical units depend on the
variable "userScale" in module Y of area N.

MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD SD 41050: $SN_MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGRD

Jog mode
- Character wr
Multi-line: no

MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE SD 41100: $SN_MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE

JOG at revolutional feedrate
0 = G94
1 = G95
- Character wr
Multi-line: no

MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO SD 41120: $SN_MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO

JOG velocity for G95
Degree, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no

MDD_JOG_SET_VELO SD 41110: $SN_MDD_JOG_SET_VELO

JOG velocity for G94
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no

MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO SD 41200: $SN_MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO

JOG velocity for master spindle
rev/min, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no

MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE SD 41010: $SN_MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE

Variable incremental value for JOG mode
- Double wr
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-242 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.8 Machine and setting data

1.8.4 Area C, Mod. SE: Channel-specific setting data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem

/Channel/Settings/...

Channel-specific setting data

MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED SD 42100: $SC_MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED

Dry run feedrate
mm/min, inch/min, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no

MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE SD 42000: $SC_MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE

Starting angle for thread
Degree Double wr
Multi-line: no

1.8.5 Area A, Mod. SE: Axis-specific setting data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem

/Axis/Settings/...

Axis-specific setting data

AA_OFF_LIMIT SD 43350: $SA_AA_OFF_LIMIT

Upper limit of compensation value which can be preset by means of synchronized actions via the system variable
$AA_OFF.
This limit value acts on the absolutely effective compensation value via $AA_OFF.
It is possible to interrogate the compensation value for limit-range violation via the system variable $AA_OFF_LIMIT.
- Double r
Multi-line: no

MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE SD 43410: $SA_MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE

Working area limitation active in the negative direction
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Number of machine axis 1

MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE SD 43400: $SA_MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE

Working area limitation active in the positive direction
0 = inactive
1 = active
- Character wr
Multi-line: yes Number of machine axis 1

MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 SD 43220: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26

Maximum spindle speed at G26 (master spindle)
rev/min, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-243
1 Variables 03/2006
1.8 Machine and setting data

MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS SD 43230: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS

Spindle speed limitation (master spindle)
rev/min, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 SD 43210: $SA_MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25

Minimum spindle speed at G25 (master spindle)
rev/min, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: no 1

MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS SD 43430: $SA_MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS

Working area limitation in the negative direction
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of machine axis 1

MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS SD 43420: $SA_MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS

Working area limitation in the positive direction
mm, inch, user defined Double wr
Multi-line: yes Number of machine axis 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-244 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.9 Parameters

1.9 Parameters
1.9.1 Area C, Mod. RP: Arithmetic parameters

OEM-MMC: Linkitem

/Channel/Parameter/...

Arithmetic parameters are special predefined variables which are addressed with
the letter R followed by a number. The contents and meaning of an arithmetic
parameter are defined by the programmer of the NC program. 100 R parameters
are defined by default. The number of R parameters can be set via the channel-
specific machine data 28050 (MM_NUM_R_PARAM). Up to 1000 R-Parameters
can be set.

R $R[x] x = ParameterNo PA
R parameter (up to SW 3.2)

Attention: This variable should be used for SW releases < 3.3. For later releases use the variable rpa !

Attention: For MMC102 the R number is used as row index !!!

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes R number MM_NUM_R_PARAM

rpa R[x] x = ParameterNo PA

R parameter (from SW 3.3)

Attention: For MMC102 the R number is used as row index !!!

- Double wr
Multi-line: yes R number + 1 MM_NUM_R_PARAM + 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-245
1 Variables 03/2006
1.9 Parameters

1.9.2 Area C, Mod. VSYN: Channel-specific user variables for

synchronous actions

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/SelectedFunctionData/...

This module contains channel-specific user variables for synchronous actions

acFifoN $AC_FIFOx[y] , x = FIFONo (1-10) y = ParameterNo

FIFO variable for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)
The number of columns depends on the number of FIFOs
- Double r
Multi-line: yes 1=2: access to the first element read MD $MC_MM_LEN_AC_FIFO+6
in
3: access to the last element read in
4: sum of all FIFO elements
5: number of elements available in
FIFO
6: current write index in relation to
start of FIFO
7 etc: FIFO contents

acMarker $AC_MARKER[x] x = MarkerNo

Flag variable, counter for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)

- UWord r
Multi-line: yes Number of the flag MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER

acMarkerL $AC_MARKER[n]
Flag variable, counter for motion synchronous actions
(Note: only with SYNACT)
- UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes Flag number MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_MARKER

acParam $AC_PARAM[x] x = ParameterNo

Dynamic parameters for synchronous actions (Note: SYNACT only)

- Double r
Multi-line: yes Number of the parameter MD $MC_MM_NUM_AC_PARAM

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-246 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.10 Servo

1.10 Servo
1.10.1 Area N, Mod. SD: Servo data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/ServoData/...

The SD module makes servo data available.

These data can be accessed only via the cyc. variable service and the logging
function (not individual variable service).

The row index is coded as follows:

The lower three places contain the NCK axis index
The fourth place contains the data format.

The column index is coded as follows:

The lower three places contain the signal ID
The fourth place contains the servo cycle

Data format coding:

0: 32 bit float
1: 64 bit float

Servo cycle coding:

0: The average value of all servo cycle values of one IPO cycle must be
applied
61: The minimum value must be applied
62: The maximum value must be applied
n: The value of the nth servo cycle in the course of one IPO cycle must be
applied
Maximum value of: IPO_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO /
POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATIO
( 1 <=n <=60 )

Coding of signal ID:

1: Following error
2: Control deviation
3: Contour deviation
4: Actual position value, measuring system 1
5: Actual position value, measuring system 2
6: Position setpoint
7: Actual velocity value of active encoders (NCK)
8: Drive velocity setpoint (NCK)
9: Compensation value, measuring system 1
10: Compensation value, measuring system 2
11: Controller mode
12: Parameter set
13: Active measuring system
14: Position setpoint at controller input
15: Velocity setpoint at controller input
16: Acceleration setpoint at controller input
17: Velocity feedforward value (plus QEC)
18: Torque/force feedforward value

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-247
1 Variables 03/2006
1.10 Servo

19: Torque/force limit value

20: Actual velocity, measuring system 1
21: Actual velocity, measuring system 2
22: Interpolation ended signal
23: Exact stop fine signal
24: Exact stop coarse signal
25: QEC learning criterion
26: QEC compensation value
50: Utilization
51: Active power
52: Torque/force setpoint
53: Actual current value (smoothed)
54: Actual speed/velocity motor
55: Valve lift setpoint
56: Actual valve lift
57: Actual pressure cylinder A end
58: Actual pressure cylinder B end
60: Safe actual position
61: Safe actual drive position
62: Safety-relevant input signal NCK
63: Safety-relevant output signal NCK
64: Safety-relevant input signal drive (from PLC)
65: Safety-relevant output signal drive (from PLC)
66: Reaction identifier for NCK
67: Reaction identifier for NCK/drive
68: Result list 1 NCK
69: Result list 1 drive
70: Result list 2 NCK
71: Result list 2 drive
72: Safety partial actual value
73: Actual velocity limit
74: Setpoint velocity limit
75: SI actual value difference
76: Current SI slip speed
77: Current SBR limit

servoDataFl32
Servo data
- 0 Float r
Multi-line: yes Axis index / data format (see module siehe Bausteinkopf
header)

servoDataFl64
Servo data
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Axis index / data format (see module siehe Bausteinkopf
header)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-248 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

1.11 Diagnosis data

1.11.1 Area N, Mod. DIAGN: Global diagnostic data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem

/Nck/ChannelDiagnose/...

This module contains information about global NC diagnostic data.

The measured time variables are available on the destination hardware only. The
net time is calculated without interrupts by higher priority time levels, the gross time
includes the interrupts.
The highest priority time level is the SERVO, followed by the IPO and finally the
interpreter/ preparation. To obtain useful minimum and maximum time intervals, the
corresponding variables must be initialized before the measurement.

actCycleTimeBrut
Sum of current gross runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Selects a specific SW task on the 4
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
Line index 5: SYNACT (from SW
7.1)

actCycleTimeNet
Sum of current net runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Selects a specific SW task on the 4
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
Line index 5: SYNACT (from SW
7.1)

compressAbility
Describes whether the NCK supports the transfer of compressed files
Bit0=1: With Huffman algorithm compressed files can be transferred
(this corresponds to instruction ";$COMPR=HUFFMAN1" during download)
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

dp611USpecAccChangeCnt
The counter is incremented if the NCK changes the
available ACC information
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dp611USpecAccKey
Version and type information about available ACC contents
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no maxnumDrives

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-249
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

dp611USpecAccMask
Bit-coded screenform indicating the drives for which special ACC files are available

Bit 0 == 1 -> A special ACC is available

for drive with log. drive number 1.
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dp611USpecAccPath
Path in which the ACC files are stored in the NCK file system.
This path might be empty later on if the files are to
be supplied from the active file system.
Current equivalent value: /_N_VS_DIR
- 0 String[32] r
Multi-line: no

dpAxisCfgMachAxisNr
Machine axis !!CAUTION NCU LINK!!
- 0 0 INT32_MAX UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpAxisCfgNumAxes

dpAxisCfgNumAxes
Number of axes entered in the system
- 0 0 INT32_MAX UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpAxisCfgValid
Axis info is available
0=Information is not available
1=Information is available
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpAxisStateCtrlout
Status of output drivers.
0=no axis status assigned
1=axis status assigned
2=axis status is cyclical
3=axis status assigned and cyclical
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpAxisCfgNumAxes

dpAxisStateEnc1
Status encoder 1 driver
0=no axis status assigned
1=axis status assigned
2=axis status is cyclical
3=axis status assigned and cyclical
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpAxisCfgNumAxes

dpAxisStateEnc2
Status encoder 2 driver
0=no axis status assigned
1=axis status assigned
2=axis status is cyclical
3=axis status assigned and cyclical
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpAxisCfgNumAxes

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-250 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

dpAxisStateLifeCntErrCtrlout
This data counts the number of position control cycles
since failure of the sign-of-life signal
0 to n= number of position control cycles since
failure of the sign-of-life signal
- 0 0 INT32_MAX UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpAxisCfgNumAxes

dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc1
This data counts the number of position control cycles since
failure of the sign-of-life signal
0 to n= number of position control cycles since
failure of the sign-of-life signal
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpAxisCfgNumAxes

dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc2
This data counters the number of position control cycles since
failure of the sign-of-life signal
0 to n= number of position control cycles since
failure of the sign-of-life signal
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpAxisCfgNumAxes

dpBusCfgBaudrate
Baud rate on DP bus (bit/s)
The permissible baud rates are determined by
the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170)
Hz 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusCfgCycleTime
The time required by the master to scan all
slaves once (request, response), until the
cycle starts from the beginning again.
s, user defined 0 0 DOUBLE_MAX Double r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusCfgDataExTime
Data exchange time in [s,s,userdef]
s, user defined 0 0 DOUBLE_MAX Double r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusCfgNumBuses
Number of DP buses
Currently only one bus standardized acc. to Profibus DP standard
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpBusCfgValid
Bus configuration data are available
TRUE= data exist and are initialized
FALSE= no data exist
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-251
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

dpBusStateAccessDurationAct
Current access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateAccessDurationMax
Maximum access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateAccessDurationMin
Minimum access time to communications buffer for DP master
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateAccessErrCnt1
Number of bus access errors of type 1 since NCK Start
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateAccessErrCnt2
Number of bus access errors of type 2 since NCK Start
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr1
Average number of cycles between two
bus access errors of type 1
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr2
Average number of cycles between two
bus access errors of type 2
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateCycleCnt
Number of bus cycles since NCK Start
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateDpmAction
Indicator for operating progress of DP M
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateDpmActual
Current status of DP M bus - controlled by DP M
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateDpmCtrl
Booting status of processor for DP Master dpcadmin
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-252 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

dpBusStateDpmError
Error on status transitions
- 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateDpmPrjCnt
Modification counter for new DP configurations.

Suggested use:
*) Read modification counter (1)
*) Read out configuring data
*) Read modification counter (2)
*) If the modification counters in (1) and (2) are identical
and both display "valid", the data read from HW-Config
will be consistent.
even values -> configuration invalid
uneven values -> configuration valid
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateDpmRequest
Desired status of DP M bus - request from HOST
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpBusStateNumActiveSlaves
This data indicates how many slaves can currently be
accessed via the bus. This value is updated in online operation.

The number of slaves on the bus is determined

by the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170)
- 0 0 125 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpBusCfgNumBuses

dpClientCfgId
Identification client NCK/PLC/3RD
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpClientCfgNumClnt

dpClientCfgNumClnt
Number of clients
- 0 0 INT32_MAX UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpClientCfgValid
Client information is available
0=no client information available
1=client information is available
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpClientStateComm
Client status incl. output release
0=No output enable
1=Client state output enable
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpClientCfgNumClnt

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-253
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

dpSlaveCfgAssignBus
Bus number of the slave
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveCfgBusAddr
The address of the slave on the bus.
In addition to its own address, every slave has a
broadcast address via which all salves can be
addressed.
The broadcast address is not available for individually
addressing a single slave.
127: Broadcast address
- 0 0 127 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveCfgInputTime
Time for actual-value sensing
See dpSlaveMasterAppCycTime
s, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveCfgMasterAppCycTime
Position controller cycle.
For a detailed description, please refer to
PROFIDRIVE PROFIL ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Edition: V1.2 Draft, April 1999) Section 7
See PROFIDRIVE PROFIL ANTRIEBSTECHNIK
(Edition: V1.2 Draft, April 1999) Section 7
s, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves
Number of slaves configured in SDB1xxx.
This value may not match the actual number of slaves
connected to the bus.
The number of slaves which can be configured for bus connection
is determined by Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170).
- 0 0 125 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpSlaveCfgOutputTime
Time for setpoint acceptance
See dpSlaveMasterAppCycTime
s, user defined 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveCfgValid
This data indicates whether the slave data structure
has already been initialized. The structure is initialized
when a slave configuration or status data is accessed.
Scanning dpSlaveCfgValid also activates initialization
of the structure.

True: Slave data are available

False: Slave data are not available
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-254 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

dpSlaveIdentNo
Ident number of the slave
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveIdentNoEx
The extended ID no. of the PROFIBUS slave
helps to identify the PROFIBUS slaves not officially classified
as such and therefore lack specificiation dpSlaveIdentNo.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveStateComm
The slave is active on the bus once the drive assigned to
the slave has successfully logged on to the bus.
True: Slave on bus
False: Slave not on bus
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveStateIncCnt
The incarnation counter of the slave
is increased by one each time the slave is included in the bus. If the slave drops out of the bus, this counter is not
changed.
After the first time it has gone into the bus (that is the first operational status of the slave), the value is 1.
In case of an area overflow, the count restarts at 0.
This only functions with slaves which contain at least one assigned NC axis. In the case of other slaves (pure I/O slaves,
or axes controlled by the PLC), this values remains at 0.

From 0 (starting value after Restart) to a maximum of 2147483647 (2^31-1).

- 0 0 2147483647 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlaveStateSync
The drive linked to this slave is operating in cyclic mode.
Slaves without a drive are defined as "non-cyclical".
True: Cyclical
False: Non-cyclical
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves

dpSlotCfgAssignAxis
This data supplies the axis indices of the drive, encoder 1 and encoder 2
for access in the Axis-Assign-Table.
The 32-bit value consists of 4 bytes with the following meaning:
Byte0(bits 0-7) = axis index of axis
Byte1(bits 8-15) = axis index, encoder 1
Byte2(bits 16-23)= axis index, encoder 2
Byte3(bits 24-31)= provided for future extensions.
A byte with the value 0xFF indicates that no axis index
is defined for the relevant slot.
- 255 0 32 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-255
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

dpSlotCfgAssignBus
Bus number assigned to this slot
Since only one bus is currently supported by Profibus DP,
there is only one bus to which all slots are assigned.
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotCfgAssignClient
This data supplies the clientIndex for accessing the
Client Assign table.
0=no assignment possible (this applies to diagnostic and PKW slots)
>0 assignment exists
- 0 0 2 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotCfgAssignMaster
Number of master to which this slot is assigned
Since only one bus is currently supported by
Profibus DP and only one Class 1 Master exists
per bus, there is only one master to which all slots
are assigned.
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotCfgAssignSlave
This data contains the bus address of the slave
belonging to the nth slot.
All legal slave addresses can be specified
- 0 0 125 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotCfgIoType
I/O identifier
0 = input slot
1 = output slot
2 = diagnosis slot
- 0 0 2 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotCfgLength
Length in number of bytes
- 0 0 32 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotCfgLogBaseAddress
The logical basic address of the slot is assigned
during configuration. Although it is not needed on the
bus for data transfer purposes, this address is the only
means by which a unique link can be created between the
NCK and bus nodes.
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-256 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

dpSlotCfgNumSlots
The total number of all slots configured in the system is
stored in this data.
0 (lower limit) up to INT32_MAX(upper limit);
Note that a slave cannot support more than
256 slots.
- 0 0 INT32_MAX UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpSlotCfgSlaveAddress
This data contains the bus address of the slave to which this slot is assigned.
Several slots may have the same slave address.

The number of available addresses on the bus is determined

by the Profibus standard (DIN19245 EN50170).
- 0 0 125 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotCfgSlotNr
Slot number within the slave
A maximum total of 256 slots can be assigned to each slave.
0: Diagnostic slot
2: Diagnostic slot
4: 1st data slot
- 0 0 255 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotCfgValid
The slot data structure (CcIdent) exists and is initialized.
True: Data are valid
False: Data are invalid or not initialized
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpSlotStateComm
Status of slots (ok, failed, not processed by the NCK)
0= no sign of life
1= sign of life
2= not processed by NCK
- 0 0 1 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotStateRecvTelegram
Bit pattern of this slot received by the master
in the form of a hexadecimal string
- 0 String[198] r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotStateSendTelegram
Bit pattern of this slot sent to the slave in
the form of a hexadecimal string
Transmitted message frame
- 0 String[198] r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

dpSlotStateTelegramType
Message frame type of slot
0 = Message frame type unknown
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSlotCfgNumSlots

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-257
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

dpSysCfgAvailable
This data specifies whether the system has been generated
with DP Adapter and/or DP Master
0= Neither DPA nor DPM available
1= DPA available
2= DPM available
3= DPA and DPM available
- 0 0 3 UWord r
Multi-line: no 1

dpSysCfgNumMaster
Number of masters
There is only one master per bus with DP.
Since only 1 bus is currently permitted by the
bus standard, there can only be a maximum
of one master.
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpSysCfgValid
This data indicates whether the configuration data are valid and
initialized.
TRUE or FALSE
- 0 0 1 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: no 1

dpSysCfgVersionDpm
Version number of DP M SW as numerical value
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpSysCfgNumMaster

dpSysCfgVersionDpr
Actual version Dpr (inaccessible in earlier SW)
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpSysCfgNumMaster

dpSysCfgVersionDprEx
DPR_SS_VERSION is a version number stored in the NCK which
can be read out via this variable.
- 0 Double r
Multi-line: no dpSysCfgNumMaster

dpSysCfgVersionHost
This data contains the version number of the host SW as a numerical value
- 0 0 UINT16_MAX Double r
Multi-line: no dpSysCfgNumMaster

dpSysStateDpmInit
There are three different initialization states:
REQUEST, ACKNOWLEDGE and ERROR
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no dpSysCfgNumMaster

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-258 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

errCodeSetNrGen
Selection of error code set to be used in the case of communication
errors. The selection is client-specific, the client is identified by the sender
address.
0: P1-compatible code
5: P5-compatible code
6: P6-compatible code
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

errCodeSetNrPi
Selection of error code set to be used by PI Services in the case of communication errors. The selection is client-specific,
the client is identified by the sender address.

0: P1-compatible code
5: P5-compatible code
6: P6-compatible code
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

maxCycleTimeBrut
Sum of maximum gross runtime of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Selects a specific SW task on the 4
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
Line index 5: SYNACT (from SW
7.1)

maxCycleTimeNet
Sum of maximum net runtime of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Selects a specific SW task on the 4
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
Line index 5: SYNACT (from SW
7.1)

minCycleTimeBrut
Sum of minimum gross runtimes of all channel
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Selects a specific SW task on the 4
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
Line index 5: SYNACT (from SW
7.1)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-259
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

minCycleTimeNet
Sum of minimum net runtimes of all channels
ms 0 0 Double r
Multi-line: yes Selects a specific SW task on the 4
NCK:
Line index 1: SERVO
Line index 2: IPO
Line index 3: VL
Line index 4: PLC
Line index 5: SYNACT (from SW
7.1)

nckCompileSwitches
Selected NCK compiler switches
Bit0: NDEBUG
Bit1: NOTRACES
Bit2: EMBARGO
Bit3: TARGET
- UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pcmciaDataShotAct
Current access to PCMCIA card: Transferred bytes
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement
a status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pcmciaDataShotSum
Current access to PCMCIAcard: Total length in bytes.
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement a
status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pcmciaFfsLength
Length of FFS on PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pcmciaShotStatus
Current access to PCMCIA-Karte: Status
Data pcmciaShotStatus, pcmciaDataShotSum and pcmciaDataShotAct can be used to implement a
status display for PCMCIA card access operations.
0: Not active
1: Write active
2: Read active
3-: Reserved
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pcmciaStartFfsOffset
Start offset of FFS at beginning of PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

pcmciaStartShotOffset
Current access to PCMCIA card: Start offset at beginning of PCMCIA card in bytes
- 0 0 UDoubleword r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-260 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

poweronTime $AN_POWERON_TIME
Time since last normal boot ( in minutes )
Can be written from SW 6.3.
s, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

setupTime $AN_SETUP_TIME
Time since last "control system boot on default
values" ( in minutes ).
The timer is automatically set to zero on every
"control system boot on default values".
Can be written from SW 6.3.
s, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1.11.2 Area C, Mod. DIAGN: Channel-specific diagnosis data

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Channel/ChannelDiagnose/...

This module contains information about the channel-specific NC diagnostic data.

The measured time variables are available on the destination hardware only. The
net time is calculated without interrupts by higher priority time levels, the gross time
includes the interrupts. The highest priority time level is the SERVO, followed by
the IPO and finally the interpreter/ preparation. To obtain useful minimum and
maximum time intervals, the corresponding variables must be initialized before the
measurement.

acIpoBuf $AC_IPO_BUF
Level of IPO buffer (number of blocks)
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

actCycleTimeBrut
Current gross cycle time
line index 1: SERVO-task
line index 2: IPO-task
line index 3: interpreter/preparation-task
line index 4: PLC
line index 5: SYNACT (from SW 7.1)
ms Double r
Multi-line: yes 1-3 3

actCycleTimeNet
Current net cycle time
line index 1: SERVO-task
line index 2: IPO-task
line index 3: interpreter/preparation-task
line index 4: PLC
line index 5: SYNACT (from SW 7.1)
ms Double r
Multi-line: yes 1-3 3

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-261
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

cuttingTime $AC_CUTTING_TIME
Tool operating time ( in seconds ):
The operating time of the path axes excluding active
rapid traverse is measured in all NC programs between
NC Start and Program End/NC Reset.
The measurement is also interrupted during an active
dwell time. The timer is automatically set to zero
every time the control boots on default values.
Can be written as of SW 6.3.
s, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

cycleTime $AC_CYCLE_TIME
Runtime of selected NC program ( in seconds ):
The runtime between NC Start and Program End / NC
Reset is measured in the selected NC program.
The timer is cleared when a new NC program is
started.
Can be written as of SW 6.3.
s, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

ipoBufLevel
Fill level of the IPO buffer (integer value in %)
% 0 100 UWord r
Multi-line: yes 1 1

maxCycleTimeBrut
Maximum gross cycle time
line index 1: SERVO-task
line index 2: IPO-task
line index 3: interpreter/preparation task
line index 4: PLC
line index 5: SYNACT (from SW 7.1)
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1-3 3

maxCycleTimeNet
Maximum net cycle time
line index 1: SERVO-task
line index 2: IPO-task
line index 3: interpreter/preparation-task
line index 4: PLC
line index 5: SYNACT (from SW 7.1)
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1-3 3

minCycleTimeBrut
Minimum gross cycle time
line index 1: SERVO-task
line index 2: IPO-task
line index 3: interpreter/preparation task
line index 4: PLC
line index 5: SYNACT (from SW 7.1)
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1-3 3

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-262 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

minCycleTimeNet
Minimum net cycle time
line index 1: SERVO-task
line index 2: IPO-task
line index 3: interpreter/preparation-task
line index 4: PLC
line index 5: SYNACT (from SW 7.1)
ms Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1-3 3

operatingTime $AC_OPERATING_TIME
Total runtime of NC programs in Automatic mode
( in seconds ):
The runtimes of all programs are summed between
NC Start and Program End/NC Reset.
The timer is set to zero on every control boot.
Can be written as of SW 6.3.
s, user defined 0.0 Double wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

1.11.3 Area N, Mod. ETPD: Data lists for protocolling

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
/Nck/ProtocolData/...

Data lists for protocolling.This module allows to access several lines or rows at a
time.

area
Variable specification of nth OPI data in the list:
area
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 2 + 5 * ( n-1) 2 + 5 * (numData- 1)

col
Variable specification of nth OPI data in list:
col
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 4 + 5 * ( n-1) 4 + 5 * (numData- 1)

numData
Number of data in the list
<= maxnumTraceProtData
- 0 maxnumTraceProtData UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

row
Variable specification of nth OPI data in list:
row
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 5 + 5 * ( n-1) 5 + 5 * (numData- 1)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-263
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

type
Variable specification of nth OPI data in list:
type
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 6 + 5 * ( n-1) 6 + 5 * (numData- 1)

unit
Variable specification of nth OPI data in list:
unit
- UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 3 + 5 * ( n-1) 3 + 5 * (numData- 1)

1.11.4 Area C, Mod. ETP: Types of events

OEM-MMC: Linkitem

/Channel/ProtocolEvent/...

Description of logging event types.

It is permissible to access this module via several lines and columns.

The line index identifies a specific event.

Standard events: line index <= 10000:
OEM events: line index > 10000:
User index: is determined by the 1000s digit of the line index
Event type: is determined by the last three digits of the line index

Examples of the line index:

00001: Standard event of user 0 with the number 1 (IPO)
00006: Standard event of user 0 with the number 6 (NC start)
03006: Standard event of user 3 with the number 6 (NC start)
06006: Standard event of user 6 with the number 6 (NC start)
10001: OEM event of user 0 with the number 1
13002: OEM event of user 3 with the number 2

Standard event types:

Cyclic events:
1= IPO and IPO cycle
15 = IPO2
47 = IPO3 (from SW 6.4)
48 = IPO4 (from SW 6.4)

Acyclic events related to axis motions:

2= GEO_AXIS_START and Geo axis starts or changes the
direction
18 = GEO_AXIS_STARTa see VDI interface NCK->PLC
channel specific
DBB40 Bit6 and Bit7 (Bit6 = motion
command+, Bit7 = motion command-)
Event occurs when a bit is reset.
3= GEO_AXIS_STOP and Geo axis stops

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-264 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

19 = GEO_AXIS_STOPa, see VDI interface NCK->PLC

channel specific
DBB40 Bit6 and Bit7 (Bit6 = motion
command-, Bit7 = motion command+)
Event occurs when both bits are set to
0 and one of them was previously active.
4= MA_AXIS_START, One machine axis of the
channel starts or changes the direction
see VDI interface NCK->PLC axis-
specific
DBB64 Bit6 and Bit7 (Bit6 = motion
command-, Bit7 = motion command+)
Event occurs when a bit is reset.
5= MA_AXIS_STOP, One machine axis stops
see VDI interface NCK->PLC axis-
specific
DBB64 Bit6 and Bit7 (Bit6 = motion
command-, Bit7 = motion command+)
Event occurs if both bits are set to 0
and one of them was previously active.

Acyclic events related to channel influence:

6= NC_START NC start (if detected in NC)
7= NC_STOP NC stop (if detected in NC, axes may
still be traversed)

Acyclic events related to part program processing:

8= BLOCK_BEG_1 Block start (first IPO cycle of a
block) without intermediate blocks, all program levels

9= BLOCK_BEG_2 and Block start (first IPO cycle of a

block) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
20 = BLOCK_BEG_2a
10 = BLOCK_BEG_3 Block start (first IPO cycle of a
block) without intermediate blocks, only main program level and MDA level

16 = BLOCK_BEG_S1 and Block start (search run with

computation) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
22 = BLOCK_BEG_S1a
11 = BLOCK_END_1 Block end (first IPO cycle of a
block) without intermediate blocks, all program levels

12 = BLOCK_END_2 and Block end (first IPO cycle of a

block) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
21 = BLOCK_END_2a
13 = BLOCK_END_3 Block end (first IPO cycle of a
block) without intermediate blocks, only main program level and MDA level

17 = BLOCK_END_S1 Block end (search run with

computation) with intermediate blocks, all program levels
31 = BLOCK_END_P1 Block end (run in)
(from SW ?: not yet implemented)
32 = BLOCK_END_P1a Block end (run in)
(from SW ?: not yet implemented)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-265
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

44 = BLOCK_END_I1 Block end (interpreter)

(from SW 6.4)
43 = NC_LEVEL_CHG Level change during part
program processing (from SW 6.4)

Acyclic events triggered by part programm command WRTPR

23 = PROT_TXT_REQ Logging a WRTPR text
24 = PROT_TXT_REQ_S1 Logging a WRTPR text (search
run with computation)
33 = PROT_TXT_REQ_P1 Logging a WRTPR text (run in)
(from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by the logging process itself
14 = PROT_FILE_BEG Start logging related to a log
file.
29 = PROT_START_TRIG Start trigger has triggered
(from SW 6.4)
30 = PROT_STOP_TRIG Stop trigger has triggered
(from SW 6.4)
46 = PROT_START Start logging (from SW
6.4)
45 = PROT_STOP Stop logging (from SW
6.4)

Acyclic events triggered by buttons

42 = CANCEL_BUTTON The Cancel button was pressed
(from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by alarms
41 = ALARM_REPORTED An alarm has occurred
(from SW 6.4)

Acyclic events triggered by synchronized action

36 = SYNC_ACT_ACTIV Activating synchronized action
(from SW 6.4)
37 = SYNC_ACT_DEACT Deactivating synchronized
action (from SW 6.4)
38 = SYNC_ACT_FIRE Synchronized action triggers
(from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by tool
25 = TOOL_CHANGE tool change
(from SW 6.2)
27 = TOOL_CHANGE_S1 tool change (search run with
computation) (from SW 6.3)
34 = TOOL_CHANGE_P1 tool change (run in)
(from SW 6.4)
26 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE cutting edge change
(from SW 6.2)
28 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE_S1 cutting edge change (search
run with computation) (from SW 6.3)
35 = CUTTEDGE_CHANGE_P1 cutting edge change (run in)
(from SW 6.4)
Acyclic events triggered by PLC
39 = PLC_OB_1 PLC OB1 started (from
SW 6.4)
40 = PLC_OB40 PLC OB40 started (from
SW 6.4)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-266 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.11 Diagnosis data

asciiMode
Data logging format
0: Data recorded in binary format with fixed alignment to 8 bytes
1: Data recorded in ASCII format
2: Data recorded in binary format with variable alignment
3: Data recorded in binary format with variable alignment and optimization of two consecutive data records of the same
event. In this case, only the header is logged, not the actual data.
- 0 0 3 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

countActivated
Number of times the event has occurred
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no

dataListIndex
Index of data list to be used
All valid columns in module ETPD - 1)
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

dataProtok
Number of bytes entered in the Fifo file
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no

dataUploaded
Number of bytes already uploaded from the Fifo file
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: no

eventActive
Event state
0: Not active
1: Active
2: Deactivate and release data set
- 0 0 2 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

eventActiveStatus
For diagnosis: Event state
0: Activated
1: Not activated
2: Cannot be activated because the sum of the variable lengths is too large
3: Cannot be activated because the internal resources are not sufficient
4: Cannot be activated because the protocol file cannot be created
100-...- cannot be activated because the variable specification with the index (value - 100) is wrong
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

maxElementsFastFifoUsed
For diagnosis: Maximum number of entries in the FIFO buffer
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-267
1 Variables 03/2006
1.11 Diagnosis data

maxFileLength
Maximum length of log file
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

maxGrossFileLengthUsed
For diagnosis: Maximum gross size of log file
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (See module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

maxNetFileLengthTooSmall
For diagnosis: Number of (net) bytes by which log file is undersized
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

numElementsFastFifoTooSmall
For diagnosis: Number of entries by which the Fifo buffer is undersized
- 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

protocolFilename
Name of the log file including the path
- 0 String[64] wr
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

resultPar1
General result value, the significance is a function of the event.
SYNC_ACT_ACTIVATE, SYNC_ACT_DEACTIVATE, and SYNC_ACT_FIRE: ID of the synchronous action.
All non-stated events do not supply this result value.
- 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (see block header) siehe Bausteinkopf

skip
Number of events to be skipped
- 0 0 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

startTriggerLock
Setting, whether the start trigger is not to be processed during this event.
0: Trigger is processed
1: Trigger is not processed
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no

stopTriggerLock
Setting, whether the stop trigger is not to be processed during this event.
0: Trigger is processed
1: Trigger is not processed
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: no

suppressProtLock
Clears the effect of traceProtocolLock
0: The disable is active
1: The disable is canceled for this event
- 0 0 1 UWord wr
Multi-line: yes 1 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-268 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 1 Variables
1.12 HMI / MMC State data

timePeriod
Time base for cyclic event only
ms 0 0 UWord r
Multi-line: yes Event (see module header) siehe Bausteinkopf

1.12 HMI / MMC State data

1.12.1 Area M, Mod. S: Internal status data MMC

OEM-MMC: Linkitem
//State/...

Some internal status data of the MMC can be accessed via this module.

/Nck/Nck/ActApplication
Current application for display in MMC
- String[32] wr
Multi-line: no

/Nck/Nck/ActBag
Current operating mode for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no

/Nck/Nck/Channel
Current channel for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no

/Nck/Nck/CoordSystem
Coordinate system for display in MMC
- Character wr
Multi-line: no

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 1-269
1 Variables 03/2006
1.12 HMI / MMC State data

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

1-270 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface

2 Interface Signals sl
2
2.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface .................... 2-272

2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface ........................ 2-272

2.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version..................... 2-273
2.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version...................... 2-275
2.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel ......................... 2-276
2.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)......................................... 2-277
2.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT8).................... 2-279
2.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2) ............................................................... 2-280
2.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................... 2-284
2.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/HMI (DB 10) ............................................. 2-285
2.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11) ......................................... 2-292
2.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18) .... 2-295
2.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19) ................................... 2-298
2.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)...................................................... 2-303
2.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30) ............................... 2-304
2.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC->NCK) (DB 31–DB 61) ...... 2-322
2.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71) .................. 2-331
2.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72)..................... 2-332
2.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73)................................... 2-333
2.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
(840Di with MCI2 only) (DB 77).............................................. 2-335

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-271
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface

2.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface

Please find the descriptin of Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface in
chapter 4.3.

2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

General
In the following list of interface signals, a reference to relevant documentation is
provided for every signal.
This reference specifies the section number or the short designation of the
description of functions, please refer to
References: /FB/, xx, ”yyy”
xx Short designation of individual description of functions (e.g.: /A2/)
yyy Name of description of functions (e.g.: ”Various interface signals”
or title of the guide)

Inverse signals
Signals marked with a ”*” are so-called inverse signals. These signals initiate the
appropriate function when a 0 signal appears rather than a 1 signal (e.g. MCP,
byte n+2.0: *NC STOP).

Legend
• In STEP7, DBB means data module byte
• In STEP7, DBW means data module word (16 bits)
• In STEP7, DBD means data module double word (32 bits)

Note
Please refere also to
SINAMICS S120 Installation and Start-UP Manual
SINAMICS S List Manual for SINAMICS drives.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-272 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version

Signals from machine control panel (keys)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO

IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

IB n + 2 Key- Key- Spindle *Spindle Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop

switch switch start stop start stop
position 0 position 2

IB n + 3 Key- Feedrate override

switch
position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block

IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
+ - Rapid x 4th axis 7th axis R10
R15 R13 traverse R1 R4 R7
R14

IB n + 5 Axis selection
Y Z 5th axis Traverse R11 R9 8th axis 6th axis
R2 R3 R5 command R8 R6
MCS/WCS
R12

IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

IB n + 7 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-273
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode

1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO

QB n + 1 Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

start stop
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC

QB n + 2 Axis selection Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
Direction X 4th axis 7th axis R10
key R1 R4 R7
-
R13

QB n + 3 Axis selection
Z 5th axis Travel R11 R9 8th axis 6th axis Direction
R3 R5 command R8 R6 key
MCS/WCS +
R12 R15

QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Y

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2

QB n + 5 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-274 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version

Signals from machine control panel (keys)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO

IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

IB n + 2 Keyswitch Keyswitch Spindle *Spindle Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop
position 0 position 2 start stop

IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override

position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block

IB n + 4 Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
R15 R13 R14 +Y -Z -C R10
R1 R4 R7

IB n + 5 Direction keys
+X +C Rapid Travel -Y -X +Z
R2 R3 traverse command R11 R9 R8 R6
override MCS/WCS
R5 R12

IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

IB n + 7 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode

1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO

QB n + 1 Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC

QB n + 2 Direction keys Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
+Y -Z -C
R13 R1 R4 R7 R10

QB n + 3 Direction keys
Travel -Y -X +Z
R3 R5 command R11 R9 R8 R6 R15
MCS/WCS

QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Direction

key
+X
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2

QB n + 5 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-275
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel

Signals from slimline machine control panel
(keys and switches)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

*NC Stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.

IB n + 1 Spindle Keyswitch Machine function

NC Start SP right *SP Stop SP left SS 3 REF. REPOS Teach in

IB n + 2 Feedrate Keyswitch Machine functions

START *STOP var. INC SS 0 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override

RESET SS 2 SS 1 E D C B A

IB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

(+) R15 (-) R13 Rapid KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
traverse
R14

IB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X

IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

IB n + 7 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to slimline machine control panel

(LEDs)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

NC Stop SP - SP 100 % SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.

QB n + 1 Spindle Machine function

NC Start SP right SP Stop SP left Unassigned REF. REPOS Teach in

QB n + 2 Feedrate Machine functions

START STOP var. INC Unassigned 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

QB n + 3 Unassigned
Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned

QB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

(+) R15 (-) R13 Rapid KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
traverse
R14

QB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X

QB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

QB n + 7 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-276 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)

Signals from handheld unit (keys)
(input display)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Reserved

IB n + 1 Reserved

IB n + 2
T9 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1

IB n + 3
T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9

IB n + 4
T24 T23 T22 T21

IB n + 5 Acknowl- Keyswitch Rapid traverse/feed override switch

edgement
Digital E D C B A
display

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-277
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals to handheld unit (LEDs)

(Output display, LEDs)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 always 1

New data Line

for selected selection
QB n + 1 line

QB n + 2
L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1

QB n + 3
L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
HHU digital display

QB n + 4 1st character (right) of the selected line

QB n + 5 2nd character of the selected line

QB ...

QB n + 18 15th character of the selected line

QB n + 19 16th character (left) of the selected line

Note
The parameterization is described in the Installation and Start-Up Guide and in
the Description of Functions P3 sl ”Basic PLC program”.

References: /BH/”Operator Components Manual”

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-278 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HT8)

Signals from machine control panel simulation
Interface HT8→PLC
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Function key block

REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS

IB n + 1 Function key block

FCT15 FCT14 BigFct FCT12 FCT11 INC REPOS

IB n + 2 JOG keys positive direction

If 1: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
Ax1-Ax6=
Ax7-Ax12

IB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction

Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1

IB n + 4 Shift keys
Signal Diagno Service System Param Correct Progr. Mach.

IB n + 5 Shift keys
BF16 BF15 BF14 BF13 BF12 Step Modify Insert

IB n + 6 Start key block

Res. HT 6 VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP

IB n + 7
E D C B A

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-279
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals to machine control panel simulation

Interface PLC→HT8

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS
QB n + 1 Function key block
FCT15 FCT14 BigFct FCT12 FCT11 INC REPOS
QB n + 2 Axes 7–12 JOG keys positive direction
selected
QB n + 2
Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
QB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction
For WCS: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
No MCS
Ax4 to Ax6
QB n + 4 Shift keys
Signal Diagno Service System Param Correct Progr. Mach.
QB n + 5 Shift keys
BF16 BF15 BF14 BF13 BF12 Step Modify Insert
QB n + 6 Start key block
Display VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP
travel keys
QB n + 7

2.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2)

DB2 Signals for PLC messages (PLC→HMI), /P3/

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Channel 1

0 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000

Feed disable (alarm no.: 510000–510015)

1 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008

2 Feed and read-in disable byte1 (alarm no.: 510100–510131)

3 Feed and read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510108–510115)

4 Feed and read-in disable byte 3 (alarm no.: 510116–510123)

5 Feed and read-in disable byte 4 (alarm no.: 510124–510131)

6 Read-in disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510200–510207)

7 Read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510208–510215)

8 Read-in disable byte 3 (alarm no.: 510216–510223)

9 Read-in disable byte 4 (alarm no.: 510224–510231)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-280 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

10 NC Start disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510300–510307)

11 NC Start disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510308–510315)

12 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511100–511107)

13 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511108–511115)

14 Feed stop GEOaxis 2 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511200–511207)

15 Feed stop GEOaxis 2 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511208–511215)

16 Feed stop GEOaxis 3 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511300–511307)

17 Feed stop GEOaxis 3 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511308–511315)

Channel 2

18 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000

Feed disable (alarm no.: 520000-520015)

19 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008

20-23 Feed and read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520100–520131)

24-27 Read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520200–520231)

28-29 NC Start disable byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 520300–520315)

30-31 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 521100-521115)

32-33 Feed stop GEOaxis 2 byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 521200-521215)

34-35 Feed stop GEOaxis 3 byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 521300-521315)

36-143 As from channel 3, please refer to the following table

Channel areas in DB2

Area Address Signal number
Channel 1, see above DBX 0.0 - DBX 11.7 510.000 - 510.231
Channel 1, geo axes DBX 12.0 - DBX 17.7 511.100 - 511.315
Channel 2, see above DBX 18.0 - DBX 29.7 520.000 - 520.231
Channel 2, geo axes DBX 30.0 - DBX 35.7 521.100 - 521.315
Channel 3 DBX 36.0 - DBX 47.7 530.000 - 530.231
Channel 3, geo axes DBX 48.0 - DBX 53.7 531.100 - 531.315
Channel 4 DBX 54.0 - DBX 65.7 540.000 - 540.231
Channel 4, geo axes DBX 66.0 - DBX 71.7 541.100 - 541.315
Channel 5 DBX 72.0 - DBX 83.7 550.000 - 550.231
Channel 5, geo axes DBX 84.0 - DBX 89.7 551.100 - 551.315
Channel 6 DBX 90.0 - DBX 101.7 560.000 - 560.231
Channel 6, geo axes DBX 102.0 - DBX 107.7 561.100 - 561.315
Channel 7 DBX 108.0 - DBX 119.7 570.000 - 570.231
Channel 7, geo axes DBX 120.0 - DBX 125.7 571.100 - 571.315
Channel 8 DBX 126.0 - DBX 137.7 580.000 - 580.231
Channel 8, geo axes DBX 138.0 - DBX 143.7 581.100 - 581.315
Channel 9, channel 10 not
implemented

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-281
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Axis areas in DB2

Axis/spindle

144 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100

Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600100-600015) for axis/spindle 1

145 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108

146-147 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600200-600215) for axis/spindle 2

148-149 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600300-600315) for axis/spindle 3

150-151 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600400-600415) for axis/spindle 4

152-153 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600500-600515) for axis/spindle 5

154-155 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600600-600615) for axis/spindle 6

156-157 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600700-600715) for axis/spindle 7

158-159 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600800-600815) for axis/spindle 8

160-161 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600900-600915) for axis/spindle 9

162-163 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601000-601015) for axis/spindle 10

164-165 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601100-601115) for axis/spindle 11

166-167 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601200-601215) for axis/spindle 12

168-169 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601300-601315) for axis/spindle 13

170-171 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601400-601415) for axis/spindle 14

172-173 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601500-601515) for axis/spindle 15

174-175 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601600-601615) for axis/spindle 16

176-177 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601700-601715) for axis/spindle 17

178-179 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601800-601815) for axis/spindle 18

Axes 19 -31 not implemented

User areas
User area 0 Bytes 1 - 8

180 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000

... User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700063)

187 700063 700062 700061 700060 700059 700058 700057 700056

188-195 User area 1 Bytes 1 - 8 (alarm no.: 700100-700163)

...
428-435 User area 31 Bytes 1 - 8 (alarm no.: . 703.100-703.163)

Note
In DB2, the assignment is made between message/alarm number, text and area
identifier. All alarm or message bits are automatically transferred to the user
interface (channel, axis/spindle) through appropriate parameter settings. If these
parameter settings are not made, the bit transfer must be programmed in the user
program. The user interface can be further influenced after the block for the

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-282 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

error/operational messages has been called. Only signals of the channels and
axes declared in the NC machine data can be transferred and texts displayed.
The user must acknowledge all error messages generated. Operational
messages are displayed only for as long as the relevant condition prevails.
The number of user areas (max. 32) can be parameterized via FB 1.
DB2/DB3 must be deleted after changing the configuration (FB1: MsgUser).

Definition of error and operational messages /P3/

Byte no. of DB2 / Error message EM or operational message OM
7 / EM 6 / EM 5 / OM 4 / OM 3 / EM 2 / EM 1 / OM 0 / EM
15 / OM 14 / EM 13 / OM 12 / EM 11 / OM 10 / EM 9 / OM 8 / OM
23 / OM 22 / OM 21 / EM 20 / EM 19 / OM 18 / EM 17 / OM 16 / EM
31 / OM 30 / EM 29 / OM 28 / EM 27 / OM 26 / OM 25 / EM 24 / EM
35 / OM 34 / EM 33 / OM 32 / EM
151 / OM 150 / EM 149 / OM 148 / EM 147 / OM 146 / EM 145 / OM 144 / EM
159 / OM 158 / EM 157 / OM 156 / EM 155 / OM 154 / EM 153 / OM 152 / EM
187 / OM 186 / OM 185 / OM 184 / OM 183 / EM 182 / EM 181 / EM 180 / EM
195 / OM 194 / OM 193 / OM 192 / OM 191 / EM 190 / EM 189 / EM 188 / EM

Example
The alarms numbered from 510200 to 510207 can be generated via DB2, DBB6
(read-in disable channel 1). These alarms are defined as error messages as
standard.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-283
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10)

board input and output signals from NCK

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC→NC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Disabling of digital NCK inputs /A2/

Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBB 1 Setting of digital NCK inputs from PLC

Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBB2, 3
unas-
signed
DBB 4 Disabling of digital NCK outputs /A2/
Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 5 Overwrite screenform of digital NCK /A2/ outputs

Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 6 Setting value of digital NCK outputs from PLC /A2/

Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 7 Input screenform of digital NCK outputs /A2/

Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1
st
DBB 8-29 Machine axis number table for FC 19, 24, 25, 26 (1 MCP)

st
DBB 30 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, 24 (1 MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies

nd
DBB 32-53 Machine axis number table for FC 19, 24, 25, 26 (2 MCP)

nd
DBB 54 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, 24 (2 MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-284 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

General signals to NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC→NC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 56 Keyswitch /A2/ Acknowl. EMER-

EMER- GENCY
GENCY STOP /N2/
STOP /N2/
Position 3 Position 2 Position 1 Position 0

DBB 57 PC INC inputs

shutdown in mode
Only 840Di group area
evaluated active

DBB 58 Collision
detection
off

DBB 59

2.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/HMI (DB 10)

On-board NCK inputs and outputs (DB 10)

DB10 Signals from (NCK -> PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 60 Actual value of the digital ON-BOARD inputs of the
NCK
On-board inputs §)
Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBB 61-63

DBB 64 Setpoint for the digital outputs of the NCK without Setpoint for the digital on-board outputs of the NCK
hardware
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 65-67 Unassigned

DBB 68 Handwheel 1 moved

DBB 69 Handwheel 2 moved

DBB 70 Handwheel 3 moved

DBB 71 Modification counter inch/metric system of units

st
DBB 72 Status of the actual value display indicated (1 MCP)

HT6/HT8 Travel keys Machine/ Valid

displayed Work display

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-285
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

nd
DBB 73 Status of the actual value display indicated (2 MCP)

HT6/HT8 Travel keys Machine/ Valid

displayed Work display
st
DBB 74-79 Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (1 MCP)
MCP1AxisFromHMI
HT6/HT8
nd
DBB 80-85 Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (2 MCP)
MCP2AxisFromHMI
HT6

DBB 86 Reserved

DBB 88 Reserved

Note
#) Although no associated hardware I/Os exist, the PLC can process bits 4-7 of
the digital inputs and NCK outputs. Consequently, these bits can also be used to
transfer information between the NCK and the PLC.

§) The digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK exist as on-board hardware for
the 840D. No hardware I/Os are available for bits 0-3 of the FM-NC. In
accordance with #), these can be processed by the PLC.

Selection/status signals from HMI (DB 10)

DB 10 Signals from NC (NCK→PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 90
ePS to PLC

DBB 91
PLC to ePS

DBB 92
Gp-> PLC DP1 MPI/DP
Bus Bus
Slaves OK Slaves OK
DBB 93 free

DBB 94 free

DBB 95 free

DBB 96 free

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-286 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 97 Channel number for handwheel 1 /H1/

HMI--> PLC
D C B A

DBB 98 Channel number for handwheel 2 /H1/

HMI--> PLC
D C B A

DBB 99 Channel number for handwheel 3 /H1/

HMI--> PLC
D C B A

DBB 100 Axis number for handwheel 1 /H1/

HMI--> PLC

Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A

axis selected handwheel

DBB 101 Axis number for handwheel 2 /H1/

HMI--> PLC

Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A

axis selected handwheel

DBB 102 Axis number for handwheel 3 /H1/

HMI--> PLC

Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A

axis selected handwheel

DBB 103 HMI-battery HMI AT box HMI HMI Remote

alarm tempera- ready fan HD diagnosis
HMI--> PLC
active
ture limit monitoring monitoring /FBFE/

General signals from NCK (DB 10)

DB 10 Signals from NC (NCK→PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 104 NCK CPU 1

st
OB1 HHU MCP 2 MCP 1
ready /A2/ cycle ready ready ready

DBB 105 Too-

lmanage-
ment
command
cancellation
DBB 106 EMERGEN- Collision
CY STOP detection
active /N2/ off

DBB 107 Inch NCU-link Probe actuated /M4/

system active
Probe 2 Probe 1

DBB 108 NC ready Drive ready Drives in HMI-CPU HMI CPU HMI2 CPU
/A2/ /FBA/ cyclic Ready Ready ready
(HMI to (HMI to
operation OPI) MPI) E_HMI2
/A2/ /A2/
Ready

DBB 109 NCK Air temp. Heat sink PC NCK

battery alarm temp. operating alarm
alarm /A2/ alarm present
system

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-287
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

/A2/ NCU 573 fault /A2/

DBB 110 Software cams minus /N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DBB 111 Software cams minus /N3/

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DBB 112 Software cams minus /N3/

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DBB 113 Software cams minus /N3/

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

DBB 114 Software cams plus /N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DBB 115 Software cams plus /N3/

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DBB 116 Software cams plus /N3/

23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DBB 117 Software cams plus /N3/

31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

Note
regarding NCK-CPU Ready (DBX 104.7):
This signal represents the NC sign-of-life monitoring. The signal has to be
entered into the machine safety circuit.

External digital inputs of the NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC -> NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 122 Disable the external digital NCK inputs
Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

DBB 123 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs
Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

DBB 124 Disable the external digital NCK inputs

Input 24 Input 23 Input 22 Input 21 Input 20 Input 19 Input 18 Input 17

DBB 125 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs
Input 24 Input 23 Input 22 Input 21 Input 20 Input 19 Input 18 Input 17

DBB 126 Disable the external digital NCK inputs

Input 32 Input 31 Input 30 Input 29 Input 28 Input 27 Input 26 Input 25

DBB 127 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs
Input 32 Input 31 Input 30 Input 29 Input 28 Input 27 Input 26 Input 25

DBB 128 Disable the external digital NCK inputs

Input 40 Input 39 Input 38 Input 37 Input 36 Input 35 Input 34 Input 33

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-288 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 129 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs
Input 40 Input 39 Input 38 Input 37 Input 36 Input 35 Input 34 Input 33

External digital outputs of the NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC -> NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 130 Disable the external digital NCK outputs
Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 131 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 132 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 133 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 134 Disable the external digital NCK outputs

Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 135 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 136 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 137 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 138 Disable the external digital NCK outputs

Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 139 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 140 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 141 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 142 Disable the external digital NCK outputs

Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

DBB 143 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

DBB 144 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

DBB 145 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs
Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-289
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Analog inputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC -> NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 146 Disable the analog NCK inputs
Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBB 147 Specified analog value for NCK from PLC

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBW 148 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 1 of NCK

DBW 150 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 2 of NCK

DBW 152 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 3 of NCK

DBW 154 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 4 of NCK

DBW 156 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 5 of NCK

DBW 158 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 6 of NCK

DBW 160 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 7 of NCK

DBW 162 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 8 of NCK

DBB Unassigned
164,165

Analog outputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC -> NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 166 Overwrite screenform for the analog NCK outputs
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 167 Default screenform for the analog NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 168 Disable the analog NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 169 RESERVED

DBW 170 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 1 of NCK

DBW 172 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 2 of NCK

DBW 174 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 3 of NCK

DBW 176 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 4 of NCK

DBW 178 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 5 of NCK

DBW 180 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 6 of NCK

DBW 182 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 7 of NCK

DBW 184 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 8 of NCK

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-290 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

External digital input and output signals of the NCK (DB 10)
DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 186 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs

Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

DBB 187 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs

Input 24 Input 23 Input 22 Input 21 Input 20 Input 19 Input 18 Input 17

DBB 188 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs

Input 32 Input 31 Input 30 Input 29 Input 28 Input 27 Input 26 Input 25

DBB 189 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs

Input 40 Input 39 Input 38 Input 37 Input 36 Input 35 Input 34 Input 33

DBB 190 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 191 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 192 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 193 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

Analog input and output signals of the NCK (DB 10)

DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 194 Actual value for analog input 1 of the NCK

DBW 196 Actual value for analog input 2 of the NCK

DBW 198 Actual value for analog input 3 of the NCK

DBW 200 Actual value for analog input 4 of the NCK

DBW 202 Actual value for analog input 5 of the NCK

DBW 204 Actual value for analog input 6 of the NCK

DBW 206 Actual value for analog input 7 of the NCK

DBW 208 Actual value for analog input 8 of the NCK

DBW 210 Setpoint for analog output 1 of the NCK

DBW 212 Setpoint for analog output 2 of the NCK

DBW 214 Setpoint for analog output 3 of the NCK

DBW 216 Setpoint for analog output 4 of the NCK

DBW 218 Setpoint for analog output 5 of the NCK

DBW 220 Setpoint for analog output 6 of the NCK

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-291
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBW 222 Setpoint for analog output 7 of the NCK

DBW 224 Setpoint for analog output 8 of the NCK

DBW 226- Collision detection 8 bytes = 64 bits (nck 65 and higher)

DBW 233

DBW 234- Collision detection 8 bytes = 64 bits (nck 65 and higher)

DBW 241

2.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11)

Mode group-specific signals (DB 11)

DB 11 Signals to mode group 1 (PLC→NCK) /K1/
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Mode Mode Mode Mode Operating mode

group reset group stop group stop change
Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 1 Single block Machine function

Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 2 Machine function

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 3

Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.

DB 11 Signals from mode group 1 (NCK→PLC) /K1/

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 4 Strobe mode

HMI--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTOM.

DBB 5 Strobe machine function

HMI--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 6 All NCK Mode Mode Active operating mode

channels in internal Group group
JOG active reseted

reset state /K1/ /K1/ ready JOG MDA AUTOM.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-292 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 7 Active machine function

REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 8 Machine function

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DB 11 Signals to mode group 2 (PLC→NCK) /K1/

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 20 Mode Mode Mode Mode Operating mode

group reset group stop group stop change
Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 21 Single block Machine function

Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 22 Machine function
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 23 Unassigned

Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-293
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB 11 Signals from mode group 2 (NCK→PLC) /K1/

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 24 Strobe mode

HMI--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 25 Strobe machine function

HMI--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 26 All NCK Mode Mode Active operating mode

channels in internal group group
JOG active
reset state reseted ready JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 27 Active machine function

REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 28 Machine functions
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

Note
The other mode groups (mode group 3 to mode group 10) are also located in DB
11 with the following initial bytes:
Mode group 3: DBB 40 Mode group 7: DBB 120
Mode group 4: DBB 60 Mode group 8: DBB 140
Mode group 5: DBB 80 Mode group 9: DBB 160
Mode group 6: DBB 100 Mode group 10: DBB 180

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-294 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18)

Parameterization section
References: /FBSI/, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC → PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 0 not relevant for solution line

DBB ... not relevant for solution line

DBW 34 not relevant for solution line

DBB 36 Stop E SPL

READY
DBB 37

Data area / error

DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC ←→ NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Data area for SPL inputs/outputs

SPL_DATA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD 38
SPL_DATA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD 42
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD 46
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD 50
Data area for user SPL
SPL_DATA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD 54
SPL_DATA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD 58
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD 62
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD 66

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-295
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC ←→ NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD 70
SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD 74

Difference in level between NCK and PLC for diagnostics

SPL_DELTA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD 78
SPL_DELTA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD 82
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD 86
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD 90
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD 94
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD 98
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD 102
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD 106
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD 110
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD 114
DBD 118 CMDSI
DBD 119 xxxxxxxx

DBD 120 Error number

0 = no error
1 - 320 = Signal number starting from SPL_DATA.INSEP [1]
DBD 124 Level indicator of cross-checking
(diagnostics option: how many SPL signals currently differ in level)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-296 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Supplementary data areas

DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC ←→ NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Data area for single-channel inputs/outputs
from NCK PLCSIOUT [1 .. 8]
DBB 128
from NCK PLCSIOUT [9 .. 16]
DBB 129
from NCK PLCSIOUT [17 .. 24]
DBB 130
from NCK PLCSIOUT [25 .. 32]
DBB 131
to NCK PLCSIIN [1.. 8]
DBB 132
to NCK PLCSIIN [9 .. 16]
DBB 133
to NCK PLCSIIN [17 .. 24]
DBB 134
to NCK PLCSIIN [25 .. 32]
DBB 135
SPL status
DBB 136
PROFIsafe module(s) for
th th th th th st
DBB 138 8 input 7 input 6 input 5 input 4 input 3rd input 2nd input 1 input
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

DBB 139
PROFIsafe module(s) for
th th th th th st
DBB 140 8 output 7 output 6 output 5 output 4 output 3rd output 2nd output 1 output
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

DBB 141
reserved

DBB 142
to
DBB 188

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-297
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19)

DB 19 Signals to operator panel (PLC→HMI)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Actual Back up HMI Adv Clear Clear Key disable Screen Screen
value in travel shutdown recall cancel /A2/ darkening bright
WCS recorder alarms alarms /A2/ /A2/
(for OEM
0=MCS HMI Adv HMI Adv
users)
/A2/

DBB 1 Reserved

DBW 2

DBW 4

DBB 6 Analog spindle 1, capacity in percent

DBB 7 Analog spindle 2, capacity in percent

DBB 8 Channel number of machine control panel to HMI

DBB 9 Reserved for selection Automatc OEM2 OEM1

tool
measure-
ment

DBB 10 PLC Hardkeys (Values 1 ... 255, Default: 0 )

DBB 11 Reserved for hardkey function expansions

DBB 12

DBB 13 Load part Res. Disable

Select program Unload Teach
transfer
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/

DBB 14 0=act. FS RS-232 act. FS: Index of file to be transferred in the standard list.
1=pas. FS RS-232 pass. FS: Number of the control file for user file names.

DBB 15 RS-232 act. FS: Index that specifies the axis, channel or tool no.
RS-232 pass. FS: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list

DBB 16 1=pas FS Part program handling: Number of the control file for user file names.

DBB 17
Part program handling: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list

DBB 18

DBB 19 Reserved (signal counter), HMI --> PLC

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-298 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB 19 Signals from operator panel (HMI → PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 20 MCS/WCS Simulation Language Recall Cancel Cancel key Screen is
Change- active 2 switched alarm alarm actuated dark
over /A2/ cleared cleared /A2/
/A2/ HMI Emb. /A2/
HMI Adv HMI Adv
/A2/ /A2/

DBB 21 Active HMI operating area

DBB 22 Displayed channel number from the HMI /A2/

DBB 23

DBW 24 actual mask number from JobShop

DBB 26 Part program handling status /A2/

Select Load Unload Active Error OK Error

DBB 27 Error program handling /A2/

DBW 28 Mask number for "Extend user interface" /IAM/, BE1

DBB 30 Control bits PLC --> HMI

Exit mask Request

mask

DBB 31 Control bits PLC --> HMI

Inactive bit Error, Not Mask Mask Mask Mask
possible to exited active requested request
request accepted
mask
DBB 32 FunctionSelectionNo. from PLC

PLC>HMI Busy Strobe

function function

DBB 33 Parameter 1 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)

PLC>HMI

DBB 34 Parameter 2 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)

PLC>HMI

DBB 35 Parameter 3 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)

PLC>HMI

DBB 36 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)

HMI>PLC

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-299
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 37 Parameter 1 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 48)

HMI>PLC

DBB 38 Parameter 2 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 48)

HMI>PLC

DBB 39 Parameter 3 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 48)

HMI>PLC

DBB40-47 used internally

DBB 48 PLC-Busy HMI-Strobe FunctionSelectionNo. from HMI
function function
HMI>PLC
DBB 49 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB48)

PLC>HMI

Interface 2nd HMI

DBB Assignment as for DBB 0 to DBB 49

50-99

Switchover interface to HMI

Knocking interface (HMI announces itself to NCU)

DBW 100 ONL_REQUEST /B3/

Online request from HMI
HMI writes its client identification as online request
(bit 8-15: bus type, bit 0-7: HMI bus address)

DBW 102 ONL_CONFIRM /B3/

Acknowledgment from PLC to online request
PLC writes HMI client identification as acknowledgment (bus type, HMI bus address;
as with DBW 100).

DBW 104 PAR_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/

HMI writes its client identification (bus type, HMI bus address; as with DBW 100).

DBB 106 PAR_HMI_TYP /B3/

Type of HMI as per NETNAMES.INI: Main / subordinate operator panel / server /...

DBB 107 PAR_MSTT_ADR /B3/

HMI writes address of MCP to be activated; 255, when no MCP activated

DBB 108 PAR_STATUS /B3/

PLC writes online enable for HMI.

DBB 109 PAR_Z_INFO /B3/

PLC writes additional info about status

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-300 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBW 110 M_TO_N_ALIVE

Sign of life from PLC to HMI through M to N block

DBB 112 reserved Bustype MCP

DBB 118 TCU index

st
1 online interface

DBB 119 TCU index

nd
2 online interface

Online interface HMI 1 (user)

DBW 120 MMC1_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/
PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when HMI goes online.

DBB 122 MMC1_TYP /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when HMI goes online.

DBB 123 MMC1_MSTT_ADR /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when HMI goes online.

DBB 124 MMC1_STATUS /B3/

Connection status, HMI and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments

DBB 125 MMC1_Z_INFO /B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)
DBB 126 res. TCU1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1_ MMC1
SHIFT_ CHANGE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MSTT_ SHIFT
LOCK
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/

DBB Reserved Bustype MCP

127
DBB Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)

128-129

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-301
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Online Interface HMI 2 (user)

DBW 130 MMC2_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/

PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when HMI goes online.

DBB 132 MMC2_TYP /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when HMI goes online.

DBB 133 MMC2_MSTT_ADR /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when HMI goes online.

DBB 134 MMC2_STATUS /B3/

Connection status, MMC and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments

DBB 135 MMC2_Z_INFO /B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)

DBB 136 res. TCU2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_ MMC2_
SHIFT_ CHANGE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ ACTIVE_ MSTT_ SHIFT_
LOCK
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT_ LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/

DBB Reserved Bustype MCP

137
DBB Reserved Transline (Transline DB number)

138

DBB Code carrier input parameters

Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
140-197
DBB Code carrier return parameters
Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
198-249
DBB Commands
Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
250-255
DBB Commands for Paramtm.exe
Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
256-267
DBW Traffic light status
Optional package TPM on HMI Advanced required
268
DBW Counter[1 ... 32]
Optional package TPM on HMI Advanced required
270 to
394

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-302 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)

DB 20 PLC machine data (PLC→operator)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 0 INT values

DBW

DBW INT values

DBB Bit arrays

DBB

DBB Bit arrays

DBD REAL values

DBD

DBD REAL values

Note
The initial and end addresses of the PLC machine data areas depend on the
respective length indications of the partial areas. In general, the integer values
start with the data byte 0. The upper limit is determined by the corresponding
length indication. In general, the following bit arrays (2-decade hexadecimal
numbers on input) start with the following even address. The real values follow
directly the bit arrays and also start with an even address.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-303
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30)

DB Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Activate dry Activate Activate Activate

run M01 single block DRF /H1/
feedrate /K1/ /K1/
/V1/

DBB 1 Activate PLC action CLC CLC stop Time Synchron- Enable Activate
program complete override /TE1/ monitoring ized action protection referencing
test /K1/ /TE1/ act. (tool OFF zones /R1/
/K1/ manage- /A3/
/FBSY/
ment)

DBB 2 Skip block /K1/

/7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0

DBB 3 Nibbling and punching /N4/

Manual Stroke not Stroke Stroke Manual Stroke
release of operating delayed suppres- stroke enable /N4/
stroke 2 /N4/ /N4/ sion /N4/ enable /N4/

DBB 4 Feedrate override /V1/

H G F E D C B A

DBB 5 Rapid traverse override /V1/

H G F E D C B A

DBB 6 Feedrate Rapid Program Delete Delete Read-in Feed

override traverse level abort subroutine distance-to- disable /K1/ disable
active /V1/ override /K1/ no. of go /V1/
active /V1/ passes /A2/

DBB 7 Reset Suppress NC Stop NC Stop NC Stop to NC Start NC Start

/K1/ Start Lock axes plus /K1/ block limit /K1/ disable
spindle /K1/ /K1/ /K1/

DBB 8 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

DBB 9 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/

Area 10 Area 9

DBB 10 Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/

DBB 11 Area 10 Area 9

Note
on Feedrate override active (DBX6.7)
even if feedrate override is not active (= 100%), the setting 0% is effective.
on Feedrate override (DBB 4)
either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation or 0-200%
corresponding to the dual value in byte (201–255 ⇒ max. 200%).
on Rapid traverse override (DBB 5)
either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation or 0-100%
corresponding to the dual value in byte (101–255 ⇒ max. 100%).

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-304 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

on Activate single block (DBX0.4)

select variant via ”Write variable”.
on Delete distance-to-go (DBX6.2)
effects only path axes and not positioning axes

Control signals to geometry axes

DBB 12 Geometry axis 1
Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel /H1/
traverse key disable /V1/
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1

DBB 13 Geometry axis 1 machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 14 OEM signals geometry axis 1

DBB 15 Geometry axis 1

DBB 16 Geometry axis 2

Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel /H1/
traverse key disable /V1/
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1

DBB 17 Geometry axis 2 machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 18 OEM signals geometry axis 2

DBB 19 Geometry axis 2

DBB 20 Geometry axis 3

Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel /H1/
traverse key disable /V1/
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1

DBB 21 Geometry axis 3 machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 22 OEM signals geometry axis 3

DBB 23 Geometry axis 3

Note
about machine function: machine function only defined when signal "INC inputs

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-305
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is not set.

Operating signals from HMI/status signals from NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC,
21-30 HMI→PLC, PLC→NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 24 Dry run M01 Select DRF

feedrate selected NCK- selected
HMI--> PLC
selected /K1/ related /H1/
/V1/ M01

DBB 25 Program REPOS Feedrate REPOSPATHMODE

test MODE override for
HMI--> PLC
selected EDGE rapid
/K1/ traverse 2 1 0
selected
/V1/
DBB 26 Skip block selected /K1/
HMI--> PLC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB 27 Skip block Skip block
selected selected
HMI--> PLC
/K1/ /K1/

DBB 28 OEM channel signals

PLC→NCK

DBB 29 Do not Switch off Switch off Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate
fixed feed 4 fixed feed 3 fixed feed 2 fixed feed 1
PLC→NCK disable wear workpiece PTP
/FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/,
tool monitoring counter motion /V1/ /V1/ /V1/ /V1/
DBB 30 Activate contour handwheel
PLC→NCK
No tool Activate Neg. Simulation Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
change NCK- direction contour 3 2 1
commands related simulation handwheel
M01 contour on
handwheel
/H2/
DBB 31 REPOSPATHMODE
PLC→NCK
Skip block Skip block REPOS 2 1 0
active /9 active /8 MODE
EDGE

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-306 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 32 Last action M00/M01 Approach Action Execution

NCK--> PLC block active active block block from
/K1/ /K1/ active /K1/ active /K1/ external
source
active
DBB 33 Program Transformation M02/M30 Block Handwheel Revolutio- Orientable Referencing
NCK--> PLC test active active /K1/M1 active search override nal toolholder active
/K1/ /K1/ active active feedrate active /R1/
/K1/ /H1/ active /V1/
DBB 34 OEM channel signals feedback
NCK--> PLC

DBB 35 Channel status /K1/ Program status /K1/

NCK--> PLC
Reset Interrupted Active Aborted Interrupted Stopped Waiting Running
DBB 36 NCK alarm Channel- Channel Interrupt All axes All axes
NCK--> PLC with specific NCK ready processing stationary requiring
processing alarm present for active /B1/ reference
stop /A2/ operation /K1/ points are
present referenced
/A2/ /R1/
DBB 37 Stop Read-in CLC CLC CLC Contour handwheel active
NCK--> PLC
at block enable is stopped stopped active Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
end with ignored upper limit lower limit /TE1/ 3 2 1
SBL is /TE1/ /TE1/ /H1/ /H1/ /H1/
sup-
pressed
DBB 38 Nibbling and punching /N4/
NCK--> PLC
Acknowl. Stroke
manual enable
stroke active /N4/
enable
/N4/
DBB 39 Protection
NCK--> PLC zones not
guaranteed

Note
on Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected (DBX25.3)
Depending on this signal, the basic PLC program copies the feedrate override onto the
rapid traverse override on the channel-specific interface.
On Program test selected (DBX25.7)
”Program test selected” means axis disable for all channel axes and spindles.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-307
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Status signals of geometry axes

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 40 Geometry axis 1

Traverse command /H1/ Travel requests Handwheel active /H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

DBB 41 Geometry axis 1 active machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 42 OEM signals geometry axis 1

DBB 43 Geometry axis 1

DBB 44
HMI--> PLC

DBB 46 Geometry axis 2

Traverse command /H1/ Travel requests Handwheel active /H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

DBB 47 Geometry axis 2 active machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 48 OEM signals geometry axis 2

DBB 49 Geometry axis 2

DBB 50
HMI--> PLC

DBB 52 Geometry axis 3

Traverse command /H1/ Travel requests Handwheel active /H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

DBB 53 Geometry axis 3 active machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-308 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 54 OEM signals geometry axis 3

DBB 55 Geometry axis 3

DBB 56
HMI--> PLC

DBB 57

Change signals on auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 58 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 59 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
not not not not not
decoded decoded decoded decoded decoded
DBB 60 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1
quick quick quick change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 61 T fct 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1 T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1
quick quick quick change/H2/ change/H2/ change
/H2/
DBB 62 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1
quick quick quick change/H2/ change/H2/ change
/H2/
DBB 63 DL fct. DL fct.
quick change
DBB 64 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1
quick quick quick change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 65 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
change change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 66 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
quick quick quick quick quick
DBB 67 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
quick quick quick quick quick quick

Note
For 10-decade T numbers, only the T fct. 1 change signal is available. For
5-decade D numbers, only the D fct. 1 change signal is available.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-309
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Transferred M/S functions

DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 68 Extended address M function 1 (binary) /H2/

DBD 70
M function 1 (binary) /H2/

DBW 74 Extended address M function 2 (binary) /H2/

DBD 76 M function 2 (binary) /H2/

DBW 80 Extended address M function 3 (binary) /H2/

DBD 82 M function 3 (binary) /H2/

DBW 86 Extended address M function 4 (binary) /H2/

DBD 88 M function 4 (binary) /H2/

DBW 92 Extended address M function 5 (binary) /H2/

DBD 94 M function 5 (binary) /H2/

DBW 98 Extended address S function 1 (binary) /H2/

DBD 100 S function 1 (REAL format) /H2/

DBW 104 Extended address S function 2 (binary) /H2/

DBD 106 S function 2 (REAL format) /H2/

DBW 110 Extended address S function 3 (binary) /H2/

DBD 112 S function 3 (REAL format) /H2/

Note
M functions are programmed in the part program in the INTEGER format (8 decades plus
sign).

”REAL format” means: 24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-310 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Transferred T/D/DL functions

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 116 Extended address T function 1 (16 bit Int)

DBW 118 T function 1 (binary) /H2/

For 8-decade T nos., T function 1 (32 bit DINT) is used in DBD 118 (see note)
DBD 118

DBW 120 Extended address T function 2 (16 bit Int)

DBW 122 T function 2 (Int)

DBW 124 Extended address T function 3 (16 bit Int)

DBW 126 T function 3 (Int)

DBB 128

DBB 129 D function 1 (binary) /H2/

DBW 130 For 5-decade D nos., D function 1 (16 bit DINT) is used in DBD 130 (see note)
Extended address D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB 130

DBB 131 D function 2 (8 bit Int)

DBB 132 Extended address D function 3 (8 bit Int)

DBB 133 D function 3 (8 bit Int)

DBW 134 Extended address DL function (16 bit Int)

DBD 136 DL function (REAL)

Note

With active tool management, programmed T functions are not output to the PLC.
8-decade T nos. are only available as T function 1
Programmed D functions with names (e.g. D=CUTEDGE_1) cannot be output in ASCII
format to the PLC.
5-decade D nos. are only available as D function 1
The REAL format corresponds to floating point representation in STEP 7 (24 bit
mantissa and 8 bit exponent). This floating point format supplies a maximum of 7
valid places.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-311
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Transferred H/F functions

DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 140 Extended address H function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 142 H function 1 (REAL or Dint) /H2/
DBW 146 Extended address H function 2 (binary) /H2/
DBD 148 H function 2 (REAL or Dint) /H2/
DBW 152 Extended address H function 3 (binary) /H2/
DBD 154 H function 3 (REAL or Dint) /H2/
DBW 158 Extended address F function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 160 F function 1 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 164 Extended address F function 2 (binary) /H2/
DBD 166 F function 2 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 170 Extended address F function 3 (binary) /H2/
DBD 172 F function 3 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 176 Extended address F function 4 (binary) /H2/
DBD 178 F function 4 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 182 Extended address F function 5 (binary) /H2/
DBD 184 F function 5 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 188 Extended address F function 6 (binary) /H2/
DBD 190 F function 6 (REAL format) /H2/

Note
F functions are programmed in the part program in the REAL format.
The extended address of the F function contains an identifier with the following
meaning:
0 = path feed,
1-31 = machine axis number for feed with positioning axes.
The H function data type is dependent on MD 22110: AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-312 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Decoded M signals (M0–M99)

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 194 Dynamic M functions

M07 M06 M05 * M04 * M03 * M02 M01 M00

DBB 195 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

DBB 196 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

DBB 197 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

DBB 198 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32

DBB 199 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40

DBB 200 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48

DBB 201 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56

DBB 202 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M71 M70 * M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64

DBB 203 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72

DBB 204 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

DBB 205 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88

DBB 206 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M99 M98 M97 M96

DBB 207

Note
M functions marked with * are not decoded in this bit array if a spindle is
configured in the channel. In this case, these M functions are offered as extended
M functions in DB21-30.DBB68 ff. and in the relevant axis DB DB31-61.DBB86 ff.
Dynamic M functions (M00 to M99) are decoded by the basic PLC program.
The PLC user must use dynamic M functions in order to generate static M
functions.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-313
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Active G functions
DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 208 Number of active G function of G function group 1 (binary) /K1/

DBB 209 Number of active G function of G function group 2 (binary) /K1/

DBB 210 Number of active G function of G function group 3 (binary) /K1/

DBB 211 Number of active G function of G function group 4 (binary) /K1/

DBB 212 Number of active G function of G function group 5 (binary) /K1/

DBB 213 Number of active G function of G function group 6 (binary) /K1/

DBB 214 Number of active G function of G function group 7 (binary) /K1/

DBB 215 Number of active G function of G function group 8 (binary) /K1/

...

DBB 270 Number of active G function of G function group n-1 (binary) /K1/

DBB 271 Number of active G function of G function group n (binary) /K1/

Note

The active G functions of the groups are updated each time a G function or a mnemonic
identifier (e.g. SPLINE) is programmed.
G functions within a G group are output as binary value, starting with 1.
A G function with the value 0 means that no G function is active for this G group.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-314 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals for protection areas from NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 272 Machine-related protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
DBB 273 Machine-related protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 274 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
DBB 275 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 276 Machine-related protection area violated /A3/
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

DBB 277 Machine-related protection area violated /A3/

Area 10 Area 9

DBB 278 Channel-related protection area violated /A3/

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

DBB 279 Channel-related protection area violated /A3/

Area 10 Area 9

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-315
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Instruction-controlled signals to NC channel

DB Signals to NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 280 Synch. Reserved

action
disable
request

DBB 281 Synch.

action
disabled

DBW 282 Reserved

DBW 284 Reserved

DBW 286 Reserved

DBW 288 Reserved

DBW 290 Reserved

DBW 292 Reserved

DBW 294 Reserved

DBW 296 Reserved

DBW 298 Reserved

DBB 300 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1

DBB 301 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 16 No. 15 No. 14 No. 13 No. 12 No. 11 No. 10 No. 9

DBB 302 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 24 No. 23 No. 22 No. 21 No. 20 No. 19 No. 18 No. 17

DBB 303 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 32 No. 31 No. 30 No. 29 No. 28 No. 27 No. 26 No. 25

DBB 304 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 40 No. 39 No. 38 No. 37 No. 36 No. 35 No. 34 No. 33

DBB 305 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 48 No. 47 No. 46 No. 45 No. 44 No. 43 No. 42 No. 41

DBB 306 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 56 No. 55 No. 54 No. 53 No. 52 No. 51 No. 50 No. 49

DBB 307 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 64 No. 63 No. 62 No. 61 No. 60 No. 59 No. 58 No. 57

Note
The request signals are set by the user and reset by the basic program after
transmission of the corresponding data.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-316 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Instruction-controlled signals from NC channel

DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 308 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 8 Nr. 7 Nr. 6 Nr. 5 Nr. 4 Nr. 3 Nr. 2 Nr.1

DBB 309 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 16 Nr. 15 Nr. 14 Nr. 13 Nr. 12 Nr. 11 Nr.10 Nr.9

DBB 310 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 24 Nr. 23 Nr. 22 Nr. 21 Nr. 20 Nr. 19 Nr.18 Nr.17

DBB 311 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 32 Nr. 31 Nr. 30 Nr. 29 Nr. 28 Nr. 27 Nr. 26 Nr.25

DBB 312 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 40 Nr. 39 Nr. 38 Nr. 37 Nr. 36 Nr. 35 Nr. 34 Nr. 33

DBB 313 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 48 Nr. 47 Nr. 46 Nr. 45 Nr. 44 Nr. 43 Nr. 42 Nr.41

DBB 314 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 56 Nr. 55 Nr. 54 Nr. 53 Nr. 52 Nr. 51 Nr. 50 Nr.49

DBB 315 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 64 Nr. 63 Nr. 62 Nr. 61 Nr. 60 Nr. 59 Nr. 58 Nr.57
Cyclic Signals interface NCK PLC

DBB 316 Active G functions

G00 geo.
DBB 317
Tool PTP Travel request Workpiece External
missing motion drive test setpoint language
active reached mode
active
DBB 318
Overstore Dry-run AssociatedM01 Stop TOFF TOFF Search ASUP
active feedrate active /H2/ delayed movement active active stopped
active /V1/ active /K1/ /K1/
DBB 319
No tool Stop- Repos Delay FTS Repos Repos Repos REPOS
change delay- DEFERRA L Path Mode Path Mode Path Mode MODE
command range not Chan Ackn 2 Ackn 1 Ackn 0 EDGE
active activated ACKN

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-317
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals to orientation axes

DB Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 320 Traversing keys Orientation axis 1

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel

traverse key disable
− − override
(bit value coding)

DBB 321 Orientation axis 1

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 322 OEM signals orientation axis 1

DBB 323 Orientation axis 1

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 324 Traversing keys Orientation axis 2

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

traverse key
stop (bit value coding)
override
disable

DBB 325 Orientation axis 2

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 326 OEM signals orientation axis 2

DBB 327 Orientation axis 2

DBB 328 Traversing keys Orientation axis 3

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

key
traverse stop (bit value coding)
disable
override

DBB 329 Orientation axis 3

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 330 OEM signals orientation axis 3

DBB 331 Orientation axis 3

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-318 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals from orientation axes

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 332 Orientation axis 1
Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)

DBB 333 Orientation axis 1

Active machine function
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 334 OEM signals orientation axis 1

DBB 335 Orientation axis 1

DBB 336 Orientation axis 2

Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
(bit value coding)
plus minus plus minus

DBB 337 Orientation axis 2

Active machine function
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 338 OEM signals orientation axis 2

DBB 339 Orientation axis 2

DBB 340 Orientation axis 3

Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)

DBB 341 Orientation axis 3

Active machine function
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 342 OEM signals orientation axis 3

DBB 343 Orientation axis 3

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-319
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Tool management functions from NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Modification signals tool management functions

DBB 344 Last Transfer to Tool limit Tool pre-

replace- new value warning
ment tool of replace- reached limit
tool group ment tool reached

DBB
345-347
Transferred tool management functions

DBD 348 T number for tool prewarning limit (DInt)

DBD 352 T number for tool limit value (DInt)

DBD 356 T number of new replacement tool (DInt)

DBD 360 T number of last replacement tool (DInt)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-320 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals from/to NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC, PLC →NCK)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 0 – 7 )
DBB 364
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 8 – 15 )
DBB 365
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 0 – 7 )
DBB 366
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 8 – 15 )
DBB 367
CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_IN (DBB368 - 371)
DBB 368

DBB 369

DBB 370

DBB 371

DBB 372 CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_OUT (DBB372 - 375)

DBB 373

DBB 374

DBB 375

DBB 376 ProgEventDisplay

DBB 377 Stop

following
collision
detection.

DBB 378

DBB 379

DBB 380

DBB 381

DBB 382

DBB 383

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-321
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC->NCK) (DB 31–DB 61)

DB Signals to axis/spindle (PLC→NCK)
31 -61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Feedrate override /V1/

Axis and
spindle H G F E D C B A

DBB 1 Override Position Position Follow-up Axis/spindle Sensor fixed Acknowl. Drive test
active measuring measuring mode /A2/ disable stop fixed stop movement
Axis and
/V1/ system 2 system 1 /A2/ /F1/ reached enable
spindle /A2/ /A2/ /F1/)

DBB 2 Reference point value /R1/ Clamping Delete Controller Cam

in progress distance-to- enable activation
Axis and
/A3/ go/ spindle /A2/ /N3/
spindle reset
/A2, S1/
4 3 2 1

DBB 3 Program Velocity/ Activate Activate Activate Activate Enable Accept

test axis/ spindle fixed feed 4 fixed feed 3 fixed feed 2 fixed feed 1 travel to fixed external ZO
Axis and
spindle speed stop /K2/
spindle release limitation /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /F1/
/A3/ /V1/ /V1/ /V1/ /V1/

DBB 4 Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel /H1/
Axis and traverse key disable stop/spindle
spindle override /H1/ stop /A2/
/H1/
plus minus 3 2 1

DBB 5 Machine function /H1/

Axis and
spindle Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 6 OEM axis signals

Axis and
spindle

DBB 7

DBB 8 Request PLC Activation Allocate NC axis to channel

axis/spindle signal with /K5/
change of
this byte
/K5/ /K5/ D C B A

Note
DBX8.4: is automatically reset after assignment.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-322 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 9 Lock Control parameter block /A2/
parameter
set
definition
from NC
/A2/
C B A

DBB 10 REPOS
DELAY

DBB 11 Start brake

test

DBB 12 Delay Modulo 2nd software limit switch Hardware limit switch
reference limit /A3/ /A3/
Axis
point enabled
approach
/R1/
plus minus plus minus

DBB 13
Axis

DBB 14
Axis

DBB 15
Axis

DBB 16 Delete No n- Resyn- Resyn- Gear has Actual gear stage /S1/
S value monitoring chronize chronize changed
Spindle
/S1/ when spindle 1 spindle 2 over /S1/
changing /S1/ /S1/
gear /S1/
C B A

DBB 17 Invert Resyn- Resyn- Feedrate

M3/M4 chronize chronize override f.
Spindle
/S1/ spindle at spindle at spindle
pos. 2 /S1/ pos. 1 /S1/ valid /S1/

DBB 18 Setpoint rot. direct. /S1/ Oscillating Oscillation

speed via PLC
Spindle
/S1/ /S1/
CCW CW

DBB 19 Spindle override /V1/

Spindle
H G F E D C B A

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-323
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 20 Not used reserved Release Not used Not used Reserved ramp Not used
brake Yaskawa generator
Drive
quick stop
/A2/
1)
DBB 21 Pulse n Motor Motor selection /A2/ Drive parameter set selection
enable controller Selection 0 … 7 /A2/
Drive
/A2/ integrator done
disable /A2/
/A2/
1) B A C B A

DBB 22 Selection of Safe Deselect Deselect safe

speed safe velocity and
Safety
standstill standstill
Integr.
1) bit value 1 bit value 0

DBB 23 Activate Activate Trans- Trans- Trans-mission of bit

test stop end mission of mission of value 0
Safety
position bit value 2 bit value 1
Integr. pair 2

DBB 24 Master/ Bit value for Torque CC_Slave Control Stepper motor
slave on compensa- axis Axis
CTRLOUT_changed:
tion
1 0 controller
Change setpoint ON Suppress Rotation monitoring
output assignment link
(for compile cycles)

DBB 25

DBB 26 Enable Enable Comp-

ESR ensation
Grinding slave axis
response control
overlay
ON

DBB 27 Stop Resume

Grinding HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS

DBB 28 PLC AxStop, Stop at Change Set AXRESUME AXRESET OscillAxExtReversal

checks stop next reversal reversal
Oscillation
axis /P5/ reversal point /P5/ point /P5/
point
/P5/

DBB 29 Disable Start

automatic gantry
Grinding
synchroni-
synchroni- zation
zation Gantry

DBB 30 Position Autom. Start spindle Start Stop spindle

spindle gear step spindle
(Technology) Counter-
change
clockwise Clockwise

1) See note at the end of this subsection

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-324 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 31 Track Disable Resynchro-
synchronism synchroni- nize
(Technology)
zation

DBB 32 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect

external external external external
Safety
stop E stop D stop C stop A
Integr. 1)

DBB 33 Select override

Safety Bit value 3 Bit value 2 Bit value 1 Bit value 0

Integr. 1)

DBB 34

DBB ...

DBB 56 Spindle Spindle Seperate

inside speed feed drive
clamping display as C axis
engaged

DBB 57

DBB 58 Internal data for CF 18

DBB 59

Note
The IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DBX2.2) is effective only for position axes on an
axis-specific basis; the IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DB21-30, DB6.2) acts on a
channel-specific basis. The IS ”Spindle reset” (DXB2.2) acts on a spindle-specific
basis.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-325
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Signals from axis/spindle (NCK→PLC)

31 -61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 60 Position reached /B1/ References/ References/ Encoder Encoder NCU_Link Spindle
Axis and with exact with exact synchro- synchro- limit limit Axis active /no axis
spindle stop fine stop coarse nizes nizes frequency frequency /S1/
/B3/
2 /R1/ 1 /R1/ exceeded 2 exceeded 1
/A3/ /A3/

DBB 61 Current Speed Position Axis/spindle Follow-up Axis ready Axial alarm Travel
controller controller controller stationary mode request
Axis and /B3/
active /A2/ active /A2/ active /A2/ (n < nmin) active /A2/ /F1/
spindle /A2/

DBB 62 Axis Force fixed Fixed stop Activate Measure- Revolutio- Handwheel Software
container stop limited reached travel to fixed ment active nal overlay cams
rotation /F1/ /F1/ stop /F1/ feedrate active /H1/ active /N3/
/M5/
active active

DBB 63 Stop Axis/ Axis stop PLC- AXRESET

spindle active controlled DONE
HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
disable /P2/ axis /P2/
active active active active
active /P2/

DBB 64 Traverse command /H1/ Travel request Handwheel active /H1/

Axis and
spindle plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

65 Active machine function /H1/

Axis and
spindle Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
1) See note at the end of this subsection

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-326 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 66 OEM axis signals (reserved)
Axis and Activate
spindle monitoring
/TE6/

DBB 67

DBB 68 NC axis/spindle in channel /K5/

PLC axis/ Neutral axis/ Axis New type D C B A
spindle /K5/ spindle replacement requested by
/K5/ possible PLC
/K5/ /K5/

DBB 69 NCU number in NCU link network Control parameter block

C B A

DBB 70 Repos Repos shift Repos shift

delay quit valid

DBB 71 PLC axis Brake test

permanently active
assigned
DBB 72 REPOS
DELAY

DBB 73

DBB 74 Modulo
limit
enabled
active

DBB 75

DBB 76 Rounding Indexing Positioning Path axis Scratch

axis in axis in axis pulse
Axis
position position /P2/ /A2/
/T1/

DBB 77 Reduced-
speed
colision

DBB 78
Axis
F function (REAL format)
for positioning axis /V1/

DBB 82 Gear Setpoint gear stage /S1/

change-
Spindle over /S1/
C B A

DBB 83 Actual Speed Spindle in Support Geometry Set speed Set speed Speed limit
rotat. monitoring setpoint area limits monitoring increased limited exceeded
Spindle
direction /W1/ range /S1/ violated /W1/ /S1/ /S1/ /S1/
CW /S8/
/S1/

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-327
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 84 Active spindle operating mode /S1/ Tapping CLGON SUG active Const.
without active (grinding cutting
Spindle
compen- /S8/ wheel speed
sating surface active
chuck /S1/ speed)
Control Oscillation Positioning Synchro-
mode mode mode nous mode

DBB 85 Spindle in
Spindle position

DBB 86 M function (binary) for spindle /S1/

Spindle

DBD 88
Spindle
S function (floating-point) for spindle
/S1/

DBB 92 Not used reserved Motor Not used Not used Not used HLGSS Not used
brake active
Drive
released /A2/
1)
DBB 93 Enable n controller Drive Active motor /A2/ Active drive parameter set 0 … 7
Drive pulses integrator ready /A2/
/A2/ disabled /A2/
/A2/
1) B A C B A
DBB 94 reserved nact = nset |nact| < nx |nact| < Md < Mdx Ramp-up Temperature prewarning
Drive /A2/ /A2/ nmin /A2/ /A2/ complete /A2/
/A2/
1) Heat sink Motor
DBB 95 Limitation Speed Fall short of Generator Fall short of UDC-link <
Drive of power threshold min. active retract alarm
1) section I2T star/delta generator voltage threshold
voltage /A2/
DBB 96 Master/ Bit value for Master/ Master/ Master/ Axis control (Stepper
slave active CTRLOUT_changed Slave Slave Slave active motor)
/TE3/ Compen- coarse fine error
sation rotation
controller monitoring
activ /S6/
1 0
Change setpoint output
assignment (for compile
cycles)

DBB 97 Offset after Activate Activate Axis is

turn-on mirroring link slave axis
point /TE6/
/TE6/ /TE6/ /TE6/
1) See note at the end of this subsection

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-328 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 98 Emergency Accel. Speed Overlaid Actual value Synchronism /S3/
Synchro- retraction warning warning motion coupling
nous spindle active threshold threshold /S3/ /S3/
reached reached
coarse fine
DBB 99 Emergency Max. Max. Synchro- Axis acce- Slave Master
Synchro- retraction acce- speed nization lerating spindle spindle
nous spindle enabled leration reached running active active
reached /S3/ /S3/
DBB 100 Oscillation Oscillation Spark-out Error in Oscillation OscillAxExtReversal
Grinding active /P5/ motion active oscillation cannot active
active /P5/ /P5/ start /P5/
/P5/
DBB 101 Gantry axis Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry cut-off limit
Gantry /G1/ leading grouping is synchroni- warning exceeded /G1/
axis synchro- zation run limit
/G1/ nous ready to exceeded
/G1/ start /G1/ /G1/
DBB
102,103

DBB 104 Active infeed axis /P5/

Grinding

Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

DBB 105 Active infeed axis /P5/

Axis 16 Axis 9

DBB 106 Active infeed axis /P5/

Axis 24 Axis 17

DBB 107 Active infeed axis /P5/

Axis 31 Axis 30 Axis 25

DBB 108 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /

1) Axis safely Status pulses deleted Safe
referenced operational
stop / safe
speed
active

1) See note at the end of this subsection

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-329
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Continuation: Signals from axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 109 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Actual position > cam position
1) SC 4- SC 4+ SC 3- SC 3+ SC 2- SC 2+ SC 1- SC 1+

DBB 110 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

1) n < nx Safe velocity Safe velocity Safe zero
active bit active bit speed
value 1 value 0 active

DBB 111 Reserved for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /

1) Stop E Stop D Stop C Stop A/B
active active active active

DBB 112 - Reserved for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /

114

Note
This note refers to the signal bytes marked with 1) in column 1 in the above table.
These signal bytes are directly transferred to the interface independently of any
configured link communication.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-330 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71)

DB 71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Interface (I) active

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9

DBB 2,3

DBB n res. res. res. NC Position at Reload Unload Load

program loading
positions point
magazine

DBB
n+2 Assigned channel (8 bit Int)

DBB
n+3 Tool management no. (8 bit Int)

DBD
n+4 Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)

DBD
n+8 Unassigned parameter 2 (D word)

DBD
n + 12 Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)

DBW
n + 16 Identification for loading/unloading station (Int), (fixed value 9999)

DBW
n + 18 No. of loading station (Int)

DBW
n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (Int)

DBW
n + 22 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (Int)

DBW
n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)

DBW
n + 26 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)

DBW
n + 28 Reserved

Initial addresses of the loading/unloading stations:

Loading/unloading station 1: n= 4 Loading/unloading station 3: n= 64
Loading/unloading station 2: n= 34 Loading/unloading station 4: n= 94

Load interface 1 is responsible for spindle loading and reloading of tools, for relocating tools and for positioning at any
location (e.g. buffer).
References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions Tool Management”

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-331
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72)

DB 72 Signals from spindle (NCK→PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Interface (I) active

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9

DBB 2,3

DBB n
res. Replace Replace OldT in T0 Prepare Perform Compul-
manual tool manual buffer no. change change sory
tool. (n-42) (initiate: change
M06)
DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB
n+2 Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
DBB
n+3 Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
DBD
n+4 Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
DBD
n+8 Unassigned parameter 2 (D word)
DBD
n + 12 Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)
DBW Buffer identification (Int), (fixed value 9998)
(corresponds to ”Target position for new tool”)
n + 16
DBW Relative location (target) in the buffer (Int)
n + 18
DBW Magazine no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Magazine no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 24
DBW Location no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 26
DBW Tool new: location type (Int)
n + 28
DBW Tool new: size left (Int)
n + 30
DBW Tool new: size right (Int)
n + 32
DBW Tool new: size top (Int)
n + 34
DBW Tool new: size bottom (Int)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-332 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

n + 36
DBW Tool status for tool new
n + 38
Tool was in Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Tool Tool Tool Active tool
use location changed limit measured disabled enabled
coded reached
Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
Master tool to be to be ignore ID for tools
loaded unloaded disabled in buffer

DBW Tool new: T no. (Int)

n + 40
DBW If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then buffer location of old tool is entered here.
n + 42
DBW Original magazine of new tool
n + 44
DBW Original location of new tool
n + 46
Initial addresses of the buffers:
Spindle 1: n= 4
Spindle 2: n = 52
References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions, Tool Management”

2.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73)

DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK→PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Interface (I) active

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9

DBB 2,3

DBB n
res. Replace res. res. T0 res. Perform Obligatory
manual tool change change
(initiation: T
no.)

DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
n+2
DBB Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
n+3
DBD Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
n+4
DBD Unassigned parameter 2 (D word)
n+8

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-333
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBD Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)

n + 12
DBW Reserved
n + 16
DBW Reserved
n + 18
DBW Circular magazine no. (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Magazine no. of the old tool
n + 24
DBW Location no. for old tool (Int)
n + 26
DBW Tool new: location type (Int)
n + 28

DBW Tool new: size left (Int)

n + 30
DBW Tool new: size right (Int)
n + 32
DBW Tool new: size top (Int)
n + 34
DBW Tool new: size bottom (Int)
n + 36
DBW Tool status for tool new
n + 38
Tool was in Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Tool Tool Tool Active tool
use location changed limit measured disabled enabled
coded reached
Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
Master tool to be to be ignore ID for tools
loaded unloaded disabled in buffer

DBW Tool new: T no. (Int)

n + 40
DBW Original location of new tool in this circular magazine
n + 42
Initial addresses of the circular magazines: circular magazine 1: n = 4
2: n = 48

References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions, Tool Management”

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-334 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 2 Interface Signals sl
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

2.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU (840Di with
MCI2 only) (DB 77)
DB77 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 0 to Input signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB 7

DBB 8 to Output signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB 15

DBD 16 Status send MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBD 20 Status receive MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBB 24 Input signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 31

DBB 32 Output signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 39

DBD 40 Status send MCP2, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBD 44 Status receive MCP2, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBB 48 to Input signals from HHU to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB 53

DBB 60 Output signals from PLC to HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 79

DBD 80 Status Send HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBD 84 Status Receive HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 2-335
2 Interface Signals sl 03/2006
2.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

FB1- parameter:
MCPNum :=1, //correct number of MCPs
MCP1In :=P#DB77.DBX0.0,
MCP1Out := P#DB77.DBX8.0,
MCP1StatSend := P#DB77.DBX16.0,
MCP1StatRec := P#DB77.DBX20.0,
MCP2In :=P#DB77.DBX24.0,
MCP2Out := P#DB77.DBX32.0,
MCP2StatSend := P#DB77.DBX40.0,
MCP2StatRec := P#DB77.DBX44.0,
MCPSDB210 := TRUE,
BHG: :=1; //handheld unit interface:
//0 - no HHU
//1 – HHU to MPI
//2 – HHU to OPI
BHGIn :=P#DB77.DBX48.0, //transmitted data of handheld unit
BHGOut: :=P#DB77.DBX60.0, //received data of handheld unit
BHGStatSend: :=P#DB77.DBX80.0, // status DW for transmitting handheld unit
BHGStatRec: :=P#DB77.DBX84.0, // status DW for receiving HHU

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

2-336 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface

3 Interface Signals power line

3
3.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface .................... 3-338

3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface ........................ 3-338

3.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version..................... 3-338
3.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version...................... 3-340
3.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel ......................... 3-341
3.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)......................................... 3-342
3.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU)................... 3-344
3.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2) ............................................................... 3-345
3.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10) ............................................................... 3-349
3.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC (DB 10) ........................................... 3-353
3.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11) ......................................... 3-358
3.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18) .... 3-360
3.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19) ................................... 3-364
3.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)...................................................... 3-369
3.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30) ............................... 3-370
3.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC->NCK) (DB 31–DB 61) ...... 3-386
3.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71) .................. 3-393
3.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72)..................... 3-394
3.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73)................................... 3-396
3.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
(840Di with MCI2 only) (DB 77)............................................... 3-397
3.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn, ShopMill, ShopTurn (DB 82) ..... 3-398

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-337
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface

3.1 Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface

Please find the descriptin of Data modules (DB) of the PLC application interface in
chapter 4.3.

3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

General
In the following list of interface signals, a reference to relevant documentation is
provided for every signal.
This reference specifies the section number or the short designation of the
description of functions, please refer to
References: /FB / xx, ”yyy”
xx Short designation of individual description of functions (e.g.: /A2/)
yyy Name of description of functions (e.g.: ”Various interface signals”
or title of the guide)

Inverse signals
Signals marked with a ”*” are so-called inverse signals. These signals initiate the
appropriate function when a 0 signal appears rather than a 1 signal (e.g. MCP,
byte n+2.0: *NC STOP).

Legend
•In STEP7, DBB means data module byte
•In STEP7, DBW means data module word (16 bits)
•In STEP7, DBD means data module double word (32 bits)

3.2.1 Signals from/to machine control panel, M version

Signals from machine control panel (keys)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO

IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

IB n + 2 Key- Key- Spindle *Spindle Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop

switch switch start stop start stop
position 0 position 2

IB n + 3 Key- Feedrate override

switch
position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block

IB n + 4 Direction keys Keyswitch Direction keys

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-338 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

position 3
+ - Rapid x 4th axis 7th axis R10
R15 R13 traverse R1 R4 R7
R14

IB n + 5 Axis selection
Y Z 5th axis Traverse R11 9th axis 8th axis 6th axis
R2 R3 R5 command R9 R8 R6
MCS/WCS
R12

IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

IB n + 7 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode

1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO

QB n + 1 Feed *Feed NC Start *NC Stop Machine function

start stop
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC

QB n + 2 Axis selection Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
Direction X 4th axis 7th axis R10
key R1 R4 R7
-
R13

QB n + 3 Axis selection
Z 5th axis Travel R11 9th axis 8th axis 6th axis Direction
R3 R5 command R9 R8 R6 key
MCS/WCS +
R12 R15

QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Y

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2

QB n + 5 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Note
With the SINUMERIK 840D, the machine control panel is assigned to the input/output area
by GP parameters; as a standard, initial address 0 is specified for the input and output
areas.
With FM-NC, the initial address is set via the SDB 210. For the supplied SDB
210, initial address 120 is specified. If another initial address is desired, this must
be specified via the STEP 7 Package Communication Configuration. Note that
the GD parameters given automatically through Communication Configuration
must be set on the machine control panel.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-339
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.2 Signals from/to machine control panel, T version

Signals from machine control panel (keys)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

D C B A JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO

IB n + 1 Machine function
REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

IB n + 2 Keyswitch Keyswitch Spindle *Spindle Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop
position 0 position 2 start stop

IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override

position 1
Reset Single E D C B A
block

IB n + 4 Keyswitch Direction keys

position 3
R15 R13 R14 +Y -Z -C R10
R1 R4 R7

IB n + 5 Direction keys
+X +C Rapid Travel -Y -X +Z
R2 R3 traverse command R11 R9 R8 R6
override MCS/WCS
R5 R12

IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15

IB n + 7 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

Signals to machine control panel (LEDs)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 Machine function Operating mode

1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC JOG TEACH IN MDA AUTO

QB n + 1 Feed start *Feed stop NC Start *NC Stop machine function

REPOS REF var. INC 10000 INC

QB n + 2 Direction keys Single Spindle *Spindle

block start stop
+Y -Z -C
R13 R1 R4 R7 R10

QB n + 3 Direction keys
Travel -Y -X +Z
R3 R5 command R11 R9 R8 R6 R15
MCS/WCS

QB n + 4 Unassigned customer keys Direction

key
+X
T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 R2

QB n + 5 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-340 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.3 Signals from/to slimline machine control panel

Signals from slimline machine control panel
(keys and switches)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

*NC Stop SP - SP 100% SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.

IB n + 1 Spindle Keyswitch Machine function

NC Start SP right *SP Stop SP left SS 3 REF. REPOS Teach in

IB n + 2 Feedrate Keyswitch Machine functions

START *STOP var. INC SS 0 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

IB n + 3 Keyswitch Feed override

RESET SS 2 SS 1 E D C B A

IB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

(+) R15 (-) R13 Rapid KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
traverse
R14

IB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X

IB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

IB n + 7 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-341
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals to slimline machine control panel

(LEDs)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 Spindle speed override Operating mode

NC Stop SP - SP 100 % SP + SINGLEB JOG MDA AUTOM.

QB n + 1 Spindle Machine function

NC Start SP right SP Stop SP left Unassigned REF. REPOS Teach in

QB n + 2 Feedrate Machine functions

START STOP var. INC Unassigned 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

QB n + 3 Unassigned
Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned Unassigned

QB n + 4 Direction keys Optional customer keys

(+) R15 (-) R13 Rapid KT4 KT3 KT2 KT1 KT0
traverse
R14

QB n + 5 Axis selection
T17 KT5 6 5 4 Z Y X

QB n + 6 Unassigned customer keys

T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16

QB n + 7 Unassigned customer keys

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8

3.2.4 Signals from/to handheld unit (HHU)

Signals from handheld unit (keys)
(input display)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Reserved

IB n + 1 Reserved

IB n + 2
T9 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1

IB n + 3
T16 T15 T14 T13 T12 T11 T10 T9

IB n + 4
T24 T23 T22 T21

IB n + 5 Acknowl- Keyswitch Rapid traverse/feed override switch

edgement
Digital E D C B A
display

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-342 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals to handheld unit (LEDs)

(Output display, LEDs)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 always 1

New data Line

for selected selection
QB n + 1 line

QB n + 2
L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1

QB n + 3
L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9
HHU digital display

QB n + 4 1st character (right) of the selected line

QB n + 5 2nd character of the selected line

QB ...

QB n + 18 15th character of the selected line

QB n + 19 16th character (left) of the selected line

Note
With the SINUMERIK 840D, the handheld unit is connected to the OPI or MCP
interface of the PLC.

The initial addresses of the input/output areas and the activation must be set via
basic program parameter FB1. With the SINUMERIK 810D and FM-NC, the
handheld unit is connected to the MPI interface of the PLC.

The initial addresses of the input/output areas as well as the number of bytes to
be transferred must be specified via the STEP 7 Package Communication
Configuration.

Note that the GD parameters given automatically through Communication

Configuration must be set on the handheld unit.

The parameterization is described in the Installation and Start-Up Guide and in

the Description of Functions P3 ”Basic PLC program”.

References: /BH/, ”Operator Components Manual”

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-343
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.5 Signals from/to handheld programming unit (HPU)

Signals from machine control panel simulation
Interface HPU→PLC
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

IB n + 0 Function key block

REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS

IB n + 1 Function key block

FCT15 FCT14 BigFct FCT12 FCT11 INC REPOS

IB n + 2 JOG keys positive direction

If 1: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
Ax1-Ax6=
Ax7-Ax12

IB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction

Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1

IB n + 4 Shift keys
Signal Diagno Service System Param Correct Progr. Mach.

IB n + 5 Shift keys
BF16 BF15 BF14 BF13 BF12 Step Modify Insert

IB n + 6 Start key block

Res. HT 6 VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP

IB n + 7 Feedrate override (HT6, HT8)

E D C B A

Signals to machine control panel simulation

Interface PLC→HPU

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

QB n + 0 Function key block
REF TEACH AUTO MDA JOG QUIT RESET WCS/MCS
QB n + 1 Function key block
FCT15 FCT14 BigFct FCT12 FCT11 INC REPOS
QB n + 2 Axes 7–12 JOG keys positive direction
selected
QB n + 2
Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
QB n + 3 JOG keys negative direction
For WCS: Ax6 Ax5 Ax4 Ax3 Ax2 Ax1
No MCS
Ax4 to Ax6
QB n + 4 Shift keys
Signal Diagno Service System Param Correct Progr. Mach.
QB n + 5 Shift keys
BF16 BF15 BF14 BF13 BF12 Step Modify Insert
QB n + 6 Start key block
Display VAL+ VAL- SF2 SF1 START STOP

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-344 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

travel keys
QB n + 7

3.2.6 PLC messages (DB 2)

DB2 Signals for PLC messages (PLC→MMC), /P3/
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Channel 1

0 510007 510006 510005 510004 510003 510002 510001 510000

Feed disable (alarm no.: 510000–510015)

1 510015 510014 510013 510012 510011 510010 510009 510008

2 Feed and read-in disable byte1 (alarm no.: 510100–510131)

3 Feed and read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510108–510115)

4 Feed and read-in disable byte 3 (alarm no.: 510116–510123)

5 Feed and read-in disable byte 4 (alarm no.: 510124–510131)

6 Read-in disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510200–510207)

7 Read-in disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510208–510215)

8 Read-in disable byte 3 (alarm no.: 510216–510223)

9 Read-in disable byte 4 (alarm no.: 510224–510231)

10 NC Start disable byte 1 (alarm no.: 510300–510307)

11 NC Start disable byte 2 (alarm no.: 510308–510315)

12 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511100–511107)

13 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511108–511115)

14 Feed stop GEOaxis 2 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511200–511207)

15 Feed stop GEOaxis 2 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511208–511215)

16 Feed stop GEOaxis 3 byte 1 (alarm no.: 511300–511307)

17 Feed stop GEOaxis 3 byte 2 (alarm no.: 511308–511315)

Channel 2

18 520007 520006 520005 520004 520003 520002 520001 520000

Feed disable (alarm no.: 520000-520015)

19 520015 520014 520013 520012 520011 520010 520009 520008

20-23 Feed and read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520100–520131)

24-27 Read-in disable byte 1-4 (alarm no.: 520200–520231)

28-29 NC Start disable byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 520300–520315)

30-31 Feed stop GEOaxis 1 byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 521100-521115)

32-33 Feed stop GEOaxis 2 byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 521200-521215)

34-35 Feed stop GEOaxis 3 byte 1-2 (alarm no.: 521300-521315)

36-143 As from channel 3, please refer to the following table

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-345
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Channel areas in DB2

Area Address Signal number
Channel 1, see above DBX 0.0 - DBX 11.7 510.000 - 510.231
Channel 1, geo axes DBX 12.0 - DBX 17.7 511.100 - 511.315
Channel 2, see above DBX 18.0 - DBX 29.7 520.000 - 520.231
Channel 2, geo axes DBX 30.0 - DBX 35.7 521.100 - 521.315
Channel 3 DBX 36.0 - DBX 47.7 530.000 - 530.231
Channel 3, geo axes DBX 48.0 - DBX 53.7 531.100 - 531.315
Channel 4 DBX 54.0 - DBX 65.7 540.000 - 540.231
Channel 4, geo axes DBX 66.0 - DBX 71.7 541.100 - 541.315
Channel 5 DBX 72.0 - DBX 83.7 550.000 - 550.231
Channel 5, geo axes DBX 84.0 - DBX 89.7 551.100 - 551.315
Channel 6 DBX 90.0 - DBX 101.7 560.000 - 560.231
Channel 6, geo axes DBX 102.0 - DBX 107.7 561.100 - 561.315
Channel 7 DBX 108.0 - DBX 119.7 570.000 - 570.231
Channel 7, geo axes DBX 120.0 - DBX 125.7 571.100 - 571.315
Channel 8 DBX 126.0 - DBX 137.7 580.000 - 580.231
Channel 8, geo axes DBX 138.0 - DBX 143.7 581.100 - 581.315
Channel 9, channel 10 in SW 5 not
implemented

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-346 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Axis areas in DB2

Axis/spindle

144 600107 600106 600105 600104 600103 600102 600101 600100

Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600100-600015) for axis/spindle 1

145 600115 600114 600113 600112 600111 600110 600109 600108

146-147 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600200-600215) for axis/spindle 2

148-149 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600300-600315) for axis/spindle 3

150-151 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600400-600415) for axis/spindle 4

152-153 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600500-600515) for axis/spindle 5

154-155 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600600-600615) for axis/spindle 6

156-157 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600700-600715) for axis/spindle 7

158-159 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600800-600815) for axis/spindle 8

160-161 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 600900-600915) for axis/spindle 9

162-163 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601000-601015) for axis/spindle 10

164-165 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601100-601115) for axis/spindle 11

166-167 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601200-601215) for axis/spindle 12

168-169 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601300-601315) for axis/spindle 13

170-171 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601400-601415) for axis/spindle 14

172-173 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601500-601515) for axis/spindle 15

174-175 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601600-601615) for axis/spindle 16

176-177 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601700-601715) for axis/spindle 17

178-179 Feed stop/spindle stop (alarm no.: 601800-601815) for axis/spindle 18

Axes 19 -31 not implemented

User areas
User area 0 Bytes 1 - 8

180 700007 700006 700005 700004 700003 700002 700001 700000

... User area 0 (alarm no.: 700000-700063)

187 700063 700062 700061 700060 700059 700058 700057 700056

188-195 User area 1 Bytes 1 - 8 (alarm no.: 700100-700163)

...
428-435 User area 31 Bytes 1 - 8 (alarm no.: . 703100-703163)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-347
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Note
In DB2, the assignment is made between message/alarm number, text and area
identifier. All alarm or message bits are automatically transferred to the user
interface (channel, axis/spindle) through appropriate parameter settings. If these
parameter settings are not made, the bit transfer must be programmed in the user
program. The user interface can be further influenced after the block for the
error/operational messages has been called. Only signals of the channels and
axes declared in the NC machine data can be transferred and texts displayed.
The user must acknowledge all error messages generated. Operational
messages are displayed only for as long as the relevant condition prevails.
The number of user areas can be parameterized via FB 1.
DB2/DB3 must be deleted after changing the configuration (FB1: MsgUser).

Definition of error and operational messages /P3/

Byte no. of DB2 / Error message EM or operational message OM
7 / EM 6 / EM 5 / OM 4 / OM 3 / EM 2 / EM 1 / OM 0 / EM
15 / OM 14 / EM 13 / OM 12 / EM 11 / OM 10 / EM 9 / OM 8 / OM
23 / OM 22 / OM 21 / EM 20 / EM 19 / OM 18 / EM 17 / OM 16 / EM
31 / OM 30 / EM 29 / OM 28 / EM 27 / OM 26 / OM 25 / EM 24 / EM
35 / OM 34 / EM 33 / OM 32 / EM
151 / OM 150 / EM 149 / OM 148 / EM 147 / OM 146 / EM 145 / OM 144 / EM
159 / OM 158 / EM 157 / OM 156 / EM 155 / OM 154 / EM 153 / OM 152 / EM
187 / OM 186 / OM 185 / OM 184 / OM 183 / EM 182 / EM 181 / EM 180 / EM
195 / OM 194 / OM 193 / OM 192 / OM 191 / EM 190 / EM 189 / EM 188 / EM

Example
The alarms numbered from 510200 to 510207 can be generated via DB2, DBB6
(read-in disable channel 1). These alarms are defined as error messages as
standard.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-348 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.7 Signals to NC (DB 10)

On board input and output signals from NCK

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC→NC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Disabling of digital NCK inputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)

Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBB 1 Setting of digital NCK inputs from PLC (SW 2 and higher)

Digital inputs without hardware #) On-board inputs §)

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBB2, 3
unas-
signed
DBB 4 Disabling of digital NCK outputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)
Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 5 Overwrite screenform of digital NCK /A2/ outputs (SW 2 and higher)

Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 6 Setting value of digital NCK outputs from PLC /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)

Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 7 Input screenform of digital NCK outputs /A2/ (SW 2 and higher)

Digital outputs without hardware #) On-board outputs §)

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1
st
DBB 8-29 Machine axis number table for FC 19, 24, 25, 26 (1 MCP)

st
DBB 30 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, 24 (1 MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies

nd
DBB 32-53 Machine axis number table for FC 19, 24, 25, 26 (2 MCP)

nd
DBB 54 Upper limit of machine axis numbers for FC 19, 24 (2 MCP)
With 0, the max. number of machine axis numbers applies

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-349
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Note
#) Bits 4-7 of the digital input and NCK outputs can be processed by the PLC even though
there are no hardware I/Os available for this. Therefore, these bits can be used in addition
to the information exchange between NCK and PLC.

§) On the 840D, the digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK are physically on-board.
On the FM-NC, there are no hardware I/Os for bit 0 to bit 3. These can be processed by
the PLC according to #).

General signals to NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC→NC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 56 Keyswitch /A2/ Acknowl. EMER-

EMER- GENCY
GENCY STOP /N2/
STOP /N2/
Position 3 Position 2 Position 1 Position 0

DBB 57 PC INC inputs

shutdown in mode
Only 840Di group area
evaluated active

DBB Collision
58 - 59 detection
off

External digital inputs of the NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC -> NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 122 Disable the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

DBB 123 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

DBB 124 Disable the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
Input 24 Input 23 Input 22 Input 21 Input 20 Input 19 Input 18 Input 17

DBB 125 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
Input 24 Input 23 Input 22 Input 21 Input 20 Input 19 Input 18 Input 17

DBB 126 Disable the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
Input 32 Input 31 Input 30 Input 29 Input 28 Input 27 Input 26 Input 25

DBB 127 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
Input 32 Input 31 Input 30 Input 29 Input 28 Input 27 Input 26 Input 25

DBB 128 Disable the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
Input 40 Input 39 Input 38 Input 37 Input 36 Input 35 Input 34 Input 33

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-350 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 129 Values from the PLC for the external digital NCK inputs (SW 2 and higher)
Input 40 Input 39 Input 38 Input 37 Input 36 Input 35 Input 34 Input 33

External digital outputs of the NCK (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC -> NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 130 Disable the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 131 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 132 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 133 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 134 Disable the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 135 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 136 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 137 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 138 Disable the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 139 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 140 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 141 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 142 Disable the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

DBB 143 Overwrite screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

DBB 144 Value from the PLC for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

DBB 145 Default screenform for the external digital NCK outputs (SW 2 and higher)
Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-351
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Analog inputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NC (PLC -> NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 146 Disable the analog NCK inputs
Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBB 147 Specified analog value for NCK from PLC

Input 8 Input 7 Input 6 Input 5 Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBW 148 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 1 of NCK

DBW 150 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 2 of NCK

DBW 152 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 3 of NCK

DBW 154 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 4 of NCK

DBW 156 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 5 of NCK

DBW 158 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 6 of NCK

DBW 160 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 7 of NCK

DBW 162 Setpoint from PLC for analog input 8 of NCK

DBB Unassigned
164,165

Analog outputs of the NCK (external) (DB10)

DB10 Signals to NCK (PLC -> NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 166 Overwrite screenform for the analog NCK outputs
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 167 Default screenform for the analog NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 168 Disable the analog NCK outputs

Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 169 RESERVED

DBW 170 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 1 of NCK

DBW 172 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 2 of NCK

DBW 174 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 3 of NCK

DBW 176 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 4 of NCK

DBW 178 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 5 of NCK

DBW 180 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 6 of NCK

DBW 182 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 7 of NCK

DBW 184 Setpoint from PLC for analog output 8 of NCK

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-352 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.8 Signals from/to NCK/MMC (DB 10)

On-board NCK inputs and outputs (DB 10)

DB10 Signals from (NCK -> PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 60 Actual value of the digital ON-BOARD inputs of the
NCK (SW 2 and higher)
On-board inputs §)
Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1

DBB 61-63

DBB 64 Setpoint for the digital outputs of the NCK without Setpoint for the digital on-board outputs of the NCK
hardware
Output 8 Output 7 Output 6 Output 5 Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output 1

DBB 65-67 Unassigned

DBB 68 Handwheel 1 moved

DBB 69 Handwheel 2 moved

DBB 70 Handwheel 3 moved

DBB 71 Modification counter inch/metric system of units

st
DBB 72 Status of the actual value display indicated (1 MCP)

HT6/HT8 Travel keys Machine/ Valid

displayed Work display
nd
DBB 73 Status of the actual value display indicated (2 MCP)

HT6/HT8 Travel keys Machine/ Valid

displayed Work display
st
DBB 74-79 Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (1 MCP)
MCP1AxisFromHMI
HT6/HT8
nd
DBB 80-85 Machine axis numbers of the displayed axes (2 MCP)
MCP2AxisFromHMI
HT6 from
SW 6.1.51

DBB 86 Reserved

DBB 88 Reserved

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-353
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Note
#) Although no associated hardware I/Os exist, the PLC can process bits 4-7 of
the digital inputs and NCK outputs. Consequently, these bits can also be used to
transfer information between the NCK and the PLC.

§) The digital inputs and outputs 1 to 4 of the NCK exist as on-board hardware for
the 840D. No hardware I/Os are available for bits 0-3 of the FM-NC. In
accordance with #), these can be processed by the PLC.

Selection/status signals from MMC (DB 10)

DB 10 Signals from NC (NCK→PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 90

DBB 91

DBB 92 free

DBB 93 free

DBB 94 free

DBB 95 free

DBB 96 free

DBB 97 Channel number for handwheel 1 /H1/

(SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A

DBB 98 Channel number for handwheel 2 /H1/

(SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A

DBB 99 Channel number for handwheel 3 /H1/

(SW 4.1 and higher)
MMC--> PLC
D C B A

DBB 100 Axis number for handwheel 1 /H1/ (SW 2 and

higher)
MMC--> PLC

Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A

axis selected handwheel

DBB 101 Axis number for handwheel 2 /H1/ (SW 2 and

higher)
MMC--> PLC

Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A

axis selected handwheel

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-354 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 102 Axis number for handwheel 3 /H1/ (SW 4.1 and
higher)
MMC--> PLC

Machine Handwheel Contour E D C B A

axis selected handwheel

DBB 103 MMC- MMC AT box Remote

101/102 tempera- ready diagnosis
MMC--> PLC
battery active
alarm ture limit /FBFE/

General signals from NCK (DB 10)

DB 10 Signals from NC (NCK→PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 104 NCK CPU 1st OB1 HHU MCP 2 MCP 1

ready /A2/ Cycle ready ready ready

DBB 105 Unassigned

DBB 106 EMERGEN- Collision

CY STOP detection
active /N2/
off

DBB 107 Inch NCU-link Probe actuated /M4/

system active
Probe 2 Probe 1

DBB 108 NC ready Drive ready Drives in MMC-CPU MMC CPU MMC2 CPU
/A2/ /FBA/ cyclic Ready Ready ready
(MMC to (MMC to
operation OPI) MPI) E_MMC2
/A2/ /A2/
Ready

DBB 109 NCK Air temp. Heat sink PC NCK

battery alarm temp. operating alarm
alarm /A2/ alarm present
/A2/ NCU 573 system /A2/
fault

DBB 110 Software cams minus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DBB 111 Software cams minus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DBB 112 Software cams minus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DBB 113 Software cams minus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

DBB 114 Software cams plus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DBB 115 Software cams plus (SW 2 and higher) /N3/

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

DBB 116 Software cams plus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16

DBB 117 Software cams plus (SW 4.1 and higher) /N3/
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-355
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Note
Concerning NCK CPU Ready (DBX 104.7):

This signal is the sign-of-life monitoring function for the NC. It must be included in
the safety circuit of the machine.
Concerning MMC CPU1 READY (DBX 108.3 and DBX 108.2):
If the MMC is connected to the operator panel interface (X 101), bit 3 is set
(default). When connecting to the PG MPI interface (X 122), bit 2 is set.

External digital input and output signals of the NCK (DB 10)
DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/ (SW2 and higher)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 186 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs

Input 16 Input 15 Input 14 Input 13 Input 12 Input 11 Input 10 Input 9

DBB 187 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs

Input 24 Input 23 Input 22 Input 21 Input 20 Input 19 Input 18 Input 17

DBB 188 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs

Input 32 Input 31 Input 30 Input 29 Input 28 Input 27 Input 26 Input 25

DBB 189 Actual value of external digital NCK inputs

Input 40 Input 39 Input 38 Input 37 Input 36 Input 35 Input 34 Input 33

DBB 190 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

Output 16 Output 15 Output 14 Output 13 Output 12 Output 11 Output 10 Output 9

DBB 191 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

Output 24 Output 23 Output 22 Output 21 Output 20 Output 19 Output 18 Output 17

DBB 192 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

Output 32 Output 31 Output 30 Output 29 Output 28 Output 27 Output 26 Output 25

DBB 193 NCK setpoint for external digital NCK outputs

Output 40 Output 39 Output 38 Output 37 Output 36 Output 35 Output 34 Output 33

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-356 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Analog input and output signals of the NCK (DB 10)

DB 10 Signals from NCK (NCK→PLC), /A2/ (SW2 and higher)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 194 Actual value for analog input 1 of the NCK

DBW 196 Actual value for analog input 2 of the NCK

DBW 198 Actual value for analog input 3 of the NCK

DBW 200 Actual value for analog input 4 of the NCK

DBW 202 Actual value for analog input 5 of the NCK

DBW 204 Actual value for analog input 6 of the NCK

DBW 206 Actual value for analog input 7 of the NCK

DBW 208 Actual value for analog input 8 of the NCK

DBW 210 Setpoint for analog output 1 of the NCK

DBW 212 Setpoint for analog output 2 of the NCK

DBW 214 Setpoint for analog output 3 of the NCK

DBW 216 Setpoint for analog output 4 of the NCK

DBW 218 Setpoint for analog output 5 of the NCK

DBW 220 Setpoint for analog output 6 of the NCK

DBW 222 Setpoint for analog output 7 of the NCK

DBW 224 Setpoint for analog output 8 of the NCK

DBW 226- Kollisionsüberwachung 8 Byte = 64 Bits

DBW 233

DBW 234- Kollisionsüberwachung 8 Byte = 64 Bits

DBW 241

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-357
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.9 Signals from/to mode group (DB 11)

Mode group-specific signals (DB 11)

DB 11 Signals to mode group 1 (PLC→NCK) /K1/
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Mode Mode Mode Mode Operating mode

group reset group stop group stop change
Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 1 Single block Machine function

Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 2 Machine function

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 3

Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.

DB 11 Signals from mode group 1 (NCK→PLC) /K1/

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 4 Strobe mode

MMC--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTOM.

DBB 5 Strobe machine function

MMC--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 6 All NCK Mode Mode Active operating mode

channels in internal group group
JOG active resetted
reset state ready JOG MDA AUTOM.

DBB 7 Digitizing Active machine function

REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 8 Machine functions

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-358 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB 11 Signals to mode group 2 (PLC→NCK) /K1/

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 20 Mode Mode Mode Mode Operating mode

group reset group stop group stop change
Axes plus disable
spindle
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 21 Single block Machine function

Type A Type B REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 22 Machine functions
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 23 Unassigned

Note
about machine function: machine function defined centrally when signal "INC
inputs in mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is set.

DB 11 Signals from mode group 2 (NCK→PLC) /K1/

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 24 Strobe mode

MMC--> PLC
JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 25 Strobe machine function

MMC--> PLC
REF REPOS TEACH IN

DBB 26 All NCK Mode Mode Active operating mode

channels in internal group group
JOG active resetted
reset state ready JOG MDA AUTO-
MATIC

DBB 27 Digitizing Active machine function

/FBD/
(SW 2 and REF REPOS TEACH IN
higher)
DBB 28 Machine functions
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

Note
The other mode groups (mode group 3 to mode group 10) are also located in DB
11 with the following initial bytes:
Mode group 3: DBB 40 Mode group 7: DBB 120
Mode group 4: DBB 60 Mode group 8: DBB 140

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-359
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Mode group 5: DBB 80 Mode group 9: DBB 160

Mode group 6: DBB 100 Mode group 10: DBB 180

3.2.10 Signals for Safety SPL (safe programmable logic) (DB 18)

Parameterization section
References: /FBSI/, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC → PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 0 INSEP valid (valid bit)
8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte input byte
DBB 1

DBB 2 OUTSEP valid (valid bit)

8th 7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte output byte

DBB 3

DBW 4 INSEP_ADDR (address 1st input byte)

DBW 6 INSEP_ADDR (address 2nd input byte)

DBW 8 INSEP_ADDR (address 3rd input byte)

DBW 10 INSEP_ADDR (address 4th input byte)

DBW 12 INSEP_ADDR (address 5th input byte)

DBW 14 INSEP_ADDR (address 6th input byte)

DBW 16 INSEP_ADDR (address 7th input byte)

DBW 18 INSEP_ADDR (address 8th input byte)

DBW 20 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 1st output byte)

DBW 22 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 2nd output byte)

DBW 24 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 3rd output byte)

DBW 26 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 4th output byte)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-360 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBW 28 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 5th output byte)

DBW 30 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 6th output byte)

DBW 32 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 7th output byte)

DBW 34 OUTSEP_ADDR (address 8th output byte)

DBB 36 Stop E SPL

READY
DBB 37

Data area / error

DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC ←→ NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Data area for SPL inputs/outputs

SPL_DATA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD 38
SPL_DATA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD 42
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [1..32]
DBD 46
SPL_DATA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD 50
Data area for user SPL
SPL_DATA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD 54
SPL_DATA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD 58
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD 62
SPL_DATA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD 66
SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD 70
SPL_DATA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD 74

Difference in level between NCK and PLC for diagnostics

SPL_DELTA.INSEP [1..32]
DBD 78
SPL_DELTA.INSEP [33..64]
DBD 82
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [1..32]

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-361
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBD 86
SPL_DELTA.OUTSEP [33..64]
DBD 90
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [1..32]
DBD 94
SPL_DELTA.INSIP [33..64]
DBD 98
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [1..32]
DBD 102
SPL_DELTA.OUTSIP [33..64]
DBD 106
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [1..32]
DBD 110
SPL_DELTA.MARKERSIP [33..64]
DBD 114
DBD 118 CMDSI
DBD 119 DCC
system
error x
DBD 120 Error number
0 = no error
1 - 320 = Signal number starting from SPL_DATA.INSEP [1]
DBD 124 Level indicator of cross-checking
(diagnostics option: how many SPL signals currently differ in level)

Supplementary data areas

DB 18 Signals for Safety SPL (PLC ←→ NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Data area for single-channel inputs/outputs
from NCK PLCSIOUT [1 .. 8]
DBB 128
from NCK PLCSIOUT [9 .. 16]
DBB 129
from NCK PLCSIOUT [17 .. 24]
DBB 130
from NCK PLCSIOUT [25 .. 32]
DBB 131
to NCK PLCSIIN [1.. 8]
DBB 132
to NCK PLCSIIN [9 .. 16]
DBB 133
to NCK PLCSIIN [17 .. 24]
DBB 134

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-362 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

to NCK PLCSIIN [25 .. 32]

DBB 135
SPL status
DBB 136
PROFIsafe module(s) for
th th th th th st
DBB 138 8 input 7 input 6 input 5 input 4 input 3rd input 2nd input 1 input
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

DBB 139
PROFIsafe module(s) for
th th th th th st
DBB 140 8 output 7 output 6 output 5 output 4 output 3rd output 2nd output 1 output
byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte

DBB 141
Teststop data
Number of axes per TeststopBlock 1 (NoOfAxisPerBlock[1])
DBB 142
to
DBB 149
Number of axes per TeststopBlock 8 (NoOfAxisPerBlock[8])
Pointer onto axis table 1 (BlockPointer[1])
DBB 150
to
DBB 157
Pointer onto axis table 8 (BlockPointer[8])
st
Safety axis table (AxisTable[1]) 1 axis
DBB 158
to
DBB 188
st
Safety axis table (AxisTable[31]) 31 axis

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-363
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.11 Signals from/to operator panel (DB 19)

DB 19 Signals to operator panel (PLC→MMC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Actual Back up MMC Clear Clear Key disable Screen Screen
value in travel shutdown recall cancel /A2/ darkening bright
WCS recorder alarms alarms /A2/ /A2/
(for OEM
0=MCS
users)
/A2/

DBB 1 Reserved

DBW 2 Higraph first error display

DBW 4 Higraph first error display

DBB 6 Analog spindle 1, capacity in percent

DBB 7 Analog spindle 2, capacity in percent

DBB 8 Channel number of machine control panel to MMC

DBB 9 Reserved for selection Automatc OEM2 OEM1

tool
measure-
ment

DBB 10 PLC Hardkeys (Values 1 ... 255, Default: 0 )

DBB 11 Reserved for hardkey function expansions

DBB 12 RS-232 On RS-232 Off RS-232 RS-232 COM1 COM2 Res. Res.
External Stop
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
/A2/ /A2/

DBB 13 Load part Res. Disable

Select program Unload Teach
transfer
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/

DBB 14 0=act. FS RS-232 act. FS: Index of file to be transferred in the standard list.
1=pas. FS RS-232 pass. FS: Number of the control file for user file names.

DBB 15 RS-232 act. FS: Index that specifies the axis, channel or tool no.
RS-232 pass. FS: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list

DBB 16 1=pas FS Part program handling: Number of the control file for user file names.

DBB 17
Part program handling: Index of the file to be transferred in the user list

DBB 18 TO comp.

DBB 19 Reserved (signal counter)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-364 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB 19 Signals from operator panel (MMC → PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 20 MCS/WCS Simulation Language Recall Cancel Cancel key Screen is
Change- active 2 switched alarm alarm actuated dark
over /A2/ HMI Emb. cleared cleared /A2/
/A2/ /A2/
MMC 103 MMC 103
/A2/ /A2/

DBB 21 Active MMC operating area

DBB 22 Displayed channel number from the MMC /A2/

DBB 23 Counter Main

spindle spindle
internal internal
voltage voltage

DBB 24 RS-232 status from PLC

RS-232 On RS-232 Off RS-232 RS-232 Com1 Com2 OK Error
External Stop active /A2/ active /A2/
/A2/ /A2/ /A2/ /A2/
/A2/ /A2/

DBB 25 Error RS-232 /A2/

DBB 26 Part program handling status /A2/

Select Load Unload Active Error OK Error
MMC 5.3
and higher;
6.1

DBB 27 Error program handling /A2/

DBW 28 Mask number for "Extend user interface" /IAM/, BE1

DBB 30 Control bits PLC --> MMC

Exit mask Request

mask

DBB 31 Control bits PLC --> MMC

Inactive bit Error, Not Mask Mask Mask Mask
possible to exited active requested request
request accepted
mask
DBB 32 FunctionSelectionNo. from PLC

PLC>MMC Busy Strobe

function function

DBB 33 Parameter 1 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)

PLC>MMC

DBB 34 Parameter 2 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)

PLC>MMC

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-365
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 35 Parameter 3 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)

PLC>MMC

DBB 36 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 32)

MMC>PLC

DBB 37 Parameter 1 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 48)

MMC>PLC

DBB 38 Parameter 2 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 48)

MMC>PLC

DBB 39 Parameter 3 for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB 48)

MMC>PLC

DBB40-47 used internally

DBB 48 PLC-Busy HMI-Strobe FunctionSelectionNo. from MMC
function function
MMC>PLC
DBB 49 Error code for FunctionSelectionNo. (function selection from DBB48)

PLC>MMC

Interface 2nd MMC

DBB Assignment as for DBB 0 to DBB 49

50-99

Switchover interface to MMC

Knocking interface (MMC announces itself to NCU)

DBW 100 ONL_REQUEST /B3/

Online request from MMC
MMC writes its client identification as online request
(bit 8-15: bus type, bit 0-7: MMC bus address)

DBW 102 ONL_CONFIRM /B3/

Acknowledgment from PLC to online request
PLC writes MMC client identification as acknowledgment (bus type, MMC bus address;
as with DBW 100).

DBW 104 PAR_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/

MMC writes its client identification (bus type, MMC bus address; as with DBW 100).

DBB 106 PAR_MMC_TYP /B3/

Type of MMC as per NETNAMES.INI: Main / subordinate operator panel / server /...

DBB 107 PAR_MSTT_ADR /B3/

MMC writes address of MCP to be activated; 255, when no MCP activated

DBB 108 PAR_STATUS /B3/

PLC writes online enable for MMC.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-366 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 109 PAR_Z_INFO /B3/

PLC writes additional info about status

DBB 110 M_TO_N_ALIVE

Sign of life from PLC to MMC through M to N block

DBB 118 TCU index

1st online interface

DBB 119 TCU index

2nd online interface

Online interface MMC 1 (user)

DBW 120 MMC1_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/
PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when MMC goes online.

DBB 122 MMC1_TYP /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when MMC goes online.

DBB 123 MMC1_MSTT_ADR /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when MMC goes online.

DBB 124 MMC1_STATUS /B3/

Connection status, MMC and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments

DBB 125 MMC1_Z_INFO /B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)
DBB 126 res. TCU1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1 MMC1
SHIFT
ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE MCP SHIFT
LOCK
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/

DBB Reserved

127-129

Online Interface MMC 2 (user)

DBW 130 MMC2_CLIENT_IDENT /B3/

PLC writes PAR_CLIENT_IDENT to MMCx_CLIENT_IDENT when MMC goes online.

DBB 132 MMC2_TYP /B3/

PLC writes PAR_MMC_TYP to MMCx_TYP when MMC goes online.

DBB 133 MMC2_MSTT_ADR /B3/

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-367
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

PLC writes PAR_MSTT_ADR to MMCx_MSTT_ADR when MMC goes online.

DBB 134 MMC2_STATUS /B3/

Connection status, MMC and PLC alternately write their requests/acknowledgments

DBB 135 MMC2_Z_INFO /B3/

Additional info connection status (pos./neg. acknowledgment, error messages...)

DBB 136 res. TCU2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2 MMC2
SHIFT
ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE MCP SHIFT
LOCK
DENIED CHANGED PERM REQ SHIFT LOCK
/B3/ /B3/ /B3/ /B3/ LOCK /B3/
/B3/

DBB Reserved

137-139

DBB Code carrier input parameters

Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
140-197
DBB Code carrier return parameters
Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
198-249
DBB Commands
Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
250-255
DBB Commands for Paramtm.exe
Optional package SINTDC on HMI-Advanced required
256-267
DBW Traffic light status
Optional package TPM on HMI Advanced required
268
DBW Counter[1 ... 32]
Optional package TPM on HMI Advanced required
270 to
394

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-368 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.12 PLC machine data (DB 20)

DB 20 PLC machine data (PLC→operator)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 0 INT values

DBW

DBW INT values

DBB Bit arrays

DBB

DBB Bit arrays

DBD REAL values

DBD

DBD REAL values

Note
The initial and end addresses of the PLC machine data areas depend on the
respective length indications of the partial areas. In general, the integer values
start with the data byte 0. The upper limit is determined by the corresponding
length indication. In general, the following bit arrays (2-decade hexadecimal
numbers on input) start with the following even address. The real values follow
directly the bit arrays and also start with an even address.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-369
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.13 Signals from/to NCK channel (DB 21–30)

DB Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Activate dry Activate Activate Activate

run M01 single block DRF /H1/
feedrate /K1/ /K1/
/V1/

DBB 1 Activate PLC action CLC CLC stop Time Synchron- Enable Activate
program complete override /TE1/ monitoring ized action protection referencing
test /K1/ /TE1/ act. (tool OFF zones /R1/
/K1/ manage- /A3/
/FBSY/
ment)

DBB 2 Skip block /K1/

/7 /6 /5 /4 /3 /2 /1 /0

DBB 3 Nibbling and punching /N4/

Manual Stroke not Stroke Stroke Manual Stroke
release of operating delayed suppres- stroke enable /N4/
stroke 2 /N4/ /N4/ sion /N4/ enable /N4/

DBB 4 Feedrate override /V1/

H G F E D C B A

DBB 5 Rapid traverse override /V1/

H G F E D C B A

DBB 6 Feedrate Rapid Program Delete Delete Read-in Feed

override traverse level abort subroutine distance-to- disable /K1/ disable
active /V1/ override /K1/ no. of go /V1/
active /V1/ passes /A2/

DBB 7 Reset NC Stop NC Stop NC Stop to NC Start NC Start

/K1/ axes plus /K1/ block limit /K1/ disable
spindle /K1/ /K1/ /K1/

DBB 8 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

DBB 9 Activate machine-related protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)

Area 10 Area 9

DBB 10 Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
Activate channel-specific protection area /A3/ (SW 2 and higher)

DBB 11 Area 10 Area 9

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-370 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Note
on Feedrate override active (DBX6.7)
even if feedrate override is not active (= 100%), the setting 0% is effective.
on Feedrate override (DBB 4)
either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation or 0-200%
corresponding to the dual value in byte (201–255 max. 200%).
on Rapid traverse override (DBB 5)
either 31 positions (Gray code) with 31 MD for % evaluation or 0-100%
corresponding to the dual value in byte (101–255 max. 100%).
on Activate single block (DBX0.4)
select variant via ”Write variable”.
on Delete distance-to-go (DBX6.2)
effects only path axes and not positioning axes

Control signals to geometry axes

DBB 12 Geometry axis 1
Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel /H1/
traverse key disable /V1/
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1

DBB 13 Geometry axis 1 machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 14 OEM signals geometry axis 1

DBB 15 Geometry axis 1

DBB 16 Geometry axis 2

Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel /H1/
traverse key disable /V1/
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1

DBB 17 Geometry axis 2 machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 18 OEM signals geometry axis 2

DBB 19 Geometry axis 2

DBB 20 Geometry axis 3

Traversing keys /H1/ Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel /H1/
traverse key disable /V1/
override /H1/
/H1/
+ - 3 2 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-371
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 21 Geometry axis 3 machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 22 OEM signals geometry axis 3

DBB 23 Geometry axis 3

Note
about machine function: machine function only defined when signal "INC inputs in
mode group area active" (DB10.DBX57.0) is not set.

Operating signals from MMC/status signals from NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC,
21-30 MMC→PLC, PLC→NCK)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 24 Dry run M01 Select DRF ePS

feedrate selected NCK- selected loading
MMC--> PLC
selected /K1/ related /H1/
program
/V1/ M01

DBB 25 Program REPOS Feedrate REPOSPATHMODE

test MODE override for
MMC--> PLC
selected EDGE rapid
/K1/ traverse 2 1 0
selected
/V1/
DBB 26 Skip block selected /K1/ (SW 2 and higher)
MMC--> PLC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DBB 27 Skip block Skip block
selected selected
MMC--> PLC
/K1/ /K1/
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) higher)

DBB 28 OEM channel signals

PLC→NCK

DBB 29 Do not Switch off Switch off Activate Activate Activate Activate Activate
fixed feed 4 fixed feed 3 fixed feed 2 fixed feed 1
PLC→NCK disable wear workpiece PTP
/FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/, /FBMA/,
tool monitoring counter motion /V1/ /V1/ /V1/ /V1/
(SW 4 and (SW 4 and (SW 4 and (SW 4 and
higher) higher) higher) higher)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-372 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 30 Activate contour handwheel

PLC→NCK
No tool Activate Neg. Simulation Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
change NCK- direction contour 3 2 1
commands related simulation handwheel
M01 contour on
handwheel
/H2/
DBB 31 REPOSPATHMODE
PLC→NCK
Skip block Skip block REPOS 2 1 0
active /9 active /8 MODE
EDGE
DBB 32 Last action M00/M01 Approach Action Execution
NCK--> PLC block active active block block from
/K1/ /K1/ active /K1/ active /K1/ external
source
active
DBB 33 Program Transformation M02/M30 Block Handwheel Revolutio- Orientable Referencing
NCK--> PLC test active active /K1/M1 active search override nal toolholder active
/K1/ /K1/ active active (SW 2 feedrate active /R1/
/K1/ and higher) active /V1/
/H1/
DBB 34 OEM channel signals feedback
NCK--> PLC

DBB 35 Channel status /K1/ Program status /K1/

NCK--> PLC
Reset Interrupted Active Aborted Interrupted Stopped Waiting Running
DBB 36 NCK alarm Channel- Channel Interrupt All axes All axes
NCK--> PLC with specific NCK ready processing stationary requiring
processing alarm present for active /B1/ reference
stop /A2/ operation /K1/ points are
present in SW 4 referenced
/A2/ and higher /R1/
DBB 37 Stop Read-in CLC CLC CLC Contour handwheel active
NCK--> PLC
at block disable is stopped stopped active Handwheel Handwheel Handwheel
end with ignored upper limit lower limit /TE1/ 3 2 1
SBL is /TE1/ /TE1/ /H1/ /H1/ /H1/
/K1/
sup-
pressed
DBB 38 Nibbling and punching /N4/
NCK--> PLC
Acknowl. Stroke
manual enable
stroke active /N4/
enable
/N4/
DBB 39 Protection
NCK--> PLC zones not
guaranteed

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-373
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Note
on Feedrate override for rapid traverse selected (DBX25.3)
Depending on this signal, the basic PLC program copies the feedrate override
onto the rapid traverse override on the channel-specific interface.
On Program test selected (DBX25.7)
”Program test selected” means axis disable for all channel axes and spindles.

Status signals of geometry axes

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 40 Geometry axis 1

Traverse command /H1/ Travel requests Handwheel active /H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

DBB 41 Geometry axis 1 active machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 42 OEM signals geometry axis 1

DBB 43 Geometry axis 1

DBB 44
MMC--> PLC

DBB 46 Geometry axis 2

Traverse command /H1/ Travel requests Handwheel active /H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

DBB 47 Geometry axis 2 active machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 48 OEM signals geometry axis 2

DBB 49 Geometry axis 2

DBB 50
MMC--> PLC

DBB 52 Geometry axis 3

Traverse command /H1/ Travel requests Handwheel active /H1/
plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

DBB 53 Geometry axis 3 active machine function /H1/

Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-374 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 54 OEM signals geometry axis 3

DBB 55 Geometry axis 3

DBB 56
MMC--> PLC

DBB 57

Change signals on auxiliary function transfer from NC channel

DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 58 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 59 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
not not not not not
decoded decoded decoded decoded decoded
DBB 60 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1 S fct. 3 S fct. 2 S fct. 1
quick quick quick change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 61 T fct 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1 T fct. 3 T fct. 2 T fct. 1
quick quick quick change/H2/ change/H2/ change
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and /H2/
higher) higher)
DBB 62 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1 D fct. 3 D fct. 2 D fct. 1
quick quick quick change/H2/ change/H2/ change
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and /H2/
higher) higher)
DBB 63 DL fct. DL fct.
quick change
DBB 64 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1 H fct. 3 H fct. 2 H fct. 1
quick quick quick change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 65 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
change change change change change change
/H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/ /H2/
DBB 66 M fct. 5 M fct. 4 M fct. 3 M fct. 2 M fct. 1
quick quick quick quick quick
DBB 67 F fct. 6 F fct. 5 F fct. 4 F fct. 3 F fct. 2 F fct. 1
quick quick quick quick quick quick

Note
For 10-decade T numbers, only the T fct. 1 change signal is available. For
5-decade D numbers, only the D fct. 1 change signal is available.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-375
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Transferred M/S functions

DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 68 Extended address M function 1 (binary) /H2/

DBD 70
M function 1 (binary) /H2/

DBW 74 Extended address M function 2 (binary) /H2/

DBD 76 M function 2 (binary) /H2/

DBW 80 Extended address M function 3 (binary) /H2/

DBD 82 M function 3 (binary) /H2/

DBW 86 Extended address M function 4 (binary) /H2/

DBD 88 M function 4 (binary) /H2/

DBW 92 Extended address M function 5 (binary) /H2/

DBD 94 M function 5 (binary) /H2/

DBW 98 Extended address S function 1 (binary) /H2/

DBD 100 S function 1 (REAL format) /H2/

DBW 104 Extended address S function 2 (binary) /H2/

DBD 106 S function 2 (REAL format) /H2/

DBW 110 Extended address S function 3 (binary) /H2/

DBD 112 S function 3 (REAL format) /H2/

Note
M functions are programmed in the part program in the INTEGER format
(8 decades plus sign).

”REAL format” means: 24 bit mantissa and 8 bit exponent.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-376 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Transferred T/D/DL functions

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 116 Extended address T function 1 (16 bit Int)

DBW 118 T function 1 (binary) /H2/

For 8-decade T nos., T function 1 (32 bit DINT) is used in DBD 118 (see note)
DBD 118

DBW 120 Extended address T function 2 (16 bit Int)

DBW 122 T function 2 (Int)

DBW 124 Extended address T function 3 (16 bit Int)

DBW 126 T function 3 (Int)

DBB 128

DBB 129 D function 1 (binary) /H2/

DBW 130 For 5-decade D nos., D function 1 (16 bit DINT) is used in DBD 130 (see note)
Extended address D function 2 (8 bit Int)
DBB 130

DBB 131 D function 2 (8 bit Int)

DBB 132 Extended address D function 3 (8 bit Int)

DBB 133 D function 3 (8 bit Int)

DBW 134 Extended address DL function (16 bit Int)

DBD 136 DL function (REAL)

Note
With active tool management, programmed T functions are not output to the PLC.
8-decade T nos. are only available as T function 1
Programmed D functions with names (e.g. D=CUTEDGE_1) cannot be output in
ASCII format to the PLC.
5-decade D nos. are only available as D function 1
The REAL format corresponds to floating point representation in STEP 7 (24 bit
mantissa and 8 bit exponent). This floating point format supplies a maximum of 7
valid places.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-377
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Transferred H/F functions

DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBW 140 Extended address H function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 142 H function 1 (REAL or Dint) /H2/
DBW 146 Extended address H function 2 (binary) /H2/
DBD 148 H function 2 (REAL or Dint) /H2/
DBW 152 Extended address H function 3 (binary) /H2/
DBD 154 H function 3 (REAL or Dint) /H2/
DBW 158 Extended address F function 1 (binary) /H2/
DBD 160 F function 1 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 164 Extended address F function 2 (binary) /H2/
DBD 166 F function 2 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 170 Extended address F function 3 (binary) /H2/
DBD 172 F function 3 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 176 Extended address F function 4 (binary) /H2/
DBD 178 F function 4 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 182 Extended address F function 5 (binary) /H2/
DBD 184 F function 5 (REAL format) /H2/
DBW 188 Extended address F function 6 (binary) /H2/
DBD 190 F function 6 (REAL format) /H2/

Note
F functions are programmed in the part program in the REAL format.
The extended address of the F function contains an identifier with the following
meaning:
0 = path feed,
1-31 = machine axis number for feed with positioning axes.
The H function data type is dependent on MD 22110: AUXFU_H_TYPE_INT.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-378 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Decoded M signals (M0–M99)

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 194 Dynamic M functions

M07 M06 M05 * M04 * M03 * M02 M01 M00

DBB 195 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08

DBB 196 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16

DBB 197 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24

DBB 198 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M39 M38 M37 M36 M35 M34 M33 M32

DBB 199 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M47 M46 M45 M44 M43 M42 M41 M40

DBB 200 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M55 M54 M53 M52 M51 M50 M49 M48

DBB 201 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M63 M62 M61 M60 M59 M58 M57 M56

DBB 202 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M71 M70 * M69 M68 M67 M66 M65 M64

DBB 203 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M79 M78 M77 M76 M75 M74 M73 M72

DBB 204 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M87 M86 M85 M84 M83 M82 M81 M80

DBB 205 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M95 M94 M93 M92 M91 M90 M89 M88

DBB 206 Dynamic M functions /H2/

M99 M98 M97 M96

DBB 207

Note
M functions marked with * are not decoded in this bit array if a spindle is
configured in the channel. In this case, these M functions are offered as extended
M functions in DB21-30.DBB68 ff. and in the relevant axis DB DB31-61.DBB86 ff.
Dynamic M functions (M00 to M99) are decoded by the basic PLC program.
The PLC user must use dynamic M functions in order to generate static M
functions.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-379
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Active G functions
DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 208 Number of active G function of G function group 1 (binary) /K1/

DBB 209 Number of active G function of G function group 2 (binary) /K1/

DBB 210 Number of active G function of G function group 3 (binary) /K1/

DBB 211 Number of active G function of G function group 4 (binary) /K1/

DBB 212 Number of active G function of G function group 5 (binary) /K1/

DBB 213 Number of active G function of G function group 6 (binary) /K1/

DBB 214 Number of active G function of G function group 7 (binary) /K1/

DBB 215 Number of active G function of G function group 8 (binary) /K1/

...

DBB 270 Number of active G function of G function group n-1 (binary) /K1/

DBB 271 Number of active G function of G function group n (binary) /K1/

Note
The active G functions of the groups are updated each time a G function or a
mnemonic identifier (e.g. SPLINE) is programmed.
G functions within a G group are output as binary value, starting with 1.
A G function with the value 0 means that no G function is active for this G group.

Signals for protection areas from NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 2 and higher)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 272 Machine-related protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
DBB 273 Machine-related protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 274 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1
DBB 275 Channel-specific protection area preactivated /A3/
Area 10 Area 9
DBB 276 Machine-related protection area violated /A3/
Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

DBB 277 Machine-related protection area violated /A3/

Area 10 Area 9

DBB 278 Channel-related protection area violated /A3/

Area 8 Area 7 Area 6 Area 5 Area 4 Area 3 Area 2 Area 1

DBB 279 Channel-related protection area violated /A3/

Area 10 Area 9

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-380 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Instruction-controlled signals to NC channel

DB Signals to NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 4 and higher)
21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 280 Synch. Reserved

action
disable
request

DBB 281 Synch.

action
disabled

DBW 282 Reserved

DBW 284 Reserved

DBW 286 Reserved

DBW 288 Reserved

DBW 290 Reserved

DBW 292 Reserved

DBW 294 Reserved

DBW 296 Reserved

DBW 298 Reserved

DBB 300 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 8 No. 7 No. 6 No. 5 No. 4 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1

DBB 301 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 16 No. 15 No. 14 No. 13 No. 12 No. 11 No. 10 No. 9

DBB 302 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 24 No. 23 No. 22 No. 21 No. 20 No. 19 No. 18 No. 17

DBB 303 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 32 No. 31 No. 30 No. 29 No. 28 No. 27 No. 26 No. 25

DBB 304 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 40 No. 39 No. 38 No. 37 No. 36 No. 35 No. 34 No. 33

DBB 305 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 48 No. 47 No. 46 No. 45 No. 44 No. 43 No. 42 No. 41

DBB 306 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 56 No. 55 No. 54 No. 53 No. 52 No. 51 No. 50 No. 49

DBB 307 Disable synchronized actions /FBSY/

No. 64 No. 63 No. 62 No. 61 No. 60 No. 59 No. 58 No. 57

Note
The request signals are set by the user and reset by the basic program after
transmission of the corresponding data.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-381
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Instruction-controlled signals from NC channel

DB
21 - 30 Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC) (SW 4 and higher)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 308 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 8 Nr. 7 Nr. 6 Nr. 5 Nr. 4 Nr. 3 Nr. 2 Nr.1

DBB 309 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 16 Nr. 15 Nr. 14 Nr. 13 Nr. 12 Nr. 11 Nr.10 Nr.9

DBB 310 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 24 Nr. 23 Nr. 22 Nr. 21 Nr. 20 Nr. 19 Nr.18 Nr.17

DBB 311 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 32 Nr. 31 Nr. 30 Nr. 29 Nr. 28 Nr. 27 Nr. 26 Nr.25

DBB 312 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 40 Nr. 39 Nr. 38 Nr. 37 Nr. 36 Nr. 35 Nr. 34 Nr. 33

DBB 313 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 48 Nr. 47 Nr. 46 Nr. 45 Nr. 44 Nr. 43 Nr. 42 Nr.41

DBB 314 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 56 Nr. 55 Nr. 54 Nr. 53 Nr. 52 Nr. 51 Nr. 50 Nr.49

DBB 315 Synchronized actions can be disabled /FBSY/

Nr. 64 Nr. 63 Nr. 62 Nr. 61 Nr. 60 Nr. 59 Nr. 58 Nr.57
Cyclic Signals interface NCK PLC

DBB 316 Active G functions

G00 geo.
DBB 317
Tool PTP Travel request Workpiece External
missing motion drive test setpoint language
active reached mode
active
DBB 318
Overstore Dry-run AssociatedM01 Stop TOFF TOFF Search ASUP
active feedrate active /H2/ delayed movement active active stopped
active /V1/ active /K1/ /K1/
DBB 319
No tool Stop- Repos Delay FTS Repos Repos Repos REPOS
change delay- DEFERRA L Path Mode Path Mode Path Mode MODE
command range not Chan Ackn 2 Ackn 1 Ackn 0 EDGE
active activated ACKN

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-382 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals to orientation axes

DB Signals to NCK channel (PLC→NCK)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 320 Traversing keys Orientation axis 1

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed stop Activate handwheel

traverse key disable
− − override
(bit value coding)

DBB 321 Orientation axis 1

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 322 OEM signals orientation axis 1

DBB 323 Orientation axis 1

DBB 324 Traversing keys Orientation axis 2

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

traverse key
stop (bit value coding)
override
disable

DBB 325 Orientation axis 2

DBB 326 OEM signals orientation axis 2

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 327 Orientation axis 2

DBB 328 Traversing keys Orientation axis 3

+ − Rapid Traversing Feed Activate handwheel

key
traverse stop (bit value coding)
disable
override

DBB 329 Orientation axis 3

DBB 330 OEM signals orientation axis 3

var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 331 Orientation axis 3

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-383
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Signals from orientation axes

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 332 Orientation axis 1
Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)

DBB 333 Orientation axis 1

Active machine function
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 334 OEM signals orientation axis 1

DBB 335 Orientation axis 1

DBB 336 Orientation axis 2

Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
(bit value coding)
plus minus plus minus

DBB 337 Orientation axis 2

Active machine function
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 338 OEM signals orientation axis 2

DBB 339 Orientation axis 2

DBB 340 Orientation axis 3

Travel command Travel request Handwheel active
plus minus plus minus (bit value coding)

DBB 341 Orientation axis 3

Active machine function
var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC

DBB 342 OEM signals orientation axis 3

DBB 343 Orientation axis 3

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-384 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Tool management functions from NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Modification signals tool management functions

DBB 344 Last Transfer to Tool limit Tool pre-

replace- new value warning
ment tool of replace- reached limit
tool group ment tool reached

DBB
345-347
Transferred tool management functions

DBD 348 T number for tool prewarning limit (DInt)

DBD 352 T number for tool limit value (DInt)

DBD 356 T number of new replacement tool (DInt)

DBD 360 T number of last replacement tool (DInt)

Signals from/to NC channel

DB Signals from NCK channel (NCK→PLC, PLC →NCK)

21 - 30
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 0 – 7 )
DBB 364
CH_CYCLES_SIG_IN (Bit 8 – 15 )
DBB 365
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 0 – 7 )
DBB 366
CH_CYCLES_SIG_OUT (Bit 8 – 15 )
DBB 367
CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_IN (DBB368 - 371)
DBB 368

DBB 369

DBB 370

DBB 371

DBB 372 CH_OEM_TECHNO_SIG_OUT (DBB372 - 375)

DBB 373

DBB 374

DBB 375

DBB 376 ProgEventDisplay

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-385
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 377 Stop

following
collision
detection

DBB 378

DBB 379

DBB 380 Reserved ASUP

DBB 381 Reserved ASUP

DBB 382 Reserved ASUP

DBB 383 Reserved ASUP

3.2.14 Signals from/to axis/spindle (PLC->NCK) (DB 31–DB 61)

Note
DBX8.4: is automatically reset after assignment (SW 3.7, 4.2 and higher). For
previous SW versions, the activation signal must be applied until the assignment
is made (DBB68).

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 9 Lock Control parameter block (SW4 and
parameter higher) /A2/
set
definition
from NC
/A2/
C B A

DBB 10 REPOS
DELAY

DBB 11 Start brake

test

DBB 12 Delay Modulo 2nd software limit switch Hardware limit switch
reference limit /A3/ /A3/
Axis
point enabled
approach
/R1/
plus minus plus minus

DBB 13
Axis

DBB 14
Axis

DBB 15

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-386 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

Axis

DBB 16 Delete No n- Resyn- Resyn- Gear has Actual gear stage /S1/
S value monitoring chronize chronize changed
Spindle
/S1/ when spindle 1 spindle 2 over /S1/
changing /S1/ /S1/
gear /S1/
C B A

DBB 17 Invert Resyn- Resyn- Feedrate

M3/M4 chronize chronize override f.
Spindle
/S1/ spindle at spindle at spindle
pos. 2 /S1/ pos. 1 /S1/ valid /S1/

DBB 18 Setpoint rot. direct. /S1/ Oscillating Oscillation

speed via PLC
Spindle
/S1/ /S1/
CCW CW

DBB 19 Spindle override /V1/

Spindle
H G F E D C B A

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 20 Speed Torque limit Ramp- Runup
setpoint 2 function change-
611D
smoothing /A2/ generator over U/f
/A2/ interface mode
/A2/ /DE1/
1)
DBB 21 Pulse n controller Selecting Motor selection /A2/ Drive parameter set selection /A2/
enable integrator motor
611D
/A2/ disable /A2/
/A2/
1) B A C B A

DBB 22 Selection of Safe speed Deselect Deselect

safe safe
Safety
standstill velocity and
Integr. bit value 1 bit value 0 standstill
1)

DBB 23 Activate Activate Trans- Trans- Trans-

test stop end mission of mission of mission of
Safety
position bit value 2 bit value 1 bit value 0
Integr. pair 2

DBB 24 Master/ Bit value for Torque CC_Slave Control Stepper

slave on compensa- axis Axis motor
CTRLOUT_changed:
tion
1 0 controller
Change setpoint output ON Suppress Rotation
assignment (for compile link monitoring
cycles)

DBB 25

DBB 26 Enable Enable Comp-

ESR ensation
Grinding slave axis
response control ON
overlay

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-387
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 27 Stop Resume

Grinding HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS

DBB 28 PLC AxStop, Stop at Change Set AXRESUME AXRESET

checks stop next reversal reversal
Oscillation
axis /P5/ reversal point /P5/ point /P5/
(SW 2 and point (SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) /P5/ (SW 2 higher) higher)
and higher)

DBB 29 Disable Start

automatic gantry
Grinding
synchroni-
synchroni- zation
zation Gantry

DBB 30 Position Autom. Start spindle Start Stop

spindle gear step spindle spindle
(Technology) Counter-
change
clockwise Clockwise

1) See note at the end of this subsection

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (PLC → NCK)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 31 Track Disable Resynchro-
synchronism synchroni- nize
(Technology)
zation

DBB 32 Deselect Deselect Deselect Deselect

external external external external
Safety
stop E stop D stop C stop A
Integr. 1)

DBB 33 Select override

Safety Bit value 3 Bit value 2 Bit value 1 Bit value 0

Integr. 1)

DBB 34

DBB ...

DBB 55

DBB 56 Internal Spindle Separate

spindle speed feed drive
(PLC to
voltage display engaged
HMI) as C axis

DBB 58 Internal date for FC18

DBB 59

Note
The IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DBX2.2) is effective only for position axes on an
axis-specific basis; the IS ”Delete distance-to-go” (DB21-30, DB6.2) acts on a
channel-specific basis. The IS ”Spindle reset” (DXB2.2) acts on a spindle-specific
basis.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-388 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB Signals from axis/spindle (NCK→PLC)

31 -61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 60 Position reached /B1/ References/ References/ Encoder Encoder NCU_Link Spindle
Axis and with exact with exact synchro- synchro- limit limit Axis active /no axis
spindle stop fine stop coarse nizes nizes frequency frequency /S1/
/B3/
2 /R1/ 1 /R1/ exceeded 2 exceeded 1
/A3/ /A3/

DBB 61 Current Speed Position Axis/spindle Follow-up Axis ready Axial alarm Travel
controller controller controller stationary mode request
Axis and /B3/
active /A2/ active /A2/ active /A2/ (n < nmin) active /A2/ /F1/
spindle /A2/

DBB 62 Axis Force fixed Fixed stop Activate Measure- Revolutio- Handwheel Software
container stop limited reached travel to fixed ment active nal overlay cams
rotation /F1/ (SW /F1/ stop /F1/ feedrate active /H1/ active /N3/
/M5/
active 5.2) (SW 2 and (SW 2 and active (SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) higher) higher) higher)

DBB 63 Stop Axis/ Axis stop PLC- AXRESET

spindle active controlled DONE
HIAxMove Corr DEPBCS DEPMCS
disable /P2/ axis /P2/
active active active active
active /P2/

DBB 64 Traverse command /H1/ Travel request Handwheel active /H1/

Axis and
spindle plus minus plus minus 3 2 1

65 Active machine function /H1/

Axis and
spindle Var. INC 10000 INC 1000 INC 100 INC 10 INC 1 INC
1) See note at the end of this subsection

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 66 OEM axis signals (reserved)
Axis and Activate
spindle monitoring
/TE6/

DBB 67

DBB 68 NC axis/spindle in channel /K5/

PLC axis/ Neutral axis/ Axis New type D C B A
spindle /K5/ spindle replacement requested by
/K5/ possible PLC
/K5/ /K5/

DBB 69 NCU number in NCU link network Control parameter block

C B A

DBB 70 Repos Repos shift Repos shift

delay quit valid

DBB 71 PLC axis Brake test

permanently active
assigned
DBB 72 REPOS
DELAY

DBB 73

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-389
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 74 Modulo
limit
enabled
active

DBB 75

DBB 76 Rounding Indexing Positioning Path axis Scratch

axis in axis in axis pulse
Axis
position position /P2/ /A2/
/T1/

DBB 77 Reduced-
speed
collision

DBB 78
Axis
F function (REAL format)
for positioning axis /V1/

DBB 82 Gear Setpoint gear stage /S1/

change-
Spindle over /S1/
C B A

DBB 83 Actual rotat. Speed Spindle in Support Geometry Set speed Set speed Speed limit
direction monitoring setpoint area limits monitoring increased limited exceeded
Spindle
CW /W1/ range /S1/ violated /W1/ /S1/ /S1/ /S1/
/S1/ (SW 2 and /S8/ (SW 2 and
higher) (SW 2 and higher)
higher)

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 84 Active spindle operating mode /S1/ Tapping CLGON SUG active Const.
without active (grinding cutting
Spindle
compen- /S8/ wheel speed
sating (SW 2 and surface active
chuck /S1/ higher) speed)
Control Oscillation Positioning Synchro-
mode mode mode nous mode

DBB 85 Spindle in
Spindle position

DBB 86 M function (binary) for spindle /S1/

Spindle

DBD 88
Spindle
S function (floating-point) for spindle
/S1/

DBB 92 RLI Speed Torque limit HLGSS Set-up

setpoint 2 active active mode

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-390 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

611D active smoothing /A2/ /A2/ active /A2/

active /A2/
1)
DBB 93 Enable n controller Drive Active Active drive parameter set /A2/
611D pulses integrator ready motor /A2/
/A2/ disabled /A2/
/A2/
1) B A C B A
DBB 94 Variable nact = nset |nact| < nx |nact| < Md < Mdx Ramp-up Temperature prewarning
611D signaling /A2/ /A2/ nmin /A2/ /A2/ complete /A2/
fct. /A2/ /A2/
1) Heat sink Motor
DBB 95 Limitation UDC-link <
611D of power alarm
1) section I2T threshold
/A2/
DBB 96 Master/ Bit value for Master/ Master/ Master/ Axis control (Stepper
slave active CTRLOUT_changed Slave Slave Slave active motor)
/TE3/ Compen- coarse fine error
sation rotation
controller monitoring
activ /S6/
1 0
Change setpoint output
assignment (for compile
cycles)

DBB 97 Offset after Activate Activate Axis is

turn-on mirroring link slave axis
point /TE6/
/TE6/ /TE6/ /TE6/
1) See note at the end of this subsection

DB Continuation: Signals to axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)

31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 98 ESR- Accel. Speed Overlaid Actual Synchronism (SW 2 and
Synchro- reaction warning warning motion value higher) /S3/
nous spindle triggered threshold threshold /S3/ (SW2 coupling
reached reached and higher) /S3/ (SW2
and higher)
coarse fine
DBB 99 Emergency Max. acce- Max. speed Synchro- Axis acce- Slave Master
Synchro- retraction leration reached nization lerating spindle spindle
nous spindle enabled reached running active active
(SW 2 and (SW 2 and
higher) /S3/ higher) /S3/
DBB 100 Oscillation Oscillation Spark-out Error in Oscillation
Grinding active /P5/ motion active /P5/ oscillation cannot start
(SW 2 and active /P5/ /P5/ /P5/
higher)
DBB 101 Gantry axis Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry Gantry cut-
Gantry /G1/ leading grouping is synchroni- warning off limit
(SW 2 and axis synchro- zation run limit exceeded
higher) /G1/ nous ready to start exceeded /G1/
/G1/ /G1/ /G1/
DBB
102,103

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-391
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DBB 104 Active infeed axis /P5/

Grinding
(SW2 and
higher) Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1

DBB 105 Active infeed axis /P5/

Axis 16 Axis 9

DBB 106 Active infeed axis /P5/

Axis 24 Axis 17

DBB 107 Active infeed axis /P5/

Axis 31 Axis 30 Axis 25

DBB 108 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /

1) Axis safely Status Safe
referenced pulses operational
deleted stop / safe
speed active

1) See note at the end of this subsection

DB Continuation: Signals from axis/spindle (NCK → PLC)
31-61
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 109 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
Actual position > cam position
1) SC 4- SC 4+ SC 3- SC 3+ SC 2- SC 2+ SC 1- SC 1+

DBB 110 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

1) n < nx Safe velocity Safe velocity Safe zero
active bit active bit speed
value 1 value 0 active

DBB 111 Reserved for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated / /

1) Stop E Stop D Stop C Stop A/B
active active active active

Note
This note is refers to the signal bytes marked with 1) in column 1 in the above
table.
These signal bytes are directly transferred to the interface independently of any
configured link communication.

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-392 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.15 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (DB 71)

DB 71 Interface for loading/unloading magazine (NCK→PLC)

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Interface (I) active

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9

DBB 2,3

DBB n res. res. res. NC Position at Reload Unload Load

program loading
positions point
magazine

DBB
n+2 Assigned channel (8 bit Int)

DBB
n+3 Tool management no. (8 bit Int)

DBD
n+4 Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)

DBD
n+8 Unassigned parameter 2 (D word)

DBD
n + 12 Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)

DBW
n + 16 Identification for loading/unloading station (Int), (fixed value 9999)

DBW
n + 18 No. of loading station (Int)

DBW
n + 20 Magazine no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (Int)

DBW
n + 22 Location no. (source) for unloading/reloading/positioning (Int)

DBW
n + 24 Magazine no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)

DBW
n + 26 Location no. (target) for loading/reloading/positioning (Int)

DBW
n + 28 Reserved

Initial addresses of the loading/unloading stations:

Loading/unloading station 1: n= 4 Loading/unloading station 3: n= 64
Loading/unloading station 2: n= 34 Loading/unloading station 4: n= 94

Load interface 1 is responsible for spindle loading and reloading of tools, for relocating tools and for positioning at any
location (e.g. buffer).

References: /FBW/”Description of Functions Tool Management”

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-393
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.16 Interface for spindle as change position (DB 72)

DB 72 Signals from spindle (NCK→PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Interface (I) active

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9

DBB 2,3

DBB n
Spindle Replace Replace OldT in T0 Prepare Perform Compul-
manual tool manual buffer no. change change sory
Tool tool. (n-42) (initiate: change
remaining M06)
in spindle
DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB
n+2 Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
DBB
n+3 Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
DBD
n+4 Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
DBD
n+8 Unassigned parameter 2 (D word)
DBD
n + 12 Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)
DBW Buffer identification (Int), (fixed value 9998)
(corresponds to ”Target position for new tool”)
n + 16
DBW Relative location (target) in the buffer (Int)
n + 18
DBW Magazine no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. (source) for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Magazine no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 24
DBW Location no. (target) for old tool (Int)
n + 26
DBW Tool new: location type (Int)
n + 28
DBW Tool new: size left (Int)
n + 30
DBW Tool new: size right (Int)
n + 32
DBW Tool new: size top (Int)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-394 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

n + 34
DBW Tool new: size bottom (Int)
n + 36
DBW Tool status for tool new
n + 38
Tool was in Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Tool Tool Tool Active tool
use location changed limit measured disabled enabled
coded reached
Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
Master tool to be to be ignore ID for tools
loaded unloaded disabled in buffer

DBW Tool new: T no. (Int)

n + 40
DBW If DBX (n+0.4) = 1, then buffer location of old tool is entered here.
n + 42
DBW Original magazine of new tool
n + 44
DBW Original location of new tool
n + 46
Initial addresses of the buffers:
Spindle 1: n= 4
Spindle 2: n = 52

References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions, Tool Management”

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-395
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

3.2.17 Interface for circular magazine (DB 73)

DB73 Signals from circular magazine (NCK→PLC)
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

DBB 0 Interface (I) active

I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1

DBB 1
I16 I15 I14 I13 I12 I11 I10 I9

DBB 2,3

DBB n
res. Replace res. res. T0 res. Perform Obligatory
manual tool change change
(initiation: T
no.)

DBB Unassigned
n+1
DBB Assigned channel (8 bit Int)
n+2
DBB Tool management no. (8 bit Int)
n+3
DBD Unassigned parameter 1 (D word)
n+4
DBD Unassigned parameter 2 (D word)
n+8
DBD Unassigned parameter 3 (D word)
n + 12
DBW Reserved
n + 16
DBW Reserved
n + 18
DBW Circular magazine no. (Int)
n + 20
DBW Location no. for new tool (Int)
n + 22
DBW Magazine no. of the old tool
n + 24
DBW Location no. for old tool (Int)
n + 26
DBW Tool new: location type (Int)
n + 28

DBW Tool new: size left (Int)

n + 30
DBW Tool new: size right (Int)

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-396 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 3 Interface Signals power line
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

n + 32
DBW Tool new: size top (Int)
n + 34
DBW Tool new: size bottom (Int)
n + 36
DBW Tool status for tool new
n + 38
Tool was in Tool fixed Tool being Prewarning Tool Tool Tool Active tool
use location changed limit measured disabled enabled
coded reached
Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8
Master tool to be to be ignore ID for tools
loaded unloaded disabled in buffer

DBW Tool new: T no. (Int)

n + 40
DBW Original location of new tool in this circular magazine (SW 6.3 and higher)
n + 42
Initial addresses of the circular magazines: circular magazine 1: n = 4
2: n = 48

References: /FBW/, ”Description of Functions, Tool Management”

3.2.18 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU (840Di with
MCI2 only) (DB 77)
DB77 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 0 to Input signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB 7

DBB 8 to Output signals from MCP1 to PLC, MPI Bus (GD communication)
DBB 15

DBD 16 Status send MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBD 20 Status receive MCP1, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBB 24 Input signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 31

DBB 32 Output signals from MCP2 to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 39

DBD 40 Status send MCP2, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBD 44 Status receive MCP2, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBB 48 to Input signals from HHU to PLC, MPI bus (GD communication)
DBB 53

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 3-397
3 Interface Signals power line 03/2006
3.2 Interface signals of the PLC application interface

DB77 Signals to and from the machine control panel and HHU
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DBB 60 Output signals from PLC to HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)
to
DBB 79

DBD 80 Status Send HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)

DBD 84 Status Receive HHU, MPI bus (GD communication)

FB1- parameter:
MCPNum :=1, //correct number of MCPs
MCP1In :=P#DB77.DBX0.0,
MCP1Out := P#DB77.DBX8.0,
MCP1StatSend := P#DB77.DBX16.0,
MCP1StatRec := P#DB77.DBX20.0,
MCP2In :=P#DB77.DBX24.0,
MCP2Out := P#DB77.DBX32.0,
MCP2StatSend := P#DB77.DBX40.0,
MCP2StatRec := P#DB77.DBX44.0,
MCPSDB210 := TRUE,
BHG: :=1; //handheld unit interface:
//0 - no HHU
//1 – HHU to MPI
//2 – HHU to OPI
BHGIn :=P#DB77.DBX48.0, //transmitted data of handheld unit
BHGOut: :=P#DB77.DBX60.0, //received data of handheld unit
BHGStatSend: :=P#DB77.DBX80.0, // status DW for transmitting handheld unit
BHGStatRec: :=P#DB77.DBX84.0, // status DW for receiving HHU

3.2.19 Signals to/from ManualTurn, ShopMill, ShopTurn (DB 82)

A list of the signals of DB 82 can be found in:

References: /FBMA/, Description of Functions ManualTurn
/FBSP/, Description of Functions ShopMill
/FBT/, Description of Functions ShopTurn

of Functions ShopTurn

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

3-398 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 4 PLC-Blocks
4.1 Overview of organization blocks

4 PLC-Blocks
4
4.1 Overview of organization blocks ................................................... 4-400

4.2 Overview of function blocks .......................................................... 4-400

4.3 Assignment of data blocks............................................................ 4-401

4.4 Assigned timers ............................................................................ 4-402

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 4-399
4 PLC-Blocks 03/2006
4.1 Overview of organization blocks

4.1 Overview of organization blocks

Table Overview of organization blocks (OBs)

OB no. Designation Meaning Kit

1 ZYKLUS Cyclic processing GP
40 ALARM Process alarms GP
100 NEUSTART Beginning of restart GP

4.2 Overview of function blocks

Table Overview of function blocks (FCs)

FC no. Designation Meaning Kit

0 - Reserved for Siemens
2 GP_HP Basic program, cyclic part GP
3 GP_PRAL Basic program, alarm-controlled part GP
5 GP_DIAG Basic program, diagnostic alarm (FM-NC) GP
7 TM_REV Transfer block for tool change with circular GP
magazine
8 TM_TRANS Transfer block for tool management GP
9 ASUP Asynchronous subprograms GP
10 AL_MSG Alarms/messages GP
12 AUXFU Call interface for user auxiliary functions GP
13 BHG_DISP Display control for handheld unit GP
15 POS_AX Positioning axis GP
16 PART_AX Indexing axis GP
17 Y-D switchover GP
18 SpinCtrl Spindle control from PLC GP
19 MCP_IFM Distribution of machine control panel and MMC GP
signals to interface (milling machine)
21 Transfer data exchange PLC-NCK GP
22 TM_DIR Selection of direction GP
24 MCP_IFM2 Transfer of MCP signals to interface GP
25 MCP_IFT Distribution of machine control panel and MMC GP
signals to interface
26 HPU_MCP Distribution of HPU signals to interface
30 - 35 Assigned if ManualTurn, ShopMill or ShopTurn
are installed
36 - 127 User assignable with FM-NC, 810DE
36 - 255 User assignable with 810D, 840DE, 840D

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

4-400 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 4 PLC-Blocks
4.3 Assignment of data blocks

Tabelle 4-1: Overview of function blocks (FBs)

FB no. Designation Meaning Kit

0 - 29 Reserved for Siemens
1 RUN_UP Basic program, booting GP
2 GET Read NC variables GP
3 PUT Write NC variables GP
4 PI_SERV PI services GP
5 GETGUD Read GUD variable GP
7 PI_SERV2 General PI services GP
29 Diagnostics for signal recorder and data trigger GP
36 - 127 User assignable with FM-NC, 810DE
36 - 255 User assignable with 810D, 840DE, 840D

4.3 Assignment of data blocks

Note
Only so many DBs are created as are necessary according to NC-MD.

Tabelle 4-2: Overview of data blocks

DB no. Designation Meaning Kit
1 Reserved for Siemens GP
2-4 PLC MSG PLC messages GP
5-8 Basic program
9 NC COMPILE Interface for NC compile cycles GP
10 NC Central NC interface GP
INTERFACE
11 BAG 1 Mode group interface GP
12 Computer link and transport system
13-14 Reserved (Hymnos, basic program)
15 Basic program
16 PI service definitions
17 Version code
18 SPL interface (Safety Integrated)
19 MMC interface
20 PLC machine data
21 - 30 CHANNEL 1 NC channel interface GP
31 - 61 AXIS 1,... Reserved for interface axis/spindle no. 1 to 31 GP
62 - 70 User assignable
71 - 74 User tool management GP

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition 4-401
4 PLC-Blocks 03/2006
4.4 Assigned timers

75 - 76 M group decoding GP
77 Tool management buffer
78 - 80 Reserved for Siemens
81 - 89 Assigned if ManualTurn, ShopMill or ShopTurn
are installed
(81)90 - User assignable FM-NC, 810DE, see below
127
(81)90 - User assignable 810D, 840DE, 840D, see
399 below

Note
Data blocks of inactivated channels, axes/spindles, C programming, tool
management can be assigned by the user.

4.4 Assigned timers

Timer no. Meaning

1-9 Reserved
10 - 127 User assignable

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

4-402 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

I Index
I
I.1 Stichwortindex

$ 6

$$/C/SGA/actToolBasePos with diameter 611D / enable high-speed inputs/outputs ....

conv. ............................................... 1-179 ........................................................ 1-240
$$actToolBasePosBasic with diameter 611D support ........................................ 1-31
conv. ............................................... 1-179
$$actToolBasPosBN with diameter
conv. ................................................... 1-179 A
$$traceProtocolLock is inactive.......... 1-268
a0-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous
action ..............................................1-102
/ a1-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous
action ..............................................1-102
/Nck/Nck/ActApplication ..................... 1-269 a2-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous
/Nck/Nck/ActBag ................................ 1-269 action ..............................................1-102
/Nck/Nck/Channel............................... 1-269 a3-coeff. nth polynominal for synchonous
/Nck/Nck/CoordSystem ...................... 1-269 action ..............................................1-103
AA_OFF_LIMIT................................... 1-243
aaAccLimA............................................ 1-98
1 aaActIndexAxPosNo ..................1-75, 1-153
aaAlarmStat ...............................1-75, 1-153
1st measuring point ............................ 1-100 aaBcsOffset ...............................1-75, 1-153
aaCoupAct .................................1-76, 1-153
2 aaCoupOffs................................1-76, 1-153
aaCurr ........................................1-76, 1-153
2nd measuring point........................... 1-100 aaDelt.................................................. 1-176
2nd torque limit .......................... 1-84, 1-162 aaDtbb .......................................1-76, 1-154
aaDtbw................................................ 1-177
aaDteb .......................................1-76, 1-154
3 aaDtepb .....................................1-76, 1-154
aaDtepw.............................................. 1-177
3rd measuring point............................ 1-100 aaDtew................................................ 1-177
aaEgActive............................................ 1-98
aaEgAx ................................................. 1-99
4 aaEgDenom .......................................... 1-99
aaEgNumera......................................... 1-99
4th measuring point............................ 1-100 aaEgNumLa .......................................... 1-99
aaEgSyn ............................................... 1-99
aaEgSynFa ........................................... 1-99
aaEgType.............................................. 1-99

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-403
I Index 03/2006

aaEsrEnable .............................. 1-76, 1-154 aaStat.........................................1-80, 1-158

aaEsrStat................................... 1-77, 1-154 aaSync .......................................1-81, 1-158
aaEsrTrigger.............................. 1-77, 1-154 aaTOff ................................................. 1-178
aaIbCorr.............................................. 1-177 aaTOffLimit ......................................... 1-178
aaIbnCorr................................... 1-77, 1-154 aaTOffPrepDiff .................................... 1-178
aaIenCorr................................... 1-77, 1-155 aaTOffVal............................................ 1-178
aaIwCorr ............................................. 1-177 aaTorque....................................1-81, 1-158
aaJerkCount .............................. 1-77, 1-155 aaTotalOvr .................................1-81, 1-158
aaJerkLimA......................................... 1-100 aaTravelCount ...........................1-81, 1-158
aaJerkTime................................ 1-77, 1-155 aaTravelCountHS ......................1-81, 1-159
aaJerkTotal................................ 1-77, 1-155 aaTravelDist...............................1-81, 1-159
aaLeadP .................................... 1-77, 1-155 aaTravelDistHS..........................1-81, 1-159
aaLeadPTurn............................. 1-77, 1-155 aaTravelTime .............................1-81, 1-159
aaLeadSp .................................. 1-78, 1-155 aaTravelTimeHS ........................1-81, 1-159
aaLeadSv .................................. 1-78, 1-155 aaTyp .........................................1-82, 1-159
aaLeadTyp................................. 1-78, 1-155 aaVactB .....................................1-82, 1-159
aaLeadV .................................... 1-78, 1-155 aaVactM.....................................1-82, 1-159
aaLoad....................................... 1-78, 1-156 aaVactW ............................................. 1-178
aaMaslState............................... 1-78, 1-156 aaVc...........................................1-82, 1-159
aaMeasP1Valid .................................. 1-100 aaVeloLimA......................................... 1-101
aaMeasP2Valid .................................. 1-100 Abscissa arc centre of 10th contour
aaMeasP3Valid .................................. 1-100 element ....................................1-36, 1-43
aaMeasP4Valid .................................. 1-100 Abscissa arc centre of 1st contour element
aaMeasPoint1..................................... 1-100 .................................................1-36, 1-42
aaMeasPoint2..................................... 1-100 Abscissa arc centre of 2nd contour element
aaMeasPoint3..................................... 1-100 .................................................1-36, 1-42
aaMeasPoint4..................................... 1-100 Abscissa arc centre of 3rd contour element
aaMeasSetangle ................................ 1-101 .................................................1-36, 1-42
aaMeasSetpoint ................................. 1-101 Abscissa arc centre of 4th contour element
aaMeasSpValid .................................. 1-101 .................................................1-36, 1-42
aaMm......................................... 1-78, 1-156 Abscissa arc centre of 5th contour element
aaMm1....................................... 1-78, 1-156 .................................................1-36, 1-42
aaMm2....................................... 1-78, 1-156 Abscissa arc centre of 6th contour element
aaMm3....................................... 1-78, 1-156 .................................................1-36, 1-42
aaMm4....................................... 1-79, 1-156 Abscissa arc centre of 7th contour element
aaMw .................................................. 1-177 .................................................1-36, 1-42
aaMw1 ................................................ 1-177 Abscissa arc centre of 8th contour element
aaMw2 ................................................ 1-177 .................................................1-36, 1-43
aaMw3 ................................................ 1-177 Abscissa arc centre of 9th contour element
aaMw4 ................................................ 1-177 .................................................1-36, 1-43
aaOff.......................................... 1-79, 1-156 Abscissa end point of 10th contour element
aaOffLimit .................................. 1-79, 1-156 .................................................1-38, 1-45
aaOffVal..................................... 1-79, 1-157 Abscissa end point of 1st contour element1-
aaOscillBreakPos1 .................... 1-79, 1-157 37, 1-44
aaOscillBreakPos2 .................... 1-79, 1-157 Abscissa end point of 2nd contour element
aaOscillReversePos1 ................ 1-79, 1-157 .................................................1-37, 1-44
aaOscillReversePos2 ................ 1-79, 1-157 Abscissa end point of 3rd contour element
aaOvr......................................... 1-79, 1-157 .................................................1-38, 1-44
aaPlcOvr.................................... 1-80, 1-157 Abscissa end point of 4th contour element
aaPolfa ...................................... 1-80, 1-157 .................................................1-38, 1-44
aaPolfaValid .............................. 1-80, 1-157 Abscissa end point of 5th contour element
aaPower .................................... 1-80, 1-157 .................................................1-38, 1-44
aaSnglAxStat............................. 1-80, 1-158 Abscissa end point of 6th contour element
aaSoftendn ................................ 1-80, 1-158 .................................................1-38, 1-44
aaSoftendp ................................ 1-80, 1-158

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-404 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

Abscissa end point of 7th contour element acIwStat .............................................. 1-103

................................................. 1-38, 1-44 acIwTu ................................................ 1-103
Abscissa end point of 8th contour element acJogCoord......................................... 1-103
................................................. 1-38, 1-44 Ackn. by MMC for NCK-preparation
Abscissa end point of 9th contour element command .......................................... 1-33
.......................................................... 1-44 Acknowl. from MMC for command from
Absicssa end point of 9th contour element NCK to MMC..................................... 1-33
.......................................................... 1-38 Acknowledgement counter variable.... 1-112
Absolute axis index .........1-88, 1-91, 1-166, Acknowledgement criteria for an alarm1-69,
................................. 1-181, 1-183, 1-187 1-72
absoluteBlockBufferName.................. 1-132 Acknowledgement criteria of an alarm.. 1-71
absoluteBlockBufferPreview............... 1-132 ackSafeMeasPos .......................1-82, 1-160
absoluteBlockCounter ........................ 1-132 acMarker ............................................. 1-246
acAlarmStat ........................................ 1-101 acMarkerL ........................................... 1-246
acAxCtSwA......................................... 1-101 acMea ................................................. 1-103
Access meas. result trigger event 1 in MCS acMeasActPlane ................................. 1-103
........................................................ 1-156 acMeasChbfr....................................... 1-104
Access meas. result trigger event 1 in WCS acMeasChsfr....................................... 1-104
........................................................ 1-177 acMeasCornerAngle ........................... 1-104
Access meas. result trigger event 2 in MCS acMeasCornerSetangle ...................... 1-104
........................................................ 1-156 acMeasDiameter................................. 1-104
Access meas. result trigger event 2 in WCS acMeasDirApproach ........................... 1-104
........................................................ 1-177 acMeasDNumber ................................ 1-104
Access meas. result trigger event 3 in MCS acMeasFineTrans ............................... 1-104
........................................................ 1-156 acMeasFrameSelect ........................... 1-104
Access meas. result trigger event 3 in WCS acMeasInput ....................................... 1-105
........................................................ 1-177 acMeasLatch....................................... 1-105
Access meas. result trigger event 4 in MCS acMeasNcbfr....................................... 1-105
........................................................ 1-156 acMeasP1Coord ................................. 1-105
Access meas. result trigger event 4 in WCS acMeasP2Coord ................................. 1-105
........................................................ 1-177 acMeasP3Coord ................................. 1-105
Access to data double word ................. 1-50 acMeasP4Coord ................................. 1-105
Access to meas. result 1 in MCS ......... 1-78 acMeasPframe.................................... 1-105
Access to meas. result 2 in MCS ......... 1-78 acMeasResults ................................... 1-105
Access to meas. result 3 in MCS ......... 1-78 acMeasScaleunit................................. 1-105
Access to meas. result 4 in MCS ......... 1-79 acMeasSema ...................................... 1-106
accessLevel.......................................... 1-23 acMeasSetCoord ................................ 1-106
accIndex ............................................... 1-49 acMeasTNumber ................................ 1-106
acConstCutS .........1-87, 1-90, 1-182, 1-186 acMeasToolLength ............................. 1-106
acDelt ................................................. 1-101 acMeasToolMask................................ 1-106
acDtbb ................................................ 1-101 acMeasType ....................................... 1-106
acDtbw................................................ 1-102 acMeasUifr.......................................... 1-106
acDteb ................................................ 1-102 acMeasValid ....................................... 1-107
acDtepb .............................................. 1-102 acMeasWpAngle................................. 1-107
acDtepw.............................................. 1-102 acMeasWpSetangle............................ 1-107
acDtew................................................ 1-102 acOvr .................................................. 1-107
acEsrTrigger ....................................... 1-102 acParam.............................................. 1-246
acFct0................................................. 1-102 acPathn............................................... 1-107
acFct1................................................. 1-102 acPlcOvr ............................................. 1-107
acFct2................................................. 1-102 acPltbb ................................................ 1-107
acFct3................................................. 1-103 acPlteb ................................................ 1-107
acFctll ................................................. 1-103 acProg................................................. 1-108
acFctul ................................................ 1-103 acPRTimeA......................................... 1-108
acFifoN ............................................... 1-246 acPRTimeM ........................................ 1-108
acIpoBuf ............................................. 1-261 acPtpSup ............................................ 1-108

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-405
I Index 03/2006

acRetpoint .......................................... 1-178 Active mode .......................................... 1-97

acSMode ...............1-87, 1-90, 1-182, 1-186 Active no. of the master tool holder .... 1-110
acStat ................................................. 1-108 Active T-number.................................. 1-144
acSynaMem........................................ 1-108 Active tool length 1.............................. 1-111
Act tool base position ......................... 1-151 Active tool length 2.............................. 1-111
actBlock .............................................. 1-132 Active tool length 3.............................. 1-112
actBlockA............................................ 1-132 Active tool radius................................. 1-112
actBlockI ............................................. 1-132 Active toolholder ................................. 1-121
actCouppPosOffset ................... 1-82, 1-160 Active total offset................................. 1-108
actCycleTimeBrut .................... 1-249, 1-261 Active total offset for block search ...... 1-120
actCycleTimeNet ..................... 1-249, 1-261 Active transformation .......................... 1-112
actDistToGoEns ................................. 1-178 actLineNumber.................................... 1-133
actDLNumber ..................................... 1-108 actMasterToolHolderNo...................... 1-110
actDNumber ....................................... 1-108 actOriToolLength1 .............................. 1-110
actDNumberFanuc ............................. 1-108 actOriToolLength2 .............................. 1-110
actDNumberS ..................................... 1-109 actOriToolLength3 .............................. 1-110
actDuploNumber ................................ 1-109 acTotalOvr .......................................... 1-111
actFeedRate ...................1-82, 1-160, 1-178 actParts............................................... 1-111
actFeedRateIpo .................................. 1-109 actProgPos ......................................... 1-174
actFrameIndex.................................... 1-109 actProgPosBKS .................................. 1-178
actGearStage ........1-87, 1-90, 1-182, 1-186 actPunchRate ..................................... 1-147
actHNumberFanuc ............................. 1-109 acTrafo................................................ 1-111
acThreadPitch .................................... 1-109 acTrafoParSet..................................... 1-111
acThreadPitchAct ............................... 1-109 actSpeed............... 1-87, 1-90, 1-182, 1-186
acThreadPitchInc ............................... 1-109 actSpeedRel ..............................1-82, 1-160
acTime................................................ 1-109 actTNumber ........................................ 1-111
acTimec .............................................. 1-110 actTNumberLong ................................ 1-111
acTimer............................................... 1-110 actTNumberS...................................... 1-111
actIncrVal........................1-74, 1-151, 1-174 actToolBasePos............. 1-74, 1-151, 1-174
actIndexAxPosNo...................... 1-82, 1-160 actToolBasePosBasic ......................... 1-178
actInvocCount..................................... 1-136 actToolBasePosBasicDiam ................ 1-179
actIpoType.......................................... 1-110 actToolBasePosDiam ......................... 1-179
actIpoTypeS ....................................... 1-110 actToolBasPosBN............................... 1-179
Activation of ESR ...........1-77, 1-102, 1-154 actToolBasPosBNDiam ...................... 1-179
Activation of punching and nibbling actToolBasPosEN............................... 1-179
functions ........................................... 1-35 actToolBasPosENitc ........................... 1-179
Active channel machine function........ 1-118 actToolBasPosENjmp ......................... 1-179
Active channel-independent basic frames actToolEdgeCenterPos....................... 1-174
.......................................................... 1-52 actToolEdgeCenterPosEns ................ 1-179
Active channel-specific basic frames . 1-114 actToolIdent ........................................ 1-111
Active encoder.................................... 1-165 actToolLength1 ................................... 1-111
Active G function ................................ 1-146 actToolLength2 ................................... 1-111
Active G function (current language).. 1-146 actToolLength3 ................................... 1-112
Active G function (ISO Dialect)........... 1-147 actToolRadius ..................................... 1-112
Active G-function for block search...... 1-147 actToolWide ........................................ 1-202
Active G-function for block search in binary actTransform....................................... 1-112
........................................................ 1-146 Actual gear stage of spindle .......1-87, 1-90,
Active G-function of the correponding group .............................................1-182, 1-186
........................................................ 1-146 Actual lead value position ..........1-77, 1-155
Active immediately after referencing ... 1-39, Actual lead value velocity ..........1-78, 1-155
.......................................................... 1-46 Actual motor wiring ....................1-85, 1-162
Active INC weighting of the axis1-74, 1-151, Actual position difference between 2
1-174 encoders ......................................... 1-167
Active interpolation mode ................... 1-110 Actual position value in relation to WOS
Active interpolation mode search run. 1-110 frame............................................... 1-179

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-406 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

Actual tool base position .................... 1-179 All axes referenced ............................. 1-112
Actual value assignment .................... 1-241 All channels of mode group in Reset .... 1-97
Actual value encoder 1....................... 1-173 allAxesRefActive ................................. 1-112
Actual value encoder 2....................... 1-173 allAxesStopped ................................... 1-112
Actual value in basic coordinate system ...... amSetupState ............................1-83, 1-160
........................................................ 1-178 analogInpVal ......................................... 1-50
Actual value of axis specific feedrate . 1-160 analogOutpVal ...................................... 1-50
Actual value of axis-specific feedrate.. 1-82, anAxCtAS ............................................. 1-50
1-178 anAxCtSwA........................................... 1-51
Actual value of position, encoder 1. ... 1-167 anAxEsrTrigger ..................................... 1-51
Actual value of position, encoder 2 .... 1-167 Angle of rotation alpha1 (in degrees).. 1-225
Actual value of rotary speed..... 1-82, 1-160, Angle of rotation alpha2 (in degrees).. 1-225
............................................ 1-191, 1-193 Angle of rotation for block search edge
Actual value of smoothened current... 1-193 position............................................ 1-122
Actual value of subroutine call counter ........ Angle of rotation for edge position ...... 1-122
............................................. 1-136, 1-138 Angles of axes for toolholders ............ 1-121
Actual value of subroutine call counter. ....... Angular difference between toolholder axes
........................................................ 1-141 ........................................................ 1-121
Actual value of the axis/spindle current in A anTimer................................................. 1-51
............................................... 1-76, 1-153 aPbbIn................................................... 1-51
Actual value of the interpolation feedrate..... aPbbOut................................................ 1-51
........................................................ 1-109 aPbdIn................................................... 1-51
Actual value of the resolution .... 1-83, 1-160 aPbdOut................................................ 1-51
Actual value of the smoothened current....... aPbrIn ................................................... 1-51
........................................................ 1-191 aPbrOut................................................. 1-52
Actual version Dpr .............................. 1-258 aPbwIn .................................................. 1-52
actualCurrent ........................... 1-191, 1-193 aPbwOut ............................................... 1-52
actualSpeed............................. 1-191, 1-193 Approach direction .............................. 1-104
actValResol ............................... 1-83, 1-160 Arc center in relation to WOS frame ... 1-134
acVactB .............................................. 1-112 Arc radius in relation to WOS frame ... 1-134
acVactw .............................................. 1-112 area..................................................... 1-263
acVc.................................................... 1-112 asciiMode............................................ 1-267
adaptData ........................................... 1-222 Assignment [axis]................................ 1-255
Adapter data ....................................... 1-222 Assignment [bus] ................................ 1-256
Adapter number.................................. 1-198 Assignment [client].............................. 1-256
adaptNo .............................................. 1-198 Assignment [master] ........................... 1-256
aDbb ..................................................... 1-49 Assignment [slave].............................. 1-256
aDbd ..................................................... 1-49 Assignment of each channel to mode group
aDbr...................................................... 1-50 .......................................................... 1-23
aDbw .................................................... 1-50 Associated M01 selected.................... 1-129
Add. correction value for path feed or axial aTcAckC ............................................. 1-112
feed........................................ 1-82, 1-159 aTcCmdC............................................ 1-113
Add. path feed correction for synchronous aTcFct ................................................. 1-113
actions ............................................ 1-112 aTcLfn ................................................. 1-113
Added for alignment only.................... 1-181 aTcLfo ................................................. 1-113
Additional info on travel to fixed stop . 1-166 aTcLmyn ............................................. 1-113
aDlb ...................................................... 1-50 aTcLtn ................................................. 1-113
aDld ...................................................... 1-50 aTcLto ................................................. 1-113
aDlr ....................................................... 1-50 aTcMfn ................................................ 1-113
aDlw...................................................... 1-50 aTcMfo ................................................ 1-113
aInco..................................................... 1-50 aTcMmyn ............................................ 1-113
Alarm number (actual alarm)...... 1-69, 1-71, aTcMtn ................................................ 1-113
.......................................................... 1-73 aTcMto ................................................ 1-114
alarmNo ..............................1-69, 1-70, 1-72 aTcStatus............................................ 1-114
aLinkTransRate .................................. 1-112 aTcThno.............................................. 1-114

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-407
I Index 03/2006

aTcTno ............................................... 1-114 Axis veloc. in machine coordinates...... 1-82,

Automatic block division ..................... 1-147 ........................................................ 1-159
automCutSegment ............................. 1-147 Axis veloc. in workpiece coordinates .. 1-178
Available memory DRAM file system no. 1 Axis velocity actual value load side in the
.......................................................... 1-54 MCS ................................................ 1-173
Available memory DRAM file system no. 2 axisActiveInChan ........... 1-83, 1-160, 1-179
.......................................................... 1-54 axisActivInNcu ...................................... 1-52
Available memory SRAM file system ... 1-55 axisFeedRateUnit .......... 1-83, 1-161, 1-179
axComp ..................................... 1-83, 1-160 axisType................................................ 1-23
Axes in exact stop .............................. 1-112
Axial acceleration overr. main run ........ 1-98
Axial acceleration override B
run in............................................... 1-119
Axial dist.-to-go for infeed during oscill. in badMemFfs ........................................... 1-52
WCS ............................................... 1-177 Base position of the active tool ........... 1-178
Axial distance from beginning of block in Base position of the active tool rel. to
the WCS ......................................... 1-177 workpiece........................................ 1-179
Axial distance to the end of block in the Basic system clock cycle .................... 1-240
WCS ............................................... 1-177 basicLengthUnit .................................... 1-23
Axial jerk override basisFrameMask........................1-52, 1-114
run in............................................... 1-119 Baud rate on DP bus (bit/s) ................ 1-251
Axial jerk override main run................ 1-100 BCS setpoint value including override
Axial offsets of an axis............... 1-75, 1-153 components .................................... 1-177
Axial override for synchronous actions 1-79, block.................................................... 1-133
1-157 Block label........................................... 1-136
Axial velocity overr. main run ............. 1-101 Block no. of curr. block, if syn. act. is active
Axial velocity override ........................................................ 1-142
run in............................................... 1-119 Block no. where the syn. act. is
Axis active ................................. 1-83, 1-160 programmed.........................1-142, 1-144
Axis active flag.................................... 1-179 Block number ...........................1-133, 1-136
Axis container rotation.......................... 1-51 Block overview
Axis distance from beginning of the block in function blocks ................................ 4-400
BCS ....................................... 1-76, 1-154 Block search active ............................. 1-118
Axis distance to the end of the block in the Block search waits for partner channel..... 1-
BCS ....................................... 1-76, 1-154 122
Axis dist-to-go of infeed during oscill. in blockLabel........................................... 1-136
BCS ....................................... 1-76, 1-154 blockNoStr ...............................1-133, 1-136
Axis exists.................................. 1-83, 1-161 blockNoStrAct ..........................1-142, 1-144
Axis has been referenced................... 1-169 blockNoStrProg........................1-142, 1-144
Axis identifier of 1st rotary axis........... 1-226 blockType............................................ 1-114
Axis identifier of 2nd rotary axis ......... 1-226 blockTypeInfo...................................... 1-115
Axis info is available ........................... 1-250 Boot. stat. proc. f. DP Master.............. 1-252
Axis is being referenced ..................... 1-168 Broadcast bus address of slave.......... 1-254
Axis name.......................1-74, 1-152, 1-175 Bus address of slave........................... 1-257
Axis name 1........................................ 1-228 Bus configuration data are available... 1-251
Axis name 2........................................ 1-228 Bus number of the slave ..................... 1-254
Axis specification ..................... 1-171, 1-181 Bytes read to the Fifo file .................... 1-267
Axis state ................................. 1-152, 1-175 Bytes transferred to PCMCIA card ..... 1-260
Axis status ........................1-74, 1-80, 1-158 Bytes written to the Fifo file................. 1-267
Axis type .................................. 1-172, 1-182 BZS setpoint value (C) incl. override
Axis type according to $AA_TYP ........ 1-82, components .................................... 1-154
........................................................ 1-159 BZS setpoint value (N) incl. override
Axis types for all machine axes ............ 1-23 components ...................................... 1-77
Axis veloc. in basic coordinates 1-82, 1-159

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-408 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

C cmdAngPos........... 1-87, 1-90, 1-183, 1-187

cmdConstCutSpeed........ 1-88, 1-90, 1-183,
Calculation resolution for angular ....................................................... 1-187
position ............................................... 1-240 cmdContrPos .............................1-83, 1-161
Calculation resolution for linear cmdCouppPosOffset..................1-84, 1-161
positions ............................................. 1-240 cmdDwellTime .................................... 1-116
Cart. PTP travel is supported ............. 1-108 cmdFeedRate ................ 1-84, 1-161, 1-180
Center of the circle ............................. 1-133 cmdFeedRateIpo ................................ 1-116
Center point of a cutting edge ............ 1-174 cmdGearStage...... 1-88, 1-90, 1-183, 1-187
Center point of cutting edge distance-to-go cmdGwps .............. 1-88, 1-91, 1-183, 1-187
........................................................ 1-176 cmdInvocCount ................................... 1-136
Center point of the cutting edge cmdProgPos ....................................... 1-174
REPOS ............................................... 1-176 cmdSpeed............. 1-88, 1-91, 1-183, 1-187
Chaining 1 of the magazine to following cmdSpeedRel ............................1-84, 1-161
magazine ........................................ 1-207 cmdToolBasePos........... 1-74, 1-151, 1-175
Chaining 2 of the magazine to previous cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEns. 1-134
magazine ........................................ 1-208 cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleCenterEnsS .......
Chaining rule ...................................... 1-203 ........................................................ 1-134
chanAlarm .......................................... 1-115 cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEns 1-134
chanAssignment ................................... 1-23 cmdToolEdgeCenterCircleRadiusEnsS.......
chanAxisNoGap..............1-83, 1-116, 1-161 ........................................................ 1-134
Change counter of the tool data in a cmdToolEdgeCenterPos..................... 1-175
channel ........................................... 1-126 cmdToolEdgeCenterPosEnsS ............ 1-180
changeAxConfCounter ....................... 1-116 cmdTrafoParSetS ............................... 1-116
Channel basic frame screen form ...... 1-104 cmdTrafoS .......................................... 1-116
Channel name ............................. 1-32, 1-98 CNC system language.......................... 1-24
Channel number of axis ............ 1-83, 1-161 Code number of the active
Channel number of spindle ........ 1-87, 1-90, transformation ..................................... 1-111
............................................. 1-182, 1-187 col........................................................ 1-263
Channel status (1=active) .................. 1-116 Command counter variable................. 1-113
Channel status according to Command for magazine execution .... 1-204,
$AC_STAT ......................................... 1-108 ....................................................... 1-207
channelName ....................................... 1-32 Command from NCK to MMC............... 1-33
channelNo .............1-87, 1-90, 1-182, 1-187 Command from NCK-preparation to the
Channel-specific setting for tool MMC ................................................. 1-33
management..................................... 1-32 Command number .............................. 1-113
chanNoAxisIsActive................... 1-83, 1-161 Command parameter 1 of the
chanStatus.......................................... 1-116 magazine ............................................ 1-207
Characteristics of total offsets in NCK.. 1-24 Command parameter 2 of the
cIn....................................................... 1-116 magazine ............................................ 1-207
circleCenter ........................................ 1-133 Command state of the magazine........ 1-204
circleCenterS ...................................... 1-133 Command status................................. 1-114
circlePlane .......................................... 1-133 Command status of the magazine ...... 1-207
circlePlaneS........................................ 1-133 Command word SPL-KDV .................... 1-64
circleRadius ........................................ 1-133 Compensation parameters for SUG ... 1-203
circleRadius for block search. ............ 1-134 Compensation value upper limit $AA_OFF
circleRadiusS...................................... 1-134 with clear......................................... 1-243
circleTurn............................................ 1-134 Comperator input NC ............................ 1-50
circleTurnS ......................................... 1-134 completeDocAcxChangeCnt................. 1-52
cl1PoImage.............................. 1-191, 1-193 completeDotAcxChangeCnt ................. 1-53
cl1ResImage............................ 1-191, 1-193 completeDpcAcxChangeCnt................. 1-53
clearInfo..............................1-69, 1-71, 1-72 compressAbility................................... 1-249
Client information is available............. 1-253 Compressed data transfer .................. 1-249
Client status incl. output release ........ 1-253 Configurable messages ...................... 1-164
Cmd tool base position....................... 1-151 Confirmation of SI actual position ........ 1-82,

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-409
I Index 03/2006

....................................................... 1-160 Corresponds to circleRadiusWos ....... 1-134

conntectPar ........................................ 1-203 countActivated .................................... 1-267
Constant cutting speed of the master Counter for motion synchronous actions 32
spindle ...............1-88, 1-90, 1-183, 1-187 bit .................................................... 1-246
Container actual address ..................... 1-50 Counter for NC start signal ................. 1-119
Contour deviation ............................... 1-172 Counter for NC-start key..................... 1-118
Contour type of 10th contour element. 1-41, Counter for rejected NC starts ............ 1-123
1-47 Counter incremented with each call of
Contour type of 1st contour element ... 1-40, EXTCALL .......................................... 1-55
......................................................... 1-46 Counter indicating changes of axes
Contour type of 2nd contour element 1-40, configuration ................................... 1-116
1-46 Counter indicating that a new LUD ACC is
Contour type of 3rd contour element... 1-40, available.......................................... 1-118
......................................................... 1-46 cOut .................................................... 1-117
Contour type of 4th contour element... 1-40, CRC diagnostic parameter ................. 1-193
......................................................... 1-46 CRC errors on the drive bus ......1-86, 1-164
Contour type of 5th contour element... 1-40, crcErrorCount...........................1-191, 1-193
.......................................................... 1-47 CRC-parameter for diagnosis ............. 1-191
Contour type of 6th contour element... 1-40, Cumulative value of superimposition in the
.......................................................... 1-47 tool di .............................................. 1-178
Contour type of 7th contour element... 1-40, Curr. safety actual value difference NCK -
......................................................... 1-47 drive ................................................ 1-170
Contour type of 8th contour element... 1-41, Curr. safety speed difference
.......................................................... 1-47 NCK - drive ......................................... 1-170
Contour type of 9th contour element... 1-41, Curr. stat. of DP M bus - DP M contr. . 1-252
.......................................................... 1-47 Current access time to bus ................. 1-252
contrConfirmActive .................... 1-84, 1-161 Current application.............................. 1-269
contrMode.................................. 1-84, 1-162 Current block (DISPLOF active) ......... 1-132
Control mode of drive ................ 1-85, 1-162 Current block (DISPLOF inactive) ...... 1-132
Controller enable ....................... 1-84, 1-161 Current channel .................................. 1-269
Controller mode servo ............... 1-84, 1-162 Current const. cutting rate1-87, 1-90, 1-182,
Coordinate system ............................. 1-269 1-186
Coordinate system manual travel....... 1-103 Current coupling state of the slave spindle
Coordinate system of the 1st measuring ...............................................1-76, 1-153
point................................................ 1-105 Current gross cycle time ..................... 1-261
Coordinate system of the 2nd measuring Current indexing position ...........1-75, 1-153
point................................................ 1-105 Current indexing position number........ 1-82,
Coordinate system of the 3rd measuring ........................................................ 1-160
point................................................ 1-105 Current interpreter block ..................... 1-132
Coordinate system of the 4th measuring Current lead .............................1-109, 1-125
point................................................ 1-105 Current lead change ........................... 1-109
Coordinate system of the set point..... 1-106 Current lead during search run ........... 1-125
Corner cutting angle ........................... 1-104 Current location........................1-199, 1-213
corr. to actTNumber for block search Current magazine ....................1-198, 1-213
without calc..................................... 1-111 Current magazine position.................. 1-206
Corr. to circleCenter for block search with Current master value .................1-77, 1-155
calc. ................................................ 1-133 Current module name for step editor .. 1-135
corrBlActive ........................................ 1-116 Current net cycle time ......................... 1-261
Corresp. to actNumber for block search Current operating mode MMC ............ 1-269
with calc.......................................... 1-109 Current physical unit ............................. 1-74
corresponds to $$actToolBasPosEN Current physical unit of axis................ 1-175
Mode=0 .......................................... 1-179 Current physical unit of the axis position .....
corresponds to $$actToolBasPosEN ........................................................ 1-151
Mode=1 .......................................... 1-179 Current position of channel axes ........ 1-103
Corresponds to circleCenterWos ....... 1-134 Current position of machine................ 1-103

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-410 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

Current reverse position 1 for oscill. in the feedrate............................................... 1-116

BCS ....................................... 1-79, 1-157 desiredSpeed...........................1-191, 1-193
Current reverse position 2 for oscill. in the diagnoseDataFfs................................... 1-53
BCS ....................................... 1-79, 1-157 Diameter ............................................. 1-104
Current speed limitation for spindle..... 1-89, diamonInfo .......................................... 1-180
....................................1-91, 1-184, 1-188 Difference value main run to run in of
Current state reached during the boot $AA_TOFF[ ]................................... 1-178
process ........................................... 1-164 Digital drive type ................................... 1-54
Current status of the master-slave coupling digitInpVal ............................................. 1-53
............................................... 1-78, 1-156 digitOutpVal .......................................... 1-53
Current stroke number ....................... 1-148 Dimension of the magazine ................ 1-207
Current tool holder data...................... 1-127 Direct encoder used............................ 1-191
Current width of the grinding wheel.... 1-202 direction .............................................. 1-117
cuttEdgeNo......................................... 1-224 Display of active alarms .............1-75, 1-153
cuttEdgeParam........................ 1-196, 1-235 Display of active axis ............................ 1-52
cuttingTime ......................................... 1-262 Display of existing axes. ..................... 1-116
Cycles between bus access errors type 1.... Display state for block display ............ 1-137
........................................................ 1-252 Display traversing blocks .................... 1-129
Cycles between bus access errors type 2.... displayAxis ..................... 1-84, 1-162, 1-180
........................................................ 1-252 displayState ........................................ 1-137
cycleTime ........................................... 1-262 Dist.-to-go of infeed during oscill. in the
cycServRestricted .............................. 1-117 WCS................................................ 1-102
Distance from beginning of the block in the
BCS................................................. 1-101
D Distance from the beginning of block in the
WCS................................................ 1-102
Dadr.................................................... 1-142 Distance per revolution ..............1-84, 1-162
data..................................................... 1-201 Distance to change position................ 1-211
Data byte from/to the PLC.................... 1-49 Distance to the end of the block in the BCS
Data byte in link area............................ 1-50 ........................................................ 1-102
Data double word (32 bits) from/to the PLC Distance to the end of the block in the WCS
.......................................................... 1-49 ........................................................ 1-102
Data exchange time in [s,s,userdef]... 1-251 Distance-to-go in the SZS................... 1-178
Data for measurement........................ 1-105 Distance-to-go of infeed during oscill. in the
Data logging format ............................ 1-267 BCS................................................. 1-102
Data version ............................ 1-192, 1-194 distPerDriveRevol ......................1-84, 1-162
Data word (16 bits) from/to the PLC..... 1-50 Disturbing torque/max. torque (motor end)
Data word in link area........................... 1-50 ........................................................ 1-173
dataListIndex ...................................... 1-267 DNo ..................................................... 1-224
dataProtok .......................................... 1-267 D-number .................................1-142, 1-224
dataUploaded ..................................... 1-267 Double value of the auxiliary function . 1-150
DC-link voltage ................................... 1-194 DP cycle time in [s,s,userdef] ............. 1-251
delayFSt ............................................. 1-117 DP system configuration data are
Des. status of DP M bus - HOST req. 1-253 valid..................................................... 1-258
Desired parameter set of the dp611USpecAccChangeCnt............... 1-249
drive........................................... 1-85, 1-163 dp611USpecAccKey........................... 1-249
Desired torque value in Nm....... 1-81, 1-158 dp611USpecAccMask ........................ 1-250
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate1-180 dp611USpecAccPath.......................... 1-250
Desired value of axis-specific feedrate, DPA/DPM available ............................ 1-258
........................................................ 1-161 dpAxisCfgMachAxisNr ........................ 1-250
Desired value of position after fine dpAxisCfgNumAxes ............................ 1-250
interpolation ........................... 1-83, 1-161 dpAxisCfgValid.................................... 1-250
Desired value of rotary speed ............ 1-191 dpAxisStateCtrlout .............................. 1-250
Desired value of rotary speed. ........... 1-161 dpAxisStateEnc1................................. 1-250
Desired value of the interpolation dpAxisStateEnc2................................. 1-250

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-411
I Index 03/2006

dpAxisStateLifeCntErrCtrlout ............. 1-251 DpSync ............................................... 1-255

dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc1................ 1-251 dpSysCfgAvailable.............................. 1-258
dpAxisStateLifeCntErrEnc2................ 1-251 dpSysCfgNumMaster.......................... 1-258
dpBusCfgBaudrate ............................. 1-251 dpSysCfgValid .................................... 1-258
dpBusCfgCycleTime........................... 1-251 dpSysCfgVersionDpm ........................ 1-258
dpBusCfgDataExTime........................ 1-251 dpSysCfgVersionDpr .......................... 1-258
dpBusCfgNumBuses .......................... 1-251 dpSysCfgVersionDprEx ...................... 1-258
dpBusCfgValid.................................... 1-251 dpSysCfgVersionHost......................... 1-258
dpBusStateAccessDurationAct .......... 1-252 dpSysStateDpmInit ............................. 1-258
dpBusStateAccessDurationMax......... 1-252 DRF active .......................................... 1-129
dpBusStateAccessDurationMin.......... 1-252 DRF value ........................................... 1-180
dpBusStateAccessErrCnt1................. 1-252 DRFActive........................................... 1-129
dpBusStateAccessErrCnt2................. 1-252 drfVal................................................... 1-180
dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr1..... 1-252 Drive assignment (driveIndex) ...1-86, 1-163
dpBusStateAvgCycleBetweenErr2..... 1-252 Drive assignment (logDriveNo)........... 1-167
dpBusStateCycleCnt .......................... 1-252 Drive error code for alarm 300911..... 1-192,
dpBusStateDpmAction ....................... 1-252 ....................................................... 1-194
dpBusStateDpmActual ....................... 1-252 Drive load in % (611D only) .......1-78, 1-156
dpBusStateDpmCtrl............................ 1-252 Drive power in W (611D only)....1-80, 1-157
dpBusStateDpmError ......................... 1-253 Drive ready.......................................... 1-164
dpBusStateDpmPrjCnt ....................... 1-253 Drive switched on.......................1-86, 1-164
dpBusStateDpmRequest.................... 1-253 Drive type............................................ 1-240
dpBusStateNumActiveSlaves............. 1-253 drive2ndTorqueLimit ..................1-84, 1-162
dpClientCfgId...................................... 1-253 driveActMotorSwitch ..................1-85, 1-162
dpClientCfgNumClnt........................... 1-253 driveActParamSet ......................1-85, 1-162
dpClientCfgValid................................. 1-253 driveClass1Alarm.......................1-85, 1-162
dpClientStateComm ........................... 1-253 driveContrMode .........................1-85, 1-162
dpSlaveCfgAssignBus........................ 1-254 driveCoolerTempWarn...............1-85, 1-163
dpSlaveCfgBusAddr ........................... 1-254 driveDesMotorSwitch .................1-85, 1-163
dpSlaveCfgInputTime......................... 1-254 driveDesParamSet.....................1-85, 1-163
dpSlaveCfgMasterAppCycTime ......... 1-254 driveFastStop.............................1-85, 1-163
dpSlaveCfgNumSlaves ...................... 1-254 driveFreqMode...........................1-85, 1-163
dpSlaveCfgOutputTime ...................... 1-254 driveImpulseEnabled .................1-86, 1-163
dpSlaveCfgValid ................................. 1-254 driveIndex ..................................1-86, 1-163
dpSlaveIdentNo .................................. 1-255 driveIntegDisable .......................1-86, 1-163
dpSlaveIdentNoEx.............................. 1-255 driveLinkVoltageOk....................1-86, 1-163
dpSlaveStateComm ........................... 1-255 driveLoad .............. 1-88, 1-91, 1-183, 1-187
dpSlaveStateIncCnt............................ 1-255 driveMotorTempWarn ................1-86, 1-164
dpSlaveStateSync .............................. 1-255 driveNumCrcErrors ....................1-86, 1-164
dpSlotCfgAssignAxis .......................... 1-255 driveParked................................1-86, 1-164
dpSlotCfgAssignBus........................... 1-256 drivePowerOn ............................1-86, 1-164
dpSlotCfgAssignClient........................ 1-256 driveProgMessages ............................ 1-164
dpSlotCfgAssignMaster...................... 1-256 driveReady.......................................... 1-164
dpSlotCfgAssignSlave........................ 1-256 driveRunLevel ..................................... 1-164
dpSlotCfgIoType................................. 1-256 driveSetupMode.................................. 1-165
dpSlotCfgLength................................. 1-256 driveSpeedSmoothing ........................ 1-165
dpSlotCfgLogBaseAddress ................ 1-256 driveType .............................................. 1-54
dpSlotCfgNumSlots ............................ 1-257 driveTypeChangeCnt ............................ 1-54
dpSlotCfgSlaveAddress ..................... 1-257 Dry run feedrate .......................1-131, 1-243
dpSlotCfgSlotNr.................................. 1-257 dummy ................................................ 1-181
dpSlotCfgValid.................................... 1-257 Duplo number .............. 1-198, 1-213, 1-224
dpSlotStateComm .............................. 1-257 Duplo number of active tool ................ 1-109
dpSlotStateRecvTelegram ................. 1-257 Duplo number of programmed tool).... 1-120
dpSlotStateSendTelegram ................. 1-257 duploNo....................................1-198, 1-224
dpSlotStateTelegramType.................. 1-257 Dval ..................................................... 1-143

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-412 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

Dwell time unit .................................... 1-126 Expected Dpr version from

Dynamic parameters for synchronous DPR_SS_VERSION ....................... 1-258
actions ............................................ 1-246 Extended ID no. of the slave............... 1-255
extension............................................. 1-150
Extension of the auxiliary function ...... 1-150
E External execution .............................. 1-137
External NCK input of SI prog. log. from
Eadr .................................................... 1-143 NCK peri. .......................................... 1-62
Edge number ...................................... 1-224 External NCK output of SI prog. log. to NCK
Edge offset value (edgeData)............. 1-197 per..................................................... 1-62
Edge offset value parameter External PLC input of SI prog. log. from
(cuttEdgeParam) ............................ 1-196 PLC peri. ........................................... 1-62
edgeData ......................1-197, 1-202, 1-235 External PLC output of the SI
edgeECData ....................................... 1-231 progr. logic ............................................ 1-62
edgeSCData ............................ 1-233, 1-234 externCncSystem.................................. 1-24
effComp1 ............................................ 1-165 extProgActive...................................... 1-117
effComp2 ............................................ 1-165 extProgBufferName ............................ 1-137
EG axis number master axis ................ 1-99 extProgFlag......................................... 1-137
EG block change criterion .................. 1-119 extraCuttEdgeParams .......................... 1-24
EG denominator link factor................... 1-99 extUnit............................ 1-74, 1-151, 1-175
EG link active........................................ 1-98
EG link type .......................................... 1-99
EG number of master axes .................. 1-99 F
EG numerator link factor ...................... 1-99
EG synchronism deviation.................. 1-128 fctGenState ......................................... 1-165
EG synchronous position of Feed disable ....................................... 1-129
master axis ........................................... 1-99 Feed forward control factor torque...... 1-167
EG synchronous position of slave axis 1-99 Feed forward control factor velocity.... 1-167
Empty location search strategy during tool Feed forward control mode................. 1-167
change............................................ 1-208 Feedrate override.....................1-165, 1-181
Enable inverter impulse............. 1-86, 1-163 feedRateIpoOvr................................... 1-117
encChoice........................................... 1-165 feedRateIpoUnit .................................. 1-117
Encoder master value ........................ 1-173 feedRateOvr.............................1-165, 1-181
encTypeDirect ......................... 1-191, 1-193 feedStopActive.................................... 1-129
encTypeMotor.......................... 1-191, 1-194 FFS diagnostic data .............................. 1-53
errCodeSetNrGen .............................. 1-259 FFS free memory .................................. 1-55
errCodeSetNrPi .................................. 1-259 FFS memory defect .............................. 1-52
Error code set for communication FFS net size.......................................... 1-56
errors ................................................. 1-259 FFS total size ........................................ 1-66
Error code set P1 for comm. errors .... 1-259 FFS used memory ................................ 1-67
Error on status transitions .................. 1-253 FIFO buffer for execution from external
Error SPL-KDV ..................................... 1-65 source ............................................. 1-137
ESR alarm status ............................... 1-101 FIFO variable for synchronous actions1-246
ESR axis enable ........................ 1-76, 1-154 Fill level of the IPO buffer (integer value in
ESR axis status ......................... 1-77, 1-154 %).................................................... 1-262
ESR start signal.................................... 1-51 Fill-level display SPL-KDV .................... 1-65
Estimation of program runtime - fillText1............................... 1-69, 1-71, 1-73
downtime ............................................ 1-108 fillText2............................... 1-69, 1-71, 1-73
Estimation of program runtime - machining fillText3............................... 1-69, 1-71, 1-73
time................................................. 1-108 fillText4............................... 1-69, 1-71, 1-73
Eval..................................................... 1-143 findBlActive ......................................... 1-118
Event state.......................................... 1-267 Fine offset ................................1-104, 1-149
eventActive ......................................... 1-267 Fine offset l1 X .................................... 1-229
eventActiveStatus............................... 1-267 Fine offset l1 Y .................................... 1-229
Existing TO edge parameters............... 1-24 Fine offset l1 Z .................................... 1-229

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-413
I Index 03/2006

Fine offset l2 X.................................... 1-229 Global basic unit ................................... 1-23

Fine offset l2 Y.................................... 1-229 Global uplaoad starting point for ACC
Fine offset l2 Z.................................... 1-229 entries ............................................... 1-49
Fine offset l3 X.................................... 1-229 GroupID ................................................ 1-48
Fine offset l3 Y.................................... 1-229 Gruppe .........................................1-49, 1-96
Fine offset l3 Z.................................... 1-229 Gruppe_NUM...............................1-49, 1-96
Fine offset l4 X.................................... 1-229 gwpsActive............ 1-88, 1-91, 1-183, 1-187
Fine offset l4 Y.................................... 1-230
Fine offset l4 Z.................................... 1-230
Fine offset of offset of rotary axis v1 .. 1-230 H
Fine offset of offset of rotary axis v2 .. 1-230
Fine offset with frames 1-94, 1-95, 1-148, 1- Hadr .................................................... 1-143
185 handwheelAss..........................1-166, 1-181
Firmware date.......................... 1-191, 1-194 Heatsink temperature monitoring......... 1-85,
Firmware version ..................... 1-192, 1-194 ........................................................ 1-163
firmwareDate ........................... 1-191, 1-194 Host SW version ................................. 1-258
firmwareVersion....................... 1-192, 1-194 Hval ..................................................... 1-143
Flag for acceptance test phase .......... 1-169 hwMLFB................................................ 1-55
Flag for acceptance test status .......... 1-169 hwProductSerialNr ................................ 1-55
Flag for NCK-side acceptance test hwProductSerialNrL .............................. 1-55
phase................................................. 1-169
Flag for NCK-side SE acceptance test1-169 I
Flag variable for synchronous actions 1-246
focStat ................................................ 1-165 I/F mode.....................................1-85, 1-163
Following error.................................... 1-166 I/O identifier......................................... 1-256
For active tech.cycle id 1-143, 1-145
block no. of current action .............. 1-144 ID of the synchronous action ...1-143, 1-145
forward..................................... 1-138, 1-141 Ident number of the slave ................... 1-255
Frame selection .................................. 1-104 Identification client NCK/PLC/3RD ..... 1-253
Free memory for synchronous actions1-108 Identifier .............................................. 1-228
Free memory in bytes........................... 1-54 Identifier for geometry/auxiliary axis ... 1-180
Free SRAM in bytes ............................. 1-54 Identifier of active tool ......................... 1-111
freeDirectorys ....................................... 1-54 Identifier of the magazine .......1-204, 1-206,
freeFiles................................................ 1-54 ........................................................ 1-207
freeMem ............................................... 1-54 Identifier programmed tool.................. 1-120
freeMemDram....................................... 1-54 Identifies splitted blocks...................... 1-123
freeMemDram2PassF .......................... 1-54 Image of external NCK inputs of SI progr.
freeMemDramPassF ............................ 1-54 logic................................................... 1-62
freeMemFfs .......................................... 1-55 Image of int. NCK inputs of SI
freeMemSramPassF ............................ 1-55 progr. logic ............................................ 1-63
freeProtokolFiles................................... 1-55 Image of int. NCK outputs of the SI
Function................................................ 1-48 progr. logic ............................................ 1-63
fxsInfo ................................................. 1-166 Image of int. PLC inputs of the SI progr.
fxsStat................................................. 1-166 logic................................................... 1-63
Image of int. PLC outputs of the SI progr.
G logic................................................... 1-63
Image of the external NCK outputs of SI
G00 prog. log. ........................................... 1-62
Path axes traverse as pos. axes .... 1-118 Image of the external PLC inputs of SI
G0Mode.............................................. 1-118 progr. log........................................... 1-62
General result value ........................... 1-268 Image of the external PLC outputs of SI
geoAxisNr ........................................... 1-181 prog. log. ........................................... 1-62
Geometry or auxiliary axis.................. 1-175 Image of the PLC flag-variable for SI prog.
Global basic frame screen form ......... 1-105 logic................................................... 1-64
Image of the ZK1PO register. ............. 1-191

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-414 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

Image of the ZK1RES register ........... 1-191 Kinematic type .................................... 1-226
Impulse enable for drive ..................... 1-166 kVFactor.............................................. 1-166
impulseEnable .................................... 1-166
IN data byte .......................................... 1-51
IN data double word ............................. 1-51 L
IN data word ......................................... 1-52
IN Real data.......................................... 1-51 lag ....................................................... 1-166
Incarnation counter............................. 1-255 Last assigned T-number for tool
inclAngle ............................................. 1-203 management ................................... 1-213
Inclination angle of inclined grinding wheel Last programmed block number ........ 1-135,
........................................................ 1-203 ........................................................ 1-137
Incorrect block occurred ..................... 1-116 lastBlockNoStr .........................1-135, 1-137
Increment Hirth tooth system 1st axis 1-227 Latched probe position in the MCS...... 1-78,
Increment Hirth tooth system 2nd axis1-227 ........................................................ 1-156
index1-88, 1-91, 1-166, 1-181, 1-183, 1-187 Latched probe position retransformed in the
Index act. G function WCS................................................ 1-177
(current language) .............................. 1-146 Length in number of bytes .................. 1-256
Index of active G function Length of FFS ..................................... 1-260
(ISO Dialect) ....................................... 1-146 Length of the path between punches.. 1-147
Index of data list ................................. 1-267 Level of access rights ........................... 1-23
Index of the active set frame .............. 1-109 Level of IPO buffer .............................. 1-261
Indexing number................................. 1-168 licenseStatus......................................... 1-55
Indic. for operating progr. of DP M ..... 1-252 Licensing status .................................... 1-55
Indirect encoder used......................... 1-191 Limit for axial correction $AA_OFF reached
Info about available ACC contents..... 1-249 ...............................................1-79, 1-156
Information on block type ................... 1-115 Limitation of protection zone applicate 1-41,
Instruction group................................... 1-96 1-47
Instruction group (Function) ................. 1-48 Limiting value achieved via
Instruction group (Gruppe) ................... 1-49 $AA_TOFF[ ]....................................... 1-178
Integrator disable....................... 1-86, 1-163 Line enabled for modification...1-135, 1-137
Internal NCK input of SI progr. logic..... 1-63 Line number of current NC instruction (start
internal NCK output of the SI 1) 1-133
progr. logic............................................ 1-63 Link transfer rate ................................. 1-112
Internal PLC input of SI progr. logic ..... 1-63 Link voltage......................................... 1-192
Internal PLC output of SI progr. logic ... 1-63 linkVoltage ...............................1-192, 1-194
Internal T number ............................... 1-225 linShift .........1-93, 1-94, 1-95, 1-148, 1-149,
Interpolation feedrate, override .......... 1-117 ................................ 1-185, 1-189, 1-190
Interpolation feedrate, units................ 1-117 linShiftFine .1-94, 1-95, 1-148, 1-149, 1-185
invocCount............................... 1-138, 1-141 load ..........................................1-192, 1-194
ipoBlocksOnly..................................... 1-129 Load ...........1-88, 1-91, 1-183, 1-187, 1-192
ipoBufLevel......................................... 1-262 Location .............................................. 1-224
isDriveUsed ........................................ 1-166 Location number of the new tool......... 1-113
Location-dependent setup offset ........ 1-231
Location-dependent wear offset ......... 1-233
J Log
Automatic Configuration Save .......... 1-57
JOG at revolutional feedrate .............. 1-242 Config. File Save/Load Error Status . 1-57
Jog mode............................................ 1-242 Configuration File Control ................. 1-57
JOG velocity for G94 .......................... 1-242 Configuration File Name ................... 1-57
JOG velocity for G95 .......................... 1-242 Load trace session during NCK start-up
JOG velocity for master spindle ......... 1-242 ...................................................... 1-57
Session descr. loaded at NCK
start-up.............................................. 1-57
K Log file name ...................................... 1-268
Log.
kindOfSumcorr...................................... 1-24

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-415
I Index 03/2006

Start value integer 16 bit .................. 1-59 Logical drive number........................... 1-240
Log. basic address of slot................... 1-256 Long value of the auxiliary function .... 1-151
logDriveNo.......................................... 1-167 Lower limit nth polynominal for synchronous
Logging action ..............................................1-103
Access rights of the session............. 1-61 Lower limit of protection zone,
Active users .................................... 1-121 applicate.......................................1-39, 1-46
Comments on session...................... 1-61 ludAccCounter .................................... 1-118
Connection of the session ................ 1-61
Delay after trigger............................. 1-60
Delay of start trigger ......................... 1-58 M
Disable of a user .............................. 1-67
End actions....................................... 1-67 M01 selected....................................... 1-129
Last user run time............................. 1-57 machFunc ........................................... 1-118
Max. no. of files ................................ 1-66 Machine axis !!CAUTION NCU LINK!! 1-250
Max. user run time............................ 1-58 Machine axis has control over the
Name of the session......................... 1-61 drive .................................................... 1-166
No. OEM data lists ........................... 1-57 Machine axis identifier ...............1-84, 1-162
No. of files created ........................... 1-68 Machine axis name ............................. 1-241
No. std. data lists .............................. 1-56 Madr.................................................... 1-143
Number of comparisons ................... 1-60 magActPlace....................................... 1-206
Number of start comparisons ........... 1-58 Magazine ............................................ 1-224
OEM event types............................ 1-119 Magazine location data....................... 1-210
Priority of the session ....................... 1-62 Magazine location hierarchy ............... 1-212
Remaining number of comparisons . 1-60 Magazine location type ....................... 1-199
Remaining number of start comparisons Magazine location user data for a tool
...................................................... 1-58 magazine ........................................ 1-222
res. no. free files ............................... 1-55 Magazine of the new tool.................... 1-113
Standard event types ..................... 1-119 Magazine user data for a tool
Start screen form integer 16 bit ........ 1-58 magazine ............................................ 1-221
Start screen form integer 32 bit ........ 1-58 magBLMag.......................................... 1-204
Start value integer 32 bit .................. 1-59 magCBCmd ........................................ 1-204
Start value real 32 bit ....................... 1-59 magCBCmdState ................................ 1-204
Start value real 64 bit ....................... 1-59 magCBIdent ........................................ 1-204
Start variable magCMCmdPar1 ................................ 1-204
Col.................................................. 1-59 magCMCmdPar2 ................................ 1-204
Row ................................................ 1-59 magCmd ............................................. 1-207
Type ............................................... 1-59 magCmdPar1...................................... 1-207
Unit................................................. 1-59 magCmdPar2...................................... 1-207
Status of start triggering ................... 1-58 magCmdState ..................................... 1-207
Trigger mask integer 16-bit .............. 1-59 magDim............................................... 1-207
Trigger mask integer 32-bit .............. 1-59 magIdent ............................................. 1-207
Trigger value integer 16-bit .............. 1-60 magKind.............................................. 1-207
Trigger value integer 32-bit .............. 1-60 magLink1 ............................................ 1-207
Trigger value real 32-bit ................... 1-60 magLink2 ............................................ 1-208
Trigger value real 64-bit ................... 1-61 magLocSearchStrat ............................ 1-208
Trigger variable magNo ................................................ 1-208
Area................................................ 1-61 magNrPlaces ...................................... 1-208
Col.................................................. 1-61 magRPlaces........................................ 1-205
Row ................................................ 1-61 magSearch.......................................... 1-205
Type ............................................... 1-61 magState............................................. 1-208
Unit................................................. 1-61 magToolSearchStrat ........................... 1-208
Triggering method ............................ 1-60 magVIdent........................................... 1-206
Triggering status............................... 1-60 magVNo .............................................. 1-206
Type of start triggering ..................... 1-58 magVPlaces........................................ 1-205
User status ....................................... 1-66 magWearCompoundNo ...................... 1-208

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-416 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

magZWMag ........................................ 1-205 Maximum value D number.................... 1-25

markActiveList .................................... 1-118 maxNetFileLengthTooSmall ............... 1-268
maskToolManagement................ 1-25, 1-32 maxNumAdapter ................................... 1-25
Master tool holder for cutting edge selection maxnumAlarms ..................................... 1-25
........................................................ 1-120 maxnumChannels ................................. 1-25
Max. no of data per data list for trace maxnumContainer................................. 1-25
protocol............................................. 1-26 maxnumContainerSlots ........................ 1-26
Max. No. avail. tool adapt. data sets .... 1-25 maxnumCuttEdges_Tool ...................... 1-26
Max. no. of data per data list for trace maxnumDrives ...................................... 1-26
protocol............................................. 1-26 maxnumEdgeSC................................... 1-26
Max. no. of event types for trace maxnumEventTypes ............................. 1-26
protocolling ....................................... 1-26 maxnumGlobMachAxes........................ 1-26
Max. number edges per tool................. 1-26 maxNumSumcorr .................................. 1-26
Max. number of directories which may be maxnumTraceProtData......................... 1-26
created.............................................. 1-66 maxnumTraceProtDataList ................... 1-26
Max. number of files which may be created maxRotSpeed ..................................... 1-203
.......................................................... 1-66 maxTipSpeed...................................... 1-203
Max. number total offsets per edge...... 1-26 MDB_JOG_CONT_MODE_LEVELTRIGGR
Max. safety speed difference D...................................................... 1-242
NCK - drive ......................................... 1-170 MDB_JOG_REV_IS_ACTIVE............. 1-242
maxCuttingEdgeNo .............................. 1-25 MDB_WORKAREA_MINUS_ENABLE1-243
maxCycleTimeBrut .................. 1-259, 1-262 MDB_WORKAREA_PLUS_ENABLE . 1-243
maxCycleTimeNet ................... 1-259, 1-262 MDBA_DRIVE_IS_ACTIVE ................ 1-240
maxElementsFastFifoUsed ................ 1-267 MDCA_CTRLOUT_MODULE_NR...... 1-241
maxFileLength .................................... 1-268 MDCA_CTRLOUT_TYPE................... 1-241
maxGrossFileLengthUsed.................. 1-268 MDCA_DRIVE_LOGIC_NR................ 1-240
Maximum number of magazine MDCA_DRIVE_MODULE_TYPE ....... 1-240
locations ............................................... 1-30 MDCA_DRIVE_TYPE ......................... 1-240
Maximum access time to bus ............. 1-252 MDCA_ENC_MODULE_NR ............... 1-241
Maximum Fifo buffer fill level reached 1-267 MDCA_ENC_TYPE ............................ 1-241
Maximum gross cycle time ................. 1-262 MDD_DRY_RUN_FEED..................... 1-243
Maximum length of log file.................. 1-268 MDD_INT_INCR_PER_DEG.............. 1-240
Maximum log file size ......................... 1-268 MDD_INT_INCR_PER_MM................ 1-240
Maximum net cycle time..................... 1-262 MDD_JOG_REV_SET_VELO ............ 1-242
Maximum number of available MDD_JOG_SET_VELO...................... 1-242
channels ............................................... 1-25 MDD_JOG_SPIND_SET_VELO......... 1-242
Maximum number of available drives... 1-26 MDD_JOG_VAR_INCR_SIZE ............ 1-242
Maximum number of available machine MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_0.............1-36, 1-42
axes .................................................. 1-26 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_1.............1-36, 1-42
Maximum number of axis containers ... 1-25 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_2.............1-36, 1-42
Maximum number of files per directory 1-56 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_3.............1-36, 1-42
Maximum number of handwheels ........ 1-29 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_4.............1-36, 1-42
Maximum number of magazines .......... 1-30 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_5.............1-36, 1-42
Maximum number of protection zones . 1-34 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_6.............1-36, 1-42
Maximum number of slots per axis MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_7.............1-36, 1-43
container........................................... 1-26 MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_8.............1-36, 1-43
Maximum number of subdirectories per MDD_PA_CENT_ABS_9.............1-36, 1-43
directory............................................ 1-56 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_0 ............1-36, 1-43
Maximum peripheral speed of the grinding MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_1 ............1-37, 1-43
wheel .............................................. 1-203 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_2 ............1-37, 1-43
Maximum position of 1st rotary axis ... 1-227 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_3 ............1-37, 1-43
Maximum position of 2nd rotary axis.. 1-227 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_4 ............1-37, 1-43
Maximum rotary speed of the grinding MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_5 ............1-37, 1-43
wheel .............................................. 1-203 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_6 ............1-37, 1-43
Maximum spindle speed at G26......... 1-243 MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_7 ............1-37, 1-43

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-417
I Index 03/2006

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_8............ 1-37, 1-44 measPosDev....................................... 1-167

MDD_PA_CENT_ORD_9............ 1-37, 1-44 measUnit............................................. 1-167
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_0 ............ 1-37, 1-44 Measurement results .......................... 1-105
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_1 ............ 1-37, 1-44 Measurement setpoint angle .............. 1-101
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_2 ............ 1-38, 1-44 Measurement setpoint position........... 1-101
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_3 ............ 1-38, 1-44 Measurement type .............................. 1-106
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_4 ............ 1-38, 1-44 Measuring circuit type of direct measuring
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_5 ............ 1-38, 1-44 system............................................. 1-193
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_6 ............ 1-38, 1-44 Measuring circuit type of indirect measuring
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_7 ............ 1-38, 1-44 syste................................................ 1-194
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_8 ............ 1-38, 1-44 Memory used DRAM file system no. 1 . 1-67
MDD_PA_CONT_ABS_9 ............ 1-38, 1-45 Memory used DRAM file system no. 2 . 1-67
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_0 ........... 1-38, 1-45 Memory used in SRAM file system....... 1-67
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_1 ........... 1-38, 1-45 Message frame type ........................... 1-257
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_2 ........... 1-38, 1-45 Message from the part program ......... 1-135
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_3 ........... 1-39, 1-45 Message ZK1 drive alarm..........1-85, 1-162
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_4 ........... 1-39, 1-45 minCycleTimeBrut....................1-259, 1-262
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_5 ........... 1-39, 1-45 minCycleTimeNet.....................1-260, 1-263
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_6 ........... 1-39, 1-45 Minimum access time to bus .............. 1-252
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_7 ........... 1-39, 1-45 Minimum diameter of the
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_8 ........... 1-39, 1-45 grinding wheel..................................... 1-203
MDD_PA_CONT_ORD_9 ........... 1-39, 1-45 minimum gross cycle time .................. 1-262
MDD_PA_MINUS_LIM................ 1-39, 1-46 Minimum net cycle time ...................... 1-263
MDD_PA_PLUS_LIM .................. 1-39, 1-46 Minimum position of 1st rotary axis .... 1-227
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_G26 ........ 1-243 Minimum position of 2nd rotary axis ... 1-227
MDD_SPIND_MAX_VELO_LIMS ...... 1-244 Minimum spindle speed at G25 .......... 1-244
MDD_SPIND_MIN_VELO_G25 ......... 1-244 Minimum width of the grinding wheel.. 1-203
MDD_SYSCLOCK_CYCLE_TIME ..... 1-240 minToolDia.......................................... 1-203
MDD_THREAD_START_ANGLE ...... 1-243 minToolWide ....................................... 1-203
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_MINUS ... 1-244 mirrorImgActive...... 1-93, 1-94, 1-95, 1-149,
MDD_WORKAREA_LIMIT_PLUS...... 1-244 .............................................1-186, 1-190
MDL_POSCTRL_SYSCLOCK_TIME_RATI Mirroring.............................................. 1-149
O..................................................... 1-241 Mirroring enabled in a settable frame .. 1-94,
MDLA_DRIVE_INVERTER_CODE.... 1-241 1-95, 1-149, 1-186
MDS_CHAN_NAME............................. 1-98 Mirroring enabled in an active
MDSA_AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB ... frame..........................................1-93, 1-190
........................................................ 1-241 MLFB of the NCU module..................... 1-55
MDU_PA_ACTIV_IMMED........... 1-39, 1-46 mmcCmd............................................... 1-33
MDU_PA_CONT_NUM ............... 1-40, 1-46 mmcCmdPrep ....................................... 1-33
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_0 ............ 1-40, 1-46 mmcCmdPrepCounter .......................... 1-55
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_1 ............ 1-40, 1-46 mmcCmdQuit ........................................ 1-33
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_2 ............ 1-40, 1-46 mmcCmdQuitPrep ................................ 1-33
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_3 ............ 1-40, 1-46 Mode according to $AC_SMODE ........ 1-87,
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_4 ............ 1-40, 1-47 ................................... 1-90, 1-182, 1-186
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_5 ............ 1-40, 1-47 Mode group ready................................. 1-97
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_6 ............ 1-40, 1-47 modeSpindleToolRevolver.................... 1-27
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_7 ............ 1-41, 1-47 modeWearGroup ................................ 1-205
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_8 ............ 1-41, 1-47 Modification counter for $$driveType.... 1-54
MDU_PA_CONT_TYP_9 ............ 1-41, 1-47 Modification counter for ACC
MDU_PA_LIM_3DIM................... 1-41, 1-47 information .......................................... 1-249
MDU_PA_ORI ............................. 1-41, 1-48 Modification counter for dimension system
MDU_PA_TW .............................. 1-41, 1-48 .......................................................... 1-65
measFctState ..................................... 1-167 Modification counter for magazine
measPos1........................................... 1-167 data ..................................................... 1-126
measPos2........................................... 1-167 Modification counter for new CP

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-418 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

configs. ............................................... 1-253 ncuPerformanceClass........................... 1-27

Modification counter for stop run ........ 1-125 nettoMemFfs ......................................... 1-56
Modification counter for tool offsets.... 1-126 No of par. of the mag. user data f tool mag.
Modification counter for upload buffer 1-132 place ................................................. 1-29
Module identifier ................................. 1-240 No of par. of the mag. user data for a tool
Monitoring data per tool edge............. 1-201 mag. .................................................. 1-30
motEnd ............................................... 1-181 No. of active tool for flat D-no. max 8 digits
Motion end criterion for single-axis ........................................................ 1-111
interpolation .................................... 1-181 No. of multiple assignments of a magazine
Motor temperature................... 1-192, 1-194 location.............................................. 1-30
Motor temperature warning ....... 1-86, 1-164 No. of P elements of a cutting edge in
Motor wiring selection (star/delta) ....... 1-85, module TUE ...................................... 1-28
........................................................ 1-163 No. of param. in the user monitoring
motorTemperature................... 1-192, 1-194 data ....................................................... 1-29
msg..................................................... 1-135 No. prog. transformation data record block
multiPlace ........................................... 1-211 search ............................................. 1-116
Mval .................................................... 1-143 No. progr. tool for flat D-no. with max. 8
digits................................................ 1-120
No. total offset params per total
N offset set ............................................... 1-30
No.of directories that have already been
name 1-74, 1-88, 1-91, 1-152, 1-175, 1-183, created .............................................. 1-67
1-187 Non-licensed options ............................ 1-68
Name of physical spindle. ......... 1-88, 1-183 Normalized path parameter ................ 1-107
namePhys..............1-88, 1-91, 1-183, 1-188 nrDuplo ............................................... 1-213
NC in stop state .................................. 1-124 nth data in list
ncFkt................................................... 1-146 area................................................. 1-263
ncFktAct.............................................. 1-146 col.................................................... 1-263
ncFktBin.............................................. 1-146 row .................................................. 1-263
ncFktBinAct ........................................ 1-146 type ................................................. 1-264
ncFktBinFanuc.................................... 1-146 unit .................................................. 1-264
ncFktBinS ........................................... 1-146 numActAxes.......................................... 1-33
ncFktFanuc......................................... 1-147 numActDEdges ................................... 1-224
ncFktS ................................................ 1-147 numActMags ....................................... 1-206
NCK alarm pending ............................ 1-115 numAlarms............................................ 1-56
NCK compiler switch .......................... 1-260 numAnalogInp....................................... 1-27
NCK flag for the SI programmable logic1-63 numAnalogOutp .................................... 1-27
NCK logbook ........................................ 1-27 numAuxAxes......................................... 1-33
NCK sign-of-life .................................... 1-56 numBAGs.............................................. 1-28
NCK timer ............................................. 1-51 numBasisFrames .........................1-28, 1-34
NCK timer variable for the SI programmable Number NC instruction groups (ISO Dialect)
logic .................................................. 1-64 .......................................................... 1-29
NCK type .............................................. 1-27 Number of active auxiliary functions( H-
NCK version ......................................... 1-27 functions) ........................................ 1-143
nckAliveAndWell................................... 1-56 Number of active channels ................... 1-28
nckCompileSwitches .......................... 1-260 Number of active drives ........................ 1-29
nckLogbookSeekPos............................ 1-27 Number of active E-function ............... 1-143
nckType ................................................ 1-27 Number of active machine axes ........... 1-29
nckVersion............................................ 1-27 Number of active S-functions.............. 1-143
NCSC system time ............................... 1-65 Number of active tool .......................... 1-111
ncStartCounter ................................... 1-118 Number of active tool edge................. 1-108
ncStartSignalCounter ......................... 1-119 Number of active wear group.............. 1-208
NCU link active ..................................... 1-56 Number of assigned handwheel ........ 1-166,
NCU power class.................................. 1-27 ........................................................ 1-181
ncuLinkActive ....................................... 1-56 Number of auxiliary axes ...................... 1-33

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-419
I Index 03/2006

Number of available mode groups ....... 1-28 Number of P elements of a tool edge in
Number of available tool carriers........ 1-121 module TS......................................... 1-28
Number of axes in channel................... 1-33 Number of parameter set.................... 1-167
Number of axis containers.................... 1-28 Number of parameters in $$toolHolderData
Number of axis entries ....................... 1-250 .......................................................... 1-31
Number of basic frames in channel...... 1-34 Number of parameters of a multiple
Number of bus access errors type 1 .. 1-252 assignment........................................ 1-30
Number of bus access errors type 2 .. 1-252 Number of parameters per adapter ...... 1-30
Number of bus cycles......................... 1-252 Number of parameters per magazine
Number of bytes log file undersized ... 1-268 location.............................................. 1-30
Number of channel-independent basic Number of pending general alarms ...... 1-56
frames............................................... 1-28 Number of polygon elements / protection
Number of channel-independent user zone .................................................. 1-34
frames............................................... 1-31 Number of programmed tool............... 1-120
Number of channel-specific R parameters1- Number of real locations in the
34 magazine ............................................ 1-208
Number of clients ............................... 1-253 Number of Siemens applic. cutting edge
Number of configured slaves.............. 1-254 data ................................................... 1-28
Number of current transformer data record Number of Siemens applic. magazine
........................................................ 1-111 location data...................................... 1-29
Number of cutting edges ......... 1-198, 1-213 Number of Siemens applic. monitoring data
Number of D numbers in module ....... 1-224 .......................................................... 1-28
Number of data in the list ................... 1-263 Number of Siemens application magazine
Number of defined locations for the control data ................................................... 1-30
block ............................................... 1-205 Number of Siemens application tool
Number of directories that can be data ....................................................... 1-31
created.................................................. 1-54 Number of slaves connected to bus ... 1-253
Number of DP buses .......................... 1-251 Number of slots................................... 1-257
Number of entries Fifo buffer Number of slots per axis container ....... 1-28
undersized .......................................... 1-268 Number of special workpieces (user-
Number of events to be skipped......... 1-268 defined) ........................................... 1-123
Number of Fanuc-G functions .............. 1-96 Number of spindles ............................... 1-34
Number of files that can be created ..... 1-54 Number of strokes............................... 1-147
Number of files that have already been Number of synchronous actions ........ 1-143,
created.............................................. 1-67 ........................................................ 1-145
Number of G functions (GroupID) ........ 1-48 Number of T area.................................. 1-35
Number of G functions (Gruppe_NUM) 1-49 Number of T areas ................................ 1-30
Number of geometry axes .................... 1-34 Number of the active M-function......... 1-143
Number of highest channel axis. .......... 1-34 Number of the actual drive
Number of HW analog inputs ............... 1-27 parameter set.............................1-85, 1-162
Number of HW analog output............... 1-50 Number of the geometry axis.............. 1-181
Number of HW analog outputs ............. 1-27 Number of the internal load magazine 1-204
Number of HW digital inputs................. 1-29 Number of the magazine .........1-206, 1-208
Number of HW digital outputs .............. 1-29 Number of the preselected T-function 1-144
Number of internal buffer magazine ... 1-205 Number of tool edges............................ 1-34
Number of log. spindles........................ 1-34 Number of tool holders in the TOA of the
Number of M function for tool change .. 1-31 channel ........................................... 1-119
Number of magazines ........................ 1-206 Number of toolholder .......................... 1-114
Number of masters............................. 1-258 Number of tools in the area TO .......... 1-213
Number of NC instruction groups ......... 1-29 Number of user frames ......................... 1-35
Number of occurrences of event ........ 1-267 Number of valid contour elements ....... 1-40,
Number of orientation axes in channel. 1-34 .......................................................... 1-46
Number of P elements of a cutting Number of workpieces machined in current
edge...................................................... 1-28 run ................................................... 1-111
Number of P elements of a tool............ 1-31 numChannels........................................ 1-28

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-420 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

numContainer ....................................... 1-28 O

numContainerSlots............................... 1-28
numContourInProtArea ........................ 1-34 Odinate arc centre of 3rd contour
numCuttEdgeParams ........................... 1-28 element ................................................. 1-43
numCuttEdgeParams_tao .................... 1-28 Odinate end point of 3rd contour
numCuttEdgeParams_tas .................... 1-28 element ................................................. 1-45
numCuttEdgeParams_ts ...................... 1-28 OEM text for logging buffer................... 1-35
numCuttEdgeParams_tu ...................... 1-28 oemProtText ......................................... 1-35
numCuttEdgeParams_tus .................... 1-29 Offset Hirth tooth system 1st axis ....... 1-227
numCuttEdges......................... 1-198, 1-213 Offset Hirth tooth system 2nd axis...... 1-227
numData ............................................. 1-263 Offset memory number length
numDigitInp .......................................... 1-29 (Fanuc)................................................ 1-109
numDigitOutp........................................ 1-29 Offset memory number radius (ISO
numDrives ............................................ 1-29 Dialect))........................................... 1-108
numElementsFastFifoTooSmall ......... 1-268 Offset normal ...................................... 1-120
numFilesPerDir..................................... 1-56 Offset of 1st rotary axis in degrees ..... 1-226
numGCodeGroups ............................... 1-29 Offset of 2nd rotary axis in degrees.... 1-226
numGCodeGroupsFanuc ..................... 1-29 Offset to leading axis/spindle, actual value
numGeoAxes........................................ 1-34 ...............................................1-82, 1-160
numGlobMachAxes .............................. 1-29 Operating mode .......................1-192, 1-194
numHandWheels.................................. 1-29 operatingMode .........................1-192, 1-194
numMachAxes...................................... 1-34 operatingTime ..................................... 1-263
numMagLocParams_tap ...................... 1-29 opMode ........1-89, 1-91, 1-97, 1-184, 1-188
numMagLocParams_u ......................... 1-29 optAssStopActive................................ 1-129
numMagParams_tam ........................... 1-30 optStopActive...................................... 1-129
numMagParams_u ............................... 1-30 Ordinal number of an alarm 1-69, 1-70, 1-72
numMagPlaceParams .......................... 1-30 Ordinate arc centre of 10th contour element
numMagPlacesMax.............................. 1-30 .................................................1-37, 1-44
numMagsMax ....................................... 1-30 Ordinate arc centre of 1st contour element
numOriAxes.......................................... 1-34 .................................................1-36, 1-43
numParams_Adapt............................... 1-30 Ordinate arc centre of 2nd contour element
numParams_SC ................................... 1-30 .................................................1-37, 1-43
numPlaceMulti ...................................... 1-30 Ordinate arc centre of 3rd contour element
numPlaceMultiParams ......................... 1-30 .......................................................... 1-37
numProtArea ........................................ 1-34 Ordinate arc centre of 4th contour element
numRParams........................................ 1-34 .................................................1-37, 1-43
numSpindles......................................... 1-34 Ordinate arc centre of 5th contour element
numSpindlesLog................................... 1-34 .................................................1-37, 1-43
numStrokes ........................................ 1-147 Ordinate arc centre of 6th contour element
numSubDirsPerDir ............................... 1-56 .................................................1-37, 1-43
numSynAct .............................. 1-143, 1-145 Ordinate arc centre of 7th contour element
numToBaust ......................................... 1-30 .................................................1-37, 1-43
numToolEdges ..................................... 1-34 Ordinate arc centre of 8th contour element
numToolHolderParams ........................ 1-31 .................................................1-37, 1-43
numToolHolders ................................. 1-119 Ordinate arc centre of 9th contour element
numToolParams_tad ............................ 1-31 .................................................1-37, 1-44
numToolParams_tu .............................. 1-31 Ordinate end point of 10th contour element
numTools............................................ 1-213 .................................................1-39, 1-45
numTraceProtocDataList...................... 1-56 Ordinate end point of 1st contour
numTraceProtocEventType................ 1-119 element ........................................1-38, 1-45
numTraceProtocOemDataList.............. 1-57 Ordinate end point of 2nd contour element
numTraceProtocOemEventType........ 1-119 .................................................1-38, 1-45
numUserFrames.......................... 1-31, 1-35 Ordinate end point of 4th contour
element ........................................1-39, 1-45
Ordinate end point of 5th contour

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-421
I Index 03/2006

element........................................ 1-39, 1-45 Parameterizing mask for module TUS 1-221

Ordinate end point of 6th contour Parameterizing the module TD
element........................................ 1-39, 1-45 (identifier) ............................................ 1-215
Ordinate end point of 7th contour paramNrCCV ...................................... 1-203
element........................................ 1-39, 1-45 paramSetNo........................................ 1-167
Ordinate end point of 8th contour parDataTAD ........................................ 1-214
element........................................ 1-39, 1-45 parDataTAO........................................ 1-214
Ordinate end point of 9th contour parDataTAS ........................................ 1-214
element........................................ 1-39, 1-45 parDataTD .......................................... 1-215
Ordinate of end point of 3rd contour parDataTO .......................................... 1-215
element............................................. 1-38 parDataToolIdentTD ........................... 1-215
Orientation reference system ............. 1-122 parDataTS........................................... 1-215
Oscillation interrupt position 1 ... 1-79, 1-157 parDataTU .......................................... 1-216
Oscillation interrupt position 2 ... 1-79, 1-157 parDataTUE ........................................ 1-216
Other counter for parDataTUS ........................................ 1-216
_N_COMPLETE_DOC_ACX............ 1-52 Parking axis ...............................1-86, 1-164
Other counter for parMasksTAD ..................................... 1-217
_N_COMPLETE_DOT_ACX ............ 1-53 parMasksTAO ..................................... 1-217
Other counter for parMasksTAS ..................................... 1-218
_N_COMPLETE_DPC_ACX ............ 1-53 parMasksTD........................................ 1-218
OUT data byte ...................................... 1-51 parMasksTO ....................................... 1-219
OUT data double word ......................... 1-51 parMasksTS........................................ 1-219
OUT data word ..................................... 1-52 parMasksTU........................................ 1-220
OUT Real data...................................... 1-52 parMasksTUE ..................................... 1-220
Overall total jerk of an axis ................. 1-155 parMasksTUS ..................................... 1-221
Overall total of jerk of an axis ............... 1-77 Part of $$absoluteBlockBufferName... 1-132
Owner magazine location of the tool .. 1-199 partDistance........................................ 1-147
Owner magazine of the tool ............... 1-199 Partner channel NCU, block
search waits ........................................ 1-123
Path for ACC files in the NCK
P file system ........................................... 1-250
Path from beginning of the block in the BCS
paAccLimA ......................................... 1-119 ........................................................ 1-107
paJerkLimA......................................... 1-119 Path override for synchronous actions1-107
Parameter 1 of the alarm....1-69, 1-71, 1-73 Path to the end of the block in the
Parameter 2 of the alarm....1-69, 1-71, 1-73 BCS..................................................... 1-107
Parameter 3 of the alarm....1-69, 1-71, 1-73 Path veloc. in basic coordinate
Parameter 4 of the alarm....1-69, 1-71, 1-73 system................................................. 1-112
Parameterizing data for module TAD . 1-214 Path velocity in the WCS .................... 1-112
Parameterizing data for module TAO. 1-214 paVeloLimA......................................... 1-119
Parameterizing data for module TAS . 1-214 pblVersion ................................1-192, 1-194
Parameterizing data for module TD ... 1-215 pcmciaDataShotAct ............................ 1-260
Parameterizing data for module TO ... 1-215 pcmciaDataShotSum .......................... 1-260
Parameterizing data for module TS.... 1-215 pcmciaFfsLength................................. 1-260
Parameterizing data for module TU ... 1-216 pcmciaShotStatus ............................... 1-260
Parameterizing data for module TUE. 1-216 pcmciaStartFfsOffset .......................... 1-260
Parameterizing data for module TUS. 1-216 pcmciaStartShotOffset........................ 1-260
Parameterizing mask for module TAD 1-217 pEgBc ................................................. 1-119
Parameterizing mask for module TAO 1-217 Physical spindle name ...............1-91, 1-188
Parameterizing mask for module TAS 1-218 PIN for licensing.................................... 1-65
Parameterizing mask for module TD.. 1-218 placeData............................................ 1-210
Parameterizing mask for module TO.. 1-219 placeType ........................................... 1-212
Parameterizing mask for module TS.. 1-219 Plane assignment of protection zone... 1-41,
Parameterizing mask for module TU.. 1-220 1-48
Parameterizing mask for module TUE 1-220 Plane setting ....................................... 1-103

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-422 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

PLC messages (DB2).............. 2-280, 3-345 Programmable frame .......................... 1-105

PLC override for motion-synchronous Programmed circular passes .............. 1-134
actions ................................... 1-80, 1-157 Programmed circular passes search .. 1-134
PLC override for synchronized actions1-107 Programmed dwell time ...................... 1-116
PLC signals to/from operator panel, (DB 19) Programmed lead ............................... 1-109
........................................................ 2-303 Programmed position for block search1-180
plcStartReason ........................ 1-139, 1-141 Programmed position, actual value .... 1-174
pMthSDC ............................................ 1-120 Programmed position, desired value .. 1-174
pOffn................................................... 1-120 Programmed position, distance-to-go. 1-175
Pos. offset of the synchr. spindle desired Programmed position, REPOS ........... 1-175
value ...................................... 1-76, 1-153 Programmed SUG desired value 1-88, 1-91,
Position as diameter or radius............ 1-180 1-183, 1-187
Position component X ........................ 1-228 progREPOS ........................................ 1-175
Position component Y ........................ 1-228 progStatus........................................... 1-120
Position component Z......................... 1-228 progTestActive .................................... 1-129
Position control cycle factor................ 1-241 progTNumber...................................... 1-120
position control gain factor ................. 1-166 progTNumberLong.............................. 1-120
Position controller difference .............. 1-172 progToolIdent...................................... 1-120
Position of the cutting edge center point. . 1- progWaitForEditUnlock....................... 1-120
175 protAreaCounter ................................. 1-121
Position of tool base, desired value ... 1-175 protCnfgAutoLoad................................. 1-57
Position offset from synchronous protCnfgAutoLoadFile ........................... 1-57
actions ....................................... 1-79, 1-156 protCnfgAutoSave................................. 1-57
Position offset referring to leading protCnfgCtl............................................ 1-57
axis/spindle............................ 1-84, 1-161 protCnfgFilename ................................. 1-57
Power section code of drive module .. 1-241 protCnfgStat.......................................... 1-57
poweronTime...................................... 1-261 Protection zone modification counter.. 1-121
preContrFactTorque ........................... 1-167 protocLastValNetIpoCycle .................... 1-57
preContrFactVel ................................. 1-167 protocMaxValNetIpoCycle .................... 1-58
preContrMode..................................... 1-167 protocolFilename ................................ 1-268
PRESET ............................................. 1-168 protocStrtMaskInt16.............................. 1-58
Preset state ........................................ 1-168 protocStrtMaskInt32.............................. 1-58
PRESETActive ................................... 1-168 protocStrtMatchCount ........................... 1-58
PRESETVal ........................................ 1-168 protocStrtNumEvDelay ......................... 1-58
Processing block for the start trigger.. 1-268 protocStrtRemMatchCount ................... 1-58
Processing block for the stop trigger .. 1-268 protocStrtState ...................................... 1-58
Profibus actual value message frame .. 1-68 protocStrtType ...................................... 1-58
Prog. spindle mode ................. 1-184, 1-188 protocStrtValueInt16 ............................. 1-59
Prog. spindle mode block search ...... 1-184, protocStrtValueInt32 ............................. 1-59
........................................................ 1-188 protocStrtValueReal32.......................... 1-59
Prog. transformation block search...... 1-116 protocStrtValueReal64.......................... 1-59
progDistToGo ..................................... 1-175 protocStrtVarCol ................................... 1-59
progDLNumberS................................. 1-120 protocStrtVarRow.................................. 1-59
progDuploNumber .............................. 1-120 protocStrtVarType................................. 1-59
progIndexAxPosNo ............................ 1-168 protocStrtVarUnit .................................. 1-59
progName..........1-135, 1-137, 1-139, 1-141 protocTrigMaskInt16 ............................. 1-59
progProtText......................................... 1-35 protocTrigMaskInt32 ............................. 1-59
Program execution from external protocTrigMatchCount .......................... 1-60
active .................................................. 1-117 protocTrigNumEvDelay......................... 1-60
Program is waiting for _N_F_MODE .. 1-120 protocTrigRemMatchCount................... 1-60
Program name...1-135, 1-137, 1-139, 1-141 protocTrigState ..................................... 1-60
Program status ................................... 1-120 protocTrigType......................................1-60
Program status according to protocTrigValueInt16............................. 1-60
$AC_PROG ........................................ 1-108 protocTrigValueInt32............................. 1-60
Program test ....................................... 1-129 protocTrigValueReal32 ......................... 1-60

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-423
I Index 03/2006

protocTrigValueReal64......................... 1-61 Referenced spindle number................ 1-204

protocTrigVarArea ................................ 1-61 refPtBusy ............................................ 1-168
protocTrigVarCol .................................. 1-61 refPtCamNo ........................................ 1-168
protocTrigVarRow ................................ 1-61 refPtStatus .......................................... 1-169
protocTrigVarType................................ 1-61 remainDwellTime ................................ 1-122
protocTrigVarUnit ................................. 1-61 Remaining dwell time.......................... 1-122
protocUserActive ................................ 1-121 Representation of active tool ................ 1-27
protSessAccR....................................... 1-61 reqParts .............................................. 1-122
protSessComm..................................... 1-61 Requested gear stage .... 1-88, 1-90, 1-183,
protSessConn....................................... 1-61 ........................................................ 1-187
protSessName...................................... 1-61 resetActive ............................................ 1-97
protSessPrior........................................ 1-62 Restricted cyclic variable service........ 1-117
pSMode ................................... 1-184, 1-188 Result
pSModeS................................. 1-184, 1-188 number of tools found ..................... 1-221
pTc...................................................... 1-121 T-numbers of the tools found.......... 1-221
pTcAng ............................................... 1-121 resultNrOfTools................................... 1-221
pTcDiff ................................................ 1-121 resultPar1............................................ 1-268
pTcNum .............................................. 1-121 resultToolNr ........................................ 1-221
pTcSol ................................................ 1-121 Retraction of the single axis is programmed
pTcStat ............................................... 1-121 ........................................................ 1-157
pTCutMod........................................... 1-122 Retraction of the single axis
pTCutModS ........................................ 1-122 programmed.......................................... 1-80
pToolO................................................ 1-122 Retraction position of the single axis1-80, 1-
punchActive ........................................ 1-148 157
punchDelayActive............................... 1-148 Return point on the contour for
punchDelayTime ................................ 1-148 repositioning.................................... 1-178
Punching delay time ........................... 1-148 Return value 2 for command
Punching or nibbling active ................ 1-148 MagCBCmd ........................................ 1-204
Punching with delay active ................. 1-148 Return variable 1 for the command
punchNibActivation............................... 1-35 MagCBCmd .................................... 1-204
rotation .......1-93, 1-94, 1-149, 1-186, 1-190
Rotation............................................... 1-149
Q Rotation of a settable frame......1-94, 1-149,
........................................................ 1-186
qecLrnIsOn ......................................... 1-168 Rotation of an active frame........1-93, 1-190
Quadrant error compensation learning rotSys.................................................. 1-122
active .............................................. 1-168 ROV rapid traverse override ............... 1-130
row ...................................................... 1-263
R rpa ....................................................... 1-245
Runtime of selected NC program ....... 1-262
R 1-245
R parameter (from SW 3.3) ................ 1-245 S
R parameter (up to SW 3.2) ............... 1-245
Radius of the circle (only effective for Sadr ....................................................1-143
G02/G03)........................................ 1-133 Safe actual position of axis ................. 1-171
Ramp-function generator rapid stop.... 1-85, Safe actual position of the drive.......... 1-171
....................................................... 1-163 Safe input signals of the axis .............. 1-170
rapFeedRateOvr................................. 1-122 Safe input signals of the drive............. 1-170
rapFeedRateOvrActive....................... 1-130 Safe input signals of the drive part 2 .. 1-170
Rapid traverse override ...................... 1-122 Safe input signals part 2 ..................... 1-170
readyActive........................................... 1-97 Safe limit of actual speed.................... 1-170
Real data .............................................. 1-50 Safe limit of desired speed ................. 1-170
Real data (32 bits) from/to the PLC...... 1-50 Safe operation active .......................... 1-170
Received message frame................... 1-257 Safe output signals of the axis............ 1-171
Reference point cam .......................... 1-168

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-424 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

Safe output signals of the drive .......... 1-171 Save axial setpoint.............................. 1-101
Safe output signals of the drive part 2 1-171 Save measuring point ......................... 1-105
Safe output signals part 2................... 1-171 scaleFact.....1-93, 1-94, 1-95, 1-149, 1-150,
safeAcceptCheckPhase ..................... 1-169 .............................................1-186, 1-190
safeAcceptTestMode.......................... 1-169 Scaling factor ...................................... 1-150
safeAcceptTestPhase ........................ 1-169 Scaling factor of a settable frame1-94, 1-95,
safeAcceptTestSE.............................. 1-169 1-149, 1-186
safeAcceptTestState .......................... 1-169 Scaling factor of an active frame1-93, 1-190
safeActPosDiff .................................... 1-170 scalingSystemCounter.......................... 1-65
safeActVeloDiff ................................... 1-170 Screenform
safeActVeloLimit................................. 1-170 ACC files available.......................... 1-250
safeDesVeloLimit ............................... 1-170 Screenform for system frames.............. 1-35
safeExtInpValNckBit............................. 1-62 Search direction .......................1-138, 1-141
safeExtInpValNckWord ........................ 1-62 Search pointer.............. 1-137, 1-139, 1-141
safeExtInpValPlcBit .............................. 1-62 Search string............................1-139, 1-141
safeExtInpValPlcWord.......................... 1-62 Search type..............................1-139, 1-141
safeExtOutpValNckBit .......................... 1-62 searchString.............................1-139, 1-141
safeExtOutpValNckWord...................... 1-62 searchType ..............................1-139, 1-141
safeExtOutpValPlcBit ........................... 1-62 seekOffset.................... 1-137, 1-139, 1-141
safeExtOutpValPlcWord....................... 1-62 seekw.......................................1-135, 1-137
safeFctEnable..................................... 1-170 SEMA data accessible .......................... 1-65
safeInputSig........................................ 1-170 semaDataAvailable ............................... 1-65
safeInputSig2...................................... 1-170 seruproMasterChanNo ....................... 1-122
safeInputSigDrive ............................... 1-170 seruproMasterNcuNo.......................... 1-123
safeInputSigDrive2 ............................. 1-170 Servo data 32-bit................................. 1-248
safeIntInpValNckBit .............................. 1-63 Servo data 64-bit................................. 1-248
safeIntInpValNckWord.......................... 1-63 servoDataFl32..................................... 1-248
safeIntInpValPlcBit ............................... 1-63 servoDataFl64..................................... 1-248
safeIntInpValPlcWord........................... 1-63 Set of blocks from the current
safeIntOutpValNckBit ........................... 1-63 operation ............................................. 1-133
safeIntOutpValNckWord....................... 1-63 Setpoint assignment ........................... 1-241
safeIntOutpValPlcBit ............................ 1-63 Setpoint cutting angle ......................... 1-104
safeIntOutpValPlcWord ........................ 1-63 Setpoint of axis-specific feedrate,......... 1-84
safeMarkerNck ..................................... 1-63 Setpoint workpiece position angle ...... 1-107
safeMarkerPlc....................................... 1-64 Settable data management frame ...... 1-106
safeMaxVeloDiff ................................. 1-170 Settable value for INC_VAR .....1-75, 1-152,
safeMeasPos...................................... 1-171 ....................................................... 1-176
safeMeasPosDrive ............................. 1-171 Settings for NCK tool management ...... 1-25
safeOutputSig..................................... 1-171 Set-up mode ....................................... 1-165
safeOutputSig2................................... 1-171 setupTime ........................................... 1-261
safeOutputSigDrive ............................ 1-171 SI PowerOn alarms can be acknowledged
safeOutputSigDrive2 .......................... 1-171 by Reset.......................................... 1-169
safePlcIn............................................... 1-64 siemData..................................1-236, 1-239
safePlcOut ............................................ 1-64 siemEdgeData .................................... 1-237
safeSplStatus ....................................... 1-64 Siemens appl. tool cutting edge parameter
safeStopFDiagnosis ................ 1-192, 1-194 ........................................................ 1-237
safeStopOtherAxis ............................. 1-171 Siemens application magazine data .. 1-236,
safeTimerNck ....................................... 1-64 ........................................................ 1-238
safeXcmpCmd ...................................... 1-64 Siemens application monitoring data.. 1-239
safeXcmpLevel ..................................... 1-65 Siemens application tool parameter ... 1-236
safeXcmpState ..................................... 1-65 siemPlaceData.................................... 1-238
Save axial measuring point 1 ............. 1-100 Signal from cycle to PLC .................... 1-117
Save axial measuring point 2 ............. 1-100 Signal from PLC to cycle .................... 1-116
Save axial measuring point 3 ............. 1-100 Signals to/from NCK channel
Save axial measuring point 4 ............. 1-100 (DB 21 -28) ......................................... 2-304

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-425
I Index 03/2006

Sign-of-life error counter encoder 1 ... 1-251 Software end position, positive
Sign-of-life error counter encoder 2 ... 1-251 direction .....................................1-80, 1-158
Sign-of-life error counter output.......... 1-251 Source location number new tool ....... 1-113
simo611dSupport ................................. 1-31 Source location number old tool ......... 1-113
Simulated lead value - position . 1-78, 1-155 Source magazine new tool ................. 1-113
Simulated leading value velocity1-78, 1-155 Source magazine old tool ................... 1-113
Single axis status ...................... 1-80, 1-158 Source of the lead value ............1-78, 1-155
Single block ........................................ 1-130 spec .........................................1-171, 1-181
Single block mode .............................. 1-130 Specification of channel for
Single block read in quasi-stop state . 1-135 SERUPRO ...............................1-139, 1-141
Single channel SI signal from NCK to PLC specParts ............................................ 1-123
.......................................................... 1-64 Speed setpoint ...................................... 1-84
Single channel SI signal from PLC to NCK Speed, setpoint ................................... 1-193
.......................................................... 1-64 speedLimit............. 1-89, 1-91, 1-184, 1-188
singleBlock ......................................... 1-135 speedOvr .............. 1-89, 1-91, 1-184, 1-188
singleBlockActive ............................... 1-130 Spindle mode ........ 1-89, 1-91, 1-184, 1-188
singleBlockType ................................. 1-130 Spindle name ........ 1-88, 1-91, 1-183, 1-187
Size downwards in half locations ....... 1-199 Spindle override .... 1-89, 1-91, 1-184, 1-188
Size of DRAM file system no. 1............ 1-66 Spindle position..... 1-87, 1-90, 1-183, 1-187
Size of DRAM file system no. 2............ 1-66 Spindle speed limitation...................... 1-244
Size of NCK alarm buffer...................... 1-25 Spindle speed, actual value........1-87, 1-90,
Size of SRAM file system ..................... 1-66 ............................................ 1-182, 1-186
Size to the left in half locations........... 1-199 Spindle speed, desired value......1-88, 1-91,
Size to the right in half locations......... 1-200 .............................................1-183, 1-187
Size upwards in half locations ............ 1-200 Spindle state ......... 1-89, 1-92, 1-184, 1-189
skip ..................................................... 1-268 Spindle type .......... 1-89, 1-92, 1-184, 1-188
Skip level /0 ........................................ 1-130 spindleType........... 1-89, 1-92, 1-184, 1-188
Skip level /1 ........................................ 1-130 spinNoDress ....................................... 1-204
Skip level /2 ........................................ 1-130 SPL booting status................................ 1-64
Skip level /3 ........................................ 1-130 splitBlock............................................. 1-123
Skip level /4 ........................................ 1-130 Start offset FFS................................... 1-260
Skip level /5 ........................................ 1-131 Start offset of curr. PCMCIA access ... 1-260
Skip level /6 ........................................ 1-131 Starting angle for thread ..................... 1-243
Skip level /7 ........................................ 1-131 startLockState ..................................... 1-123
Skip level /8 ........................................ 1-131 startRejectCounter .............................. 1-123
Skip level /9 ........................................ 1-131 startTriggerLock .................................. 1-268
skipLevel0Active................................. 1-130 Startup synchronization status............ 1-258
skipLevel1Active................................. 1-130 State.................................................... 1-267
skipLevel2Active................................. 1-130 State after travelling to fixed stop ....... 1-166
skipLevel3Active................................. 1-130 State of spindle rotation .. 1-89, 1-92, 1-185,
skipLevel4Active................................. 1-130 1-189
skipLevel5Active................................. 1-131 State of the binary inputs .........1-192, 1-194
skipLevel6Active................................. 1-131 State of the DC link voltage .......1-86, 1-163
skipLevel7Active................................. 1-131 State of the function generator ........... 1-165
skipLevel8Active................................. 1-131 State of the magazine......................... 1-208
skipLevel9Active................................. 1-131 State of the probing function............... 1-167
Slave active on bus or not State of trace channel 1...................... 1-172
(LED green) ........................................ 1-255 State of trace channel 2...................... 1-172
Slave data are available ..................... 1-254 State of trace channel 3...................... 1-172
Slot information is available................ 1-257 State of trace channel 4...................... 1-172
Slot number within the slave .............. 1-257 State var. PI Service auto. set-up of asyn.
Smoothing the desired value of the rotary motor......................................1-83, 1-160
speed.............................................. 1-165 status1-74, 1-89, 1-92, 1-139, 1-141, 1-150,
Software end position, negative 1-152, 1-175, 1-184, 1-189
direction ..................................... 1-80, 1-158 Status access to PCMCIA card .......... 1-260

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-426 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

Status array for the wait marker ......... 1-118 Synchronous run difference with sign. 1-128
Status encoder 1 driver ...................... 1-250 System frame bit screen form............. 1-104
Status encoder 2 driver ...................... 1-250 systemFrameMask................................ 1-35
Status information torque limitation .... 1-173 sysTimeBCD ......................................... 1-65
Status of axis container ...................... 1-101 sysTimeNCSC ...................................... 1-65
Status of block SPARPI...................... 1-139 sysTimeSinceStartup ............................ 1-65
Status of ForceControl function.......... 1-165 SZS setpoint value (C) incl. override
Status of output drivers. ..................... 1-250 components .................................... 1-155
Status of power enable....................... 1-173 SZS setpoint value (N) incl. override
Status of slots ..................................... 1-257 components ...................................... 1-77
Status of the auxiliary function ........... 1-150
Status of the global start disable ........ 1-123
Status slave axis with lead T
value coupling............................ 1-81, 1-158
stepEditorFormName ......................... 1-135 T number............................................. 1-114
Stop in curr.progr.area is effect.after a T_mapc [s,s,userdef] .......................... 1-254
delay ............................................... 1-117 Tadr..................................................... 1-144
Stop on another axis .......................... 1-171 Target location number new tool ........ 1-113
Stop run active.................................... 1-125 Target location number old tool .......... 1-113
stopCond ............................................ 1-124 Target magazine new tool .................. 1-113
stopCondPar....................................... 1-125 Target magazine old tool .................... 1-114
stopRunActive .................................... 1-125 tcCarr1 ................................................ 1-225
stopRunCounter ................................. 1-125 tcCarr10 .............................................. 1-225
stopTriggerLock.................................. 1-268 tcCarr11 .............................................. 1-225
Stored axial dist.-to-go in WCS after tcCarr12 .............................................. 1-225
DELDTG ......................................... 1-176 tcCarr13 .............................................. 1-225
Stored distance-to-go of the path in the tcCarr14 .............................................. 1-225
WCS ............................................... 1-101 tcCarr15 .............................................. 1-225
Strategy wear group ........................... 1-205 tcCarr16 .............................................. 1-226
strokeNr .............................................. 1-148 tcCarr17 .............................................. 1-226
Strokes per minute ............................. 1-147 tcCarr18 .............................................. 1-226
Subroutine call counter, desired value 1-136 tcCarr19 .............................................. 1-226
subSpec................................... 1-171, 1-181 tcCarr2 ................................................ 1-226
Subspecification ................................. 1-171 tcCarr20 .............................................. 1-226
Subspecification for indexing axis ...... 1-181 tcCarr21 .............................................. 1-226
subType.............................................. 1-175 tcCarr22 .............................................. 1-226
SUG programming active 1-88, 1-91, 1-183, tcCarr23 .............................................. 1-226
1-187 tcCarr24 .............................................. 1-226
Sum of compensation values .... 1-83, 1-160 tcCarr25 .............................................. 1-226
Sum of current gross runtime ............. 1-249 tcCarr26 .............................................. 1-227
Sum of current net runtime................. 1-249 tcCarr27 .............................................. 1-227
Sum of maximum gross runtime......... 1-259 tcCarr28 .............................................. 1-227
Sum of maximum net runtime ............ 1-259 tcCarr29 .............................................. 1-227
Sum of minimum gross runtime.......... 1-259 tcCarr3 ................................................ 1-227
Sum of minimum net runtimes............ 1-260 tcCarr30 .............................................. 1-227
Sum of the compensation values for tcCarr31 .............................................. 1-227
encoder 1........................................ 1-165 tcCarr32 .............................................. 1-227
Sum of the compensation values for tcCarr33 .............................................. 1-227
encoder 2........................................ 1-165 tcCarr34 .............................................. 1-227
Supplement to stopCond.................... 1-125 tcCarr35 .............................................. 1-228
suppProgFunc .................................... 1-125 tcCarr36 .............................................. 1-228
Suppression of language commands. 1-125 tcCarr37 .............................................. 1-228
suppressProtLock............................... 1-268 tcCarr38 .............................................. 1-228
Sval..................................................... 1-143 tcCarr39 .............................................. 1-228
swLicensePIN....................................... 1-65 tcCarr4 ................................................ 1-228

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-427
I Index 03/2006

tcCarr40.............................................. 1-228 Tool edge number............................... 1-104

tcCarr41.............................................. 1-229 Tool identifier ............... 1-198, 1-213, 1-224
tcCarr42.............................................. 1-229 Tool information for MMC ................... 1-198
tcCarr43.............................................. 1-229 Tool length .......................................... 1-106
tcCarr44.............................................. 1-229 Tool number........................................ 1-106
tcCarr45.............................................. 1-229 Tool operating time ( in seconds ). ..... 1-262
tcCarr46.............................................. 1-229 Tool orientation ................................... 1-122
tcCarr5................................................ 1-229 Tool search strategy during tool change... 1-
tcCarr55.............................................. 1-229 208
tcCarr56.............................................. 1-229 Tool setting ......................................... 1-106
tcCarr57.............................................. 1-229 Tool state ............................................ 1-200
tcCarr58.............................................. 1-229 toolBaseDistToGo.......... 1-74, 1-152, 1-175
tcCarr59.............................................. 1-230 toolBaseREPOS ............ 1-75, 1-152, 1-176
tcCarr6................................................ 1-230 toolChangeMfunc.................................. 1-31
tcCarr60.............................................. 1-230 toolCounter ......................................... 1-126
tcCarr64.............................................. 1-230 toolCounterC....................................... 1-126
tcCarr65.............................................. 1-230 toolCounterM ...................................... 1-126
tcCarr7................................................ 1-230 toolEdgeCenterDistToGo.................... 1-176
tcCarr8................................................ 1-230 toolEdgeCenterREPOS ...................... 1-176
tcCarr9................................................ 1-230 Toolholder name ................................. 1-227
terminalState ........................... 1-192, 1-194 Toolholder number of solutions .......... 1-121
Text for logging buffer .......................... 1-35 toolHolderData .................................... 1-127
textIndex .............................1-69, 1-71, 1-73 toolIdent ....................... 1-198, 1-213, 1-224
T-function value .................................. 1-144 toolInfo ................................................ 1-198
threadPitch ......................................... 1-125 toolInMag ..................... 1-198, 1-213, 1-224
threadPitchS ....................................... 1-125 toolInPlace ................... 1-199, 1-213, 1-224
Ti [s,s,userdef] .................................... 1-254 toolMon ............................................... 1-199
Time...................................................... 1-65 toolMyMag .......................................... 1-199
Time after a block change in toolMyPlace ........................................ 1-199
IPO cycles .......................................... 1-126 toolNo.......................................1-213, 1-225
Time after a block change in seconds 1-126 toolplace_spec .................................... 1-199
Time base........................................... 1-269 toolSearch........................................... 1-199
Time from begin. of block in interpolation toolsize_down ..................................... 1-199
cycles.............................................. 1-110 toolsize_left ......................................... 1-199
Time from the beginning of the block in toolsize_right....................................... 1-200
seconds .......................................... 1-109 toolsize_upper..................................... 1-200
Time since default boot ...................... 1-261 toolState.............................................. 1-200
Time since NCK ramp-up ..................... 1-65 torqLimit .............................................. 1-171
Time since normal boot ...................... 1-261 Torque limitation value........................ 1-171
Time stamp.........................1-70, 1-71, 1-73 Total axial override f. motion-synchronous
Time variable in seconds.................... 1-110 actions............................................. 1-158
timeBCD .............................1-70, 1-71, 1-73 total DRAM in bytes .............................. 1-66
timeOrRevolDwell............................... 1-126 Total length in bytes PCMCIA card..... 1-260
timePeriod .......................................... 1-269 Total number of real magazine
timeS .................................................. 1-126 locations.............................................. 1-205
timeSC................................................ 1-126 Total number total offsets in NCK......... 1-26
T-number ............................................ 1-213 Total of all machined workpieces........ 1-127
TnumWZV .......................................... 1-213 Total override for motion-synchronous
To [s,s,userdef]................................... 1-254 actions............................................... 1-81
toNo ...................................................... 1-35 Total path override for synchronized actions
Tool base distance-to-go 1-74, 1-152, 1-175 ........................................................ 1-111
Tool base position ..................... 1-74, 1-174 Total runtime NC programs ................ 1-263
Tool base position setpoint................... 1-74 Total travel path of an axis.........1-81, 1-159
Tool base REPOS ..........1-75, 1-152, 1-176 Total travel path of an axis at
Tool carrier status............................... 1-121 high speed .................................1-81, 1-159

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-428 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
03/2006 I Index

Total traverse processes of an axis..... 1-81, turnState ............... 1-89, 1-92, 1-185, 1-189
....................................................... 1-158 Tval ..................................................... 1-144
Total traverse processes of an axis at high type ................... 1-150, 1-172, 1-182, 1-264
speed..................................... 1-81, 1-159 Type and state of the
Total traverse processes of an axis with jerk synchronous action ..................1-144, 1-145
............................................... 1-77, 1-155 Type of actual value sensing .............. 1-241
Total traverse time of an axis .... 1-81, 1-159 Type of D-number programming........... 1-31
Total traverse time of an axis at high speed Type of setpoint output ....................... 1-241
............................................... 1-81, 1-159 Type of the active block in the
Total traverse time of an axis with jerk 1-77, interpolator .......................................... 1-114
1-155 Type of the auxiliary function .............. 1-150
Total user memory in bytes .................. 1-66 Type of the magazine ......................... 1-207
Total value of overlaid motion ... 1-79, 1-157 Type of tool monitoring ....................... 1-199
totalDirectorys....................................... 1-66 Type of tool search ............................. 1-205
totalFiles ............................................... 1-66 Type of tool search for
totalMem............................................... 1-66 replacement tools................................ 1-199
totalMemDram ...................................... 1-66 typeOfCuttingEdge................................ 1-31
totalMemDram2PassF.......................... 1-66 typStatus ..................................1-144, 1-145
totalMemDramPassF............................ 1-66
totalMemFfs.......................................... 1-66
totalMemSramPassF............................ 1-66 U
totalParts ............................................ 1-127
totalProtokolFiles .................................. 1-66 Unique hardware number of the NCU .. 1-55
Touch probe has switched ................. 1-103 Unique hardware number of the NCU (long)
TPreSelAdr ......................................... 1-144 .......................................................... 1-55
TPreSelVal ......................................... 1-144 unit ...................................................... 1-264
traceProtocolActive .............................. 1-66 Unit for service values of the drives.... 1-167
traceProtocolLock................................. 1-67 Unit of axial feedrate ........................... 1-179
traceState1 ......................................... 1-172 Unit of measurement........................... 1-105
traceState2 ......................................... 1-172 Unit of the axis-specific feedrate1-83, 1-161
traceState3 ......................................... 1-172 Upload buffer for display blocks.......... 1-132
traceState4 ......................................... 1-172 Upper boundary of protection zone,
traceStopAction .................................... 1-67 applicate............................................ 1-46
trackErrContr ...................................... 1-172 Upper limit nth polynominal for synchronous
trackErrDiff.......................................... 1-172 action ..............................................1-103
transfActive......................................... 1-127 Upper limit of protection zone,
Transformation active......................... 1-127 applicate................................................ 1-39
Transformed edge offset value Used DRAM in bytes............................. 1-67
(cuttEdgeParam) ............................ 1-235 Used memory in bytes .......................... 1-67
Transformed edge offset value (edgeData) usedDirectorys ...................................... 1-67
........................................................ 1-235 usedFiles............................................... 1-67
Transformed location-dependent setup usedMem .............................................. 1-67
offset............................................... 1-231 usedMemDram ..................................... 1-67
Transformed location-dependent wear usedMemDram2PassF ......................... 1-67
offset............................................... 1-234 usedMemDramPassF ........................... 1-67
Translation.......................................... 1-149 usedMemFfs ......................................... 1-67
Translation of a settable frame... 1-94, 1-95, usedMemSramPassF ........................... 1-67
1-148, 1-185 usedOptionsNotLicensed...................... 1-68
Translation of an active frame ... 1-93, 1-189 usedProtokolFiles ................................. 1-68
Translation of an external frame......... 1-190 User data for monitoring a
Translation reference system ............. 1-128 cutting edge ........................................ 1-222
Transmitted message frame............... 1-257 User unit table....................................... 1-31
transSys.............................................. 1-128 userData ..................................1-221, 1-222
Traversing direction............................ 1-117 User-defined cutting edge parameter . 1-202
trialRunActive ..................................... 1-131 User-defined tool parameters ............. 1-201

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition I-429
I Index 03/2006

userPlaceData .................................... 1-222 Working area limitation in the positive

userScale.............................................. 1-31 direction .......................................... 1-244
Utilization ............................................ 1-194 workPandProgName................1-135, 1-137
Workpiece and program name 1-135, 1-137
Workpiece measurement semaphore. 1-106
V Workpiece name1-136, 1-138, 1-139, 1-142
Workpiece name abbreviated .1-135, 1-138,
vaDistTorque ...................................... 1-173 1-139, 1-142
vaDpActTel ........................................... 1-68 Workpiece or tool-related
vaDpe ................................................. 1-173 protection zone ............................1-41, 1-48
vaEgSyncDiff ...................................... 1-128 Workpiece position angle.................... 1-107
vaEgSyncDiffS.................................... 1-128 Workpiece requirement....................... 1-122
vaIm.................................................... 1-173 workPName ...... 1-135, 1-138, 1-139, 1-142
vaIm1.................................................. 1-173 workPNameLong .... 1-136, 1-138, 1-139, 1-
vaIm2.................................................. 1-173 142
Validity bits ......................................... 1-107
Value of HW analog input..................... 1-50
Value of HW digital input ...................... 1-53 X
Value of HW digital output.................... 1-53
Value of the current D-number ........... 1-143 x component of offset vector l1........... 1-225
Value of the E-function ....................... 1-143 x component of offset vector l2........... 1-228
Value of the H-function....................... 1-143 x component of offset vector l3........... 1-225
Value of the M-function ...................... 1-143 x component of offset vector l4........... 1-226
Value of the preselected T-function ... 1-144 x component of rotary axis v1............. 1-230
Value of the S-function. ...................... 1-143 x component of rotary axis v2............. 1-225
Value of tthe superimposition in the tool X component of tool in WCS............... 1-110
directio ............................................ 1-178
valueDo .............................................. 1-150
valueLo ............................................... 1-151 Y
Variable incremental value for
JOG mode .......................................... 1-242 y component of offset vector l1........... 1-226
varIncrVal .......................1-75, 1-152, 1-176 y component of offset vector l2........... 1-229
vaTorqueAtLimit ................................. 1-173 y component of offset vector l3........... 1-226
vaVactm.............................................. 1-173 y component of offset vector l4........... 1-226
Vector circular plane block search ..... 1-133 y component of rotary axis v1............. 1-230
Vector of circular plane....................... 1-133 y component of rotary axis v2............. 1-225
Version of DP Master software........... 1-258 Y component of tool in WCS............... 1-110

W Z

WCS setpoint value including override z component of offset vector l1........... 1-227
components .................................... 1-177 z component of offset vector l2........... 1-230
Without function.................................. 1-141 z component of offset vector l3........... 1-226
Working area limitation active in the z component of offset vector l4........... 1-226
negative dir ..................................... 1-243 z component of rotary axis v1............. 1-230
Working area limitation active in the positive z component of rotary axis v2............. 1-225
dir.................................................... 1-243 Z component of tool in WCS............... 1-110
Working area limitation in the negative ZK1PO register image ........................ 1-193
direction .......................................... 1-244 ZK1RES register image ...................... 1-193

© Siemens AG 2006 All Rights Reserved

I-430 SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS Lists (LIS2) - 03/2006 Edition
An Suggestions

Siemens AG Corrections

for Publication/Manual
A&D MC MS SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE, SINAMICS
P. O. Box 3180
D-91050 Erlangen Lists (2st Book)

Federal Republic of Germany

Tel. +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 222 [Hotline] User Documentation

Fax +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 63315 [Documentation]

Email: mailto:[email protected]
Parameter Manual
From
Name: Order -No.: 6FC5397-3CP10-1BA0
Company/Dept. 03/2006 Edition

Adress: Should you come across any printing errors

when reading this publication, please notify us
on this sheet. Suggestions for improvements
are also welcome..
____________
Telephone: __________ /
Telefax: ________ /

Email: __________________________________________-

Suggestions and/or Corrections

 Overview of SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl Documentation (03/2006)
General Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINAMICS

840D sl S120
840Di sl

Brochure Catalog NC 61 *) Catalog

D21.2 Servo Control *)

User Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl
840D 840D 840D 840D
840Di sl 840Di sl 840Di sl 840Di sl
840Di 840Di 840Di 840Di
810D 810D 810D 810D

Operator’s Guide Operator’s Guide Programming Guide Programming Guide Diagnostics Guide *)
– HMI Embedded *) – HMI Advanced *) – Fundamentals *) – Cycles
– ShopMill – Programming compact – Advanced *) – Measuring Cycles
– ShopTurn – Programming
– Lists System Variables
– ISO Turning/Milling

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840Di sl 840D sl
840Di sl 840D
840Di sl
840Di
810D

Equipment Manual Equipment Manual Commssioning Manual Commissioning List Manual *

NCU *) Operator CNC *) Manual – Part 1
Components *) – Part 1 NCK, PLC, Drive – Part 2
– Part 2 HMI
– Part 3 ShopMill
– Part 4 ShopTurn
– Part 5 Basic Software
Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINAMICS SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D sl 840D sl S120 840D sl 840D sl
840D 840D 840D
840Di sl 840Di sl 840Di sl
840Di 840Di 840Di
810D 810D 810D

Description of Description of Description of Description of EMC Guidlines

Functions Functions Functions Functions
– Basic Machine *) – Synchronized Drive Functions Safety Integrated
– Extended Functions Actions
– Special Functions – Iso Dialects

Electronic Documentation

SINUMERIK
SINAMICS
Motors

DOCONCD *)
DOCONWEB

*) These documents are a minimum requirement

 Overview of SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Documentation (03/2006)
General Documentation

Saftey
SINUMERIK SINUMERIK Integrated
840D
840Di
810D

Brochure Catalog NC 61 *) Saftey Integrated

Application Manual

User Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840D sl 840Di
840Di 840D 840D 840D 840D
810D 840Di sl 840Di sl 840Di sl 840Di sl
840Di 840Di 840Di 840Di
810D 810D 810D 810D

Operator’s Guide Operator’s Guide Programming Guide Programming Guide Diagnostics Guide *) System Overview
– HMI Embedded *) – HMI Advanced *) – Fundamentals *) – Cycles
– ShopMill – Programming compact – Advanced *) – Measuring Cycles
– ShopTurn – Programming
– HT6 – Lists System Variables
– ISO Turning/Milling

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D 840D 840D sl 840D 840Di 840D sl
810D 840Di 840D 840Di 840D
810D 840Di sl 810D 840Di sl
840Di 840Di
810D 810D

Configuring (HW) *) Equipment Manual Commissioning Description of Commissioning List Manual *)

– 840D Operator Manual *) Functions Manual – Part 1
– 810D Components *) – 840D – ShopMill – Part 2
– 810D – ShopTurn
– HMI

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK SINUMERIK

840D sl 840D 840D 840Di 840D 840D
840D 840Di 840Di 810D 810D
840Di sl 810D 810D
840Di
810D

Description of Description of
Description of Description of Configuring MCIS
Functions Functions
Functions Functions – Operator Interface – Computer Link
– Basic Machine *) – Remote Diagnosis Saftey Integrated
– Drive Functins OP030 – Tool Data Inform. Sys.
– Extended Functions
– Tool Management– @Event – HMI Embedded – NC Data Management
– Special Functions
– Hydraulics Module – NC Data Transfer
– Synchronized
– Analog Module – Tool Data Communication
Actions
– Iso Dialects
– EMC Guidlines
Electronic Documentation

SINUMERIK
SIMODRIVE
Motors

DOCONCD *)
DOCONWEB *) These documents are a minimum requirement